JP6048902B1 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a bullet ball gaming machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed gaming machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine), and provides a gaming machine characterized by display means. A game machine including an image display panel panel 208p capable of executing an effect display and a POV display 280 capable of executing an effect display, wherein the image display panel 208p includes a first picture t. The first effect display (display of the design t of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 260 (t), etc.) may be performed. There is a case where display (display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 260 (v) to FIG. 260 (y)) is performed. [Selection] Figure 260

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  Some of these game machines are provided with display means such as an image display panel and a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
An image display panel capable of effect display;
A POV display capable of performing presentation display;
A game machine equipped with
The POV display may be located at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter referred to as “second position”).
The POV display is provided with a movable body,
The movable body is provided with a light emitter,
The POV display is configured to allow a player to visually recognize an afterimage by changing a light emission mode of the light emitter during a constant speed operation by the movable body.
The POV display is configured to perform an acceleration operation of the movable body before the constant speed operation by the movable body is performed.
The acceleration operation is an operation until the movable body in a stopped state increases the speed and shifts to the constant speed operation,
The second effect display may be performed after the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in a region including the first display region in the image display panel in a state where the acceleration operation by the movable body is performed.
The second effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display,
The first display area is a display area behind the POV display located at the second position;
The first effect display is an effect display of an aspect including one pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first pattern”),
The second effect display is an effect display of an aspect including the first pattern.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG.15 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 31 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 32 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 33 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 34 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the production example in which a notice icon changes in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery during the display of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 41 in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and the digestion effect in steps. 47 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure shown in steps about the example of production using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation which can be performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the lottery table regarding notice item. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 62 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of effects which concerns on this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. (A) It is an example of the table of box data provided in RAM of the 1st sub control part, (b) It is an example of the table of parts data provided in RAM of the 1st sub control part. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the command transmission in the presentation control of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the command transmission in the presentation control of this embodiment. (A) is a flowchart of an effect system operation process, (b) is a flowchart of a chance button operation state determination process. It is a flowchart of various button operation related processing. It is a flowchart of various button operation related processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of button press. It is a flowchart of one time operation processing. It is a flowchart of one time operation processing. It is a flowchart of continuous hit operation processing. It is a flowchart of long press operation processing. It is a flowchart of other button operation processing. It is a flowchart of a setting display process at the time of determination button operation. It is a flowchart of a right button operation setting display process. (A) is a flowchart of a brightness | luminance setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user brightness setting operation process. (A) is a flowchart of a volume setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user volume setting operation process. It is a flowchart of a setting display process at the time of an upper button operation. (A) is a flowchart of a button long press process, (b) is a flowchart of a chance button long press operation state determination process. It is a flowchart of various button long press operation related processing. It is a figure which shows the operation key unit shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 107 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG.108 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the stand-by state (customer waiting state) which does not perform symbol variation display, (b) is the operation result of each button during symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example, (c) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 111. It is a figure explaining an example of setting operation using a production button and an operation key unit. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using an effect button and an operation key unit. (A) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the continuous operation by the effect button and the effect display during execution of the effect for repeated hitting, (B) by the effect button during the execution of the effect for repeated hitting It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between long press operation and effect display, (C) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between long press operation by the effect button and effect display during execution of the effect for long press. is there. (A) is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting, and (B) is the execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display at the time of performing long press operation by an effect button intermittently. It is a figure which shows in stepwise an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for long press centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 122 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of an effect performed in the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the effect display in an ornamental symbol display apparatus, and operation | movement of an effect button. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the effect display in an ornamental symbol display apparatus, and operation | movement of an effect button. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the modification of the example of an effect shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows in stepwise an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 137 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 141. It is a figure explaining the modification of the example of an effect shown by FIG. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the slot machine (cylinder machine) as a game stand which can apply this invention from the front side (player side). (A) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment to which the present invention is applicable, as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows special figure 2 An example of a stop display symbol is shown, (c) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of an ordinary stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. (B)-(e) are an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention was equipped. FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination table for universal use in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation | movement at the time of a hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention, and the operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (B) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. . It is a figure explaining the electric long open effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (B) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of the lottery table of the prefetch notice used by the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention, and the lottery table of the notice at the time of change disclosure (after big hit judgment). It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 1st embodiment which can apply the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of 1st Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 1st embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention from the front. It is a figure explaining the movable body 1002 of the pachinko machine 100 by 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is FIG. (1) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is FIG. (2) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 2nd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of 2nd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the production pattern of the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-1 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-3 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-4 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-5 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-6 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-7 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-2 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-3 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-4 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-5 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-6 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-7 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-1 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-2 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-1 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-2 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-3 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-4 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-1 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-2 of the 3rd embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-3 of 3rd Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of 4th Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of 4th Embodiment which can apply this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 4th embodiment to which the present invention is applicable. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game stand by the modification which can apply this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification which can apply this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) is the mobile telephone 4000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 different from FIG. 248 when viewed from the front. FIG. 260 is a diagram showing a POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism to which the 1st movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255 is moved. FIG. 257 is a diagram showing a modified example of the drive unit shown in FIG. 257 and is a diagram for explaining a so-called slip ring structure. 258 is a diagram showing a modification of the drive unit shown in FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a pachinko machine provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255 in stages. (A) is an enlarged view of FIG. 260 (q), and (b) is a view showing the display area by hatching. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 in steps. FIG. 263 is a diagram illustrating an example of button notification continuing from FIG. 262 (k) in a stepwise manner. It is a figure which shows the other example which continues from FIG.262 (g) in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example which continues from FIG. 263 (l ') in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example which continues from FIG.262 (c) in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example which becomes a big hit continuing from FIG. 262 (i). It is a figure which shows the example which becomes a continuation continuing from FIG. 262 (i) in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example of the effect which displays the pattern by the afterimage effect by the 1st movable body 260 used as a sub liquid crystal unit rotating at high speed by the mechanism shown in FIG. 258 or FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the button notice following from FIG.269 (g) in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which does not develop from a button notice to a verse notice, continuing from FIG. 270 (i '). It is a figure which shows in a stepwise manner the example which hits by another type of Berser notice using the 1st movable body 260 following FIG. 269 (i). 272 is an example of the Berser notice that continues from FIG. 269 (i), similar to 272, but a step-by-step example of loss. It is a figure which shows an example which changes the display mode of a holding | maintenance icon in steps using a Versa notice. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of changing the display mode of the changing icon using the Berser notice, continued from FIG. 274 (l). FIG. 273 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the changing state of the changing icon continued from FIG. 275 (n ′). It is a figure which shows the modification of the POV display 280 shown to FIG. 256, FIG. FIG. 283 is a diagram illustrating an example of a versatility notice using the POV display 280 ′ illustrated in FIG. 277. It is a figure which shows an example of the Berser notice when the ball removal notification is performed.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 73, a gaming table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. 1 to 73 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73 in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 73, the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 are incorporated in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for causing button 136 to emit light, ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return instruction for a player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). Here, the term “hold” means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery process) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means. Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality of the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, an external hall computer (not shown), etc. The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and common maps to be explained

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start-up sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been shot. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 5 (a) shows nine types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I”. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when 15R-RUB, 8R-RUB and 4R-RUB are notified, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop pattern aspect. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  After fetching the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the reserved figure number 2 in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  Further, in the above rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are stored as command data. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. that are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is displayed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for a table for determining whether or not there is a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 10A, and if the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lot. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 14 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary figure. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 14A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 14A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), so that it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 14A, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of FIG. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 14B, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG.14 (c), the movement animation of the holding | maintenance icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 14D, the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 14E, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14G, an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 14 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 14 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 14 (j), a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 14 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 14 (l). It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 14 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, has been moved to the lower right corner and is displayed in a reduced size in FIG. 14 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 14 in stages.

  In FIG. 15 (p) continuing from FIG. 14 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 15 (s). In FIG. 15 (s), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 15 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols determined to be 15R probability variation big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG.15 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 15 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 15 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached with a different decorative symbol (a symbol combination having a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, and a 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 14 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 15 (t). 15 (u ′), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 15 (v ′) following FIG. 15 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 15 (w ′) following FIG. 15 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a “big hit” character is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following step (q) in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 16 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 14 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 16 (b). In FIG. 16B, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 16C, like the case of FIG. 15T, all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 16 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” starts. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (e), the fourth symbol (round shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Here, FIG. 17A is a diagram for explaining a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 17B is a diagram for explaining a notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. 10D is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. FIG. 18A is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 18B is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas. From the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of FIG. 2 is further displayed. Therefore, the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of displayable notice icons and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  One notice icon may be displayed for one area in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a hat notice icon I6 made up of a hat symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a carton box is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. A warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes made of symbols is displayed, a fan warning icon I10 made of a fan symbol is displayed in the warning icon third display area YA3, and a warning icon fourth display area YA4 A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed. In the notice icon fifth display area YA5, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are digested at the timing shown in FIG. To be controlled. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (the variation) shown in FIG. 17A is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be executed. After that, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the change icon display area 280, and the decorative symbol change display (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 (the hold icon h12 moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 17A) moves toward the change icon display region 280. When the decorative symbol change display (symbol change corresponding to the hold 2) is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the hat notice icon I6 is digested, and then An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested thousand box notice icon I9 may be executed. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed since all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan warning icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan warning icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon informs the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol variation display (corresponding variation) shown in FIG. 17 (a) is started, a Tonari-like effect that increases the notice icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done. In this Tono-sama effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 starts, DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a DJ effect is performed to increase the notice icon. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing the notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box to the notice icon display area 285 and displaying it is performed. Then, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the second pseudo-continuous effect, the Tono-sama effect is executed, The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is out of place may be one, and the number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the notice icons include those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are not clear, and those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are clear as shown in FIG. 18 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord are shown in the notice icon (preliminary notice icon before change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear. And a third icon notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the lord in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. Further, the second icon of the notice of the lord I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the lord in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third icon-notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the person in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of weak to strong. When the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, and the third lord's notice icon I3 are at a predetermined change display timing (for example, an increase display timing of the notice icon), FIG. It changes to one of the notice icons after the change shown in 18 (b). Also, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 18B at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing the symbol that is the object of prefetching. May be displayed before the screen, and may function as a pre-reading notice. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed along with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. In the case where the second noun notice icon I2 and the third noun notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), the notice icon (6) of the hat, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and the ribbon are shown in the notice icon (the notice icon after the change) where the content of the corresponding effect is clear. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the watchmaster, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, there is a case where the pseudo-ream effect is performed only once. Here, the pseudo-continuous effects include a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gusset pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo-continuous effect, for example, as will be described later, when a pseudo-continuous effect starts, a long-length character appears. In this case, the reliability is strong. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, the third pseudo-continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is strong. Further, the pseudo-pattern effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is weak by displaying the appearing long-length character in the normal display mode. In addition, the pseudo-seam effect of the gaze pattern is an effect of performing a disappointing display as if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, as will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is strong, “Continue” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continue” in black letters with “continue” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the Oniwaban (Ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect in which the notice effect being executed is switched to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is notified in advance. Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the shuriken notice icon I7, if the reliability is strong, “A freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, “Changing” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon simulating a ribbon worn by the Princess Chibi character, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the prefetch mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, there may be an effect of changing the displayed background from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (low stage change). Production). Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, “STECHEN” is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Also, if the reliability is weak, “STECHEN” may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Note that when the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, either the strong stage change effect or the weak stage change effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousand box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating the thousand box thrown by Tono-sama's character toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, strong or weak. If one thousand box notice icon I9 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect and has undergone the reach transition effect. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notification, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notification is executed (notification promotion). Production). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box, if the big hit is confirmed, “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, if the reliability is strong, the “A” pattern may be displayed as “elevated” in red or black. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Further, if the reliability is weak, “elevated” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice that informs in advance that the jackpot is confirmed, or the premier reach where the jackpot is confirmed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach deviation is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). In the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the fan warning icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. When the fan notice icon I10 is consumed, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the content to produce produces changes with the timing when the fan notification icon I10 is digested, the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon simulating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation reception period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digest indication of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, shuriken notice icon I7, ribbon The notice icon I8, the carousel notice icon I8, and the fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the digest display, and a corresponding effect may be executed. Or, there is a case where any notice icon is deleted without being changed.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change described above is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon before the change is changed via the notice icon. It is also possible to display to delete the notice icon (the notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 18B: erase effect). In this effect, it is informed that the fluctuation is out of place. In other words, it is a gusset notice indicating that the pattern is a deviation confirmation pattern. Of course, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, there may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  19 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a general figure display device 210, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, A figure holding lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the 4th symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the 4th symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 14, and displays the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. For example, the fourth symbol display device 284 a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 200 and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a normal symbol changing notification region, a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. 1, and a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. While the regular symbol is stopped, the LED in the area where the quadrangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the regular symbol is changing, it is displayed blinking or extinguished. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit on and off, while the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 is blinking or off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19A, the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 19A, no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and in response to this, the ornamental symbol display device 208 performs variation symbol display of the decorative symbol. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as necessary.

  Further, in FIG. 19A, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In this example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lighting in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and the holding is made. It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched, but actually, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 It is a display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 19 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 19 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 in FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. 1 second hold icon h12. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 in stages.

  In FIG. 20 (14) following FIG. 19 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but there is a change in the hold icon and the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 20 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the icon h0 and becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (17), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat and the warning of the thousand boxes at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (18). An effect display in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is the notice icon third display area. Displayed in YA3, fan notice icon I10 is displayed in notice icon fourth display area YA4. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 19 (10) to (12) is performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 20 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 20 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notification symbol in the first display area YA1. The display of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 20 (23), when two or more of the same notice icon are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as two hat notice icons I6 are displayed, Although it is set in advance so that the displayed notice icon is preferentially digested, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be determined at random, or may be set so that the notice icon displayed on the right side is preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate limited to those described above.

  Then, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 20 (25). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good. In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, for example, the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display form to the display form of the prefetching notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 20 (26), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “Continue”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 in stages.

  In FIG. 21 (28) continuing from FIG. 20 (27), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the watchdog character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ It may be the decoration 1 ”) to form the reach state and start the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the left symbol and the right symbol, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, there is a pseudo-continuous symbol representing the Tono-like character. A display moving at a low speed from above to below is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed by notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a pseudo-out symbol is framed downward without being stopped and displayed, the pseudo-sequence is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates that the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (34), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (35) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 21 (36). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 21 (37), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “Continue”, and then in FIG. In response to the digestion of the previous notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo-ream effect Is informed to the player that there is a possibility of starting.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the number-length character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbols displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are changed from “decoration 1” to “decoration”. The decoration is changed to “decoration 2”, a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols move from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is performed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the “pseudo × 2” character information may be displayed in another area. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be changed. In this effect example, after the chief character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is, the easier it is to win a big hit in one symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one hat notification icon I6 is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and in the case where two hat notification icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice, the hat It is easier to win if the two notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the hat notice icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-rendition is performed twice, and three hat notice icons I6 are digested. In the case where the pseudo-rendition effect is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win if the three hat notification icons I6 are digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (42), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol display in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-continuous effect has started.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 in stages.

  In FIG. 22 (43) following FIG. 21 (42), the decoration symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Here, reach production is started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (44), the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. Note that the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced. Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (44) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (45) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. In other words, a display is performed in which the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the Senryoku notice icon I9 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (47), and above the enlarged Senryaku notice icon I9. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a production with higher reliability is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time that the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand car boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes with the character display of “promotion” at the timing of FIG. 22 (48). The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 22 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed becomes slightly dark, and the Tono-sama character appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting the reach effect display being executed is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Is it too hot” on the darkened background, and then FIG. 22 (52). Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter, and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (55), as shown in FIG. 22 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is deleted, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Soon, in FIG. 22 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 22 in stages.

  In FIG. 23 (58) following FIG. 22 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 23 (59), the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the decoration symbol combination of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when two seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of digesting the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan warning icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fan is displayed in an enlarged manner at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan warning icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 23 (62), and the warning icon display area 285 is framed upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 23 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 23 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (66), the combination of the big-decided decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the re-variation effect is executed, resulting in a big hit. However, the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon display area. If not displayed at 285, a re-change effect may not be performed, and an out-of-display result may be derived. In other words, when the reach transition effect that is executed after digesting the thousand-car box notice icon I9 is performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one of the thousand carousel notice icons I9 is digested, if the reach transition effect is executed as a fake notice corresponding to the digested thousand carousel notice icon I9, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of place. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the case in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is the object of the pre-reading notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice differs from the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be pre-ready notice. You may make it like, and it may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 24 to 26 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. 24 to 26, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 24 (8a) to (10a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 a), an effect display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I 6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9 a-1), the thrown first lord's notice icon I 1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (9a-2), after the first icon of the notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed to explode, the timing shown in FIG. 24 (10a) is displayed. Thus, the notice icon I1 of the exploded first lord is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Also according to this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 24 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 b), an effect display in which the first button notice icon I 4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I 6 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. If the effect button 136 is operated between the time when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the time when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button-like icon It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. Thus, in this effect example, until the effect button 136 is operated, the big hit reliability indicated by the notice icon is difficult to recognize, so the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the big hit reliability. May work and enhance the production effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Also, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the digest effect of the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136. An effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  FIGS. 24 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 c), as in FIG. 19 (8), an effect display in which the hat warning icon I 6 is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 24 (9 c), a state is shown in which the hat notice icon I 6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. Note that a gaze increase effect using a notification icon other than the hat notification icon I6 may be performed. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot reliability, the less likely that the gaze increase effect is executed.

  FIGS. 24 (7d) to (9d) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 24 (7d) shows a state in which the Tono-like character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 19 (7). Thereafter, in FIG. 24 (8 d), there is an effect display in which not only one hat notice icon I 6 but also three hat notice icons I 6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the notice icon I6 of the three thrown hats is the notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2, and notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is displayed in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more in the notice icon display area 285, so that Since it is guaranteed that the performance is executed three times, it may be notified that the jackpot is determined. Further, a high-reliability notice icon is unlikely to be displayed (pre-stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon is likely to be displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285. Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d '), a part or all of the thrown three hat notice icons I6 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, but from the left of the display area. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production or the full gossip increase production which will be out of a frame.

  FIGS. 24 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (7), the character YM of Tono-sama, which has a warning icon I6 for a single box, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a warning icon I10 for a fan. A state in which is moved and displayed up to a predetermined throwing position is shown. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon selected at random. May be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 24 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons may not be different from each other, and, for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notification icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notifications can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of types of notifications can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9 e ′), some or all of the thrown three notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production which frames out from the left of an area | region, or the full gossip increase effect.

  FIG. 24 (12f-1) to FIG. 24 (12f-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in FIG. 24 (12f-1), as in FIG. 19 (12), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Has been done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (12f-2), the decoration symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIG. 25 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (the display form by the Sabohani character), the character YM of Tono-sama displays the notice icon I6 of the hat as the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is thrown toward the camera is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 25 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8h), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, the game board 200). It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the number of holds. This production hold lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The drive control by the mode (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 25 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched, but in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  25 (8i) to FIG. 25 (9i-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). In other words, in FIG. 25 (8i), as in FIG. 19 (8), the effect display in which the hat's notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 25 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat's notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (9 i-2), the notice icon of the hat notice I6 acts on the hold icon h 11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the prefetching notice display mode. An effect display (holding change effect) is displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the hat warning icon I6 may not appear as the warning icon in the warning icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetching warning with the hold icon. Note that the change notification effect may be performed using a notification icon other than the hat notification icon I6. For example, a notification icon with a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (9i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. In the case of displaying the number, after the hat notice icon I6 falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the first holding lamp in FIG. 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the pre-reading notice.

  25 (8j) to FIG. 25 (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 25 (8j) is different from FIG. 19 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area instead of the Tono-sama character YM (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8j), the DJ character appears with a hat notice icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and displays the hat's previous notice icon I6 as the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display is put on. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  25 (8k) to FIG. 25 (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8k), the DJ character appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (9k), a hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-carton box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ′), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by placing it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if Also, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in a carton box so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, a notice icon overwriting effect may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect.

  FIG. 25 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 25 (121), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the corresponding character notation. For example, a “continuation” character is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1, and the warning icon I9 for the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon display area YA2 is displayed. Is displayed with an additional character “Elevation”, and the fan ’s warning icon I10 displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is additionally displayed with “Blessing”. The shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the area YA4 is indicated by a letter “Chang eyes”, and the ribbon notice icon I8 displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 has “STECHEN” A character is added and displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the sixth notice area YA6 of the notice icon displays “question” along with “question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed afterwards.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (12l ′) and FIG. 25 (12l ″), some or all of the characters added to the notice icon are displayed as “question marks” to clearly show the corresponding notice effect. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  Further, it may be notified in advance that an effect display in which a big hit is determined is executed according to a combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. As shown in (12l "'), when three hat notification icons I6 with the" continuation "character notation are displayed in the notification icon display area 285, four pseudo-decisions are made to determine the big hit. You may make it notify that an effect display including a continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character added and displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when “promotion” is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for notifying that the result of the symbol variation display when the is digested is a jackpot confirmation (or that there is something that will be a big hit in the hold).

  In the example of production described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of Tono-sama character YM and DJ character BY. However, in the example of production shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 26 (A1), the decorative symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. This reach production is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped. Near the lower part of the hat's notice icon symbol, a character notation “stock” is added, and when the notice icon symbol is stopped, the notice icon display area 285 is notified that the notice icon will be increased. doing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the display of moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  In FIG. 26 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Normal reach production begins.

  After the start of the reach effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first lord's notice icon symbol imitating the first lord's notice icon I1 is stopped and displayed. In the production example shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the character notation “stock” is appended to the first icon of the first icon, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that an advance notice icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the notice icon design of the first lord is changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, and the display moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 26 (B4), the decorative symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result is a display error. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to a hat notice icon I6. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 for the hat, and may be another kind of notice icon. The timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the next and subsequent symbol variation display. You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  Next, another effect example of the notice icon digest effect described above will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 27-30 is a figure which shows in step-by-step another example of a notice icon digest effect. 27 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  27 (38m) to FIG. 27 (40m-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 21 (38) to FIG. 21 (40). In FIGS. 27 (38m) to (39m), the same effects as in FIGS. 21 (38) to (39) are performed, but in FIG. 27 (40m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is slow. As shown in FIG. 27 (40m-2), the quasi-continuous pattern appears at a high speed immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern becomes the stop display position of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-2). Is scrolled down to the lower side of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-3), the combination of the decorations of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and the fluctuation is displayed. Then, it is informed that the result of the stop display is a result of the deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  27 (23n) to FIG. 27 (24n) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (23) to FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23n), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, but as shown in FIG. 27 (24n), the digested hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and a notice that the digested effect is not performed is given.

  FIGS. 27 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23o), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 27 (24o-2), in the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place without starting the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 27 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2”). -The combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2”) is displayed with temporary stop and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then the stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is out of place. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  FIGS. 27 (22p) to (23p) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, in FIG. 27 (23p), in the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon). There may be an effect in which not the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1) but other notice icons are digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 27 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, the notice icon may not be digested in order from the left. In this embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the order in which they are stocked). However, the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when a notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to make a big hit, and conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. In addition, the order in which the notice icons are digested may be determined regardless of the order of the stock. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected. You may make it do. In addition, a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be digested in a specific order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 for the hat, the shuriken A rule may be set such that a jackpot is determined when digested in the order of a notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, and a shuriken notice icon I7. As a result, the player may have an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, and may improve the game motivation.

  FIG. 27 (24q-1) to FIG. 27 (24q-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing for changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digest effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is ended.

  28 (Aa) to FIG. 28 (Ae) show an effect example in the case where the notice icon increase effect is performed after the notice icon digestion effect is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (Aa), after the shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing indicated by 28 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ac), after the hold is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon is performed by Tono-sama character YM. Then, when the warning icon I9 of the thousand box is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ae), the warning icon No. 3 which has become blank due to the digestion of the shuriken warning icon I7. A notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested may be displayed.

  FIG. 28B shows an effect example in the case where the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are generated in the notice icon display area in accordance with the digestion of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM When the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed and the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, a display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. In the case where there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icon is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. The first sub-control unit It may be set in advance at 400. In this example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. However, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of the notice icons displayed are different. For example, when an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon sixth display area YA6 among the display areas that are blank in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. You may make it suggest that it displays on the display area 285, and you may make it suggest that the reliability of jackpot is the highest.

  FIG. 28C shows an effect example in the case where the effect of digesting the notice icon and the effect of increasing the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, An increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM is performed, and a state in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol change display executed before the symbol change display is executed. In this manner, the notice icon digestion effect and the notice icon increase effect may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, there may be a case where the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the notice icon increase effect is performed. Further, after the notice icon digestion effect starts, the notice icon increase effect may start, after the notice icon increase effect starts, the notice icon digest effect starts, or the notice icon The digesting effect and the notice icon increasing effect may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be a region that will be blank before it is started.

  FIG. 28 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), before the notice icon digestion effect is started, an effect is given which indicates whether or not the notice icon is digested. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon is digested when the notice icon subject to digestion starts shaking and fluctuating. I try to speak. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), when the fan warning icon I10 is deleted without being digested, the display is stopped after the stop with the combination of the decorative symbols out of place. You may alert | report.

  FIGS. 28 (59s) to 60s (60s) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 23 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 28 (59 s), the notice icon display area 285 displays two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10. Is different from the above, and after the fluctuation variation starts with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon of the fan When I10 is digested, a notice of a big hit is given, and as shown in FIG. 28 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, a hat notice icon I6) are digested, they are left as they are. You may make it alert | report that it stops and displays by the combination of the decoration pattern of, and it will become off.

  28 (23t) to FIG. 28 (32t) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (23) to FIG. 21 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (23t), in this effect example, an in-digest notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIGS. 28 (23t) to 25 (t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digestion advance notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIG. 28 (28t) to FIG. 32 (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digest notice notice icon display area YA0 continues to be displayed after digestion, and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect). ) Will continue to be displayed. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be after the notice effect of the notice icon has started, or before the notice icon has been digested. Alternatively, it may be simultaneously with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased may be after the digest effect of the notice icon has ended, or before the digest effect of the notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the end of the notice icon digestion, after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon ends. It may be at the same time as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, or before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts. It may be simultaneously with the end of the corresponding production, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation when the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol) or being digested The notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digest notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 22 (44), or only the notice icon display area YA0 during digest is erased). Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digest icon notice area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A digested first is the digest icon of the notice icon A. It may be erased after or after the presentation is finished, and no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, or the digest effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be erased at the same time as or after starting, or erased at the same time or after the notice icon b displayed in the in-digest notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. For example, while the notice icon B is being digested, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice icon B may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or an island simultaneous effect) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased, and the advance notice is given. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the region 285 and the digesting advance notice icon display region YA0 may be deleted.

  29 (Aa) to 29 (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 29 (Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon for the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 on the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested respectively. Production begins. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be an order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ab), they are enlarged and each character display is additionally displayed. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is added and displayed near the lower portion of the enlarged hat notice icon I6, and a character display of “stechen” is added near the lower portion of the enlarged notice icon I8 of the ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the ribbon notice icon I8. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ac), after the shoji is closed and Princess Chibi's character CH appears on the front side, the shoji opens as shown in FIG. 29 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. During execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and it will be reduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ae), the decorative symbol that has been displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the chord character BC Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and then the player is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. .

  In this example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icon are made different from each other, but they may be started at the same time.

  29 (66u-1) to FIG. 29 (66u-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 23 (66). That is, in FIG. 29 (66 u-1), the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. In addition, it is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-2), after the big hit start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-3), after the big hit round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area while the big hit game is being executed, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect informing that the probability change big hit is confirmed). For example, FIG. In the example shown in -3), if the hat notice icon I6 is digested during the jackpot game, a notification is made that the probable big hit is confirmed, and the fan notice icon I10 is digested. May notify that 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when other notice icons are digested, for example, a meaning that suggests that there is a possibility of promotion may be given. In this way, even if the same notice icon is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the jackpot game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon unique to the big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 29 (Ba) to FIG. 29 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ba), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 29 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect ends, as shown in FIG. 29 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when a stage change is performed. Note that after a stage change, the notice icon may be deleted, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or may not be deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 29 (22v-1) to (23v) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-2), Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. The type of notice icon to be notified is notified in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (23v), the digesting effect of the notice icon is started in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is digested. Even if the advance notification of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance may be digested. May be. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  FIG. 29 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, a notice icon that may be digested is highlighted, for example, so that the player pays attention to the digest of the notice icon. Also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. An effect corresponding to is performed, and the other effects are not performed. For example, even though the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the Bancho character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. In the event that an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as determining the jackpot, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit is made when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probable change state or a short time state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit is made in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned after the probability change state or the time-short state is finished. It may be configured as follows. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it may not carry over after a probability change state and a time-short state are complete | finished.

  Next, description will be given of an effect example in which the content of the reach effect to be transferred thereafter is notified depending on the type of the notice icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged-length character BC2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-1). Appears, and then shifts to a Bancho Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-2), when the Senryoku box notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-2), the enlarged Tono-like character YM3 is displayed. Appears and then transitions to the Tono-sama reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-3), when the fan warning icon I10 is digested, the enlarged princess character HM is then displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, in this production example, it corresponds to the jackpot reliability that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach productions is configured in the order of Hime Reach> Tonosama Reach> Bancho Reach Yes. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a Tono-like character enlarged after the notice icon I6 of the hat appears) (so-called law breaking occurs) May be configured to determine the jackpot. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of notice icons may be digested, and a plurality of characters may appear correspondingly, so that the combination notice is executed. In addition, a specific effect for digesting multiple notice icons (multiple digest-only effect) may be executed, and it is a big hit if multiple notice icons are digested rather than one notice icon is digested The reliability may be high.

  Next, a button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a is displayed together with a button reception time meter as shown in FIG. Notifying that the operation can be accepted, the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect performed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described button reach effect, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 30 (Cb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 30 (Cc). In this way, the project button button 136 changes to a projecting button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button reach production with higher jackpot reliability has been promoted.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 32 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 34 step by step.

  In FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. 32 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon has been changed from the notice icon I6 for the hat to the notice icon I1 for the first lord. Except for this point, it is the same as FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. In addition, as for the effects performed between FIG. 32 (14) and FIG. 32 (20), all the notice icons used in the notice icon increase effect are changed to the first icon notice icon I1. 20 is the same as FIG. 20 (15) to FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (20), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 32 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not changed yet.

  In FIG. 32 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 32 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as when four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially digest the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Also, which notice icon is used may be determined at random, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be digested with priority. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  After that, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32 (25), a character display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (26), the character display of “continue” attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon first display area YA1 in the advance notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. In addition, when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed Gray-out display may be used, or character information “Done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  32 (27) to 33 (33), the digested hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. Except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, this is the same as FIG. 20 (27) to FIG. 21 (33). Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (34), the display of digesting the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 33 (36), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (37), the “continuation” character display added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon second display area YA2 in the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (38) to (45) are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. 21 (38) to FIG. 22 (), except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 45), the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (46), the display of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a thousand box notice icon I9 at the timing shown in FIG. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a higher-reliability effect is additionally displayed above the displayed notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time that the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand car boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “promotion” attached to the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box disappears and the notice icon I9 of the thousand car box is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (48). In addition, the display to move to the original display position, that is, the third icon display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 34 (49), the reach transition effect described above is started. In this production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 34 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the production display in which a power failure has occurred, and then the strong reach with high reliability. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach production in this production example is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (50-1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Is it a chance?” Is displayed on the darkened background. The character “NO” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (50-2). Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (51), after the character display “Is it too hot” is displayed, the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (55), as shown in FIG. 34 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 34 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  In FIG. 34 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (59), the fluctuation variation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of the first icon of the first icon displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan's notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fan warning icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (62), the original display position, that is, the warning icon fourth display area in the warning icon display area 285 is displayed. Display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 35 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 35 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the big hit is confirmed “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 36 to FIG. 38 are diagrams showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon step by step. 36 to 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 36 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 a), an effect display is performed in which the third lord's notice icon I 3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first lord's notice icon I 1. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 36 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8b), as in FIG. 31 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9 b), it is shown that the first lord's notice icon I 1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of frame from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect using the notice icon of Tonosama.

  FIGS. 36 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8c), there is an effect display in which not only one first lord notice icon I1 but also three first lord notice icons I1 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (9c), the three first lord's notice icons I1 thrown become notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon in notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. Further, a high-reliability notice icon (for example, the third lord's notice icon I3) is unlikely to be displayed (not stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first lord's notice icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (first lord's notice icon I1) is increased by three, but a plurality of kinds of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example, The first lord's notice icon I1 and the third lord's notice icon I3 may be increased simultaneously.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (9c ′), a part or all of the thrown three first lord's notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is displayed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect or all the gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of the display area of the display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 36 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode by the Sabohani character), the character YM of the character uses the notification icon I1 of the first character as the notification icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 36 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 f), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the hold number display is performed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 36 (8 f), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched. However, in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  36 (8g) to FIG. 36 (9g-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8g), as in FIG. 31 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (9g-2), the first lord's notice icon I1 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to pre-read the notice. An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is not displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed by using a notice icon other than the first lord's notice icon I1, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  FIG. 36 (12h-1) to FIG. 36 (12h-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in FIG. 36 (12h-1), in the same manner as in FIG. 31 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the first icon notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (12h-2), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIGS. 37 (8i) to (9i) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 37 (8i) is different from FIG. 31 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, not the Tono-sama character YM. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (9i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and the first icon of the first lord is provided with the first notice icon I1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 37 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9j), the first icon notification icon I1 thrown by the character YM is displayed in the notification icon first display area YA1 of the notification icon display area 285, and the DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is placed on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if passing.

  FIGS. 37 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third icon-like notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9k), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first lord of the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY puts the third lord's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a warning icon with low jackpot reliability with a warning icon with high jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 37 (121) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed with the character notation “question mark”. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. A notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, a notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and a notice of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. A notice icon I3 is displayed, and a notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and a character notation “question mark” is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l ′), for some of the notification icons before the change, the type of the notification icon after the change may be notified by text. For example, the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has a character notation “question mark” attached thereto and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA3 is annotated with the letter “Chang eyes” and changed to a shuriken notice icon I7, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the word “continue” and changes to the hat notice icon I6. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the sixth icon display area YA6 is marked with “continuation” and “question mark” and is changed to a hat notice icon I6. Yes. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be gradually notified over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l ″), all or a part of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to the notice icons after the change, and the notice icon after the change is displayed. A corresponding character notation may be added to only the thing.

  FIGS. 38 (8m-1) to FIG. 38 (9m) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 38 (8m-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8m−1), the DJ character BY appears with a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8m-2), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 38 (9m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the Thousand Boxes is thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the preview icon I9 of the Thousand Box in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the preview icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this example, the notification icon before change may be overwritten from the notification icon after change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 38 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 38 (8n-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8n-2), the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 9n) As the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area is thrown. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first lord's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notification icon after the change may be overwritten from the notification icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the first notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change is changed to the notice icon before the overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon after being overwritten is digested than the notification icon before being overwritten, or the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may not be changed.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 39 is a figure which shows the example of an effect which a notice icon changes in steps. In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39A, a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears during the variation display of the decorative symbols. The placard is marked with the text “I will change” and notifies that the display mode will change for either the notice icon or the hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 39 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 39 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is displayed as the pre-reading notice display mode. To change. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change. In this way, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect, and the result is that the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, but it is displayed in a reduced size on the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  And as shown in FIG.39 (C), in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208, the Princess Chibi chance effect is performed. The Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned usual-game variable game is executed. Chibi princess chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery. The princess Chibi character selects one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point. This is a notice that the effect corresponding to the displayed icon will be executed. For example, if the Chibi princess character reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the wing member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is informed of the long opening, When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, the result of the symbol change display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached In advance, it is notified that the usual fluctuation display result is out of place.

  Furthermore, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by Tonentsu's notice icon is reached, as shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the third icon-like notice icon I3 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  When the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 39 (D2), at least one of the default display mode hold icons in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that is the default display mode is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change.

  In this way, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect, and the result is that the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example when power is interrupted or restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a display example in a stepwise manner when power interruption / recovery occurs while displaying the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, respectively, and in the notice icon third display area YA3, a thousand boxes are displayed. A warning icon I9 is displayed, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 40 (B), power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 40 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after power is restored instantaneously. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40C, a character display “Please wait for a while during restoration” is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before power interruption. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a special display result “special figure I”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. When the power is interrupted / restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. In the case of power interruption / recovery, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was the display mode of the pre-reading notice is also the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when power interruption / recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undecided” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undecided” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The prefetching notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved holds are consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not made for newly added hold after power interruption / recovery (holding in which the pre-read result is saved), and the pre-read notice is made after all the hold that contains “undecided” information is digested. However, for the newly increased hold after power interruption / recovery, a pre-reading notice may be made before the hold containing “undecided” information is used.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 41 in stages. 41 to 42, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 41, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 41 (1) shows a display corresponding to FIG. 19 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in a large size in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in the center of the display screen. The second decorative symbol display area is formed above the reserved icon display area 281 and the third decorative symbol is displayed in a small size, which is different from FIG. 19 (5). The second decorative symbols displayed in the second decorative symbol display area are configured such that after the change starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the confirmation stops.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM, unlike FIG. 19 (6), possesses notice icon I21 of “house” in which the letters “house” are circled.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (3), the notice icon I21 of the “house” possessed by the timing shown in FIG. 41 (4) is displayed as the notice icon. An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (5), the thrown “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (6). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the Tono-sama character YM has successfully displayed the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41 (7) to (8), a display in which the character YM is framed out downward of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and the display result of deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are respectively moved by the movement animation. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses “monkey” notice icon I22 in which the character “monkey” is circled.

  41. After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (12), the notice “I” is held at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (13). An effect display to throw toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (14), the thrown “print” notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, after the effect display similar to FIG. 41 (6) is performed, the effect display similar to FIG. 41 (7) to FIG. 41 (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (19) following FIG. 41 (18), the notice icon I21 of the “house” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon The display that the notice icon I22 of the “print” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “home” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 include the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon first display area YA1. A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be erased after the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested. Note that the timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is erased may be erased when an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started, or an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued afterwards. Also, the timing of starting the movement of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be the same, or the movement start of the “house” notice icon I21 is “mon” notice icon I22. It may be earlier than the start of the movement, or the start of movement of the “mon” notice icon I22 may be earlier than the start of the movement of the “house” notice icon I21.

  Thereafter, when the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) The family crest character 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 displays a family crest in which an effect image to that effect is displayed. Fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (22), it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). The contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding two notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “print”) are digested, so that a corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured. It should be noted that even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when a family crest drop effect is performed, it may be ensured that the symbol variation display is a big hit, or a loss result may be obtained. Further, the case where the family crest drop effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured such that the crest dropping effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is lost. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit is more easily digested than the symbol variation display that is lost, such as the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22). It may be configured.

  FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. 43 to 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIG. 43 (a1) differs from FIG. 41 (5) in that the “mon” notice icon I22 appears before the “house” notice icon I21 and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 43 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a3), the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I21 of the “house” that has been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “house” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1). The At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of “house” and “mon”), not the order of “mon” and “house”. Also, as shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the “mon” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the order of “mon” and “house”. In this production example, whether it is shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the above-described family crest drop production is performed. For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of “house” and “print” (ie, correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed, and the order of “print” and “house” (ie, When the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the crest drop effect is less likely to start than when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured.

  FIG. 43 (b1) to FIG. 43 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest drop effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b1), only the “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “pattern” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon display area 285 to be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b2), when only the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It operates as if it vibrates in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “preparing family crest” indicating that there is a possibility that a family crest drop effect is performed is performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. And Tono-sama production has started. At this time, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “monkey” notice icon I22. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b4), when the Tono-sama character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the “monkey” notice icon I22 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Are displayed in the second display area YA2.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of “Crest” remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, at this time, the crest character 224B once retreats to the initial position, so that it is easy to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but it does not retreat to the initial position and the curling operation is continued. Also good. On the other hand, the character display of “preparing family crest” is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 43 (b6), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this time, the crest character 224B that has been withdrawn descends again and resumes the scooping action. In this effect example, for example, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest character 224B descends, and FIG. The crest dropping effect shown in (21) is performed. Note that there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. In FIG. 43 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged state until the “print” notice icon I22 displayed later is digested. At this time, the “print” notice icon I22 may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  43 (c1) to FIG. 43 (c2-3) show other examples of the notice icon digestion effect. In this effect example, a state in which a background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I31 of “Mr.” in which the character “Mr.” is circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The “princess” notice icon I32 in which the character “princess” is circled is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the “２” notice icon I33 in which the character “爺” is circled is notified. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

  FIG. 43 (c2-1) shows a state of the background display after the three notice icons of “Tono” notice icon I31, “Princess” notice icon I32 and “爺” notice icon I33 are digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image with the face of the frog up from the left side of the display screen and the face of Tono-sama are displayed. A background display in which the up image and the image of the princess's face are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the reliability to the jackpot in the symbol variation display. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the value is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. ”Notice icon I32>“ 爺 ”notice icon I33, the reliability may be the highest, but the relationship between the digest order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set as appropriate. .

  Also, in FIG. 43 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for "Tono", the notice icon I32 for "Princess", and the notice icon I33 for "Morning", the notice icon I32 for "Princess" The state of the background display after only the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and a face of the frog. A background display in which the uploaded image is divided into two equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the symbol variation display is performed. Although the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, a background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notice icon I31 of “No.” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” may be digested. Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” are digested, “Tono” The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I31 and the notification icon I33 of “爺”, the notification icon I32 of “princess”, and the notification icon I33 of “爺” are digested, and the notification icon I31 of “Tono” And when the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” are digested, These can be set appropriately.

  Also, in FIG. 43 (c2-3), only the notice icon I33 for “爺” among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is shown. The state of the background display after is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background display in which an image with the face of the frog is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In this embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the big hit in is lower than that in the case where the two notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the “の う ち” notice icon I33 is digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and for example, the “donor” notice icon I31 is digested. Alternatively, the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” is digested, the notice icon I32 of “princess” or the notice of “予 告” is given. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested than when the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested However, these may be set as appropriate.

  Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 for “Tono” is displayed, the notice icon I32 for “princess” or “や” is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I33 is displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed. In addition, for example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are displayed, the “Tono” notice icon I31 and “」 ”notice icon I33 are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “爺” notice icon I33 are displayed, and the “don” notice icon I31 and “爺” When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are displayed, but these are set appropriately. can do.

  In this example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change. In this case, so-called law breaking may be reported to notify that the jackpot is confirmed.

  In addition, when three notice icons are displayed, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon is displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. It may be. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  Also, in this production example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 is digested, the Tono-sama character appears and Tono reach is started, and when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the fox character may appear and the heel reach may be started. In addition, when the “Ichi” notice icon I33 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are digested, the niece character and the princess character appear, and the niece & princess reach is started, and the “Tono” notice icon is displayed. When I31 and the princess's notice icon I32 are digested, the Tono-sama character and the princess's character appear and the lord and princess reach starts, and the lord's notice icon I31 and the niece's notice icon When I33 is digested, a Tono-sama character and a spear character may appear and the Tono & Samurai reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono”, the notice icon I32 of “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “Tatsumi” are digested, the Tono-sama character, the Princess character, and the Samurai character appear and Tono & Princess & Samurai Reach may be started. Thus, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  In addition, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned reach effect or background display notice. For example, the effect mode in jackpot game or the mode during symbol change may be changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as a character that increases the notice icon) may be performed. In addition, the production performed when the notice icon is digested is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. An effect by a corresponding light emission pattern may be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, there is an example in which a presentation may be performed when the “house” notice icon I21 is digested and when the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested. explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “mon” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state with “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (d2), the decorative symbol display device 208 digests only the “house” notice icon I21 out of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “print” notice icon I22. The situation is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested to change to a chance symbol which is a special symbol.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the chance symbol being displayed, or as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. There is a case where a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be transferred. In addition, after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image, it may be shifted to the swordsman reach, or the effect image and the crest hero B 224B are not dropped to the swordsman reach. You may make it transfer. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-3), there may be a case where the normal reach effect is started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” and then at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (d4-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the crest challenge reach has been performed is performed. The first decorative symbol is fluctuated while maintaining the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (d5-4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the Tono-sama character YM pulls the “print” notice icon I22 with a rope. This suggests that the icon I22 is attracted to increase the expectation for the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4), when the Tono-sama character YM succeeds in attracting the “monkey” notice icon I22, the family crest member 224B falls as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is displayed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. In other words, it can be said that the digestion of the “monkey” notice icon I22 is successful. In addition, after the family crest drop effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above is transferred.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4a), there is a case where the rope pulled by Tono-sama character YM breaks and the drawing of the “monkey” notice icon I22 fails. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the swordsman reach described above may be entered. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the pull-in notification icon I22 of the “print” is successfully pulled. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by Tono-sama character YM breaks and the pulling of the “print” notice icon I22 fails, the process proceeds to FIG. 44 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the “monkey” notice icon I22 is digested first. Further, it may be configured such that a family crest falling effect is more likely to occur when the “monstrength” notice icon I22 is digested than when the “family” notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse may be possible.

  In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "mon" notice icon I22, "donor" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "爺" notice icon I33, There may be a notice icon that resembles an icon. For example, a notice icon for “U”, a notice icon for “鮫”, a notice icon for “old”, a notice icon for “subject”, and “ May be prepared. For example, even if the “home” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested, the crest dropping effect may not be performed, or the “house” notice icon and the “mon” notice icon are digested. The crest dropping effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the “house” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested than when the house icon is digested. In addition, a notice icon such as “鮫” may be changed to a notice icon such as “mon”.

  Moreover, in the example of production described above, one word is formed by two characters of “house” and “mon”, and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirement for the word to be formed. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be used for this production example. For example, a notice icon for “question”, a notice icon for “similar”, and a notice for “ren” When three icons are digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed.

  Further, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest”, there is only one free space in the notice icon display area 285. The “home” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may not be displayed. Further, only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not display the notice icon is displayed. When the space 285 is empty, the display may be increased, or when the space for the warning icon display region 285 is not empty, the displayed warning icon may not be digested in the first place. In addition, even if the notice icon display area 285 is empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

  Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of the notice icon display area 285 is not displayed until the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “mon” are digested, for example, “house” When the previous notice icon I21 is digested, the "mon" notice icon I22 may be digested together, or the "house" notice icon I21 may be digested.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and an increase effect and a digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in steps. In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 45 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is a subject of the pre-reading notice, and the display mode is other hold icons (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, shows how various parts are added. In FIG. 45 (e1), the hold icon display area 281 shows the state. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen. The second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1 is carried. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating a snowman's head.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the unjust merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the unscrupulous merchant character EC is out of the frame, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the Tono-sama character YM has moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e4), an effect display for throwing the possessed third notice part P3 toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, Tono-like character YM is out of frame in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 41 (6) to (8).

  FIG. 45 (e6) shows a state in which the display result of the losing is derived, and the variation display of FIG.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. For example, the notification display area 287 informs that the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice, or the display form of the hold icon that is already the display form of the pre-reading notice indicates that the big hit is reliable. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high degree. Also, a jackpot notice display in the symbol variation display being executed is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that a notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e7), the variable display of symbols is started in the Chan throughlet display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the third notice part P3 is digested. This third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses a fourth notice part P4. This fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wound around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model imitating the head constituting the first hold icon h11 that is a display mode of a snowman. The DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the notice icon P in the notice icon display area 285 is covered. The effect display put on 2 display area YA2 is performed. It should be noted that the symbols are still displayed in the change display area 287.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e10), the display result in which the letters “Get” are displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the trunk constituting the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of a snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 45 (e11 ′), the first notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285 in which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. You may make it display once (stock) on display area YA1. In this case, the notification icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1, but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notification icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 45 (e12), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In this production example, the variation icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but may be deleted. Note that the fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 45 (e13), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the change icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wound around the neck of the fluctuation icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the fluctuation icon h0 (or the hold icon) of the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. In addition, when the display form of this completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the fluctuation is high.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to the normal symbol variation display, but may be mounted when, for example, a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 45 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 4, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the swordsman reach, the fourth notice part P4 is digested and attached to the change icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e15-2). You may make it do. Here, since the change icon h0 shifts to super reach, the change icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, functions as a prefetch notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not subject to prefetching. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 that can be applied to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestion effect in steps, and FIG. 47 is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 46 in steps. 46 to 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 46, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. 46 to 47 are different from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 46 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the Tono-sama character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. Note that the display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display for increasing the display area is performed, and further notification that the notice icon can be stocked. Well, for example, every time the displayed display area is filled with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the Tono-sama character YM. Specifically, for example, the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. When the Tono-sama character YM possesses one notice icon when the Tono-sama production is started, one display area is displayed when the Tono-sama character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM has three notice icons, the Ton-sama character YM may increase the display area by three when the action of throwing the notice icon is performed. All the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice notice area) composed of four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed. The icon display area) is displayed in a reduced size, and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) composed of four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed. This second notice icon A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second notice icon display area is displayed may be the timing at which the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing at which the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the preview icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the number of notice icon stocks is displayed instead of the preview icon display area 285. The notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (3), the notification icon I6 of the hat held is displayed in the notification icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (4). An effect display that is thrown toward is performed. In this example, the hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative design display device 208A and the second decorative design display device 208B may not be straddled, for example, the first decorative design display device. The notice icon that has entered the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A may appear on the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 46 (6), In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby notifying that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect effect will be executed in the future. Thereafter, Tono-sama character YM goes out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  FIG. 46 (7) is stopped and displayed with a combination of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” in the first ornamental symbol display device 208A, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, as a result of the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the variation display of the first special diagram 1, as shown in FIG. 46 (8), the first decoration symbol display device 208 A displays “decoration 7-decoration 6”. -The decoration display of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (9), the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation in the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 46 (10), the first notification icon first display icon 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed. The display of digesting the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it may be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Note that when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (11), the digested hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (12). Is done. In addition, the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (11) displays the first decoration symbol display timing when switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 208B to the background display. It may be the timing when the device has moved to the center of the device 208A, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (12) is enlarged.

  In FIG. 47 (13) continuing from FIG. 46 (12), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. The timing for switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed, or may be the timing before the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 47 (14), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the “continue” character display, and the second decorative symbol display device 208B provides the notice. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed across two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  After that, the enlarged character BC2 appears at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (16), and is displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208B from the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then, FIG. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, there is an effect display in which a Bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative design display device 208 and pushes up the right design that is stopped and displayed. This is done to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production will be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the chief character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 47 (16), it is not necessary for the character BC2 with the longest length to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, “display straddling” is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Alternatively, the image may be displayed integrally with the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Alternatively, a display may be performed in which the display moves from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbols are framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the display moves at a low speed downward. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (19). Thereafter, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another modification of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment, and FIG. 50 shows the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of digestion production in steps. 48 to 50, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  48 (a1) to FIG. 48 (a7-2), the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 46 to 47, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen, and a variable display of symbols is performed. Since the contents displayed in the chamber lettuce display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps the approximate center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is conspicuous. Note that the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 48 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a4), after the notice icon I6 for the hat derived and displayed in the channel display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the variation display of FIG. 1 is terminated, and the display is stopped with a combination of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2” as a result of the loss. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased at a timing before the end of the variation display in FIG. Further, in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the first decorative symbol is displayed and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without being interrupted regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), even after the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B maintains the lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display region 285A are consumed is completed. Whether to raise the 2 decorative design display device 208B can be set as appropriate. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), the variation display of special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, which is the result of the loss. "Is stopped and displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 48 (a6-2) shows a state in which two pending reservations have been consumed and the symbol variation display, which is a prefetch target, has started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the first decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the second decorative symbol is changed. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the hat notice icon I6 is expanded as shown in FIG. 48 (a7-2). Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed so as to protrude from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, a character display of “continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. Is displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that it can be easily seen by the player. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be kept lowered until the symbol variation ends.

  48 (b1) to 48 (b4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the number of notice icon display is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208). An example in which a device 288 is provided is shown. This notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) where the notice icon is displayed.

  48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b3) have the same effect contents as FIG. 20 (17) to FIG. 19 (19), but in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, A state in which the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is shown. In other words, in FIG. 48 (b1), only one hat warning icon I6 is displayed in the warning icon display area 285, so that the warning icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. Yes. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b2), Tono-sama character YM throws three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, thousand box notice icon I9, and fan notice icon I10). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. It should be noted that the value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called “gase” is displayed). When the above-described three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. Is done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the previous notice icons is reduced by 1, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. Note that the timing for displaying the value of the display device for displaying the number of notice icons displayed in a reduced manner may be the time before the notice icon is digested, or at the same time as the notice icon is digested. It may be the timing after digestion. Note that, as shown by surrounding with a broken line, even if the notice icon is digested, the value is not decreased, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this production example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments. , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a predetermined pattern emit light, sound, a decorative symbol display device (decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other You may make it alert | report the display number of a notice icon by a decorative design display apparatus etc.).

  49 (c1) to 49 (c9) are produced using two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 46 to 47. There is a difference in using a display device of the same size. 49, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 49 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, The mode is, for example, a default display mode as with the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are arranged. It arrange | positions so that it may overlap substantially. The first decorative symbol display device 208C displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281. A change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservations are displayed. Corresponding to the numbers, “2” and “0” are displayed, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 49 (c1). At the timing shown in Fig. 4, the decorative symbols are being changed. In addition, in the lower right corner portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-described chamberlet display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c1), the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed. It is shown. The background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (c1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan throughlet display area 287, the second decorative design display device 208D displays the first decorative design as shown in FIG. 49 (c2). The display device 208C is lowered to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B and is derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed. However, the size of the symbol is reduced and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 49 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c3), the number of holds is one, and therefore, in the special figure 1 second hold number display H1, “1” indicating that fact is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (c4) shows a state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the shuriken notice icon I7. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is finished, as shown in FIG. 49 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” as a result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of the loss is an opportunity, and it is informed that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by displaying this chance.

  FIG. 49 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is notified that the second pseudo-continuous notice will be performed. As the second hat notice icon I6 is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And it comes to be displayed on the whole two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (c9), in response to the digestion of the second hat notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and is stopped. An effect display that pushes up the right symbol is performed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the longest character BC is displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (c9), when a decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a numeric symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying small decorative symbols, small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols are displayed, and large symbols and small symbols are displayed in different display modes. The display mode may be the same by changing only the size.

  In this example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved away from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D are displayed. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that an accessory placed on the back side of the device 208D is visible, and further, the accessory can be moved so as to protrude forward. May be. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 49D shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 49 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. The three decorative symbol display devices may all have the same size.

  The fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (d), the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 respectively display the notice icon I6 of the hat, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed on the screen is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes is displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device per symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display region 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device. It is displayed on the device 208G. There may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Moreover, there may be a decorative symbol display device that does not display the effect display related to the notice icon. This can be applied to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 50 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, in FIG. 50, the first decorative symbol display device 208H disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with protruding frame portions on the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J includes an upper end side, a lower end side and a right end side. The frame portions are provided so as to protrude from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are each configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are positioned closest to each other, It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The whole can be coated.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 50 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 22 (47), which covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. The swordsman reach is shown. That is, in FIG. 50 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the thousand carton box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and a notice is given to shift to a more reliable performance. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start to move in directions close to each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. Thus, in this embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digestion of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to a position closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is hardly visible. It becomes a state. At this time, the reach decoration effect as shown in FIG. 22 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. In other words, the reach effect display that has been executed over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J is slightly darkened, and the Tono-sama character appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed. A display that cuts off the display is performed. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect has been started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 50 (e7), “decoration 1-decoration 2—over the second ornamental symbol display device 208I and the third ornamental symbol display device 208J. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e8) to (e9), all are temporarily hidden, and in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotate 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, display of the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e11-1), the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that fluctuated and fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e11-2), the display of digesting the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, even if the notice icon is digested, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e12-2), an effect display is performed in which the princess character dances with a fan and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, re-variable display is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "decoration symbol combination) is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 50 (e7 ′) shows an example in which, after the display shown in FIG. 50 (e6) is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in directions away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the character of the heel is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed across the third ornament symbol display device 208J, the first ornament symbol display device 208H, and the second ornament symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 50 (e7 ″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate together, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also rotates. It is also possible to rotate together. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be configured integrally. It may be configured as a body and driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be able to be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, after the display shown in FIG. 6E is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees, and unlike FIG. 50 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third The display can be performed with the horizontal widths of the display screens of the decorative symbol display device 308J being uniform.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing step by step another modification of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. 51, the transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. Light emitting means such as LEDs are provided at appropriate positions near the side edges of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 51, the first layer panel disposed on the front side is subjected to lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is disposed on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is subjected to lens cuts in a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 51, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. In addition, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured with one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern. In FIG. 51, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. In FIG. 51, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the purpose of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable icon display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h 0 and hold icons h 11 and h 12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Since the contents displayed in the chamber lettuce display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. That is, in FIG. 51 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon is performed by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL. Thereafter, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (extinguishes), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a hat notice icon I6 derived and displayed in the Chanletlet display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. While the state of moving toward the screen is displayed, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be made to be.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 performs dark display and guides the light. Stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise and causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated and the first layer panel is rotated. The panel of the layers may not be rotated, and the panel of the first layer may be rotated together with the panel of the second layer.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, so that It is foretelling that the rendition will be executed.

  FIG. 51G shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested. As shown in FIG. 51 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 51 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the notice effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state in advance of notice. As shown in FIG. 51 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of symbols is performed in the chunklet display area 287 displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6. That the notice icon I6 is derived.

  FIG. 51 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate The light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6, and the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel is also caused to emit light to simulate the effect image. The notice icon digestion effect is performed so as to form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel is different from the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel, the pattern formed on the first layer panel and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 51 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The enlarged display is performed on the entire screen, and at the timing, the notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon digestion effect. 52 (1) to FIG. 11 (11), except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I31 for the drink instead of the notice icon I10 for the fan. 22 (44) to FIG. 22 (54), only the portions different from the above description will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be protruded upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the effect contents. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. This drink notice icon I31 is a notice icon for notifying that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 52 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in an enlarged manner, and an effect display for sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is in a state before the operation reception start of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (17), the button reception time meter decreases in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 52 (18). Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. Note that the timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. May be the timing before is displayed, or may be the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. Further, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, when it is turned on (for example, lit in blue) to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period, You may make it light (for example, light in red) in the aspect which alert | reports that.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an effect example using movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  53 (a1) to FIG. 53 (a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notice icon stock. Yes. FIG. 53 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 41 (1), but the effect movable body 224C simulating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” attached to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect device. It arrange | positions so that it may be hidden behind 206.

  FIG. 53 (a2) shows a state where the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden in the effect device 206 to a viewable position that is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, it is notified that one of a plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the kind of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be notified by voice or lamp. A plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the types of notice icons, and the types of notice icons stocked depending on the types of effect movable bodies 224C that appear may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (a3) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 53B, effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can rotate about the depth direction as the rotation axis are arranged in the vicinity of the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first effect movable body 224Da marked with “Large”, a fifth effect movable body 224De marked with an asterisk symbol, “board” The second effect movable body 224Db to which the character is attached is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and a third effect movable body 224Dc to which the character “shake” is attached A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with a “dance” character are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. These first effect movable body 224Da to sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 53B, when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the number of effect movable bodies that have been digested may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the stocked notice icons may be rotated. Also good.

  FIGS. 53 (c1) to (c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the pre-reading mode has been entered. In this production example, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the state shifts to a pre-reading mode for notifying that the change display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 53 (c1) shows that the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state where the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the upper arm portion 224a is pivotally attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation axis ax1. . The forearm portion 224b has a base end portion rotatably attached to a distal end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation axis ax2.

  When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the pre-reading mode is started, as shown in FIG. 53 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character display “Preparing for special training” on the right side in the belt-like scroll display area. Scrolls from left to right. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-read mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position covering the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position) A reciprocating operation (prefetching operation) is performed. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is temporarily returned to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. In addition, during the pre-reading operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 53 (c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by arranging two “decorations 1” during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is the object of prefetching. Here, the prefetching operation is continued.

  FIG. 53 (c4) shows a state in which the special training reach as the super reach production is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of “Preparing for special training” is finished, and the character display of “Special training start” indicating that special training reach has been started is performed. Further, after the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 53 (c5), the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (c6). Further, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image and notifies that the reliability for the big hit is high.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. It is. In FIG. 54, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 54, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode.

  Since FIG. 54 (1) is the same display as FIG. 41 (1) described above, detailed description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 54 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  In this example of production, Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (3), but the hat notification icon I6 possessed by the hat has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 54 (4). As shown in FIG. 5, in the state where the character YM of Tono-sama is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 54 (5), the hold symbols h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are moved by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Note that Tono-sama character YM still stands by at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (6), an effect display is performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this production example, when the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notification icon is stocked. The notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed while the symbol fluctuation display is being executed, but a so-called gasse warning is not performed. May be. In this case, for example, the character YM of Tono-sama may end the display before the start of the variation display of the symbol that is the target of prefetching. For example, the character YM may be displayed one time before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of Tonosama may be terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching ends. For example, super reach that is performed during the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started. The display of Tono-sama character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of Tonosama may be continuously displayed after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character's character is waiting and the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swing fluctuation display is in progress), the standby display may be continued in a state where the character has the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. Since it is the same except that (12) and the variation display of the second decorative symbol are performed, detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 54 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Yes. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 54 (12), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 54 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the change in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 55, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 55, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  55 (a1) to 55 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after an effect for notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 55 (a1) shows a state in which the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a character display of “item by strike” indicating that an item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, when a strike is acquired in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bowling effect by the Tono-sama character has been started. Note that the mission displayed on the explanation display unit 288 and the content of the success reward are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the pre-read advance notice, It may be related to a notice about the symbol variation display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that a notice of notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed by performing a bowling effect as shown in FIG. 55 (a1). This bowling effect may be a dedicated effect that is performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the currently changing symbol display, or may be used as another pre-reading advance notice. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and a character display of “following the next variation” is displayed indicating that it is continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. It should be noted that the “Strike and Item Get” is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates the mission and its success fee.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball cast by the Tono-sama character rolls on the lane and moves toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , The expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the image of the striked scene is displayed together with the text display of “strike”, and the mission is achieved. As shown in the figure, a character display of “GET” is displayed together with the enlarged hat notice icon I6 to notify that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is informed that it has been stocked. Thus, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, during the symbol variation display being executed, the announcement item is not displayed (stock), and the announcement item is displayed. A notice is being made.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-described bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, the notice icon display area 285C for displaying the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-described bowling effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 55, when a big hit is made during the bowling production, the bowling production is started at the timing of displaying the big jackpot symbol derived after super reach (for example, during fluctuation fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a different background display may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a2) may be displayed.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (b), when a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be terminated, but the display may be continued as it is. . In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55 (c), when a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another modification of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, description has been given of the one that preferentially displays the fluctuation of the special figure 2 over the special figure 1. However, in this production example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. However, the special figure variation game concerning the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the one that performs the start opening prize order variation for starting the start opening prize order. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to those that perform special figure 2 priority fluctuation. 56, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 56, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. In addition, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h 11, the third hold icon h 12, and the fifth hold icon h 13 are displayed on the first special figure starting port 230. It is a hold icon showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and put on hold, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been put on the second special figure starting port 232 and put on hold. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2. FIG.

  The effect shown in FIG. 56 is an effect that may start after the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended, and the SB character SB moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, This is an effect (Amida effect) for obtaining a notice item or the like.

  First, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops display with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Amida effect is started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), a savohani character SB is placed at any one of the starting points of three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. Are arranged at each of the end points of the three horizontal lines, respectively, a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a lose icon IX. In addition, several vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central part of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined, for example, according to the number of holds at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited thereto. In this Amida production, if the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the rules of Amida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stored in stock. When the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that every time a pseudo-ream is performed, the Sabohani character SB may move to a position where a vertical line is arranged. May be equal. Moreover, you may advance to the place of the vertical line of 2 or more points | pieces per symbol change display. 56, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 55C and 55D, the effect can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the AMIDA effect even during execution of super reach. Then, for example, there may be an effect that the notice icon increases during super reach.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative symbol starts to be changed. Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB starts moving from the starting point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is displayed. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are displayed connected by the vertical line, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the vertical line. In the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the middle horizontal line is reached halfway.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is found to be cut off in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line, so the Sabohani character SB is in the middle Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Therefore, the savohani character SB follows the rule of Amida lottery from the middle horizontal line to the upper horizontal line. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the Sabohani character SB reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 56 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that it has been acquired, the AMIDA effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1) and described above, any one of a plurality of different types of notice icons is selected. For example, FIG. 56 (a1- 2) As shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is arranged at all the horizontal line end points, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3). Also good. In this way, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is determined that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is a warning icon indicating that the effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed as described above. In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be further increased. The effect as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), without disposing the losing icon IX, disposing the hat's notice icon I6, the fan's notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 at the end of each horizontal line, It may be determined that any notice icon is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the production of Amid with confidence.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), the savohani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the warning icons (hat warning icon I6, fan warning icon I10) arranged at the end of each horizontal line. In addition, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand car boxes are stocked. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is ensured that an effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed is performed, so that the player hits the big hit. In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-6), the notification icons of the patrons who do not clearly know the type of the warning icon at the end of each horizontal line (the first icon of the first icon I1, the second icon of the warning icon I2, the first icon 3 notice icons I3) may be arranged, so that the player does not know what notice icons will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, the expectation can be improved. Further, as described above, the color of the notice icon of Tono-sama varies depending on the type, and the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the changed notice icon from the lord's notice icon depending on which color of the notice icon is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is the notice icon for the red lord, is more easily changed to the notice icon for which the “pseudo-ream” is confirmed than the notice icon for which the “pseudo-ream” is not confirmed, and the white lord The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon, can be easily changed to a notice icon in which the “pseudo-ream” is not fixed.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is concealed with smoke to make it difficult to specify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be concealed with smoke, and the progress route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida production is started. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance which notice icon is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the production in peace. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line where the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the AMIDA effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2), during execution of the AMIDA effect, the area where the notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line is hidden with smoke, and then, FIG. 56 (a2-2a) is displayed. ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2a), the loss icon IX is changed to a thousand box notice icon I9, and the content of the Amida effect is promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons arranged at the end points of each horizontal line are changed to the lose icon IX or the notice icon with a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida effect are demoted. It may be.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the central part of the vertical line is hidden with smoke so that the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. For example, FIG. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida effect, the smoke that has partially hidden the vertical line extends in the vertical direction, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, the possibility of acquiring either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 has been suggested. Then, it is ensured that the third vertical line disappears and the fan notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the second vertical line is cut in the middle, so that the losing icon IX is not selected. As shown in 56 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut. Therefore, after the losing icon IX is selected and the AMIDA effect ends, FIG. 56 (a4-3a) As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  Note that, in the above-mentioned AMIDA effect, a pre-reading notice about the symbol variation display that is a pre-reading target may be performed according to the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. is there. In FIG. 57, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 57, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, and the hold display becomes a prefetch notice display mode (savohani hold icon). This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (1), the above-described notice icon display region 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 57 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 57 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 accordingly displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 57 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (2), the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Displayed and notified that the number of holds is three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode of savohani) instead of the default display mode.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the icon h11, and becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 57 (5) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (6), in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. As described above, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. A certain Tono-sama production has started.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 57 (11) to (12), a display in which the character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (13), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the moving animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable symbol display is started. .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (15), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (16), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the movement animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 57 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. Thus, according to this production example, it can be said that the prefetching notice with the hold icon is simultaneously performed together with the prefetching notice with the notice icon.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in stages, and in stages, other examples of an effect of increasing the notice icon and the effect of digestion FIG. In FIG. 58, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 58, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a pre-reading symbol variation display hold, but the display mode is For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  58 (a1) to FIG. 58 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is provided to notify in advance that a notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display of the deviation is displayed. The result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

  After that, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the display is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is performed. The icon moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1, and the third hold icon h13 The on-hold icon at the display position becomes the second on-hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol change display to be started next. Specifically, this placard PL1 is displayed with a hat notice icon I6 following “with the next change”, and further followed by “ga stock”, and the hat notice icon I6 Is informed that it will be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, for example, a Ton-like effect is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. As shown in 58 (a 3-1), the hat notice icon I 6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described effect example, the placard PL1 is displayed so that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on the placard PL2, a notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed after “At the next change”, and further followed by “is stock”, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the hat notice icon I6 may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  If the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked during the next symbol change display, no effects relating to the stock of the notice icon are performed as shown in FIG. 58 (a3-2). An effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, Tono-sama effect) may be performed, but in this case, a so-called gassestock effect that does not stock the notice icon is performed.

  58 (b1) to FIG. 58 (b3) show a state in which a prefetching mode, which is one of the prefetching notices, is performed during the symbol variation display being executed at the time when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b1), a game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230, and the symbol variation display to be prefetched is put on hold, and a prefetch notice is made as a display mode of the third hold icon h13. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special graphic 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a prefetching mode that is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “Intense heat is approaching” scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Display to be performed.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. Tono-sama performance is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Thus, according to this production example, it is possible to perform a prefetching notice by changing the background display in addition to a prefetching notice by the stock of the notice icon and a prefetching notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 (c1) to (c2), a ton-like effect or the like is performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, and a notice icon May be stocked.

  58 (d1) to 58 (d3) show how the notice icon stock and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, it is configured to be able to execute the stock and digestion of the notice icon related to the notice effect being performed during the symbol variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (d1), when the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a notice icon as shown in FIG. 58 (d2). The notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285 is temporarily stocked. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (e1) to (e2), the hat notice icon I6 is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may make it do.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows different notice icon increase effects and digestion effects applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of this in steps. In FIG. 59, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 59, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIGS. 59 (a1) to (a3) show a state in which the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are used together.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “Castle Town”. Yes. In addition to displaying the current stage name, the stage display area 289 may display, for example, a tutorial display such as the content of the preview and the description of the characters to be displayed. Also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned Tono-sama effect is performed, and a hat notification icon I6 is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the character display of “stock” is added, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is displayed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (b1) to (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the hat notice icon I6 that appears due to Tono-sama production is not stocked. You may make it digest. Thereby, the digest effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol variation display can be performed.

  FIGS. 59 (c1) to (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display region 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display region is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2 respectively display a hat notice icon I6, and the notice icon third display area YAL3 has a shuriken notice icon I7. It is displayed. Also, the second notice icon display area 285F has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. In other words, when the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, a smaller number than this. The reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on whether the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F. Well, for example, the more stock the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, It may be configured so as to be easy with. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two of them may be digested. In this case, The remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display or may be deleted without being digested. In addition, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured such that the reliability for the big hit differs depending on the number of the notice items being stocked.

  FIGS. 59 (d1) to (d3) show other examples of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed in a small size overlapping the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is the first hold. The icon h11 is overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a notice icon is included and displayed in the hold icon is shown.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (d2), the reduced-size hat notice icon I6s displayed on the variation icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and a character display of “stock” is added, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Is done. In this production example, every time the symbol fluctuation display is suspended, the production of stocking the notice icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. It is not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the fluctuation icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  59 (f1) to FIG. 59 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  59 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 59 (d1) and will not be described in detail.

  In this effect example, after that, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (f2), and then the variation icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (f3). Although h0 is erased, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also erased together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. Thus, even if the notice icon is displayed on the fluctuation icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  59 (g1) to FIG. 59 (g3) show a state where when a certain notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained that provides the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more of the plurality of kinds of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 18B, and which notice icon is included. It is a difficult aspect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then displayed in an enlarged manner. The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (g3), the display of the notification icon I51 of the bouquet changes to a notification icon I6 of the hat and a notification icon I8 of the ribbon, and the types of the notification icons included in the notification icon I51 of the bouquet Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to which type of the notice icon is included while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiment described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be displayed after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display is suspended. If the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, or if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and the symbol change display is not held, the stock status is displayed even during the demonstration display. May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked regardless of whether the symbol variation display is suspended.

  Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be notified.

  In addition, an effect may be provided in which the stocked notice icon is changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, a stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to a fan notice icon I10. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of chances in a state where the hat's notice icon I6 is stocked, an effect may be performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 is changed to the thousand box notice icon I9. . Conversely, the stock notice icon may be demoted (level down).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the fan notice icon, or the hat notice icon I6 may be digested and executed to increase the number of pseudo reams. Good. Conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

  In addition, the length of the variable display time when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not performed may be the same or different between the symbol change display that is a big hit and the symbol change display that is lost.

  Further, as a variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so as not to carry out the advance notice of stocking the notice icon.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the length of fluctuation time for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be digested during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  Further, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 before interruption is performed. The notice icon may be stocked and not digested, or may be configured to digest.

  In addition, the types of notification icons are not limited to those described above or described later, and various types can be employed.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon. When this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player selects You may make it possible to increase possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is digested, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, The brightness may be set.

  In addition, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is digested, for example, the user setting may be cleared, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

  In addition, for example, an effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is digested, for example, the prefetch mode can be ended or the effect mode can be ended. Alternatively, it may be possible to end after confirming the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode.

  Further, for example, a point acquisition item or a level-up gifting item may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. It may be.

  Further, for example, a reach production corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the Tono-sama icon is digested, Tono-sama VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  Also, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, an icon “next notice” is displayed, and a notice effect of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune telling icon) that starts fortune-telling when digested. In this case, the fortune telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  In addition, for example, there may be an icon for displaying information on the island simultaneous production when digested. For example, the countdown until the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production starts may be displayed, or the contents of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that allows for store-side customization once digested. For example, it is possible to make settings that allow the production to be performed according to the area of the installed amusement store (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) and the name of the amusement store to be installed Good. For example, according to the setting, it is possible to differentiate between a group notice character (for example, Namahage group) appearing in the Tohoku region mode and a group notice character (eg, Shachihoko group) appearing in the Chubu region mode. There is a case.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a tutorial display when digested.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a roulette effect when digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed is displayed, or a result indicating that the symbol change display is notified is displayed.

  Moreover, for example, when digested, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state.

  Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing, in stages, examples of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table related to the notice item. It is.

  60 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the common figure display apparatus 210, the common figure reservation lamp 216, and the 4th symbol display apparatus 284a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (a), the reserved icon display region 281A of FIG. 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of FIG. 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 60 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both FIG. 1 and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4”, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A in FIG. 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icons are displayed left justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed constantly, or may be displayed or not as necessary.

  FIG. 60B shows a state in which two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side aligned. These hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, since the first hold is consumed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left side as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. At this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of FIG. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 60 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. ).

  After the change of the display mode of the hold icon h11, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (e) is reached, the notice icon display area 285A and the princess notice icon Ih are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. The That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has been increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by a balloon with the character notation “Atari” and “Question Mark” appears. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), after “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, so the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. The In the present embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, if the result of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is out of sync, a notice icon Will not be digested, and no notice icon will be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digest icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the preview icon is digested and increased. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of FIG. Only the region 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is out of place. .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (j), after the suspended symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started, Tonen's notice icon It is digested, and “Atari” and “Question Mark” Tono-sama character YI appears with a letter balloon. Note that the appearance timing of Tono-sama character YI may be before, after or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 60 (j), a bad servant notice icon Id is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil agent is added and displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the Tono-sama notice icon It may be, or at the same time. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the appearance of the villain character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 60 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , You will be informed that it was a big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to perform the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this production example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 hold, An increase display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of / 50, an increase display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 3/50, and an increase display of the notice icon of the bad actor is executed with a probability of 2/50 . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tonosama is executed with a probability of 40/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent is executed with a probability of 25/50. Execute the digest display. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of place, when the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is suspended as a result of the prefetch of the hold in FIG. Will display an increase in the notification icon of Tono-sama with a probability of 3/50, an increase display of the notification icon of the princess with a probability of 2/50, and an increase in the notification icon of the bad actor with a probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, digestion display of Tonen's notice icon is executed at a probability of 1/50, digestion display of a princess's notice icon is executed at a probability of 10/50, and a notice icon of an evil agent is executed at a probability of 15/50. Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display in FIG. , 25/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the princess, 20/50 probability to increase the number of the princess notice icon, 7/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the evil agent Run. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tonosama is executed with a probability of 20/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not assumed to win the second special figure starting port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, The notice icon may not be displayed in an increased manner and any notice icon may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of place, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 on hold. Do not perform and do not display any notice icons.

  In addition, for example, when the electric support state is finished and one or a plurality of suspensions remain for the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, an increase display and a digest display of the notice icon may be performed according to the jackpot determination result that is executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73.

  62 to 73 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 62 to 73, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 62 to 73 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 62 to 73, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 62 to 72 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 63 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a mode of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding the character of Tono-sama are made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 62A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is the castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62D starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character displays an icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It shows how to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the performance when the Tono-sama character throws it. It should be noted that the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed in an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or impossible. In this case, it may be specified from the middle of throwing, or may be specified from the beginning. Also, an animation related to a notice icon (high expectation notice icon) with a high jackpot expectation when digested and an animation related to a notice icon with a low jackpot expectation when digested than the high expectation notice animation. The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (f), a state in which the Tono-sama character has thrown a bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “By digesting the notice icon ...”, something has been done by digesting the notice icon An explanation of what happens is given. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the bomb icon I61 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be later than the movement to. Thus, in the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where a plurality of types of explanation displays are displayed in one symbol variation display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts, the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (i). . The swordsman notice icon I62 is an icon for notifying that the swordsman reach will shift to the swordsman reach as described later. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one-to-one to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 62 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the Tono-sama character. The animation ends. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Here, the difficulty in visual recognition means that the visual recognition icon is more difficult to see than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1. In other words, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, thereby making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display part TT1 and the notice of the swordsman notice I62. May be possible. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.
The arrangement position of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be arranged in the vicinity of the tutorial display section TT1 in addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and in this way the same effect can be obtained. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 or may be the content that is completely unrelated to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be content related to the current performance, or content that is completely unrelated to the current performance. In FIG. 62 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon and is related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It is not displayed in relation to the text, but happens to be related to the contents of the explanation, but the content of the text displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched as described later. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be digested in the symbol variation display that is performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. In this example, the description has been given of the case where the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display part TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display part ST1.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (l), the first decorative design display device 208L has a decorative design of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Panda is the master of the lord”. The relationship between the Tono-sama character and the panda character is described. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the display change of the tutorial display portion TT1 is a timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display portion TT1 displays a plurality of explanations in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 62 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is completed. In other words, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from “Panda is the master of the lord” to “When the Yatsushiro general moves ...”. It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb operate.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation as shown in FIG. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. Is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (p), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging, and the expectation about whether or not the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested is expressed. By doing so, the player may be anxious to want the notice icon to be used early. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62. The effect display need not be performed. This effect display is applied to the character display portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore there is a case where attention can be paid to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon I62 of the swinging swordsman moves upward and is being digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. Thereby, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a) following FIG. 62 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display for notifying that it will develop into super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the advancement to the swordsman reach is foretold by digesting the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which produces high reliability for the big hit in this swordsman reach. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows a situation where the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 63 (c), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be out of frame after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may be out of frame with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation display is made, the UI may be out of frame after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously erased. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 63 (d), the duel scene animation continues. When the timing shown in FIG. 63 (e) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifying that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. It may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the main character, Tosama, was defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. A combination of decorative symbols is derived and fluctuation fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -The decoration display of “decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, when a notice icon (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) for reviving after stock display is stocked, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town that is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. Note that FIG. 64A to FIG. 64L are the same as FIG. 62A to FIG.

  FIG. 64 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as “decoration C”) displayed as “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed as “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration”. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. When the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance up notice icon I63 may always be stocked, or the chance up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. The notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the chance-up notice icon I63 (including an enlarged / reduced image itself), which may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the animation for obtaining a notice icon with a symbol may be anything that can display the notice icon in an identifiable manner. Further, there may be an incompatible icon such as the notice icon symbol CS and the chance up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be more or less than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of notice icon displayed when an animation (for example, throwing animation) relating to Tonosama's character is displayed as an advance notice when triggered by an animation relating to a figure (eg, an animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed when both animations are triggered. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed on two occasions, and two may be stocked on different occasions with one change, or may not be displayed. In the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in any symbol row. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “When a general Yatsushiro moves ...”.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 64 (n), a chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS, and FIG. ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and moves to the right side of the swordsman notice icon I62 and is arranged (stocked). Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance up notice icon I63 is stocked. In addition, at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon symbol 63 of the chance up is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but it may be notified by voice. Thus, in this effect example, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by the plurality of notice icons. Moreover, according to this production example, it is comprised so that a stock notice icon can be stocked. Also, in this example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked differently, and therefore the contents of the production until the stock is different are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration C-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is displayed. Is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 64 (q), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the display position. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65A following FIG. 64Q, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” stops in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It may also be noticed that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display, so that it may be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this effect example, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 still overlaps the tutorial display part TT1. When the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman notice icon I62 to make the swordsman notice icon I62 stand out. FIG. As shown, this effect display is applied to the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance up notice icon I63, and there are cases where attention can be drawn to the explanation display and the chance up notice icon I63.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that the swordsman reach has been developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on the light guide plate also overlaps with the chance up notice icon I63 that has not been digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance up notice icon I63 is displayed. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. Yes. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, depending on the position that the player sees, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate, The chance-up notice icon I63 may be easily visible.

  FIG. 65 (f) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (f), a state where the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance advance notice icon I63 is not affected by this, and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 65 (g), duel animation continues, and when the timing shown in FIG. 65 (h) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, and is expecting whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the state that the swinging-up chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward and is digested is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of Tono-sama is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first cut-in image. It has been reported that the degree of reliability for has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the chance up notice icon I63. The first cut-in image may be erased when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. May be. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed and another notice icon is stocked, the second cut-in image may be overlapped with the notice icon stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stock notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon stored. In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the performance corresponding to the notice icon is started. Alternatively, it may be a timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or may be a timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In this effect example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display part TT1 when the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed, but any display when the tutorial display part TT1 is not displayed. There is no overlap. That is, the stock notice icon has a predetermined display area and may overlap with other images at certain moments, but may not overlap with other images at certain moments. Can do. If the chance-up notice icon I63 is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 65 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It does not have to disappear.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (m), the main character, Tono-sama, defeated the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived and the fluctuation of shaking starts.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. -The decoration display of “decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the jackpot is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 66, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid to perform an effect display that conveys the displayed notice icon to the stock position. The state of going is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure chest image TR is displayed above the display screen, and there is a case where an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure chest image TR may be performed as described later. Further, in this effect example, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps out downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. There may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a3), the bomb icon I6 popping out from the treasure chest image TR is ruptured. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a4), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to inform the user that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 66 (a6) shows a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the swordsman notice icon I62 is completely transferred from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (b1) to FIG. 66 (b8), another example of a notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display part TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and “Swordsman is Tonentsu's nemesis” is displayed as an explanation display. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure chest image TR is displayed below the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure chest image TR. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 jumps upward from the inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out from the treasure box image TR is changed to the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that fact, and notifies that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked. Note that the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or may be a timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI portion displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. It may become.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing shown in FIG. 66 (b6) shows a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is resolved, and the player The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size while being overlapped with the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In this example, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5 ′), the height of the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the display position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a non-overlapping state, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is displayed in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Because the slide moves, the third decorative symbol display while visually confirming the display state of the tutorial display section TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by location 208N.

  66, in the case where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, in the effect example shown in FIG. 66, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon. May be displayed so that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transferred to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlap state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 67, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame in normal times, and shows a state in which the tutorial is displayed from below when explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 67 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in of the tutorial display section TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a4), “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display section TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display section TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 67 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative design is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or may be deleted when the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or is out of the frame. It may be deleted at the timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a7), for example, after the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (e) to (j), FIG. 67 (a8) As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from the lower right side of the display screen. The tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps the swordsman notice icon I62.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a11), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays an explanation “Explanation of notice icon ...”, but the tutorial display unit TT1 is overlapped by the swordsman notice icon I62. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame starts. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. The overlap state to TT1 is eliminated. If the display of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is out of frame, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Also in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (b1) to (b2), even when the notice icon is digested and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlap state with the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. 67 (b1) to (b2) are as described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (p) to (q), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 68 shows a state where the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the character conversation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), “Tono is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the princess Chibi character CH1. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation indicating that “gold is hotter than red”, and a description regarding the advance notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon part TT2 may overlap the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. In addition, no hold icon is displayed in the balloon part TT2 or a balloon part TT3 described later. Also, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a display area larger or smaller than the balloons TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloons TT2 and TT3 may have the same font or different fonts. The balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured not to overlap in the display area where other explanation display is performed, but may be overlapped. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a lower or higher frequency of explanation display than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 and the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may be display regions partitioned by lines, or may be display regions where either one or both are not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a2), the balloon TT2 is erased together with the Chibi princess character CH. In addition, the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon part TT2 may also be configured to be able to display across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”. In the tutorial display part TT1, “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 68 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. Also, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation indicating “the swordsman reach is hot”, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach. Note that the timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or is the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the state that the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the balloon section TT3 is displayed with an explanation “when a panda is intruded”, and an explanation regarding the notice effect is made. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative design, but may be disposed at a position where it does not overlap. Note that the timing at which the balloon TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing when the character of Tono-sama throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to easily draw attention to the player on the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3. It may be a timing before the timing, or may be a timing after the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be positioned on the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a9), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap a plurality of display parts (tutorial display part TT1 and balloon part TT3) on which explanation display is performed.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 68 (a1) to (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the production is displayed on the balloons (balloon part TT2 and balloon part TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the display mode of the balloon part TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon part TT2 is changed to red), and the character “Intense heat” is changed. In some cases, a notice display or a pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  68 (c1) to 68 (c3) show other examples of contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. A state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tonosama” to “Developed as a swordsman reach”. Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c3), a sound “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the above-described effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation about the effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 to red) and displaying the characters “Intense heat”, a notice display or a pre-read notice display may be performed in the symbol variation display. Also good.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. In FIG. 69, the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display part TT4, and the stage name display part ST2 are integrally displayed. Has been. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 69 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a2), a third hold icon (third hold icon h13 in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and, as shown in FIG. 69 (a4), a throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to (k) and described above.

  In FIG. 69 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character ruptures, the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured changes to the princess's notice icon I64 and moves to the stage name display section ST2 while being reduced in size. In the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a5), the stage name display portion ST2 is overlapped but the state where the predetermined display position (stock position) has not been reached is shown. . In this case, since the princess's notice icon I64 is not yet displayed in the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display of “castle town stage” is displayed, and at least a part of the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2. In the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 64), the explanation display is erased before it overlaps the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display is based on the trigger for obtaining the notice icon. You may comprise so that the timing which deletes may differ. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display section. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display part ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 is overlapped with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, the explanation display is not erased in the case of a gas pattern, In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be deleted when the bomb icon I61 is overlaid on the stage name display unit ST2. At the time of this darkening effect, if the UI part is not displayed, at least a part from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gusset is executed while the darkening effect is being executed Specifically, the darkening effect is produced after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started. When the darkening effect is finished and the UI unit is redisplayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display disappears from the explanation display state). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (a6), when the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed up to now is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of “STAGE” is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display part ST2, the stage name is not displayed. The scene where the notice icon is digested may be configured to overlap the execution of the darkening effect described above. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or at least a part of the already acquired notification icons (such as at least one of the plurality of notification icons, or a part of one notification icon). May be. Further, the moving means performs an effect of moving at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the moving means. Also good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed, and the stage name after the change is displayed when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed. There is no display. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 69 (a9) shows a state in which five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display section ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (description display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a9), first, the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and then the tutorial display section. At TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In this example, for example, when the notice icons are digested sequentially from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the notice icon to be digested may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 69 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 move to the left one by one to display the tutorial. The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side by one. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by, for example, instantaneous movement.

  When all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 are digested, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4, and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 are digested. In this case, the display of the stage name is resumed in the stage name display unit ST2. Note that the explanation display and the stage name display need not be resumed. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as that of the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, resumed after super-reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the same display may be resumed, or may be resumed from the display of a different part in the telop (scroll) display.

  Further, the kind of notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the kind of notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, may be shorter than the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked on the stage name display part ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is displayed in the tutorial display part. Although it is possible to stock up to three more in TT4, when the number of stocks is first stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocks is three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further added to the stage name display section ST2. Up to two stocks may be configured.

  Also, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 before the notice icon completely fits on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4. In the state), the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon is completely accommodated in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4, the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon starts to be moved upward, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 and the tutorial display section TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when digesting the notice icon. It may not be done.

  Further, in this effect example, the above-described example shown in FIG. 62 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it is needless to say that the modes shown in other drawings can be combined.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested from now on, such as a variable icon display area.

  Also, the notice icons need not be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a tooth-like manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to be filled in empty places. Good or not moving.

  In addition, each starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning port and a second special figure winning port, and so-called MAX8 machines (8 In some cases, the reservation icon display area is prepared in advance with four hold areas, and when there are four hold areas, the display area expands to five. Or you may enlarge up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  69 (b1) to FIG. 69 (b2) show a state where the stock notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Note that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are both displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward as shown in FIG. 68 (b2). In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display part ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display is provided. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. The same applies to the tutorial display section TT4. Note that the display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another example of effects according to the present embodiment step by step.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged, and in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  FIGS. 70A1 to 70A3 illustrate how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 70 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. In addition, about the display mode of this castle town stage, since it is the same as the mode shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that a UI part is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, the UI part in the space stage is displayed with a variation icon display area arranged at the lower center of the display screen, the variation icon h0 being placed on the pedestal, and a hold icon displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged vertically. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon in the castle town stage shown in FIG. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon unlike the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage. In the default display mode, for example, The white pentagon display mode, and the pre-read notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagon display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. It has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, the display position of the notice icon is different from the display position of the tutorial display area TT1, so that the tutorial display area TT1 is not overlapped by the notice icon.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 70 (a3) shows a state immediately after the transition from the other stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and the non-display state is maintained until a new explanation display is performed. Is done. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. An explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is not displayed in a certain stage (for example, the castle town stage), when a transition is made to another stage (for example, the space stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  70 (b1) to 70 (b2) show how the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and “Indicate the notice icon ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked. For example, the button icon IBT is an icon for informing in advance the number of times that an effect of operating a button during a specific effect is generated. It can be said that the reliability for the big hit is high, that is, the larger the number of stocks of the button icons IBT, the easier the big hit.

  Thus, according to this production example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that other display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 shows another production example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned Tono-sama character.

  71 (a1) to (a6) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and “Toshi-sama is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1). Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a1), a hatena notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens when digested. It may function as a notice icon. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a3), a state in which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the warning icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the Hatena notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 is difficult to view. Note that the size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the Hatena notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is deleted, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a6), what was displayed as “with the notice icon digestion ...” has been changed to “swordsman is the enemy of the lord”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. May be the previous timing, or may be a timing later than the timing when the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  71 (b1) to 71 (b3) show how the notice icons already stocked are changed by the throwing animation. 71 (b1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), and FIG. 71 (b3) is the same as FIG. 71 (a6). Therefore, description of these drawings is omitted. In the tutorial display area TT1 in FIG. 71 (b3), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 71 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display portion TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 71 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 71 (c1) to FIG. 71 (c3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. 71 (c1) is the same as FIG. 71 (b1), and FIG. 71 (c2) is the same as FIG. 71 (b2). Therefore, description of these drawings is omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 ruptures at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c2), as shown in FIG. 71 (c3), the effect image of the bombed icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 becomes the swordsman's notice. The icon changes to an icon I62 and a chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the advance notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stock advance notice icon and stocking the new advance notice icon.

  71 (d1) to (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71 (d1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 71 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character is displayed on the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (d3), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured is deleted, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the display mode changes from blue to red). )doing. Then, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  In this way, in the effect example shown in FIG. 71, at least a part of the animation at the time of obtaining the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device) The same is true for animations performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  72 (a1) to FIG. 72 (a7) show a state in which the fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by displaying the fact that a specific notice icon has been stocked. 72 (a1) to FIG. 72 (a3) are the same as FIG. 62 (h) to FIG. 62 (j), and description thereof will be omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 72 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends as shown in FIG. 72 (a4). As shown in FIG. 72 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 serving as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays “swordsman stock” indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. In other words, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 displays that fact to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who predicts that an effect with an extremely high expectation level for the big hit will be performed. Also good. Note that the timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be before the end of the throwing animation, or after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, the achievement display unit KM1 may be noticed in some cases. Note that the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed in an overlapping manner on the achievement display unit KM1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration C” as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 1-decoration C—decoration” is displayed. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 72 (a6) to (a7), a notice icon I63 indicating a chance up is displayed from the notice icon symbol CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making it difficult to see at least part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1.

  In this production example, for example, when the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the kind of the notice icon to be digested. You may make it eliminate the overlap to. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and the notice icons are digested, the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at a predetermined interval. When the predetermined number of notice icons is consumed, the overlap of the notice icon with the achievement display section KM1 may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 72 (b1) to FIG. 72 (b3), for example, examples of the operation modes of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate when developing to a super reach or a big hit are shown. It is shown.

  FIG. 72 (b1) shows a state where super reach is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a variation icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI unit is out-of-frame at the time of super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variation icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen, and the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed. The 4th symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device are hidden, there is a case where the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N adjacent to each other are integrated along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. The variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a square shape. An image with the characters “celebration” in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and the fourth symbol of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the family crest member 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward to over the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Wrapped and the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest character 224E. According to this, there is a case in which the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body are hidden.

  72 (c1) to FIG. 72 (c4), the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a certain period on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed to change the effect button 136. A state of notifying the state is shown.

  FIG. 72 (c1) shows a state in which a duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach. FIG. 72 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 63 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M at all times or at least for a certain period. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 72 (c2), the duel scene animation continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. This display notifies the player that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c3), as shown in FIG. 72 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “I will go” A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (the first button notice icon I4 or the second button notice icon I11) becomes valid, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 72 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned Hatena notice icon I66, pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68 A panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the advance notice icon I67 for holding promotion is an icon for notifying that the display form of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a display form with higher reliability for the big hit when digested. The pseudo-continuous notice icon is an icon for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye is derived as a display result of the decorative symbol when digested. In addition, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that a transition to the look-ahead zone is made upon digestion. In addition, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon that, when digested, gives an announcement that a panda will intrude and that it will be a big hit (definite).

  FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIGS. 73 (a1) to (a7) show a state in which an explanation display (for example, a display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. In addition, the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG. 73 is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman on the left side.

  FIG. 73 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis” is sequentially scrolled in from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a2), only the “swordsman is” scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a3), only the “swordsman is Tono-sama” portion is scrolled in. Yes. In these cases, since no character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognized.

  Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a4) is reached, the entire character “Swordsman is Tonen-sama's nemesis” is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of “swordsman” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a5), the “Swordsman is” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display area TT1, and the “I am the enemy of Tono-sama” part is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of “Tono-sama” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a6), the “Swordsman is Tono-sama” part is scrolled out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the “Is the enemy” part is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least the character part of “At the enemy” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display is finished. Thus, in this effect example, the character overlapped by the notice icon changes over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display is not overlapped. Note that when the scrolling of the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b7) show another display in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scroll display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which the display (for example, a notice display of “extreme heat”) is performed is shown. 73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b3) and FIG. 73 (b6) to FIG. 73 (b7) are respectively the same as FIG. 73 (a1) to FIG. 73 (a3) and FIG. 73 (a6) to FIG. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 73 (b3), as shown in FIGS. 73 (b4) to 73 (b5), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the notice. For the advance notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed to red, and the letters “Intense heat” are displayed, thereby performing the advance notice display and the pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display. The scrolling display of the explanation display is interrupted during the preview display. For example, the above-described notice display may overlap the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display ends, the scroll display of the explanation display resumes as shown in FIG. 73 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period in which the notice display is performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after progressing in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b7) is reached, the scrolling display of the explanation display ends. Note that the explanation display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, but the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  FIG. 73 (c1) to FIG. 73 (c5) are explanatory displays (for example, “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in a state where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are consumed.

  In FIG. 73 (c1), a chance-up notice icon I63 which is a notice icon scheduled to be digested first and a swordsman notice icon I62 which is a second notice icon scheduled to be digested are a chance-up notice icon I63. The swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged side by side on the right side of the tutorial display portion TT1 on the left side. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (c2), when the chance up notice icon I63 is digested, the swordsman notice icon I62 is up as shown in FIGS. 73 (c3) to (c5). The notice icon moving animation for moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed is performed. As a result, after the overlap range of the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easily visible. There is a case. That is, in this effect example, depending on the number of stocked notice icons, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display part TT1. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, the notice icon moving display in the notice icon moving animation may overlap the explanation display scroll display.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
A notice means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of notices ,
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means [for example, the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, the hold icon display area in FIG. 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.]
The on-hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol fluctuation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, in the on-hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is the first number [for example, two, etc. The second number larger than the first number [for example, 3 etc.] is digested more easily than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be executable in addition to a plurality of kinds of notices. The notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. The image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is digested, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice is likely to be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to expect the number of notices displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested, so that the game can be played so that the player does not miss the notice display. There is a case that can be made.

  Here, only the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed may be displayed as the notice icon, or other than the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed, or if the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed is not displayed. There may be.

In addition, “the notice means may provide a fake notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.] that is the same as the aspect of the notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect or the like that is a big hit]]. A viable means,
The notice means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, Is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a pseudo-announcement that leads to a loss or a reach transition effect, etc.]
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice having the same form as the notice form, or may be capable of executing anything other than the fake notice having the same form as the notice form. May be. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form, or may not execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form.

  The notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In addition, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it may be possible to execute anything other than the fake notice of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon. . The notice means may always execute a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the design variation display result may be out of sync, or after the fake notice is executed, the design change display result may be a big hit. There may be.

  In addition, after a false notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that is highly likely to display a jackpot symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holds,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than display according to the number of holds. Moreover, the hold display means may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the prefetch target to be displayed is executed. Displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is performed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon to be digested may be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, and therefore the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  It should be noted that the maximum number of displayable hold displays and the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the total displayable maximum number of hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 34 (49), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be able to execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. . In addition, the first notice may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. . In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a kind corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. [For example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. When the thousand car box notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed compared to when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be a big hit if you are
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice display. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed outside the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the kind of notice icon corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon can be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second display means always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a kind of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the number of times of displaying the notice display from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested can be expected, so that the game can be made not to let the player miss the notice display. You may be able to let

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, “the second display means may be a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is lost. Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or other than the fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. Can also be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  The second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is also possible that when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. There may be a case where when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is always out of place after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display that is highly likely to display the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, “the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are configured, or at least one of the image display means and the hold display means may not be configured.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. Also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may necessarily display a decorative symbol variation display or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holds while visually recognizing the decoration symbol variation display.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of holdings may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, notifications other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may be possible. In addition, the display according to the number of holds may be a notification that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon to be digested may be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holds differs from the displayable number of notice icons, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the notice icon display.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds. Good.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than the total of the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds in the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same. Good.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG.
One of the plural types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or digest even in normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or digest even during the execution of a special background mode for prefetching. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed, and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested when the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is not displayed, and the symbol “the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed” is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more easily displayed when the “symbol variation display with the notice display a” is performed than when the “variation display” is performed. The notice display b is a display that is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is easier to display the big hit symbol when the “symbol change display with the notice display b” is executed than when the “symbol change display with the notice display c” is executed. It may be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when the “symbol change display that the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested” is executed rather than the “symbol change display that the notice icon C is digested” is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the “symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed, the jackpot symbol is more effective than the “symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed”. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may become easy.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the second number larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number [for example, one, etc.] [ For example, 3 etc.] is configured to be a big hit if digested,
The second display means is based on the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)]. It is a display means that can display the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a pre-read notice display before the start of “design change display etc.”).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Further, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display means may include a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big win] Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.], and the hold display means Is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (9) to 20 (20), the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, during the period in which “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. A fifth number [eg 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched [for example, FIG. 19 (1) As shown in FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icon is completely digested until the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “in the period in which the symbol variation display is performed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may start to be displayed. [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is displayed during the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542” Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [e.g., the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 shown in FIG. 22 (47) or FIG. 33 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 29 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG.
One of the plural types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.]
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold, which is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)], the notice icon In some cases, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Etc.]
In some cases, the first notice icon that is displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 19 (9) to 20]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat that has started display at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (14), etc. ],
The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)”) The first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display is sometimes digested [for example, FIG. 19 ( 9) to FIG. 20 (25), the hat notice icon I6 that has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is the symbol variation display that is the object of prefetching as shown in FIG. 20 (23). Digested in, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon that is started during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display in which the display of I6 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, as the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 19 (9) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20 (25), the symbol change which is the object of prefetching is such that the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. A hat stand icon I6 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of display, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a second number [e.g., three, etc.] than when the first number [e.g., one, etc.] of the first notice icon is digested during the display of the one time symbol variation display. ] Is more likely to be a big hit if the first notice icon is digested,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10, etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [e.g., hat notice icon I6] is digested, a first notice display [e.g., pseudo shown in FIG. 21 (28) to FIG. May be displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.,
When the first notice icon [e.g. hat notice icon I6] is digested, a first fake notice table [e.g. false pseudo-relation effect etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. There is a case,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a pre-reading effect display [for example, a pre-reading mode effect that is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG.
A third notice icon [e.g., a ribbon notice icon I8] can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started. [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, For example, the background is shifted to the prefetch mode)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 19 (1), a decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the first notice icon started during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of the prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (9). The notice icon I6 of the hat that has been displayed during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, the hold that is the target of prefetching Etc. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the symbol variation display based on
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.]
A symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , A notice icon I31 for "Tono", a notice icon I32 for "Princess", a notice icon I33 for "Tsubaki", etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 41 (1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 42, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon I21 and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32), a hat When the previous notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 22 (46) to (57), when the 1,000-box notice icon I9 is digested, a strong reach effect is produced. May start, etc.]
The first combination of the displayed notice icons (for example, the combination of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 shown in FIG. 41, etc.) is a single symbol variation. By being digested in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image or the like displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 42 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the expectation that the first effect display may be displayed can be continued until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

  Also, according to this game stand, a plurality of notice icons can be displayed during the symbol variation display prior to the start of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. Display other than the effect display corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where an effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Moreover, even if it is comprised so that only the 1st effect display may be displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed several notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. In addition, the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is digested in a single symbol variation display, and a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be. Moreover, even if it is comprised so that the 1st effect display may be necessarily displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed some notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display by digesting the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons in one symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display only when the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display. The first effect display may be displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of the first number [eg, two, etc.] of the notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first effect display is performed after the first notice icon of the first combination of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons is consumed. May continue to have an expectation that it may be displayed.

“The first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a“ home ”notice icon I21, etc.] and a second notice icon [for example, a“ print ”notice icon I22, etc.]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that there may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (19), the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. During the period from when the symbol change display ends until the “house” notice icon I21 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, in the one-time symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested [for example, The effect image shown in FIG. 42 (21) is not displayed even if only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested], etc. Stand. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who can see the game.

  Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed. In the symbol fluctuation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, a display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in a single symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed, In the symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested.

  Further, only in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested.

In addition, when the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 20 or the like shown in FIG. 20] is digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 6), the display of the head-length character BC displayed in correspondence with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variation of production may be increased and the production effect may be enhanced.

  Here, only the third effect display may be displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be digested, A display other than the effect display may also be displayed. Moreover, it may be configured such that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect is displayed by digesting the third notice icon. You may be comprised so that a display may not be displayed.

  Further, the third presentation icon may be configured to be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be displayed other than digesting the third notice icon. Three effect displays may be displayed.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc. is not an icon indicating the number of the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]
Second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display that the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 46 (10) to FIG. 47 (13) digests, or FIG. 47 (16) to FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to (c5), or display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c5). Etc.] is a means capable of displaying,
The second display means displays the notification icon [for example, the notification icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to 47 (13) and the display of the notification icon shown in FIGS. 46 (5) to (9). A display of the notification icon I6 of the hat to be displayed, or a display etc. of the notification icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 49 (c6)],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 may function as a prefetch notice display],
The jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 49 (c1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c9), a notice icon is displayed during a period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there may be a case where a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the line of sight of the player who sees the display about the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means It may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may comprise only the first display means and the second display means, or may include a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only a display related to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 49 (c1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (5), a hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the display means for performing the stock effect is determined, it may be possible not to miss the stock notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Also good.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. There is a case where a notice is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to (5), a notice that the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A (Mr. Production) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since there is a possibility that a notice icon may be displayed, there is a case where the player can be noticed on the display means so that the player does not miss the notice icon display. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only the notice for displaying the notice icon is displayed, or in the first display means, the notice for displaying that the notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where other displays are also performed. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, or the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. There may be cases where this is not done.

  In addition, there may be a case in which a notice that the notice icon is displayed is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. There may be a case where a notice is given to notify the user.

In addition, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (4) and FIG. 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the range.

In addition, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon [for example, a plurality of kinds of notice icons corresponding to the type of effect shown in FIG.
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. 47 (16) to (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the long character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is the second. Displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Also good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, the on-hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
First movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 52 (12), a family crest member 224B shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31 etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 52, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon display area 285 includes two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31.]
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 52 (12) to (17)]. A viable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31 etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the movable means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the movable means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, when the fourth notice icon is digested on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. There is a case.

  Further, according to this game table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, which can enhance the effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. The first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the fourth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be always executed. If the fourth notice icon is digested, the first movable effect may not be executed.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66) and FIG. In the period from when the target symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are digested, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 or the notice icon I21 for “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable icon It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the first notice icon displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the fifth notice icon displayed. Even when the five notice icons are not digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
The first movable means is means for moving the operating means,
The first movable effect refers to the mode of the operation means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 52 (12)] to the second mode [for example, FIG. 52 (17). It is an effect that changes to a projecting position etc.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the change of the operation means is notified by the notice icon, so that the operation means may be noted.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only the operation means, or may be movable other than the operation means. Further, the first movable means may necessarily move the operating means or may not move the operating means.

In addition, it includes “second movable means [for example, a family crest member shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
Said 2nd movable means is a means which can perform the 2nd movable production [For example, the family crest fall production shown in Drawing 44 (d4-2), etc.]
The second movable effect may be executed when a sixth notice icon [for example, notice icon I21 for “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested. ing,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes abundant, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the sixth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may also be executed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. Of the displayed notice icons, When the sixth notice icon is digested, the second movable effect may not be executed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon is displayed. Of these, the second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 52 (the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, the notice icon I31 for a drink, etc.) Is not an icon indicating the number of operations for which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is suspended]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 54 (1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66), a notice icon is displayed in a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand car box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (2) to FIG. ],
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that display of the notice icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this game machine, there is a case where it is suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. In addition, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started, or other than the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestable. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started. There may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 54 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), it is a target of prefetching. During the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display is finished, the two hat announcement icons I6, the thousand box announcement icon I9 and the fan announcement icon displayed in the announcement icon display area 285 are digested. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (2) to FIG. Etc., a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by Tono-sama over the symbol change display of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and thus the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than a plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be a thing which may be. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 54 (2). ~ As shown in Fig. 5 (5), the notice that the notice icon by Tono-sama will be displayed ends before the symbol change display that is the target of prefetching is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be prefetched starts, so there is a case where it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be prefetched.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation may be configured. During the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may always be ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variation display that is displayed before is not being displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that display of at least one of the third number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 may be started. Etc.)
The third number is a number of 2 or more.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, since at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the symbol variation in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third icon There may be a case where the display may indicate other than the display of at least one of the number of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be started. There may be cases where it does not indicate that display of at least one of the cases may start.

In addition, the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. 56 (a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida production, the hat's notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started. In addition, it may be configured such that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display is surely started. There may be a case where display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 54 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57 (2), etc.]] ”) Is suspended, the display of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 57 (4) to FIG. 13 (13)] ”). May start,
A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) are displayed in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), the symbol variation display that starts after the symbol variation display that is a big hit as a prefetch target is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the symbol variation display that is displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, the display of the notice icon can be enjoyed as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design fluctuation display to be prefetched from the displayed symbol fluctuation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first prefetch notice display, or may be other than the first prefetch notice display. The notice icon may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as the first prefetch notice display.

  In addition, only the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is suspended after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol variation display may be started other than after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of one symbol variation display is started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), the pre-reading target is displayed after the display of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Until the end of the symbol variation display that is a big hit, the two hat notice icon I6, the thousand car box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, while the on-hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, the symbol variation display that is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design change display to be pre-read from the symbol change display.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. Also, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started until the second symbol variation display is terminated, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily digested, or the first symbol variation display A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from the start of display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 57 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, when the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57 (2)] is suspended, Display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 57 (2), etc.] is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started even when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. Display of the hold display may be started. In addition, when the second symbol variation display is held, the display of the second hold display may be started without fail, and when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display is displayed. It does not have to be started.

In addition, as the second pre-reading notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second pre-reading display form [for example, the pre-reading notice display form (savohani display form) shown in FIG. 57 (2)]. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode (savohani display mode) when the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is put on hold. Display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, variations of the pre-reading notice display increase and the interest may be improved.

  Here, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display form, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in display modes other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display form, and as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is the second prefetch display. It may not be displayed in a mode.

  In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variation display that is displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspended display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

  In addition, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second pending display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetch notice display [for example, preproduction mode display shown in FIGS. 58 (b2) to (b3), etc.],
The third pre-reading notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b1) to FIG. 58 (b3). Thus, the pre-reading mode effect display is started after the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the variation of the pre-reading notice display increases, the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, display may be started. In addition, the third pre-reading notice display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is put on hold, or the display is not started after the second symbol change display is put on hold. There may be cases.

In addition, the “symbol change display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol change display [for example, the symbol change that is lost based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 57 (2) ”). ")" Is suspended, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in Fig. 57 (4) to Fig. 13 (13)]". ) May start,
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may start [for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 (4) to 23 (66), the display of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching is suspended is started. By the time the symbol change display that causes a certain loss ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  In addition, only the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display is displayed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold. Only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. Display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
A game machine comprising display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69] in the display means,
When the notice icon is displayed, it is an icon displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 includes a swordsman notice icon I62. And a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Also good. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display unit, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display unit.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be a thing. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), in the state where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, No explanation is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed with the notice icon displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 69 (a7), displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be always resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 66, etc.]
The third display means displays the display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 66 (a2) to (a4) and the swordsman notices. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, and can display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69],
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed in the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the stage name display section ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. 2 pseudo-announce notice icons I65 are displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area in the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area without fail, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be one in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and not displayed, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the third display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned by a line in a square shape, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, princess notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a7), The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.], wherein the display means includes a notice icon [eg, 18 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area [for example, tutorial display section TT4, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in the hold icon [for example, hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69]. A display area different from a display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69] in the display means when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 has a chance to increase with the swordsman notice icon I62. The notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the first display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. The first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed. In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first icon is not displayed. No display other than the display may be displayed. In addition, the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and the first icon is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. A display may be displayed.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 69 (a9), displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are digested, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be cases. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  Further, for example, when the first display is an explanation of the first character, a tenth display that is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  The notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

“One of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of“ Gold is hotter than red ”in the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), (A6), a character display of “swordsman reach is hot” in the balloon part TT2, a character display of “when panda intrudes” in the balloon part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 shown in FIG. 68 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the second display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. Further, the third display may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

In addition, “the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4, the character display of “swordsman reach is hot” is displayed on the balloon display part TT2, and “when panda intrudes” is displayed on the balloon display part TT3. Text display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if it is in the state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be performed in the second display area. In addition, a notice display and an explanation display may be alternatively displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 illustrated in FIG. 69],
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  The fourth display may be capable of being displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Also good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area in the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. In addition, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be always displayed in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state where the previous notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may be a state where the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and not displayed, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 66, etc.]
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. Is a means that can be displayed, etc.,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or can display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display linked with the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned by a line in a square shape, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may also be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a9) (the princess notice icon I64, the pseudo-announce notice icon I65, The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  Note that there may be a case where the number of holdings and the number of notice icons coincide.

  Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 to FIG. 143, other game machines to which the present invention can be applied (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines 100 and spinning game machines such as slot machines) will be described in detail. To do. 74 to 143 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 74 to 143 in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 143, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106 as a door body, and a door with a ball storage tray. 108, the launcher 110, and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, an effect button 136 as an example of operation means for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 76) by the player's operation, and an effect button 36, a chance button lamp 138 for emitting the effect button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the player's balance and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 is provided with a lower pan full detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 as an example of an operation means is also provided, and the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other so that the player can operate with one hand. In the present embodiment, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a first operation means, and the effect button 136 may be referred to as a second operation means.

  Here, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 shows operation key unit 137 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the operation key unit 137 includes six buttons, that is, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, and a cancel button 137f. Each of these buttons is smaller than the production button 136, that is, the operation area is small. In other words, it can be said that the effect button 136 is larger in size than the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the enter button 137e, and the cancel button 137f.

  The effect button 136 includes an operable position (first position) protruding from the top surface of the door 108 with a ball storage tray and a door with a ball storage tray by an effect button drive motor 434 (see FIG. 77) as an example of a drive unit. It is possible to displace between the operation impossible position (second position) that enters the inside from the upper surface of 108. The effect button 136 can be pressed by the player at the operable position, and cannot be pressed by the player at the inoperable position. The effect button 136 may be configured to vibrate when operated.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 74, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  75 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 74 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 77) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 77) that performs control processing relating to the above, and a power supply control section 660 (see FIG. 77) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines. In addition, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 operates the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 to produce effects, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). Here, the term “hold” means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery process) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). When winning, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 76 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is disposed on the back side of the game board 200, and can be moved in the vertical direction by a family crest motor (not shown). The effect movable body 225 can be displaced between a position retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advance position). Yes.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 74, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 76 correspond to the effect means. The device 208 corresponds to an example of display means or decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are: The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means. Each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 includes a plurality of boards (for example, a plurality of control boards, one or more relay boards, and one or more control boards). It may be constituted by. Further, when the combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is regarded as sub-control means, in the pachinko machine 100 described here, the main control unit 300 and sub-control means (first sub-control) Unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) are provided on separate boards, and the boards are directly connected by electric signal lines, but the electric signals between these boards are further connected by another relay board. The transmission / reception may be relayed.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing Yes. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address, and when referred to as a table in the following description, a condition for determining which address in the ROM 306 is designated is displayed in a table format. May refer to a summary. The same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). Lower body full sensor for detecting that the main body opening sensor, front frame door sensor, door sensor with ball storage tray, and lower tray 128 shown in FIG. A random number generation circuit that receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and compares an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage. 318, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a general-purpose display device Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 10 and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high-accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) Is connected to a drive circuit 330 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  The main control unit 300 is a game control unit that performs game control, and includes a success / failure determination unit, a start information prefetching unit, and a prior determination unit, which will be described later.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined prize opening such as a general prize opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, a variable winning opening 234 or the like is won. And a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 may be provided in the power management unit 660.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an input / output interface for transmitting / receiving commands to / from the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication, the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 is the main control unit. A signal corresponding to a command can be transmitted to 300. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. In addition, information communication between the main control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 may be configured as one-way communication so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect button 136 shown in FIG. 74, and an operation key unit. The basic circuit 402 receives detection signals from a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons constituting the button 137 and an effect button initial position sensor 427 as detection means for detecting that the effect button 136 is located at the initial position. Sensor circuit 428 for output, upper arm motor and forearm motor for driving the effect movable body 224, drive circuit 430 for controlling the family crest motor for driving the effect movable body 225, and effect button drive for driving the effect button 136 A drive circuit 432 for controlling the motor 434 is connected. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is set to the above-described operable position, but is not limited thereto, and can be set to an appropriate position. For example, the initial position is set to the above-described inoperable position. You may make it do.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300 that is a game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device The effect means such as 208 is controlled.

  Thus, the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 are functioning as an example of production control means.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 75 mainly based on signals such as commands transmitted from the main control unit 300, and awards based on control signals output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. The payout control unit 600 may be connected to a frame sensor (not shown). The frame sensor detects when the front frame door 106 and / or the main body 104 is open, and outputs an open signal. Here, the payout control unit 600 may output door opening information to the main control unit 300 when an opening signal from the frame sensor is input.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. 74, or the ball feed for feeding the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 78A to 78D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start-up sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been shot. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 78 (a), nine types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 78 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are illuminated.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 78A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 78 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 78 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 78 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when 15R-RUB, 8R-RUB and 4R-RUB are notified, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 78 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 78 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long press automatic continuous hitting function for performing a pseudo continuous hitting operation by a long pressing operation of the effect button 136. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer, and the repeated operation is an effect button 136. This is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In the present embodiment, in the state in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, an interval of 100 ms) is performed in a pseudo manner while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) with the effect button 136, the long press auto-strike function is performed by the effect button 136 in order to appropriately perform the single operation with the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electric support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 79 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 75 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms). The main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 77 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. 77. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 77 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information in bit 7 (indicating that data is set when on), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 78 (c)) or the lost symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 78 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability variation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability variation flag is also on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  After fetching the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the reserved figure number 2 in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  Further, in the above rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are stored as command data. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. that are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, the interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 82A to 82C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is displayed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Also, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 81, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 82A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure 1 variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 82 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (disconnection) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Disconnection) is stored.

  FIG. 82B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 82 (b), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 82B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is expressed as “none”.

  FIG. 82 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, FIG. 83 is referred to regarding the success / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the success / failure determination high probability table, and FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the success / failure determination low probability table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure is in a high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination shown in FIG. 2, if the special figure high probability state is set, the special determination low probability state shown in FIG. In that case, refer to the low probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 83C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of order, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 83 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 84A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 84B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 (b), based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 85A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 85A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 according to the detection result is the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Process to change to. In the chance button control process according to the present embodiment, if there is a command for operating the effect button 136 in the effect data read in step S409 or the updated effect data, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. To do.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S417 following step S415, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when the instruction data to the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 is included in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 430.

  In step S419 following step S417, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 85B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 85C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 86A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 in FIG. 86A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208 or effect data by the shielding device 246) corresponding to this command is read from a ROM (not shown). Processing is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

  In step S511 subsequent to step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP (not shown) in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the VDP (details will be described later).

  In step S513 subsequent to step S511, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to a drive circuit (not shown) that drives the shielding device 246.

  In step S515 subsequent to step S513, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when the effect requested by the command of the first sub-control unit 400 is started or ended, a setting is made to output a control command for notifying the first sub-control unit 400 to that effect. Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 86B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 86 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, transmission of a control command to the first sub-control unit 400 set in the information transmission process (step S515) of the second sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 86D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM (not shown). As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the VDP attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP transfers image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM in step S551, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP. The VDP performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the VDP to start drawing an image. The VDP starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  87 is an example of a table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 87A is an example of a box data table, and FIG. 87B is an example of a part data table. .

  The first sub-control unit 400 stores the box data shown in FIG. 5A in the box of the RAM 408 at the timing of each effect execution, such as when the change starts, when the change is held, when the notice effect is generated, when the reach effect is generated, or when the button effect is generated. Set in the data setting area. The box data is part data (parts A to H as an example here) composed of information such as a liquid crystal command and sound, light emission, and an accessory (movable body) executed in response to an effect based on the liquid crystal command. Etc. The liquid crystal command is a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an effect display corresponding to each at the start of fluctuation, change on hold, notice effect, reach effect, button effect, etc. 101, 102, 201-203, etc.).

  Further, the liquid crystal command is in accordance with the operation of the corresponding accessory M (production movable bodies 246, 224, 225) at the time of start of fluctuation, change of hold, notice effect, reach effect, button effect, etc. For example, a command for box data such as No. 255.

  Specifically, in this example, no. The box data of 1 includes a liquid crystal command for starting a special figure change, a part A (data for storing a bumpy accessory), and a part B (data for storing a shutter). No. The box data 101 includes a liquid crystal command for displaying a saloon background and part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the saloon background). The box data 201 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 01 and part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01 (display of characters (殿) and “?”)). The box data 202 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 02, and parts E and F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02 (character (princess) and character display of “How are you?”)). , No. The box data 203 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 03, and parts E and G (production data corresponding to the conversation notice 03 (character (princess) and character display!)!) No. The box data of 255 includes a liquid crystal command for moving up and down the forceful combination and a part H (data for up and down movement of the forceful combination).

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the part data includes the movable mode of the actors (production movable bodies 246, 224, 225, etc.) executed corresponding to each production, the output sound (sound) from the speaker 120, This is information on the light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418 and the like).

  That is, each part data is composed of a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, and an accessory action layer having shutter device data and accessory (movable body) device data. Here, a plurality of (two) sound layers, ramp layers, and accessory action layers are provided, and the higher the number of each layer, the higher the priority. Each part data may have one layer number and may have one device data number (or type).

  More specifically, in this example, the part A (data for storing the bicep feature is returned) to the initial position of the feature (effect movable body 224) that is bounced on the feature action layer 1 (bumpy action layer). Contains device data. Part B (data for storing the shutter) includes device data for returning the shutter accessory (production movable body (shielding means) 246) to the initial position in the accessory operation layer 2 (shutter accessory operation layer). Yes.

  Part C (production data corresponding to the display of the salon background) includes sound device data which is BGM for the salon background in the sound layer 1 and lamp device data of the light emission pattern for the salon background in the lamp layer 1. Yes.

  In addition, the part E (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 01) includes the sound device data of the speech (such as “n?”) Generated by the character (dono) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2, and the lamp layer 2 It contains the lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice.

  In addition, the part F (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 02) includes the sound device data of the line ("Genki?") From the character (princess) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2 and the notice in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to is included.

  In addition, the part G (the production data corresponding to the conversation notice 03) is stored in the sound layer 2 in the sound device data of the line ("Gekiatsu!") Uttered by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice, and in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice is included.

  Part H (data for up and down movement of the bicep feature) includes lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding to the up and down movement of the bicep on the lamp layer 2 and a combination action layer 1 (bicep feature movement layer). ) Includes device data for moving up and down the accessory (production movable body 224).

  Although not shown here, the storage position (position) of each part data is set in each box data. The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408. In the box data 201, the start address (for example, address 1001) of the position 0001 is set as the storage position of the part E. For example, for example, No. In the box data 203, the start address (eg, address 1001) of position 0001 is set as the storage position of part E, and the start address (eg, address 1002) of position 0002 is set as the storage position of part G. ing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the box data described above (for each effect) at the timing of execution of each effect, and transmits a liquid crystal command to the second sub-control unit 500. Each box data is set together when the first sub control unit 400 sets a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. At this time, the RAM 408 stores parts data at addresses (part data setting areas) corresponding to a plurality of positions. Note that parts data may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 executes control for effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command, and returns a command to the first sub-control unit 400. The return command includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command sets the corresponding position in the RAM 408 when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. In the case where the part data is stored, the control data of the sound of the sound layer, the light emission mode of the lamp layer, and the movable mode of the accessory operation layer of the part data is stored in each device or as necessary. It transmits to the sub-control unit 500 and performs an effect corresponding to the effect display.

  FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of command transmission in effect control according to the present embodiment, and is an example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on a liquid crystal command.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85, and performs each effect according to the result. A control command is transmitted to 500.

  For example, when performing the presentation of the conversation notice 01, the first sub-control unit 400 gives the second sub-control unit 500 the No. shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command of box data 201 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image of the character (donor) and the character (“?”).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, No. Based on the position set in the box data 201, the part data is stored at the corresponding address in the RAM 408. That is, in this example, no. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data 201, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the head address (1). As a result, in the area starting at address 1001 of the RAM 408, sound device data of a speech (for example, “n?” Etc.) emitted by the character (donor) corresponding to the conversation notice 01 and the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice Are stored.

  From the first sub-control unit 400, No. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 201, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the effect of the conversation notice 01 (the character (donor) image and the character ("?") Characters (conversation notice 01). The second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 (2). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. The control data is set (3). In this example, since the return command includes information on position 0001, various device data (sound, lamp) corresponding to part E stored in position 0001 (area starting from address 1001) of RAM 408 are stored. L light emission mode) data is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, and the effect is executed (4). In addition, the presentation by the speaker 120 and the lamp L is actually after receiving a command from the main control unit 300, so a time lag occurs.

  FIG. 89 shows another example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command.

  For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect of the conversation notice 03, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the No. shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command of box data 203 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display a character (dono) image, a character (“?”) Character, and a character (princess) image, A command for instructing the display of the characters of the dialogue (“Gekiatsu!”) Is included.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, No. Based on the position set in the box data 203, the part data is stored at the corresponding address in the RAM 408. That is, in this example, no. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data 203, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 starting at address 1001, for example, No. Based on the position 0002 set in the box data 203, the part G is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1002 as the head address (1). As a result, the sound device data of the line (for example, “n?” Etc.) emitted by the character (dono) and the lamp device data of the corresponding light emission pattern are stored in the area starting at address 1001 of the RAM 408. In the area starting at address 1002 in the RAM 408, sound device data of a line ("Gekiatsu!") From a character (princess) and lamp device data of a corresponding light emission pattern are stored.

  From the first sub-control unit 400, No. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 203, the second sub-control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 03 (the character (dono) image and the character (“?”)) On the decorative symbol display device 208 (conversation notice 03a). Display of the image of the character (princess) and the text of the dialogue (“Gekiatsu!”) (Display control of display of the conversation notice 03b)) is executed. Thereafter, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a to the first sub control unit 400 (2), and transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b (3). . In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a includes the position 0001 information in the return command. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 starts position 0001 (address 1001 at the head of the RAM 408). Various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part E stored in the area (address area) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, to execute the effect (4) . In addition, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b includes the position 0002 information in the return command, so the position 0002 (address 1002 address) of the RAM 408 is included. The data of various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part G stored in the area having the head address as the first address is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, to execute the effect ( 5).

  In this way, when one liquid crystal command is a command for instructing execution of a plurality of effect displays (display of conversation notice 03a and conversation notice 03b), and part data (parts E and G) are respectively set, The first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command corresponding to the display control for performing each display from the liquid crystal command, and uses the speaker 120 and the lamp L based on the part data (parts E and G) corresponding to each return command. Perform the production.

  Next, the production system operation process will be described. FIG. 90A is a flowchart of the rendering operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This effect system operation process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 85 (a).

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S601). That is, a process of clearing (port clearing) signals input from the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed. Subsequently, the CPU 404 clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S603).

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes a chance button operation state determination process (step S605).

  Here, the chance button operation state determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as a chance button is operated (step S701). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated by detecting the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated (step S701: Yes), the operation state of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 is updated to the input state (step S703).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the previous operation state of the effect button 136 is OFF and the current operation state of the effect button 136 is ON.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S705: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S707), and then ends this process. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the current operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation (step S705: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S707.

  If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated in step S701 (step S701: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the long press operation has ended (step S709). If the CPU 404 determines that the long press operation has ended (step S709: Yes), a box data table related to release of the long press is set (step S711). As a result, a liquid crystal command indicating that the long press is released is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, whereby the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, for example, a chance button indicating an effect button 136. An effect (effect) display may be performed to the effect that the long press has been canceled for the image. It should be noted that the effect display of the long press release in the long press effect and the effect display of the long press release during the long press automatic continuous hit may be different or the same. Furthermore, according to the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, according to the part data corresponding to the set box data table, the sound effect output by the speaker 120 and various lamps 418 according to the effect display of the long press release. Blinking may be performed to enhance the production effect.

  If the CPU 404 does not determine in step S709 that the long press operation has ended (step S709: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S711.

  Returning to FIG. 90A, after executing the chance button operation state determination process, the CPU 404 determines a determination button operation state determination process (step S607), a left button operation state determination process (step S609), and a right button operation state determination. Processing (step S611), up button operation state determination processing (step S613), and down button operation state determination processing (step S615) are sequentially executed. The contents of the determination button operation state determination process, the left button operation state determination process, the right button operation state determination process, the upper button operation state determination process, and the lower button operation state determination process are the same as the chance button operation state determination described above. Since it is the same as the processing, detailed description is omitted.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes various button operation related processes (step S617), and then ends this process.

  Next, various button operation-related processes executed in the production system operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 is a flowchart of various button operation-related processes executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the various button operation-related processes shown in FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S801). When the initial operation flag is not ON (step S801: No), the CPU 404 ends this process. However, when the initial operation flag is ON (step S801: Yes), the various buttons (the effect button 136, the operation key). Assuming that the pressing operation of the unit 137) is performed, the power saving state during the customer waiting demonstration is canceled (step S803). The power saving state is configured to shift when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses without a symbol variation display or various button pressing operations after a standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, for example. Specifically, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 100 is reduced by turning off the various lamps 418 or reducing the brightness, or reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the power saving state may not be entered. The power-saving state is released when one of the various buttons is operated, but the power-saving state can be released even when two or more buttons are operated simultaneously. Alternatively, the power saving state may not be canceled when two or more buttons are operated simultaneously. Further, the power saving state may be canceled only when only one button is operated for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated alone (step S805). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: Yes), the button 404 is executed (step S807), and the process is terminated. Details of the button pressing process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S809). If the CPU 404 determines that the enter button 137e is operated alone (step S809: Yes), it executes a button press-down process to be described later (step S811), and then executes the enter button operation setting display process. (Step S813), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process at the time of operating the enter button will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S809: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815). When the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is being operated alone (step S815: Yes), it executes a button pressing process (to be described later) (step S817), and then executes a right button operation setting display process. (Step S819), this process is terminated. Details of the right button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821). If the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is being operated alone (step S821: Yes), it executes a button press process (to be described later) (step S823), and then executes a left button operation setting display process. (Step S825), the process ends. The detailed contents of the left button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827). If the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S829), and then executes an upper button operating setting display process. (Step S831), this process ends. The detailed contents of the upper button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the lower button 137b is operated alone as shown in FIG. Step S833). When the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the button press processing described later (step S835), and then executes the down button operation setting display processing. (Step S837), this process ends. The detailed contents of the down button operation setting display process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: No), the CPU 404 determines whether both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839). . If the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are being operated (step S839: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S841), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839: No), the CPU 404 determines whether both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. (Step S843). If it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: Yes), the CPU 404 executes a button pressing process described later (step S845), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: No), the CPU 404 determines whether all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. Is determined (step S847). If the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are being operated (step S847: Yes), it executes a button pressing process described later (step S849), and then performs this process. Exit. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S847: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S849. .

  Next, button pressing processing executed in various button operation related processing and various button long press operation related processing described later will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a button pressing process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not an effect receiving an operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is being executed (step S901). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect during operation acceptance is being executed (step S901: No), the CPU 404 ends this process, and if it determines that the effect during operation acceptance is being executed (step S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903). The effect determined here is not limited to the effect that actually presses the button. For example, the effect that prompts the button to be pressed is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, When there is an operation of an effect button 136 or the like, an effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button effect) is executed is also included.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the operation process once (step S905). . Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed. For example, when an effect requesting a single operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for a single operation of the button on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is comprised so that it may determine. Detailed contents of the one-time operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for a single operation of the button (step S903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly hitting the button. (Step S907). The effect determined here is not limited to the effect that actually prompts the button to be repeatedly hit. For example, the effect that prompts the button to be hit repeatedly is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, An effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button continuous hit effect) is executed when the repeat operation of the effect button 136 or the like is performed is also included.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated button hits (step S907: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the hitting operation process (step S909). Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated hitting of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed. When an effect requesting repeated operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, it is determined that the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly pressing the button on condition that the effect button 136 is operated once. It is configured as follows. The detailed contents of the continuous hit operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect that is being executed is not an effect for repeatedly hitting a button (step S907: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect that is being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button ( Step S911). The effect determined here is not limited to an effect that actually prompts the user to press and hold the button. For example, an effect that prompts the user to press and hold the button is not performed, but a predetermined button ( For example, when a long press operation of an effect button 136 or the like is performed, an effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button long press effect) is executed is also included.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the long-press operation process (step S913). Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is an effect for long press of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed, For example, when an effect requiring a long press operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is comprised so that it may determine. Details of the long press operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S917 after executing the other button operation processing (step S915). . The detailed contents of the other button operation processing will be described later.

  In step S917, the CPU 404 transmits, to the second sub-control unit 500, a liquid crystal command corresponding to the box set in the one-time operation process, continuous hit operation process, long press operation process, or other button operation process, as described later. After (step S917), this process is terminated.

  Next, the single operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of a one-time operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the one-time operation process.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect of a single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: Yes), the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing the effect that the chance button has been operated. (Step S1003) After turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (Step S1005), the processing of Step S1031 shown in FIG. 95 is executed. In this process, when other buttons are simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 is treated as invalid, but treated as valid. It may be.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: No), the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. It is determined whether or not (step S1007). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1009). . For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the right button 137d is operated, the right button 137d is set. When the right button operation box for executing the effect of the operation is set and both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are both operated. A button operation box for executing the production is set. In this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, when other buttons (for example, the upper button 137a) are operated simultaneously, the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d itself is invalid. However, it may be handled as effective. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In this case, any one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. Even if the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011). If the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1013), the step shown in FIG. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1011: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1013. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON and the button operation flag of the right button 137d is OFF. Alternatively, the two button operation flags may be turned on to execute processing in step S1033 described later.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1007 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: No), the effect being executed is the effect button 136 and the left button. It is determined whether or not the simultaneous operation of 137c is performed (step S1015). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1017). . For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect indicating that the operation has been performed is set and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. A button operation box for executing the production is set. In this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the left button 137c, when other buttons (for example, the lower button 137b) are operated at the same time, the operations of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are invalid. However, it may be handled as effective. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. In this case, any one of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is operated. Even if the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019). If the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1021), the step shown in FIG. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are not operated (step S1019: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1021. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the button operation flag of the left button 137c is OFF. Alternatively, the two button operation flags may be turned on to execute processing in step S1033 described later.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1015 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: No), as shown in FIG. Is determined to be a simultaneous operation effect of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set. (Step S1025). For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set. When the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect that the operation is performed is set and the right button 137d is operated, the right button operation box for executing the effect that the right button 137d is operated is displayed. Set. Further, when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated is set, and the effect button 136 is set. When both the right button 137d and the right button 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing the effect that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated is set, and the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and When all of the right buttons 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing an effect that all of the effect buttons 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated is set. In this process, when other buttons (for example, the enter button button 137e) are simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d, the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. In addition, the operation of the right button 137d is handled as invalid, but it may be handled as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. In this case, the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are performed. Even if any one or two of the buttons are operated, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is operated when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. Is configured to be set.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d have been operated (step S1027). If the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S1027: Yes), the CPU 404 sets the button operation flag in the RAM 408 to ON (step S1029), and then step S1031. Execute the process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1027: No), the process of step S1031 is performed without executing the process of step S1029. Run. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned ON, and the button operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d is performed. For example, the processing in step S1033 described later may be executed when the three button operation flags are turned on, for example, by leaving the flag off.

  In step S1031, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S1031). If the CPU 404 determines that the button operation flag is ON (step S1031: Yes), it executes an operation valid period end process (step S1033), and then ends this process. Specifically, the CPU 404 performs processing for ending the operation effective period even before the operation effective period ends, and then sets a box for ending the effect of accepting the button operation. Based on the set box, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command for ending acceptance of the button operation to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, in the second sub control unit 500, after displaying that the acceptance of the button operation is finished, a return command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In addition, when the reception of the button operation is continued until the operation effective period ends, the process for ending the operation effective period may not be performed.

  Next, the continuous hitting operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the continuous hitting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for continuous hitting by the effect button 136 (step S1101). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for repeated hits by the effect button 136 (step S1101: No), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for repeated hits by the effect button 136 (step 1101: Yes), the CPU 404 performs lottery effect lottery and sets the result (step S1103). Specifically, for example, whether or not to increase the continuous hitting meter displayed in the directing effect for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 136, and in the case of increasing the increase, the increase amount is determined by lottery. Set the box according to the result. Then, a liquid crystal command corresponding to the increasing amount of the continuous hitting meter is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an increase display of the repeated hitting meter in a manner corresponding to the liquid crystal command (0th embodiment) ).

  Here, the example applicable about the aspect of lottery effect lottery is demonstrated.

(First form)
The comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period may be compared with the interval at which the player operates the button to determine whether the operation is valid or invalid. For example, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.5 seconds, and finally the effect button 136 is operated. Until 0.5 seconds elapse, it is determined that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and it is determined to be effective when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed after 0.5 seconds have elapsed. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.3 seconds, and until 0.3 seconds have passed since the last time the effect button 136 was operated, Even if the button 136 is operated, it is determined to be invalid, and it is determined to be valid when the production button 136 is operated after 0.3 seconds have elapsed. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the comparison time C is set to 0.1 second, and the effect button 136 is not operated until 0.1 seconds have passed since the last time the effect button 136 was operated. Even if there is an operation, it is determined to be invalid, and it is determined to be valid if the effect button 136 is operated after 0.1 seconds have elapsed.

(Second form)
In addition, the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation effective period until the first player operation is performed is compared with the interval at which the player operates the effect button 136. The invalidity may be determined. For example, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and at other timings. Disable operation. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is validated at intervals of 0.3 seconds from the initial operation, and the operations at other timings are invalidated. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the operation of the effect button 136 is validated at intervals of 0.1 seconds from the initial operation, and the operations at other timings are invalidated.

(Third form)
In addition, in the effect lottery of the operation effect that can perform the continuous hit operation or the long press automatic continuous hit operation (continuous hit effect lottery), the progress pattern of the effect of the continuous hit effect is larger than the progress pattern of the effect of the long press automatic hit ( For example, while the amount of increase in the continuous hitting meter reaches 70% of the entire meter with 5 operations in continuous hitting operation, it does not increase to 70% of the entire meter unless the liquid crystal command is sent 7 times in the long press automatic hitting. Or the like, or vice versa.

(4th form)
Further, the increase amount due to the continuous hitting operation and the long press automatic continuous hitting operation changes with the passage of the operation effective period (for example, the increase amount increases / decreases as the operation effective period elapses). May be.

(5th form)
Further, the remaining after the end of the determination period in the operation effective period, depending on the number of times that the effect button 136 is operated during a predetermined determination period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the operation effective period (for example, 10 seconds) of the continuous hit effect It may be configured to select a lottery table that determines whether or not to execute an effect according to an operation in a period (for example, 8 seconds), and perform an effect execution lottery based on the selected lottery table. When winning by lottery, an effect according to the operation is executed, and when not winning, an effect according to the operation may not be performed. More specifically, for example, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is five or more, a low probability lottery table with a low probability of winning in the effect execution lottery is set, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the determination period is set. If the number of times is less than 5, setting a high-probability lottery table with a high probability of winning in the production execution lottery may make it possible to fully enjoy the production contents even for players who are not good at continuous hitting operations. . On the other hand, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is 5 or more, a high probability lottery table is set. If the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is less than 5, the low probability lottery table is set. Thus, there may be a case where a player who has actively performed a continuous hitting operation can be more entertained. In the determination period, it may be determined by lottery whether or not an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. In this case, the lottery table referenced in the predetermined period may be the same as or different from any of the lottery tables referenced in the remaining period. Further, effects may be performed according to all operations. In this case, in the production according to the operation performed in the determination period, for example, the production can be performed until the meter reaches a threshold value (for example, the meter can be increased to a certain value). Also good. Here, the lottery table described above is a table for lottery of whether or not the performance can be performed. However, the lottery table may be configured to determine the amount of change in the performance by lottery.

(Sixth form)
Further, in an effect that operates one or a plurality of buttons with good timing (sometimes referred to as “timing operation effect”) in the operation effective period, an effect period (may be an operation effective period, for example, 15 seconds). The remaining period (for example, the number of times the button is operated in a timely manner during the predetermined determination period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start (the number of times the button is operated during the period in which the operation timing of the corresponding button is determined to be good) The operation valid period of the timing operation effect in 10 seconds may be determined. For example, when the number of button operations with good timing during the determination period is 3 or more, the period during which the operation timing of the corresponding button is determined to be good is the first determination period, and the timing is good during the determination period If the number of button operations is less than 3 and the second judgment period is the period during which the appropriate button operation timing is judged to be good, the second judgment period is more than the first judgment period. By setting a long time, there may be a case where the content of the performance can be fully enjoyed even by a player who is not good at timing operations. On the other hand, by setting the first determination period longer than the second determination period, there are cases where a player who is good at timing operations can be more entertained. Further, the period during which the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is determined to be good may be the same as or different from either the first determination period or the second determination period. Here, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set longer than the first determination period and the second determination period, the player can practice the timing operation in the determination period. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for a player to participate in an operation effect. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set shorter than both the first determination period and the second determination period, the operation becomes easier as the timing operation effect progresses, so the timing operation is gradually increased. You may be able to feel that you have improved. Further, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set between the first determination period and the second determination period, the timing operation effect can be determined according to the skill of the player, May be able to satisfy both players who are not good at and players who are good at timing operations.

  In the present embodiment, the present invention may be applied only to any one of the 0th to 6th forms, and a plurality of types of effects for continuous hitting are prepared, and the mode is implemented according to the type of effects for consecutive hitting. May be different.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the effect button (chance button) 136 has been operated (step S1105). Then, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 136 is an initial operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1107). That is, it is determined whether or not the production button 136 has been started.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1107: Yes), after setting the time T1 until the next automatic liquid crystal command transmission is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 ( In step S1109), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is set to 500 ms, for example, but can be set to an arbitrary time. As a result, when the long press for the time T1 is performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed without pressing the button again. Yes.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, if it is determined that the long press automatic continuous hitting is being performed (step S1107: No), then the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted. After setting the time T2 to be set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1111), this process is terminated. The time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is 100 ms in this embodiment, for example, but can be set to an arbitrary time. As a result, when the long press is continuously maintained and the time T2 elapses during execution of the effect for continuous hitting, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed without pressing the button again. It has become.

  The continuous hit operation processing in this embodiment is executed only for the continuous hit operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button (up button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, determination) of the operation key unit 137 is determined. The continuous hitting operation process may be executed for the button 137e).

  Next, the long press operation process executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of a long press operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201). If the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step 1201: Yes), the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the production button 136 has been started.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1203: Yes), the CPU 404 sets a time T3 until a long press liquid crystal command is transmitted in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1205). ), This process is terminated. The time T3 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted is, for example, 100 ms in this embodiment, but can be set to an arbitrary time. Thereby, during the execution of the effect for long press, the effect can be performed as if the long press of the effect button 136 is started by performing the long press for the time T3.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, when it is determined that the effect button 136 is being pressed (step S1203: No), the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated. A chance button operation box for executing the effect is set (step S1207). Then, after setting the time T4 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted to a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1209), the process is terminated. The time T4 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted is set to, for example, 231 ms in this embodiment, but can be set to an arbitrary time. Thus, during the execution of the effect for long press, when the long press is continued and time T4 has elapsed, it is possible to perform an effect in which the long press of the effect button 136 is maintained. The time T4 set in step S1209 is configured to be set to the same time (231 ms) every time in the present embodiment, but the time set may be changed every time it is set.

  The long press operation processing in this embodiment is executed for the long press operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button of the operation key unit 137 (up button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, You may make it perform a long press operation process about the determination button 137e).

  Next, other button operation processes executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of other button operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is an operation of the enter button 137e of the operation key unit 137 (step S1301). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is an operation of the determination button 137e (step S1301: Yes), after setting the determination button pressing box for executing the effect that the determination button 137e has been operated (step S1303), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not an operation of the determination button 137e (step S1301: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the right button 137d (step S1305). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: Yes), after setting the right button pressing box for executing the effect that the right button 137d is operated (step S1307), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309: Yes), after setting the left button pressing box for executing the effect that the left button 137c has been operated (step S1311), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the operation is not the operation of the left button 137c (step S1309: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313). If the CPU 404 determines that the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: Yes), after setting the upper button pressing box for executing the effect that the upper button 137a has been operated (step S1315), This process ends. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation is not the operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: No), it is determined that the operation is the operation of the lower button 137b, and the lower button is pressed to execute the effect that the lower button 137c is operated. After setting the box (step S1317), this process ends.

  Next, a determination button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the setting display process at the time of determination button operation executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S1401). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is from when the power is turned on until the display during return ends. If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1401: No), this process ends. In the present embodiment, a volume setting screen and a brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are not displayed during the period from when the power is turned on until the display during restoration ends. Note that the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed and the volume setting and the brightness setting may be performed during the period from when the power is turned on until the display during restoration ends.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related processing is not being executed (step S1401: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S1403). That is, the CPU 404 does not display the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen as shown in FIG. 115 (e) in the standby state where the symbol variation display is not performed, during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, or the like. It is determined whether or not it is in a state. When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is not displayed (step S1403: Yes), the CPU 404 ends the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting display is displayed (step S1403: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 clearly or suggests to the player that the volume and brightness can be set by operating the operation key unit 137 during the customer waiting demonstration displayed in the standby state. It is determined whether an icon is displayed. Even when such an icon is not displayed, the processing in step S1405 is not necessary if the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen is displayed if there is a predetermined operation. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405: Yes), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1405: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a brightness setting screen for displaying the current brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the various lamps 418 and the set brightness is displayed. In the present embodiment, the brightness setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b. Note that when the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen described later are displayed at the same time, the type of setting screen to be displayed may not be divided depending on the type of button. This brightness setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is (step S1409), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the brightness setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time as it is.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1407: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume setting screen for displaying the current volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the set volume is displayed. In the present embodiment, the volume setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. This volume setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is (step S1413), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the volume setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time as it is.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1411: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1415). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume setting screen or a luminance setting screen displayed during the symbol variation display is displayed. If the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1415: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command to hide the setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Later (step S1417), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is not displayed (step S1415: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1417.

  Next, right button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of right button operation setting display processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The left button operation setting display process executed in the various button operation related processes is the same as the right button operation setting display process, and therefore the description of the right button 137d is replaced with the description of the left button 137c. As a matter of course, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S1501). If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501: No), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S1501: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S1503). When it is determined that the setting display is not displayed (step S1503: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is in a non-demo state (step S1505). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed in the standby state. If the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S1505: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the symbol variation setting screen (step S1507), and then ends this process. That is, the CPU 404 sets a liquid crystal command for displaying a volume setting screen displayed during the symbol variation display. A brightness setting screen may be displayed together with the volume setting screen. Further, only the brightness setting screen may be displayed, or a setting screen other than the volume and brightness may be displayed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S1505: No), after setting a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1509), the process is terminated.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1503 that the setting display is not hidden (step S1503: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511: YES), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1513), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1511: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515). If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515: Yes), it executes the brightness setting screen update process (step S1517), and then ends this process. In the present embodiment, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness setting is performed, but the right button 137d (left button 137c) is set. In this case, the luminance setting may not be performed. Details of the brightness setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1515: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen update process (step S1521), and ends this process. Details of the volume setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1519: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1523). If the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S1523: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen update processing (step S1525), and then ends this processing. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is not displayed (step S1523: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1525.

  Next, the brightness setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101A is a flowchart of the brightness setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes user brightness setting operation processing (step S1601). Here, the details of the user brightness setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101B is a flowchart of user brightness setting setting operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the luminance volume knob (step S1701). Specifically, for example, based on a signal output from a luminance volume knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160, the value indicated by the luminance volume knob is acquired. The luminance volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the luminance by a game clerk. That is, the luminance volume knob can be said to be a volume knob for performing luminance master setting. Note that the luminance volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the process as in step S1701 may not be executed. Also, one volume knob may be provided, and the function of the volume volume knob and the function of the luminance volume knob, which will be described later, may be unified by this volume knob.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703). If the CPU 404 determines that the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703: YES), it executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the value of the brightness volume knob is not 0 (step S1703: No), it determines whether or not the current operation is an operation to increase the brightness (step S1705). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is an operation of the upper button 137a or the right button 137d.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation to increase the luminance (step S1705: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the luminance being set is the maximum value (step S1707). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance being set is 10 when the luminance can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the set luminance is the maximum value (step S1707: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the set brightness is not the maximum value (step S1707: No), the CPU 404 increases the brightness by one level (step S1709), and then executes the process of step S1715.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1705 that the current operation is not an operation for increasing the luminance, that is, if it is determined that the operation is a luminance lowering operation (for example, operation of the down button 137b or the left button 137c) ( Step S1705: No), it is determined whether or not the luminance being set is the minimum value (step S1711). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance being set is 1 when the luminance can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the set luminance is the minimum value (step S1711), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when it is determined that the luminance being set is not the minimum value (step S1711: No), the luminance is lowered by one level (step S1713), and then the process of step S1715 is executed.

  In step S1715, the CPU 404 performs a resetting process for updating the brightness setting display changed as described above (step S1715), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen is kept in a non-display state. Even when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the brightness setting change and the set brightness can be displayed on the decorative design display device 208 in this way.

  Referring back to FIG. 101A, when the CPU 404 executes the user brightness setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the brightness setting screen is deleted (step S1603), the CPU 404 performs the brightness setting display update process. finish. Here, the timer setting until the brightness setting screen is cleared is a process of resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting a liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including.

  Next, the volume setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102A is a flowchart of the volume setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes a user volume setting operation process (step S1801). Here, details of the user volume setting operation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101B is a flowchart of the user volume setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the volume control knob (step S1901). Specifically, for example, based on a signal output from a volume control (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160, the value indicated by the volume control is obtained. The volume control knob is a knob for changing the volume by a game clerk, for example. That is, the volume control knob can be called a volume control for setting the master volume. It should be noted that the volume volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the processing as in step S1901 may not be executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the volume control is 0 (step S1903). If the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume control is 0 (step S1903: Yes), it executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume control is not 0 (step S1903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation is an operation for increasing the volume (step S1905). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the right button 137d or the upper button 137a.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation to increase the volume (step S1905: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is 10 when the volume can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. If the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is not the maximum value (step S1907: No), the CPU 404 raises the volume by one level (step S1909), and outputs data for outputting a sound effect for increasing the volume. After setting (step S1911), the process of step S1919 is executed. As a result, every time an operation for increasing the volume is performed, a sound effect indicating that the volume has been increased is output from the speaker 120.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1905 that the current operation is not an operation for increasing the volume, that is, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation is to decrease the volume (for example, an operation of the left button 137c or the lower button 137b) ( Step S1905: No), it is determined whether or not the volume being set is the minimum value (Step S1913). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume being set is 1 when the volume can be set to 10 levels of 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume being set is not the minimum value (step S1913: No), the volume is lowered by one level (step S1915), and data for outputting a sound effect for lowering the volume is set. (Step S1917), the process of step S1919 is executed.

  In step S1919, the CPU 404 performs a resetting process for updating the volume setting display changed as described above (step S1919), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the volume control is 0, the volume setting screen is kept in a non-display state. Even when the value of the volume knob is 0, the volume setting screen may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the volume setting change and the set volume can be displayed on the decorative design display device 208 in this way.

  Returning to FIG. 102A, when the user volume setting operation process is executed as described above, the CPU 404 sets a timer until the volume setting screen is deleted (step S1603), and then performs a volume setting display update process. finish. Here, the setting of the timer until the volume setting screen is cleared is a process of resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting a liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including. The time until the volume setting screen is cleared (timer) and the time until the brightness setting screen is cleared (timer) are the same time, but one time is configured to be longer than the other time. It may be.

  Next, an upper button operation setting display process executed in various button operation related processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the up button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the lower button operation setting display process executed in the various button operation related processes is the same as the upper button operation setting display process, so the description of the upper button 137a is replaced with the description of the lower button 137b. As a matter of course, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not a power-on related process is being executed (step S2001). If the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the power-on related processing is not being executed (step S2001: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is not displayed (step S2003). When it is determined that the setting display is not displayed (step S2003: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the setting display is in a non-demo state (step S2005). If the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S2005: Yes), it ends this process.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demonstration state (step S2005: No), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2007), and then ends this process.

  If it is determined in step S2003 that the setting display is not hidden (step S2003: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not a volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2011), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S2009: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013). If the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the brightness setting screen update process shown in FIG. 101A (step S2015), and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S2013: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017). If the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017: Yes), it executes the volume setting screen update process shown in FIG. 102A (step S2019), and then ends this process. . In the present embodiment, when the up button 137a (down button 137b) is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting is performed, but the up button 137a (down button 137b). Then, the volume may not be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S2017: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S2021). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation setting screen is displayed (step S2021: Yes), the CPU 404 resets the timer until the symbol variation setting screen is deleted (step S2023), and then performs this process. Exit. The symbol variation setting screen is deleted when a predetermined display time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without operating each direction button of the operation key unit 137, but the processing in step S2023 is executed. The display time of the symbol change setting screen is reset.

  Next, the button long press process will be described. FIG. 104A is a flowchart of the button long press process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This button long press process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S2101). Subsequently, the CPU 404 clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S2103).

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes a chance button long press operation state determination process (step S2105).

  Here, the chance button long press operation state determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as the chance button is being pressed and held (step S2201). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated for a long time by detecting that the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port is continuously ON.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 has been pressed for a long time (step S2201: Yes), the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 is updated to a long press state (step S2203). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 has been pressed for a long time (step S2201: No), this process ends.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has passed (step S2205). Specifically, the CPU 404 is set in the time T1 and T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting set in the continuous hitting operation processing shown in FIG. 96 or in the long press operation processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not time T3 and T4 have elapsed until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 (step S2207), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S2207.

  Returning to FIG. 104 (a), after executing the chance button long press operation state determination processing, the CPU 404 performs determination button long press operation state determination processing (step S2107), left button long press operation state determination processing (step S2109). , Right button long press operation state determination processing (step S2111), up button long press operation state determination processing (step S2113), and down button long press operation state determination processing (step S2115) are sequentially executed. Note that each of the determination button long press operation state determination process, left button long press operation state determination process, right button long press operation state determination process, up button long press operation state determination process, and down button long press operation state determination process Since the contents are the same as the above-described chance button long press operation state determination process, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes various button long press operation related processing (step S2117), and then ends this processing.

  Next, various button long press operation related processes executed in the button long press process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of various button long press operation related processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S2301). If the command transmission flag is not ON (step S2301: No), the CPU 404 terminates this process, but if the command transmission flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), the effect button (chance button) 136 is used alone. In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the operation is performed. If the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2302: Yes), it executes the button pressing process shown in FIG. 93 (step S2305), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2303: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307). If the CPU 404 determines that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2309), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the determination button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311). If the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2313), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315). If the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2317), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319). If the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2321), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the lower button 137b is operated alone (step S2323). If the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is being operated alone (step S2323: Yes), it executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2325), and then ends this process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S2323: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S2325.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is requested during the display of the effect for one operation, the effect for continuous hitting, the effect of long press, and various setting screens. In addition to the above, when the button other than the button for which the operation is requested is further operated, such as the right button 137d being operated at the same time, any operation is handled to be invalid. For example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is requested, when the right button 137d is further operated simultaneously with the effect button 136, the effect button 136 is displayed. You may make it handle as having been operated.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  107 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (a), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 107 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 107 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 107 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 107 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of FIG. 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 107 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 107 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 107 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 107 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the decorative symbol variation display is started in FIG. 107 (f).

  As shown in FIG. 107 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started, the effect button 136 is displayed in the effective period (hereinafter, this effective period is referred to as “second operation effective period”). The operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the button is displayed. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Thus, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image 136P is an example of an operation display related to the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 107 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 107 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 107 (j), a reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. It should be noted that even when the effect button 136 is not pressed within the effective period, the display as shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be performed, or the display as shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be performed. May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (j). This also applies to the effect for one-time operation, the effect for continuous hitting, and the effect for long press. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 functions as a second operation result display. Further, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, “operation result display” may be referred to as “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 107 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 107 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner, and is displayed in a reduced size, in FIG. 107 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  108 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 107 in stages.

  In FIG. 108 (p) continuing from FIG. 107 (o), the duel scene animation continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 108 (s). In FIG. 108 (s), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 108 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” determined to be the 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol (round figure) in the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 108 (v) is lit. In FIG. 108 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 108 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached in a different decorative pattern (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 107 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 108 (t). In 108 (u ′), the fluctuation of the decoration pattern combination “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 108 (v ′) following FIG. 108 (u ′), “decoration 6-decoration” is displayed. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 108 (w ′) following FIG. 108 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 108 (q) step by step.

  In FIG. 109 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 107 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 109 (b). In FIG. 109 (b), the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 109 (c), as in FIG. 108 (t), all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 109 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” starts. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (e), the fourth symbol (circular shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, an example of the operation result for each gaming state generated by the operation of each button of the effect button and the operation key unit 137 in this embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 110A is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the symbol variation display is not performed, and FIG. 110B is a symbol variation display in progress. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in, and the figure (c) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the production button 136 (chance button) is operated in the waiting state demonstration display (animation demonstration display) by animation in the standby state, the animation demonstration display is stopped and the symbol demonstration is performed. Move to display. The symbol demo display is a display showing a variation display result of the last displayed decoration symbol. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol demonstration is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, a demonstration effect corresponding to the operation is displayed. Here, for example, when the demonstration effect is capable of executing a plurality of types of effect modes, a game that changes the effect mode, makes a character appear, displays an effect, or explains a game method An effect display for starting explanation or the like. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol demonstration is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume or brightness after the setting is confirmed and the setting screen is deleted.

  Further, when the determination button 137e is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the enter button 137e is operated while the setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the display time of the currently displayed setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is reset to extend the display.

  If the right button 137d is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the right button 137d is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. In the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased and becomes brighter.

  If the left button 137c is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. In the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered and darkened.

  Further, when the upper button 137a is operated while the setting screen is not displayed in the standby state, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased. In the standby state, when the upper button 137a is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated in the standby state and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. In the standby state, when the down button 137b is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period during which the symbol variation is being displayed and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for the one-time operation, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for long press The production according to the is performed. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the symbol variation display and outside the operation effective period of the effect button 136, no operation result is given. In this embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, any operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be made. Further, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, an effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or a sound effect may be output in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. . At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  In addition, if the determination button 137e is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the change button 137e is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume after setting is fixed and the setting screen being displayed is hidden.

  When the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  If the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  In addition, if the up button 137a is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the up button 137a is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset to extend the display.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset and the display is extended.

  In addition, when the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation while the symbol variation is being displayed, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, when both the effect button 136 and the direction key are pressed at the same time during the execution of the effect for a single operation that requires the operation of the effect button 136 and the direction key, the effect corresponding to this, etc. Is done. Further, if both the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated outside the operation valid period while the symbol variation is being displayed, no operation result is obtained. Even when the operation is not valid, various lamps 418 blink, effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and sound effects are output in accordance with the operation of both the effect button 136 and the direction key. You may do it. At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted during the big hit game, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for the one-time operation, an effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for long press The production according to the is performed. In addition, if the effect button 136 is operated during the big hit game and the operation button 136 is not operated, no operation result is obtained. In this embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, any operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be made. Further, even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, an effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or a sound effect may be output in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. . At this time, an effect unrelated to the effect in the symbol variation display may be used.

  In addition, if the determination button 137e is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is given. On the other hand, if the determination button 137e is operated during the jackpot game and the setting screen (volume setting screen or luminance setting screen) is displayed, the volume or luminance after setting is confirmed, and the setting screen being displayed is displayed. You want to hide.

  Further, when the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, a volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. When the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased and becomes brighter.

  If the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, a volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. If the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is lowered and darkened.

  Further, when the up button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the upper button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the luminance setting screen is displayed, the luminance is changed and the luminance is increased. Note that if the up button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  Further, when the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. If the down button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  In addition, if the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during a big hit game other than the big hit round (for example, during the pre-hit start effect, during the round effect, during the big end effect, etc.) Not done. Further, when the big hit game is in progress and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during the big hit round, the BGM song output during the big hit game is changed. In this embodiment, a plurality of songs are prepared as BGM output during the big hit game. For example, every time the production button 136 + left button 137c is operated, "Song 1"-"Song 3"-"Song" The selected song can be shifted in the reverse direction, such as “2”-“Song 1”.

  In addition, if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit game and other than the big hit round, no operation result is made. In addition, when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit game and during the big hit round, the BGM music output during the big hit game is changed. More specifically, every time the production button 136 + the right button 137d is operated, “Song 1” − “Song 2” − “Song 3” − “Song 1”... Is selected in the forward direction. You can transition songs.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. 111 is an effect example that may be executed in some of the effects performed in FIGS. 107 to 109.

  FIG. 111 (1) corresponds to FIG. 107 (o) and displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. As shown in FIG. 111 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In the present embodiment, a state in which the reach is performed by “decoration 7” is shown, and three decorative symbols are also displayed in the lower left of the display screen. These three decorative symbols, for example, are stopped and displayed at the same time in combination of symbols corresponding to the display results of Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2 at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, three decorative symbols displayed in the lower left part of the display screen are stopped and displayed at the same time. However, for example, they may be stopped and displayed in order of left, right, and middle. .

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), when the right button 137d is operated, a symbol variation setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in other light emission modes (for example, blue color). Similarly, when the left button 137c is operated, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. The symbol variation mid-use setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol variation setting screen functions as an example of a volume setting display. In addition, the symbol variation setting screen displayed when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. This setting screen for changing symbols is arranged and displayed in a layer in front of the layer on which the effect display is performed. Therefore, while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the effect display is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is the third of the five levels.

  If the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 111 (4) while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 111 (5). Accordingly, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is in the fourth level. In the present embodiment, the volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in a state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third level, the volume decreases by one level, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG is the second level. It will change to the display which shows. As described above, the volume gauge VG that is variably displayed when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated in a state where the symbol variation setting screen is displayed is an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. There are cases where it is possible. In the present embodiment, only the sound volume can be set during symbol variation. However, brightness setting, effect mode, BGM, and the like may be set. In addition, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto repeat function is activated during the long pressing time, and the volume increases by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured (to decrease), or the volume may not be increased (not decreased) as long as the operation is not performed once so that the auto repeat function is not activated. Further, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the sound volume is fixed to the set value and the symbol variation setting screen is deleted. It may be. In addition to this, for example, the input password may be determined by operating the effect button 136 on the password input screen. That is, in this case, it can be said that the effect button 136 functions as a first operation means for performing various settings.

  FIG. 111 (6) corresponds to FIG. 108 (p), and the duel scene animation continues. In this effect example, the effect (first effect) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is then started at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (7). Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated simultaneously within the effective period. The The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that represents the remaining time of the effective period. 136P2 is included. At this time, an effect waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Here, the operation waiting animation is, for example, an animation in which a button is retracted or protruded repeatedly. Here, a still image may be displayed without performing the operation waiting animation display. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation valid period is before the start, and even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid. Note that the operation promotion notification image may be displayed at the same time as the operation effective period starts. Here, the operation effective period is a period in which the period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled and the period in which the operation of the right button 137d is enabled overlap. The operation effective period here includes an overlapping period when the effective period of the operation is started and then the effective period of the operation of the other button is started. Further, it is also possible to produce an effect of continuous hitting operation or long press operation during the effective period of the operation started first, and to perform an effect of adding two or more buttons simultaneously. On the other hand, the effective period of the operation of one button overlaps the effective period of the operation of the other button, and then the effective period of the operation of one (other) button ends and the other (one) operates. For example, after performing the simultaneous operation of two or more buttons, the operation of one (the other) button is continuously performed. You may produce the structure of performing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display including the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 may be referred to as an example of the first operation display regarding the operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means. .

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (10), as shown in FIG. 111 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 111 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display screen may be hidden. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect display (first operation result display) is performed as if the effect movable body 225 is shining. That is, an operation result effect is performed. The effect button 136 and the right button 137d emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. Thereby, it is notified in advance that the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit. In addition, it may be performed even when the result of the symbol variation display is not a big hit, so that a high degree of expectation for the big hit may be produced. Here, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not limited to the case where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing, and the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is pressed. It goes without saying that the case where the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the right button 137d is pressed is also included. That is, it is only necessary that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. Note that the effect of simultaneous operation as shown in FIG. 111 (12) may be started only when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. Further, when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is pressed and the other is not operated within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it may not be handled as a simultaneous operation.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 225 provides an effect by simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. However, the effect movable body 225 also performs the operation even when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period. It is comprised so that an effect may be performed. Note that when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period, the effect by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed. In addition, the content of the effect to be executed may be different between the case where the simultaneous operation is performed within the operation effective period and the case where the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period. If the simultaneous operation is performed at the same time, an effect with a high expectation to the big hit is performed, and if the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation effective period, an effect with a low expectation to the big hit is performed. You may make it like that and vice versa.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is suggested that the greater the number of buttons that require an operation, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot in the symbol variation display. Thereby, as the number of buttons increases, the player has a higher expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game may be improved. That is, it can be said that the display shown in FIG. 111 (8) or the like functions as the change notice. Note that the degree of expectation for jackpots in the symbol variation display may be the same regardless of the number of buttons that require an operation. Further, it may be performed as a pre-reading notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (13), the animation of the duel scene is resumed. In FIG. 111 (14), the main character Tono wins the enemy swordsman, and then, as shown in FIG. 111 (15), At the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner. In the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, three decorative symbols are still displayed in a variable manner.

  In the present embodiment, the luminance setting cannot be performed during the symbol variation display, but the luminance setting may be performed. The setting method in this case can be performed in the same manner as the volume setting. For example, in the case of the luminance setting, the up / down symbol changing setting for luminance setting is performed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b. The brightness may be set by displaying a screen, and the brightness may be changed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b. That is, the symbol variation setting screen displayed when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is operated may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation, and the symbol variation setting screen may be displayed. In the displayed state, the luminance gauge that is variably displayed when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is operated may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIGS. 112 (a1) to (a5) show a case where only one button is operated when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed. 112 (b1) to FIG. 112 (b5) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 112 (a1) to FIG. 112 (a5), and FIG. 112 (c1). ) To (c5) show that when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed, one of the buttons is operated first and the state is maintained while the other is maintained. An example of the effect when the button is operated is shown.

  FIG. 112 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 111 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (a2), when the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is non-displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (a3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed. Here, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 may not be changed even when the right button 137d is operated. If the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set. From the start of the display for prompting (button operation promotion display) to the end of the symbol variation display, the display of the symbol variation setting screen is prohibited and the volume setting is not performed. That is, the volume setting is prohibited from the timing of FIG. 111 (7) until the symbol variation display is completed. Note that the volume setting may be prohibited only while the button operation promotion display is being performed. The volume setting may be prohibited only during the period from the start of the button operation promotion display to the end of the operation result effect.

  After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 112 (a4), as shown in FIG. 112 (a5), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode during operation to the display during non-operation. It changes into a mode and an operation result effect is not performed yet.

  FIG. 112 (b1) is also a display corresponding to FIG. 111 (10), but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (b2), when only the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is non-displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (b3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation result effect is not performed. In addition, since both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated at the same time, the operation effective period continues, and not only the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 but also the right button image 137dP1. The corresponding remaining time display bar 136P2b is also displayed in such a manner that the meter continues to decrease despite the right button 137d being operated.

  After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 112 (b4), as shown in FIG. 112 (b5), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode at the time of operation to the non-operational display mode. It changes into a mode and an operation result effect is not performed yet.

  FIG. 112 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 111 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (c2), when the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (c3). Although the display mode at the time of operation changes to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (c4), when the effect button 136 is operated with the right button 137d being operated, the operation result effect is started as shown in FIG. 112 (c5). The same applies to the case where only the effect button 136 is operated first and the right button 137d is operated in that state. That is, when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated or pressed for a long time and the other button is operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. A result similar to the case (execution of the operation result effect) is obtained.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the effect shown in FIG. Here, FIGS. 113 (a1) to 113 (a2) show a case where only one button is operated when an effect requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed. 113 (b1) to FIG. 113 (b2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 111 (7) to FIG. 111 (8), and FIG. 113 (c1). ) To (c2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (8).

  FIG. 113 (a1) shows a state where only the right button 137d is pressed for a long time without operating the effect button 136. Therefore, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode at the time of non-operation to the display mode at the time of operation. After that, for example, when the remaining 1/3 of the effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 113 (a2), it is as if the effect button image 136P1 vibrates with the character display “please also press the chance button”. Animation display (vibration animation display) is started, and a display further prompting the operation of the button that has not been operated is performed. The start timing of the vibration animation display is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a predetermined time (for example, one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated) The vibration animation display may be started when 3 seconds) elapses. The vibration animation display ends when the corresponding button (the effect button 136 in FIG. 113 (a2)) is operated. As described above, when only one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated and a predetermined time has elapsed, a display (vibration animation display) different from the normal display (operation waiting animation display). ) May be performed.

  113 (b1) to FIG. 113 (b2) correspond to FIGS. 111 (7) to (8), but in FIG. 113 (b2), the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed, and only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed. Is displayed.

  113 (c1) to (c2) also correspond to FIGS. 111 (7) to (8), but in FIG. 113 (c2), in addition to the right button image 137dP1 and the effect button image 136P1. A left button image 137cP1 is further displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for the big hit is changed by changing the number of displayed button images. For example, as the number of displayed button images increases, It is configured to have high expectations.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 114 (a) corresponds to FIG. 111 (7), and the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. And as shown in FIG.114 (b), in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the operation promotion alerting image which urges | turns both the production button 136 and the right button 137d to the state operated simultaneously within the effective period is displayed. The In FIG. 114 (b), as the operation promotion notification image, the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b representing the remaining time of the operation effective period are displayed corresponding to each button image together with the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Has been. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (b), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (c), at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (d), as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 and the right button image 137dP1 changes to gray out display. The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2b displays that the remaining time is zero. The right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b may be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (g), the effect movable body 225 moves to a position that covers the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a turning operation that vibrates on the spot is performed, so that an operation result effect may be performed. It suggests that you can't. Note that the turning operation by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (h), when the operation of the right button 137d is released and the effect button 136 is operated, the effect movable body 225 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device as shown in FIG. 114 (i). In some cases, the display moves to a position covering the entire 208 display screen. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described effect display.

  As described above, the operation result effect may be performed by performing the button operation once in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136 in the operation effective period. It should be noted that in this effect example, the operation result effect may be performed by operating two buttons once for the effect button 136 and the right button 137d regardless of the operation order, or in the correct order ( For example, the operation result effect may be performed on condition that the button operation is performed in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136). The operation result effect may also be performed when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously. In this case, for example, when only the effect button 136 is operated or only the right button 137d is operated, the moving operation by the effect movable body 225 is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 114 (g), and the effect button When both 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 114 (i) may be performed.

  If the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 114 (h), but the operation result effect is not performed, the effect movable body 225 descends as shown in FIG. 114 (i ′). Ascending without being performed, an effect that failed to produce a single button operation is performed. At this time, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the effect button image 136P1 changes to gray-out display, and the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2a displays that the remaining time is zero. Become. As a result, it is notified that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d have been operated. The effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b may be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (j ′), the animation of the duel scene is resumed, and a state in which the main character Tono-sama lost to the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when requesting the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed. Although the display prompting the operation of the button requesting the operation is performed so as to prompt the operation, for example, the display prompting the operation of the button other than the button requesting the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when a single operation of the effect button 136 is requested, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. However, if only the effect button 136 is operated, the operation result effect is performed. May be performed. Further, a display that prompts the user to operate a button different from the button that requests the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the operation of the right button 137d is requested, only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, but the operation result effect is not performed even if the effect button image 136P1 is operated, and the right button 137d is operated. In such a case, an operation result effect may be performed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the operation effective period is not started, and thereafter, the operation promotion notification image is deleted, so-called fake effects. You may make it perform. As the effect of fake, for example, in the effect that the operation promotion notification image is displayed when the two effect button images 136P1 are close to each other and overlap, the two effect button images 136P1 are not overlapped. An effect that the button operation effect is not started and an operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the target button that is urging the operation becomes difficult to press mechanically or is displaced to an inoperable position. There may be an effect that makes it impossible to press the button.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining an example of the setting operation using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  115, there are a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a special symbol 1 4th symbol LED 285a and a special symbol 2 4th symbol LED 285b are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 200. The 4th symbol LED 285a for the special figure 1 notifies whether or not the special figure 1 is changing the symbol by its lighting mode, and the 4th symbol LED 285b for the special symbol 2 indicates the special symbol 2 by the lighting mode. Informs whether or not the symbol is changing. For example, the 4th design LED 285a for the special figure 1 and the 4th design LED 285b for the special figure 2 blinks at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the design variation display, and the display result is lost. It is configured to turn off and turn on when the display result is a big hit, but the lighting mode can be set arbitrarily, so that the emission color varies according to the symbol variation display state It may be.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (a), a jackpot start effect indicating that the jackpot game has been started is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of how to hit right is displayed. In addition, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 is turned off, indicating that the display result is lost, and the 4th design LED 285b for special figure 2 is turned on, indicating that the display result is a big hit. Has been. That is, the big hit this time is a big hit by displaying the special figure a on the second special figure display device 214.

  FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which the first round is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect during the big hit round. Then, “1R” indicating that it is the first round is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first big hit game is shown below the hitting display. “BONUS × 1” is displayed. In the present embodiment, a music name display MT indicating the music name of the BGM output from the speaker 120 is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (c) shows a state in which the third round is executed. At this time, when the right button 137d (or the left button 137c) is operated once as shown in FIG. 115 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 sets the volume as shown in FIG. 115 (e). A screen is displayed. Note that the volume gauge VG on the volume setting screen indicates that the volume is the third of the five levels. Note that the volume setting screen may be displayed or deleted when the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated at the same time. By doing so, the player intends to operate the volume setting screen. By doing so, it may be possible to set the volume, and it may be possible to suppress the annoyance that the volume setting screen is displayed by an unintended operation.

  When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 115 (f) while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 115 (g). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth level.

  If the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 115 (h) while the volume setting screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (i). The volume is not increased or decreased, the BGM song is changed, and the changed song name is displayed in the song name display MT. In other words, the present embodiment is configured so that the volume cannot be changed while the effect button 136 is being operated. Note that the volume setting screen is deleted after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after any one of the direction buttons in the operation key unit 137 is last operated. Here, when the direction button 136 and any one of the direction buttons in the operation key unit 137 are operated at the same time, the direction button may not be operated. Further, when the effect button 136 and the direction button are operated at the same time, the volume setting screen may be deleted.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram for describing an effect example using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display region 280 at the lower center of the effect display region 208d, and a hold icon display region 281 of Special Figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display region 280. .

  In the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of holding icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon.

  In FIG. 116 (a), one hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 has a default display mode (round shape). In a white and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In addition to the default display mode, the hold icon can also be displayed in the display mode of a pre-reading notice, and can also function as a pre-reading notice for a pending symbol variation display.

  In the variation icon display area 280, the variation icon h0 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition to the default display mode, the change icon h0 can be displayed in a preview display mode, and can function as a preview display for the symbol change display.

  116 (a), when the right button 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the volume setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 116 (c). Is displayed. At this time, according to the volume gauge VG, it is indicated that the volume is the fourth of the five levels. In this embodiment, it is configured so that no operation result is obtained even when a button to which an effect or function according to the operation is not assigned is operated. For example, the button is operated. You may make it perform the effect production to the effect of confirming. The effect effect may be an effect by sound output from the speaker 120 or light emission of the lamps by the various lamps 418 in addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image 136 </ b> P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (d), since it is before the start of the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. On the other hand, the volume setting is valid, and the volume can be changed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. Further, since the remaining time display bar 136P2 is arranged and displayed on the layer on the back side of the volume gauge VG, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so as to overlap the volume gauge VG and is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, although the decorative symbol variation display is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can display the special symbol by a variation symbol displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Can be recognized as fluctuating. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (e), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously as shown in FIG. 116 (f), FIG. As shown in 116 (g), neither the operation result effect performed by operating the effect button 136 nor the volume change. That is, the operations of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are treated as invalid. Note that the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2 hidden in the volume gauge VG is displayed in a reduced manner with the passage of time.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last time the direction key was operated, the volume setting screen is deleted and the remaining time display bar 136P2 appears as shown in FIG. 116 (h). In this case as well, unless the operation of the right button 137d is stopped, it is not treated as valid even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  Next, the relationship between the operation of the effect button 136 and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 118. Here, FIG. 117A is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during execution of the effect for repeated hitting, and FIG. 117B is the effect for repeated hitting. FIG. 6C is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the long press operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during the execution of the effect, and FIG. 10C shows the long press operation by the effect button 136 during the execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between a production | presentation display. FIG. 118 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for long press.

  In the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect pattern of the decorative symbol variation display according to the received command. To do. Then, in the production by the decided production pattern, production lottery is performed as to whether or not various productions are executed. All the box data of the production contents decided to be executed by the production lottery are read out, the part data contained in the read out box data is stored in the RAM 408, and the liquid crystal command contained in the box data is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. To the second sub-control unit 500.

  As a liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the start of the symbol variation display, for example, a background command for designating a background, a timer command for designating a variation time, and a pending number are designated. Hold number change command to be held, hold display command to specify the display position and color of the hold icon, notice command to specify the contents of the notice, reach command to specify the contents of the reach to be executed, temporary stop to specify the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped There are a design command, a final stop design command for designating a decorative design to be displayed when the design is stopped. Here, the timer command includes data that can specify the pre-reach performance time (notice timer) and the reach performance time (reach timer).

  Then, in the second sub-control unit 500, control is performed so that the designated effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, when a predetermined effect display is performed, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command to that effect to the first sub control unit 400. When receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes control corresponding to the received return command.

  When an effect for continuous hitting is performed during symbol variation, as shown in FIGS. 117 (A) and (B), liquid crystal is transferred from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing a. When the command is transmitted, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the effect for repeated hitting at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly operated, the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of A1, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 and displays the effect display that the effect button 136 is operated on the decorative symbol display device 208. Done.

  Thereafter, similarly, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C1 (E1) and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control In the unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D1 (F1), and an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the long press operation is performed by pressing and holding the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is displayed. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing B1 and displays the effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 (for example, 500 ms) elapses until a liquid crystal command for automatic hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2, and the effect button 136 is operated. The effect design display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the second operation has been performed by the effect button 136 unless at least the time T1 has elapsed since the operation was started. Therefore, when the striking operation is performed, every time the effect button 136 is operated, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Even before the period of time elapses, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and display more effects that the effect button 136 has been operated than when the long press operation has been performed. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, each time of E2 (E2, G2, I2... At the timing), the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, (F2, H2 , J2... (At each timing), an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated unless at least the time T2 has elapsed. Accordingly, when the striking operation is performed, every time the effect button 136 is operated, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Even before the period of time elapses, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and display more effects that the effect button 136 has been operated than when the long press operation has been performed. Is possible.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 117 (A) and (B), when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing of g, A return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 also ends the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if there is a single operation of the effect button 136 and a long press operation, the operation is treated as invalid.

  If the execution result of the operation result effect is satisfied by the continuous hitting operation or the long press automatic continuous hitting function before the timing of g, the second sub-control unit 500 ends the operation effective period. A return command for starting the operation result effect is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub-control unit 400 and stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, but the liquid crystal command is received by the second sub-control unit 500. Sometimes, when the operation valid period has expired, the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed. I will not.

  When an effect for long press is performed during symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at timing a, The second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the effect display for long press is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing α, but at this time, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when a time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of A3. If a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B3, and uses the effect button 136. An effect display indicating that the long press operation is being performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 may recognize that a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed if at least time T3 has not elapsed since the operation was started. Can not.

  Thereafter, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, every time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted (at timings C3, E3,...). ), A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 because the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing, and the second sub-control unit 500 (D3, F3) In response to reception of the liquid crystal command (at each timing of...), An effect display indicating that a long press operation with the effect button 136 is being performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid.

  If the execution result of the operation result effect by the long press operation is satisfied before the timing of g, the second sub-control unit 500 ends the operation effective period and starts the operation result effect. Is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 to end the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub-control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub-control unit 400 and stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  Next, an operation when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the execution of the effect for continuous hitting will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 (A) shows a state in which an effect for continuous hitting is performed during symbol variation.

  First, when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit at timing a, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the effect for repeated hitting at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the B1 When the liquid crystal command is received at the timing, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 (for example, 500 ms) elapses until a liquid crystal command for automatic hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2, and the effect button 136 is operated. The effect design display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 has been released at the timing β1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing C2, the first sub-control unit 400 sends the button release liquid-crystal command to the first sub-control unit 400. 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of β2, the second sub control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started again at the timing of E4, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F4, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when a time T1 elapses until the liquid crystal command for auto-striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of G4. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of H4, an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, if the long press operation is temporarily interrupted during the operation valid period and then the long press operation is performed again, the liquid crystal is displayed until the time T1 elapses after the long press operation is started, as in the case of the first long press operation. The command is not sent. When the long press operation is performed again during the operation valid period, the liquid crystal command may be transmitted when time T2 has elapsed since the long press operation was started. Further, the liquid crystal command is transmitted when a time different from the time T2 (which may be longer or shorter than the time T2) has elapsed after the long press operation is started again. Also good.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the effect button 136 is operated once every time T2 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 indicates that the effect button 136 has been operated in response to reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if there is a single operation of the effect button 136 and a long press operation, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T2 has elapsed at the timing g and the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 At the timing of h when the sub control unit 500 receives the command, the operation valid period has already ended, so that the operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an operation in a case where the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during the long press effect will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (B). FIG. 118 (B) shows a state in which an effect for long press is performed during symbol variation.

  First, when a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit at timing a, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at timing b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. Thereafter, when the effect display for long press is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing d, the part data corresponding to the received return command is read from the RAM 408, and based on the read part data, the sound is output, the lamp blinks, and the effect is movable Control the operation of the bodies 224, 225, etc.

  Thereafter, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also operates effectively. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the start of the operation effective period at the timing f, the first sub control unit 400 also starts and sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α1, but at this time, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when a time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until a liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of A3. If there is, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of B3, and an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when a time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until a long press liquid crystal command is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the operation button 136 is continuously pressed at the timing of C3. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D3, an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 is released at the timing of γ1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C3, the liquid crystal command for button release is sent to the first sub-control unit. 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. When the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of γ2, the second sub control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  Thereafter, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started again at the timing of α2, and when the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted elapses, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of E5. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F <b> 5, and an effect display that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued every time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs a long press operation with the effect button 136 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation effective period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 also ends and sets the operation valid period. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command instructing the end of the operation effective period at the timing h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation effective period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T4 has elapsed at the timing of G5 and the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, At the timing when the second sub-control unit 500 receives the command, since the operation valid period has already ended, the long press operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an example of the effect for repeated hits in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. Here, FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative design display apparatus 208 of stepwise.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the state has reached a reach state and has been developed into a super reach (a panda group attack reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (a), it is indicated that the “decoration 7” has been reached, and three decorative symbols are displayed in the lower left of the display screen.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), after an effect display is shown in which countless pandas are pressed, an effect button 136 is displayed as shown in FIG. 119 (c). By repeating the hit operation, a character display “defeat all the pandas by hitting the button repeatedly” is suggested, which indicates that the mission may be achieved and there is a possibility that it will be a big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts the player to strike the effect button 136 repeatedly and defeat all the pandas within the operation effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 119 (d) is a state before the operation effective period (first operation effective period) starts, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. The text “Preparation” to that effect is displayed, and then the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (e). At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “100 more characters” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is 100.

  For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of A1 in FIG. 117 (A), as shown in FIG. 119 (f), the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect on the second sub control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing B1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (g). As shown, the text display is updated to “98 more characters” indicating that two pandas have been defeated. The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases with the passage of time. Thus, in the effect for continuous hitting, the effect display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in response to the operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as an example of the first effect display.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of C1 in FIG. 117 (A), as shown in FIG. 119 (h), the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect on the second sub-control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing D1 in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (i). As shown, the text display of “72 more characters” indicating that 26 pandas have been defeated is updated.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing E1 in FIG. 117 (A), as shown in FIG. 119 (j), the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect on the second sub control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F1 in FIG. 117A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 119 (k). As shown, the character display of “50 more characters” indicating that 22 pandas have been defeated is updated.

  Then, in response to the continuous operation by the effect button 136 being continuously performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is reduced, as shown in FIG. 119 (l). The effect button 136 is operated before the operation valid period ends after the update display to the character display of “one more” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 119 (m), the character display of “0 more characters” indicating that all the pandas have been defeated is updated, as shown in FIG. 119 (n). In addition, an effect that the chief character throws up the panda is performed, and it is informed that three “decorations 7” are a big hit. That is, in this production example, since the execution result of the operation result production by the continuous hit operation is satisfied, the production results production (first result display) as shown in FIGS. 119 (m) to (n). Display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation effective period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 119 (m ′), an effect that the longest character is knocked out by the panda is lost. At the same time, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be lost. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 119 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) to 119 (m), by operating the production button 136 in succession, it is suggested that the mission is achieved and there is a possibility that a big hit will be achieved. The character display “Defeat all pandas” is performed, and a series of displays in which an operation promotion notification image that prompts the player to defeat all the pandas within the operation valid period by repeatedly striking the effect button 136 may be referred to as repeated operation display. is there.

  120 shows the same effect as FIG. 119, but shows a state in which a continuous hitting operation using the long press automatic continuous hitting function by a long press operation of the effect button 136 is being performed.

  120 (a) to 120 (e) are the same as FIGS. 119 (a) to (e), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  Then, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started as shown in FIG. 120 (f) at the timing A1 (first timing) in FIG. 117 (B) (that is, the length of the effect button 136). When the push operation is started), a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 400 performs the second operation at the timing B1 in FIG. When the sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is updated to display “98 more characters” indicating that two pandas have been defeated, as shown in FIG. 120 (g). . The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases with the passage of time.

  After that, at the timing before the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for auto-striking is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, timing D1 in FIG. 117A), Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, as shown in FIG. 120 (h), the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated.

  Thereafter, while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, the timing T2 (second timing) in FIG. 117B is reached, and the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous stroke is transmitted has elapsed. Then, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 in FIG. 117 (B), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has defeated 26 pandas as shown in FIG. 120 (i). The text display is updated to “72 more characters”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is functioned as an example of the first time.

  Thereafter, at the timing before the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous stroke is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained (for example, the timing of F1 in FIG. 117A), Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, as shown in FIG. 120 (j), the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated.

  Thereafter, when the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, when the time T2 until the operation of the liquid crystal command for automatic repetitive operation is reached at the timing E2 in FIG. A liquid crystal command indicating that the operation has been performed once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F2 in FIG. 117 (B), and the decorative symbol display device 208 has defeated 22 pandas as shown in FIG. 120 (j). The text display is updated to “50 more characters”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is functioned as an example of the second time.

  Then, in response to the long press operation with the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display in which the number of remaining pandas to be decremented decreases every time T2 elapses. As shown in 119 (l), after a time T2 has elapsed after the update display to the character display of “one more” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one, the decoration In the symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 120 (m), the character display of “0 more characters” indicating that all pandas have been defeated is updated, and as shown in FIG. An effect that the character throws away the panda is performed, and it is notified that three “decorations 7” are a big hit. That is, in this production example, since the execution result of the operation result production by the continuous hit operation is satisfied, the production results production (first result display) as shown in FIGS. 119 (m) to (n). Display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation effective period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect by the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIG. 119 (m ′), an effect that the longest character is knocked out by the panda is lost. At the same time, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is displayed, and it is informed that it will be lost. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 119 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect for long press in this embodiment is demonstrated, referring FIG. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of an effect for long press centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the player has entered a reach state and has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (a), it is shown that the reach state has been reached with “decoration 7”, and three decorative symbols are displayed in the lower left of the display screen. An animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In FIG. 121 (b), the duel scene animation continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (c), an effect for long press by the effect button 136 is started. At this time, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (c), before the operation effective period (second operation effective period) starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, when the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (d), a “long press” character display for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Thereafter, for example, at the timing of α in FIG. 117 (C) (third tying), as shown in FIG. 121 (e), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started. The liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is not operated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used until a time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (f), the same display mode as in FIG. 121 (d) is maintained.

  Thereafter, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing of A3 in FIG. 117 (C) after the time T3 has elapsed, it is indicated by B3 in FIG. 117 (C). At the timing, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 121 (g), the display image of the swordsman displayed on the upper part of the display screen is enlarged, while the display image of the swordsman is reduced, The display which produces that it is slightly dominant is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display screen of Tono-sama displayed above the display screen is enlarged may be referred to as an example of the second effect display. In this embodiment, the time T3 until the long press liquid crystal command is transmitted functions as an example of the third time.

  Thereafter, the time T4 elapses while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained. For example, the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of C3 in FIG. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, at the timing shown by D3 in FIG. 117 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 121 (h) While the display screen of Tono-sama displayed above the display screen is further enlarged, the display image of the swordsman is further reduced to display that the Ton-sama is considerably dominant.

  Then, in response to the long press operation with the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the display image of Tono-sama gradually expands every time T4 elapses. When the execution result of the operation result effect (second result display) by the long press operation is satisfied, for example, effect display as shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (h), the display of the operation promotion notification image that promotes the long press operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as a long press operation display.

  Next, an example of the step-up effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. Here, FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of the step-up effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 123 is an example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the continuation step by step, and FIG. 124 is a diagram showing another effect example performed in the effect shown in FIG. 122.

  122, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal symbol hold. A lamp 216, a fourth symbol LED 285a for special figure 1 and a fourth symbol LED 285b for special figure 2 are shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In response to this, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is also stopped and displayed in the lower left part of the display screen of the ornamental symbol display device 208. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. Further, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 and the 4th design LED 285b for special figure 2 are both turned off, indicating that the display result is lost.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 122 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

  122 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and these three hold icons h11, h12, All of h13 are displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  In FIG. 122 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started and the symbol variation is started in the first special symbol display device 212, but the change has not yet occurred in the hold icon and the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 122 (3), the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 by the change animation of the hold icon and moved to the change icon h0. Thus, the hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1, and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. The display moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is also started. At this time, the 4th design LED 285a for special figure 1 starts blinking. Note that the start timing of the hold icon movement animation may be before the start of the decorative symbol variation display, may be simultaneously with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation may be started. It may be after the start of display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two “decorations 7” stop and enter a reach state. In the lower left of the display screen, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 122 (5) shows a state of development to super reach (Echigoya reach). In this super reach, the character display “Secure Echigoya” is suggested, which suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a more reliable reach production by capturing the character of Echigoya during the reach production. This Echigoya reach is a reach including a step-up effect in which the effect for one operation is performed at most three times.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 122 (6), when the transition to Echigoya reach is performed, the first effect for the first operation (the effect of step-up 1) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a thousand boxes. A state in which the character of Echigoya is being chased by the character of the main character Tono-sama is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (7), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (8), as shown in FIG. 122 (9), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, FIG. 122 (10). As shown in the figure, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs an effect that the first operation for the first operation is successful and the second operation for the operation is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 122 (10) is also displayed when there is no operation of the effect button 136 until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without any operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, effects such as those shown in FIG. 122 (10) after display as shown in FIG. 124 (a1) described later).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (11), the second operation for the first operation (the effect of step-up 2) is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the Echigoya with a thousand boxes is the main character. The state of being chased by this character is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (12), the operation valid period is before the start, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period as shown in FIG. 122 (14), FIG. 122 (15). As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect that the effect for the first operation for the second time is successful, and that the effect is shifted to the effect for the first operation for the third time. The effect shown in FIG. 122 (15) is also displayed when there is no operation of the effect button 136 until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without any operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, after the display as shown in FIG. 124 (b1) described later is performed, the effect as shown in FIG. 122 (15)).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (16), the third operation for the first operation (the effect of step-up 3) is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the Echigoya with a thousand boxes is the main character. The state of being chased by this character is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image as an operation display prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the effective period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. At this time, an operation waiting animation display is performed on the effect button image 136P1. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (17), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (18), as shown in FIG. 123 (19), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, FIG. 123 (20). As shown in FIG. 6, the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the Tono-sama character has captured the Echigoya character, and thus the third operation for the first operation has been successful. The effect shown in FIG. 123 (20) is also displayed when there is no operation of the effect button 136 until the operation effective period ends, but when the operation effective period ends without any operation, Different effects may be displayed (for example, after the display as shown in FIG. 124 (b1) described later is performed, the effect as shown in FIG. 123 (20)).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of shifting to special reach, which is an advanced reach of Super Reach, because it has succeeded in producing one operation for three times. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to dark display, leaves the decorative symbol displayed in the lower left part of the display screen, and makes other displays difficult to see. As shown in 123 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display indicating that a swordsman reach, which is an example of a special reach, is started.

  Thus, it can be said that the effect for the first operation for the first time is an example of the first continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the first operation for the second time. The second one-time operation effect can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in the relationship of the first one-time operation effect, and the third one-time operation effect. In this relationship, it can be said to be an example of the first continuous effect display. In addition, the effect for the first operation for the third time can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in relation to the effect for the first operation for the second time.

  124 (a1) to 124 (a3) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 122 (9) in a stepwise manner. 124 (a1) to FIG. 124 (a3) show examples of effects when the first operation effect for the first time has failed.

  FIG. 124 (a1) shows that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the first operation effect for the first time, or that the Echigoya character escapes after the operation effective period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the first operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the lower left part of the display screen temporarily stops at “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” and shakes. It shows how the change is taking place.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” even in the center of the display screen, and it is lost. Informed.

  124 (b1) to FIG. 124 (b2) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 122 (14) in a stepwise manner. 124 (b1) to FIG. 124 (b2) show examples of effects when the second operation effect for the first time has failed.

  FIG. 124 (b1) shows that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the second operation for the first operation, or the Echigoya character escapes with a thousand boxes after the operation effective period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the second operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 7” is formed again, and, for example, normal reach is performed. Note that the present invention is not limited to normal reach, and other reach effects other than normal reach (for example, long reach, super reach, etc.) may be performed.

  FIG. 124 (c1) to FIG. 124 (c3) are diagrams showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 123 (19) in a stepwise manner. 124 (c1) to FIG. 124 (c3) show another example of effects when the third operation effect for the first time is successful.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (c1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state where the Tono-sama character wears sunglasses and rides on a motorcycle to follow the character of Echigoya. The effect shown in FIG. 124 (c1) is for the first operation for the third time after the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the effect for the first operation for the third time, or after the operation effective period ends. The notification that the production has been successful is made, but at this time, it is not the production that the character of Echigoya is caught as shown in FIG. 123 (20), but the character of Tono-sama is not shown in FIG. 122 (15). This is an effect that transitions after an effect indicating that the player is chasing around continuously, and a premium effect (an effect of step-up 4) that is determined to be a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the full rotation reach, and displays the variation at a low speed while maintaining a state in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (c3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” to notify that a big hit has occurred.

  Next, the relationship between the effect content and the operation of the effect button 136 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. 125 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect button 136. FIG. 126 shows the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect button 136. It is a figure explaining the relationship with operation | movement.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is driven by an effect button drive motor 434 in order to improve the effect, and an operable position (first position) that can be pressed by the player, and the player. It is possible to displace between the operation impossible position (second position) where the pressing operation cannot be performed. The operable position is the position where the effect button 136 is most protruded, and the inoperable position is the position where the effect button 136 is most recessed. The inoperable position is, for example, a position where the upper end edge of the flange-shaped flange portion provided at the upper end of the cylindrical button case surrounding the side wall of the button body of the effect button 136 and the upper surface of the button body are flush with each other. It may be a position where the upper surface of the button body is recessed from the upper edge of the collar. The condition for displacing the effect button 136 to the inoperable position is, for example, a case where the pressing of the effect button 136 is restricted in order to operate another effect button. When the button return condition is satisfied after the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position, the effect button drive motor 434 is driven to perform initial position return control for returning the effect button 136 from the inoperable position to the operable position. At this time, for example, the player may be pushing the effect button 136 and cannot return due to the pressing force. As a result, when the drive time of the effect button drive motor 434 elapses, the effect button 136 cannot return to the operable position and remains in the inoperable position. Thereafter, for example, by performing initial position return control every time a return condition such as the start of symbol variation display is established, it is possible to avoid such a situation from being maintained. . In addition, in the state where the production button 136 is maintained in the inoperable position, it is determined that the production button 136 is in the ON state. For example, during the execution of the effect for long press or the effect for continuous hitting, the long press It is determined that the operation is performed, and during the execution of the operation for one operation, it is not determined that the effect button 136 is operated unless there is an operation from OFF to ON. Become.

  125 (a1) to 125 (a3) show an example in which initial position return control is performed at the start of symbol variation display.

  FIG. 125 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state in which it has not been returned to the inoperable position in the previous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 125 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (2). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the detection state of the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, it is detected by the effect button initial position sensor 427 that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 acquires the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine that it is not in position. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is a position after the power-on operation (initial operation) performed when the power is turned on.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes an initial position returning process for returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, whereby the effect button drive motor 434 is driven, and the effect button 136 is set to the initial position as shown in FIG. 125 (a3). Returned. Note that FIG. 125 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (3). The timing at which the initial position return process is executed and the initial position return operation is started may be before the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be after the start of the decorative symbol variation display.

  125 (b1) to 125 (b3) illustrate an example in which the initial position return control is performed when the above-described Echigoya reach is performed.

  FIG. 125 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (10). That is, it is informed that the transition to the effect of step-up 2 is made. At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 125 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (11). That is, a state in which the effect of step-up 2 (second continuous effect display) has been started is shown. The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 detects the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 indicating that the effect of step-up 2 has been started. Determine the state. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, it is detected by the effect button initial position sensor 427 that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 acquires the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine that it is not in position.

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 executes an initial position return process for returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, whereby the effect button drive motor 434 is driven, and as shown in FIG. The effect button 136 is returned to the initial position before the operation effective period in the effect is started. That is, the effect button 136 is controlled to be returned to the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Note that FIG. 125 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (12). Note that the timing at which the initial position return process is executed and the initial position return operation is started is not limited to the above-described timing. For example, a return command indicating that the operation promotion notification image is displayed is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The initial position returning operation may be started based on the fact that the signal is received. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial position return process is executed in the effect of step up 2, but the initial position return process is executed in the effect of step up 1, the effect of step up 3, and the effect of step up 4. You may do it.

  FIG. 126 (a1) to FIG. 126 (a3) show an example in which the initial position return operation is not performed even though the step-up effect in the Echigoya reach described above is performed.

  FIG. 126 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 122 (4). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 126 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 122 (5). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 indicating that the effect of step-up 1 has been started, but the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 stores Since the part data for performing the initial position return operation corresponding to the return command is not set, the effect button 136 remains in the inoperable position without performing the initial position return operation.

  FIG. 126 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 122 (8). As described above, the effect button 136 does not perform the initial position return operation in step-up 1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 126 (a3), the effect button 136 is displayed while the effect of step-up 1 is being performed. 136 remains in the inoperable position. In addition, when the operation valid period is started, light is emitted in a light emission state that the chance button lamp 138 is operated, but the operation of the effect button 136 cannot be operated as described above. In this case, the chance button lamp 138 may be configured not to emit light in the light emitting mode indicating that the chance button lamp 138 is operated. For example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off.

  126 (b1) to FIG. 126 (b4) show the effect button 136 when the Echigoya character has escaped in the step-up 1 effect shown in FIGS. 126 (a1) to (a3). An operation example is shown.

  FIG. 126 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state where it is not returned while being displaced to the inoperable position.

  FIG. 126 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a2). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position.

  FIG. 126 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 124 (a3). The effect button 136 is still in an inoperable position. Thus, in this effect example, when the first operation effect for the first time fails, the initial position return operation is not performed in the symbol variation display. In this production example, the operation in the case where the first operation effect for the first time has failed is described. However, the first operation effect for the second time and the first operation effect for the third time may fail. Similarly, the initial position return operation may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b4), when the hold is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, the initial position return operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 125 (a2) to (a3). Done.

  In the present embodiment, after the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs the initial position returning operation, it is determined from the detection result of the effect button initial position sensor 427 whether or not the effect button 136 is in the initial position. However, when it is determined that there is no, predetermined retry control is performed. Specifically, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is not at the initial position as a result of the first initial position return operation, the CPU 404 performs the second initial position return operation. The retry operation is repeated until it is determined that the effect button 136 is in the initial position, and the effect button 136 is not in the initial position even though the initial position return operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the fifth time). If it is determined that there is a problem with the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button drive motor 434 is disabled and the effect button 136 is not driven until the power is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the production button 136 is displaced to the first position where the button protrudes and the second position where the button is recessed. The position can also be referred to as the first state and the second state. For example, the second position (second state) may be a position further protruding than the first position (first state), and it is difficult for the effect button 136 to harden and be pressed. The effect button 136 may be softened and pressed more easily, may be in a state of vibrating without being pressed, or the effect button 136 may be in the state. In the case where the movable body is accommodated, the state in which the movable body rotates or moves may be the second state.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 143.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 127 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, but only the right button 137 d is operated while both the effect button 136 and the right button 137 d are requested to operate. The state of the production performed in the case is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 127 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (10), as shown in FIG. 127 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the right button 137d is operated, the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate as shown in FIG. 127 (12), and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without being performed (that is, the operation result effect is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Here, the right button image 137dP1 may be deleted while the right button 137d is being operated. Thereby, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time is continuously displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2. Thereafter, when the operation effective period has elapsed without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the animation of the duel scene is resumed without performing the operation result effect as shown in FIG. 127 (13). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 127 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 127 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). The above-described operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. An operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed. This is the same in the description so far and also in the following description.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. In addition, although the example of production shown in FIG. 128 is an example of production corresponding to FIG. 111, only the production button 136 is operated while the operations of both the production button 136 and the right button 137 d are requested. The state of the production performed in the case is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 128 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (10), as shown in FIG. 128 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without being performed (that is, the operation result effect is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be deleted while the effect button 136 is being operated. Thereby, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time is continuously displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the animation of the duel scene is resumed without performing the operation result effect as shown in FIG. 128 (13). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 128 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 128 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 129 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 111, but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. It is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 129 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (1) to (7), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (7), after the effect (first effect) of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (8). In addition, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. In addition to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, the operation promotion notification image corresponds to the remaining time display bar 136P2a and the right button image 137dP1 corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 instead of the remaining time display bar 136P2. A remaining time display bar 136P2b is included. The remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 are displayed so that the meter decreases as the operation effective period elapses.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (10), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed as shown in FIG. 129 (11). When both are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 129 (12). In this effect example, in the operation result effect, a confirmation sound for notifying the big hit confirmation is output from the speaker 120. Here, a definite sound may not be output, or a definite sound may be output without fail. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 129 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). As described above, in this effect example, when the definite sound is output from the speaker 120, the big hit symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed more easily than when the definite sound is not output from the speaker 120.

  In this effect example, the operation result effect is performed when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. However, one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d in the operation effective period. The operation result effect may be performed also when the other button is operated within a predetermined time after the button is operated. Here, the predetermined time is preferably set to an appropriate time as an error (allowable range) of simultaneous pressing. However, in the pachinko machine 100, it is necessary to perform simultaneous operation with one hand because a game ball is fired. There are some cases, and it is preferable to adopt in such a case. In this case, an operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) described above may be performed. That is, in the operation effective period, the first operation result effect is performed by simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, and the first operation result effect is obtained by operating one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. What is comprised so that the 2nd operation result effect different from this may be included in this invention.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. 130 is an example corresponding to FIG. 129, but only the effect button 136 is operated while the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested. The state of the production performed in the case is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 130 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (10), as shown in FIG. 130 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 130 (12), the operation result effect is not performed, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed. , Both display modes according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be deleted while the effect button 136 is being operated. In this case, the display of the remaining time bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 may be continued. Thereby, it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not yet been performed because the remaining time display by the remaining time display bar 136P2a is continuously performed. Further, the remaining time display bar 136P2a may be deleted together with the effect button image 136P1. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the animation of the duel scene is resumed without performing the operation result effect as shown in FIG. 130 (13). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 130 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 130 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 131 is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 131, after the operation valid period is started, the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, but a button different from the requested button is operated. The situation is shown.

  First, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ′), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ′). The promotion notification image may be continuously displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, a type different from the operation result effect (for example, the first operation result effect) described above. The operation result effect (for example, the second operation result effect) may be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Geki Atsu” is displayed at the center of the display area, and 10 pandas are displayed around it. An operation result display including a display arranged so as to surround the character display is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″), the operation result effect described above. May be performed. That is, in this case, it can be said that the upper button 137a different from the button (right button 137d) for which an operation is instructed corresponds to a so-called hidden command (hidden button).

  In the above-described effect example, an example in which the effect button 136 and another direction key are operated has been described, but a button other than the direction key and the effect button 136 may be operated, for example, It is configured such that at least a part of the front frame door 106 can be pressed, and the first operation result effect described above is not performed when the effect button 136 and the press operation part on the front frame door 106 are operated. Alternatively, a second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect may be performed, or the first operation result effect may be performed. In addition, a lever may be provided instead of the pressing operation portion on the front frame door 106, and the operation result as described above may be obtained by operating the effect button 136 and the lever. In addition to the lever, operation means capable of pushing the structure can be applied. Each of these cases can also function as a hidden button.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 132 shows another example of the effect following FIG. 111 (6). Specifically, in FIG. 111, the operation result effect described above is performed by one simultaneous pressing operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 132, the effect button 136 and the right button are displayed. An operation result effect is performed as a result of continuous hitting by simultaneous operation of the button 137d.

  After the display shown in FIG. 111 (6) is performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (1), it is urged to repeatedly strike by the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d). A simultaneous operation including the display of "Right key and chance button repeated" is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image that prompts simultaneous operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d within the effective period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that represents the remaining time of the effective period. 136P2 is included. The operation promotion notification image has the same display form as the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), but may have a different display form. For example, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are repeatedly hit. An animated display may be performed. The operation effective period in this effect example may be a period in which simultaneous pressing of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested a plurality of times.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (3), when one or more simultaneous operations are performed, the effect movable body 225 moves downward little by little as shown in FIG. 132 (4), and the effect movable body The lower part of 225 overlaps a part of the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed. It should be noted that every time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, an effect that the effect movable body 225 vibrates is performed, and when the predetermined number of times (for example, five times) the simultaneous operation is performed, the effect movable body 225 may move downward. That is, an effect in which the effect movable body 225 vibrates each time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated can be referred to as an example of the operation result effect. Further, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d can be used once or a plurality of times. An effect in which the effect movable body 225 moves downward when simultaneous operations are performed can also be an example of an operation result effect. That is, it can also be said that an operation result effect is performed for each effect that the effect movable body 225 moves little by little by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. An effect different from the operation result effect may be performed. Further, every time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, the contents of the effect are, for example, first operation result effect> second operation result effect> third operation result effect. May be configured to change each time a simultaneous operation is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (5), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or a plurality of times simultaneously, the effect is movable as shown in FIG. 132 (6). The body 225 moves further downward, and about 3/4 below the effect movable body 225 overlaps the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (7), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or multiple times, as shown in FIG. 132 (8), the effect movable body 225 is displayed. Moves further downward, and the entire effect movable body 225 overlaps the front side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed. That is, the same effect as in FIG. 111 (12) is performed.

  In this production example, the long-press auto-strike function (described later) may be activated for the production button 136. For example, the production button 136 and the right button 137d are operated before the operation effective period starts. After that, when the operation valid period is started, the operation movable effect 225 such as the effect movable body 225 vibrates is performed for the first time. The right button 137d that has not been performed may be configured such that the operation result effect is not performed unless the operation state is OFF> ON. Further, after the operation valid period is started, the operation result presentation may be performed on the condition that each button requested to operate is OFF> ON. For example, when the operation effective period is started in a state where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed unless the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated again. May be configured. Further, when the operation valid period is started in a state where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is performed every time the effect button 136 is pseudo-struck repeatedly. Also good. In addition, when the long press auto-strike function is enabled for the effect button 136, the timing at which the operation result effect is performed may be based on the timing at which the effect button 136 is subjected to a pseudo continuous operation. The timing at which the player operates the right button 137d for which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not valid may be used as a reference. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the operation result effect by arbitrarily combining these.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 133 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, the effect mode 136 is configured so that it can be set to the auto mode. When a button effect requiring operation is performed, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, the operation result effect is performed assuming that the effect button 136 is operated. That is, in this production example, while the operation of both the production button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only the right button 137d is operated, but both the production button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. It is shown that the operation result effect is being performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 133 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (10), as shown in FIG. 133 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When only the right button 137d is operated, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 133 (12). Thus, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 is controlled as being operated even if it is not operated. Therefore, by operating the right button 137d, the effect button It is controlled so that an operation result effect is performed as if both 136 and the right button 137d were operated. In this example, the deterministic sound is not output, but the deterministic sound may be output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 133 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 133 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The production example shown in FIG. 134 is a production example corresponding to FIGS. 129 (7) to (15). In this production example, a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by a long press operation of the production button 136. It has a long-press automatic continuous hitting function. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer, and the repeated operation is an effect button 136. This is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. It should be noted that the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In this production example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, 200 ms interval) is performed in a pseudo manner while the presentation button 136 is continuously pressed. It is configured. Further, in this effect example, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) with the effect button 136, the long press auto-strike function is performed in order to appropriately perform the single operation with the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 134 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (7) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (3), the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 134 (5) at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (4). Is performed. However, since the timing at which the right button 137d is operated is a timing before the pseudo continuous hit operation is started, the effect button 136 is in an operation invalid state. Therefore, at this timing, the operation result effect is not started. Thereafter, when the pseudo continuous hit operation is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (6), the operation of the effect button 136 becomes valid, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 134 (7), an operation result effect is performed. Thus, in this effect example, since the long press auto-strike function is enabled, both buttons are enabled when the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated. It will be delayed until the timing is reached. In this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be validated when the operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, for example, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time after the right button 137d is operated, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 136d is not made effective at the timing when the effect button 136 is started to be pressed for a long time. You may make it delay until it becomes the timing which starts a continuous striking operation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (8), after the duel scene animation is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 134 (9) to (10) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 134 (8) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. In addition, although the example of an effect shown in FIG. 135 is an example of an effect corresponding to FIG. 134, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is also effective in this example of an effect. In this effect example, after the effect button 136 is operated, the right button 137d is operated and both buttons are operated. However, the right button is operated before the timing when the pseudo continuous operation is started. A state in which the operation of the button 137d is released is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 135 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (7) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (3), the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 135 (5) at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (4). Is performed. However, at the timing when the right button 137d is operated, since it is a period in which the pseudo continuous hit operation is not started, the effect button 136 is in an operation invalid state. Therefore, at this timing, the operation result effect is not started. Thereafter, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 135 (6) before the timing at which the pseudo continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started, the effect button 136 and the right button are displayed. As shown in FIG. 135 (7), the operation result notification image is not performed and the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are not displayed. Are both displayed according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Thereafter, when the operation valid period elapses without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, the animation of the duel scene is resumed without performing the operation result effect as shown in FIG. 135 (8). Thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 135 (9) to (10) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 135 (8) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 130 (13) to (15).

  136 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 136 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 133. However, in this effect example, when the auto mode is set, not only the effect button 136 but also the direction key including the right button 137d. When a button effect requiring operation of the direction key is performed, the operation result effect is performed even if the direction key is not operated, assuming that the direction key is operated. In other words, in this effect example, while both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are requested to be operated, the operation result effect is obtained even when neither the effect button 136 nor the right button 137d is operated. It shows what happens. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 136 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (9), when the timing shown in FIG. 136 (10) is reached, as shown in FIG. 136 (11), either the effect button 136 or the right button 137d In spite of being not operated, the operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 136 (12). As described above, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are controlled as being operated without being operated, and thus the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are controlled. Even if neither of them is operated, the operation result effect is controlled so that the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously. In this example, the deterministic sound is not output, but the deterministic sound may be output. In addition, the timing at which the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated after the operation valid period is started can be set as appropriate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (13), after the duel scene animation is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 136 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 136 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 133 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 137 to FIG. 138 are diagrams showing an example of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Here, FIG. 137 is another effect example continuing from FIG. 107 (e), and FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example effect shown in FIG. 137 step by step.

  FIG. 137 (a) continuing from FIG. 107 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (b), the effect button 136 is displayed in the effective period (in this effect example, it may be referred to as the second effective period) on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display is started. An operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the button is displayed. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Thus, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image 136P is an example of an operation display related to the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 137 (c), the valid period is reduced. In FIG. 137 (d), the player presses the effect button 136. Here, the effect button 136 is in a normal button state. For example, the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red and no operation such as vibration is performed (second button state of the effect button 136). When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. It should be noted that even when the effect button 136 is not pressed within the effective period, the display as shown in FIG. 137 (e) may be performed, or the display as shown in FIG. 137 (e) may be performed. May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (e). This also applies to the effect for one-time operation, the effect for continuous hitting, and the effect for long press. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 functions as a second operation result display. Further, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, “operation result display” may be referred to as “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 137 (f), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol variation display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display. As described above, when the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed, the big hit symbol is more easily determined and displayed than when the operation promotion notification image 136P is not displayed. It may not be configured as such.

  In FIG. 137 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed in FIG. 137 (i). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (i) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (j) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  In FIG. 137 (k), the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, the effect (first effect) of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is then started at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l). Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously within the effective period (in this effect example, sometimes referred to as the first effective period). An operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to enter the operated state is displayed. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that represents the remaining time of the effective period. 136P2 is included. At this time, an operation waiting animation display indicating that the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is performed. At this time, the effect button image 136 </ b> P <b> 1 may not be displayed and may be a still image. In the present embodiment, when the display in which the effect button image 136P1 is oscillating is performed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the display in which the effect button image 136P1 is oscillating is not performed. It has become. Note that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), an effect button 136 (sometimes referred to as second operation means in this effect example) and a right button 137d (sometimes referred to as first operation means in this effect example). ) Is operated, as shown in FIG. 137 (o), the operation result effect shown in FIG. 137 (e) (in this effect example, sometimes referred to as the second operation result effect) Different operation result effects (in this effect example, sometimes referred to as a first operation result effect) are performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation including a display in which the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed at the center of the display area and ten pandas are arranged around the character display around the display. The result is displayed. Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), when the operation effective period is started, the effect button 136 lights in red and vibrates (first button state of the effect button 136). Thereby, the expectation to the big hit with respect to a player may be able to be raised. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 vibrates, the big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the effect button 136 does not vibrate. Note that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (p), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 138 (q) to (r) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 138 (p) to (r) are the same as those in FIGS. 111 (13) to (15). Here, the second operation means may be the effect button 136, the right button 137d, or another direction key. The first operation means may be the right button 137d, an effect button, or another direction key.

  In this production example, the first button state and the second button state of the production button 136 differ depending on whether or not the production button 136 vibrates. For example, the first button state and the second button state Then, you may make it differ according to the strength of vibration. For example, the effect button 136 may vibrate with strong vibration in the first button state, and the effect button 136 may vibrate with weak vibration in the second button state. Moreover, although the lighting mode of the chance button lamp 138 is the same in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, they may be different, for example, the first button state and the second button state. The button buttons may be different in emission color (for example, the first button state is a state in which the effect button 136 emits light in the first emission color, and the second button state is The effect button 136 may be in a state of emitting light in the second emission color.) Although the same emission color is used, the brightness may be different (for example, the first button state is the effect button 136). Is a state in which light is emitted at the first luminance, and the second button state may be a state in which the effect button 136 emits light at a second luminance lower (higher) than the first luminance). So that the number of LEDs (For example, the first button state is a state in which the light emission number of the LEDs constituting the chance button lamp 138 is the first number, and the second button state is an LED constituting the chance button lamp 138. May be in a state where the number of emitted light is a second number that is smaller (larger) than the first number. Further, the form of the effect button 136 is the same in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, but may be different. For example, in the second button state, the first button state is the first button state. The form which becomes the position which the main body of the production | presentation button 136 protruded with respect to the button state may be sufficient, and the form which becomes a depressed position may be sufficient. In other words, the first button state and the second button state are included in the present invention as long as at least a part of the states is configured to be different.

  In addition, the state of the effect button 136 before the start of the first effective period may be the same, or the state of the effect button 136 may change in a period other than the first effective period, For example, it may function as a notice effect or a prefetch notice when the state of the effect button 136 changes.

  Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is configured to be able to vibrate, but for example, at least a part of the effect button 136 may be configured to be rotatable, for example, a portion where the effect button 136 is directly operated. The button body may be rotated, the body of the production button 136 is transparent and the inside can be visually recognized, and a decorative member such as a light emitter is rotatably provided inside the body of the production button 136. Also good. Further, a cylindrical case body that accommodates and supports the button main body of the effect button 136 and is attached to the door 108 with a ball storage tray may be configured to be rotatable. The effect button 136 configured in this manner may be rotated in the first button state, non-rotated in the second button state, or in the first button state. The rotation state may be at the first rotation speed, and in the second button state, the rotation state may be at the second rotation speed that is slower (faster) than the first rotation speed.

  Thus, in this production example, any form can be applied as long as the first button state and the second button state are different.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 139 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, when the operation valid period is started, the direction key vibrates. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 139 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (10), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (7), after the simultaneous operation effect (first effect) of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started, as shown in FIG. 139 (8). In addition, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (10), as shown in FIG. 139 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 139 (12). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 139 (11), the direction key vibrates when the operation effective period starts. Thereby, the expectation to the big hit with respect to a player may be able to be raised. In addition to the direction key, the effect button 136 may be vibrated. In the present embodiment, when the direction key (right button 137d) vibrates, the big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the direction key (right button 137d) does not vibrate. Note that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 139 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 139 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. 140 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129. In this effect example, when the operation valid period is started, the chance button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 blinks in red. It shows how it emits light.

  FIG. 140 (1) corresponds to FIG. 129 (1), and displays an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. As shown in FIG. 140 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In the present embodiment, a state in which the reach is performed by “decoration 7” is shown, and three decorative symbols are also displayed in the lower left of the display screen. These three decorative symbols, for example, are stopped and displayed at the same time in combination of symbols corresponding to the display results of Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2 at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 140 (2), when the right button 137d is operated, a symbol variation setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 140 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. Further, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in other light emission modes (for example, white color). Similarly, when the left button 137c is operated, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. The symbol variation mid-use setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol variation setting screen functions as an example of a volume setting display. This setting screen for changing symbols is arranged and displayed in a layer in front of the layer on which the effect display is performed. Therefore, while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the effect display is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is the third of the five levels.

  If the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 140 (4) while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one step as shown in FIG. 140 (5). Accordingly, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is in the fourth level. At this time, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The effect button 136 may be lit in red, or may be always lit in blue and not necessarily lit in red. In addition, the light may be emitted in another light emission mode (for example, a white light-up mode). In the present embodiment, the volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in a state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third level, the volume decreases by one level, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG is the second level. It will change to the display which shows. When the right button 137d (the left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto repeat function is activated during the long pressing time, and the volume increases by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured (to decrease), or the volume may not be increased (not decreased) as long as the operation is not performed once so that the auto repeat function is not activated.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (6) to (10) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (6) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (6) to (10), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (7), after the production of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (production button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) (first production) is started, as shown in FIG. 140 (8). In addition, the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 140 (10), as shown in FIG. 140 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 140 (12). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 140 (11), when the operation effective period starts, the effect button 136 emits light in a flashing manner in red. Thereby, the expectation to the big hit with respect to a player may be able to be raised. Note that the direction key (right button 137d) together with the effect button may be caused to emit light in a flashing manner in red. Further, when the operation effective period is started, the effect button 136 may be allowed to emit light in a manner that blinks in red, or may emit light in another light emission manner (for example, a manner that lights in red). There may be. In addition, when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 may not always emit blue light. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 emits light in a flashing manner in red, the big hit symbol is more easily determined and displayed than when the effect button 136 does not emit light in a blinking manner in red. . Note that the jackpot symbol does not have to be easily displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (13), after the duel scene animation is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 140 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 140 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 141 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 129, but is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while requesting the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137 d. In the operation promotion notification image, the operation of only the effect button 136 is promoted, and the right button 137d is not notified of the operation. That is, in this effect example, at least some of the buttons that require operation (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) are not notified to operate, and the operation of the right button 137d functions as a hidden command. It shows that Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 141 (1) to (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (1) to (5), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 141 (6) shows a state in which the duel scene animation continues. In this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (7), the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. However, as shown in FIG. 141 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 requires the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, but only “press the chance button” and the operation of the effect button 136. Is displayed as if requesting. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 141 (8), the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1, and the right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display corresponding to the right button image 136dP1. Bar 136P2b is not included. Therefore, if it is a normal player, it is expected that a predetermined operation result effect will be performed by operating only the effect button 136. For example, a player who obtains information by looking at the Internet or a strategy magazine, etc. If so, it may be expected that a special operation result effect is performed by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136.

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (10), as shown in FIG. 141 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d When both are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 141 (12). In this effect example, in the operation result effect, a confirmation sound for notifying the big hit confirmation is output from the speaker 120. If only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, only the effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 141 (12), for example, the drop of the effect movable body 225 is performed, and the definite sound is generated. An effect that is not output may be performed. Further, in the operation effective period, the operation result effect may not be performed and the operation promotion notification image may be continuously displayed until both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously (that is, the display) At least one of the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b being displayed may not be deleted). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 141 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 141 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 129 (13) to (15).

  142 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 142 (6) continuing from FIG. 141 (5) shows a state in which the duel scene animation continues. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (7), the simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. However, as shown in FIG. 142 (7), in this effect, the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, but unlike the effect shown in FIG. 141 (7), the decorative symbol display is performed. In the device 208, a display requesting button operation is not performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 142 (8), the decorative design display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the remaining time display bar 136P2, and does not include the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Therefore, a normal player who sees this may be able to recognize that the period in which something should be done has started, and may have a sense of expectation in the subsequent development of the production. On the other hand, for example, a player who has obtained information by looking at the Internet, a strategy magazine, or the like can expect a special operation result effect to be performed by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136. There is a case. Further, the display position of the remaining time display bar may be displayed at the same position as the display position when the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, for example, so that the player thinks that there is something, The remaining time display bar may be conspicuous as a position other than the button image (for example, the center of the display screen).

  Then, after the operation effective period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (10), as shown in FIG. 142 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 142 (12). In this effect example, in the operation result effect, a confirmation sound for notifying the big hit confirmation is output from the speaker 120. When only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, only the effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 142 (12), for example, the drop of the effect movable body 225 is performed, and the definite sound is generated. An effect that is not output may be performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (13), after the duel scene animation is resumed, the display shown in FIGS. 142 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 142 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 141 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 142.

  FIGS. 143 (8A) to 10 (A) correspond to FIGS. 142 (8) to (10). FIGS. 143 (8A) to 10 (A) show how the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The operation promotion notification image displayed here is different from FIGS. 142 (8) to (10), and includes only the remaining time display bars (136P2a, 136P2b) corresponding to the number of buttons that require the operation. The effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are not included. As described above, the buttons that require operation (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) are hidden buttons, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b corresponding to the hidden buttons are displayed, so that how many buttons are operated. You may be able to hint to the player what to do.

  FIGS. 143 (8B) to (10B) correspond to FIGS. 142 (8) to (10). FIGS. 143 (8B) to 10 (B) show how the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The operation promotion notification image displayed here is different from FIGS. 142 (8) to (10), and does not include any button image or remaining time display bar. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image is not displayed. Thus, there are cases where an effect that is a complete hidden command can be performed by not displaying any of the buttons (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) that require an operation and the remaining time display bar. In this production example, the animation of the duel scene animation is lightened, and therefore it may be possible to indicate to the player that the hidden command is being received. Here, the animation display of the duel scene may not be lightened.

  In the present embodiment, an example of an effect when a plurality of buttons are operated at the same time has been described. However, for example, a touch panel is provided and applied to a button and a touch panel operated simultaneously, or a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor. And may be applied to one that operates a button and a non-contact sensor at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the same button (the effect button 136) is used for the button for performing the normal button operation and the button for performing the long press automatic continuous hitting, but the button for performing the normal button operation is used. A mode in which an effect button corresponding to the operation method is provided, such as providing a button for performing long press automatic continuous hitting, may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a single operation effect, an effect may be performed in which a plurality of buttons are operated at preset timings. Specifically, for example, an effect button image 136P1, a right button image 137dP1, and a remaining time display bar 136P2 are displayed as operation promotion notification images, and an icon of the effect button 136 is displayed at a predetermined position on the gauge of the remaining time display bar 136P2. An icon of the right button 137d may be displayed to indicate the operation timing of each button, and when each button is operated at an appropriate timing, such an effect that an operation result effect is performed may be performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, you may make it perform the production which combined long press operation and 1 time operation. For example, a configuration may be provided in which an operation result effect is performed by pressing and holding the left button 137c to increase the gauge and operating the effect button 136 in that state. In this case, the production effect may be further improved if the production content varies according to the gauge amount at the time when the production button 136 is operated. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that combines a continuous hit operation or a long press automatic continuous hit and a single operation, or an effect that combines a continuous hit operation or a long press automatic continuous hit and a long press operation. .

  Moreover, you may make it perform long press simultaneous operation effect that operation result effect is performed by performing long press operation with each of two or more buttons, for example, when long press simultaneous operation effect is started, After a display that prompts the user to simultaneously press and hold both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is performed, a display that prompts the user to release the long-pressed button is displayed. As a result, when the long-press simultaneous operation effect is successful, an operation result effect indicating that the operation has been successful is performed. Here, the degree of change in the production (for example, the amount of increase in gauge, etc.) differs between when one of the two buttons requested to be operated is pressed and when both are pressed for a long time. May be. Furthermore, the degree of change in the production may be different depending on whether or not only one button is pressed for a long time and when only the other button is pressed for a long time. Further, the production may not be changed unless both buttons are pressed for a long time. Also, when releasing two long-pressed buttons, make sure that the displayed content is different, for example, if you release only one of the two buttons or if you release both, the effects on the operation result effect will be different. Alternatively, the operation result effect may not be performed when only one of the two buttons is released, and the operation result effect may be performed when both of the two buttons are released.

  In addition, a configuration may be provided in which an operation result effect is performed by performing a continuous hitting operation or a long press automatic continuous hitting with each of two or more buttons.

  In the present embodiment, the buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided one by one for each function, but two or more buttons having the same function are provided. It may be configured to be applicable to the embodiment. For example, a configuration in which two effect buttons are provided and three upper buttons 137a are provided, and an effect is provided by simultaneously operating two effect buttons and one or more upper buttons. You may prepare. In addition to the buttons, a production lever that simulates a production lever, a car handle, a motorcycle handle, etc. may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiments. You may provide the structure which produces an effect by operating simultaneously the button of. Alternatively, an effect dial such as a jog dial may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, the effect is performed by simultaneously operating the effect dial and other buttons. Such a configuration may be provided. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of effect buttons 136 having the same function but different uses may be provided so as to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, a first effect button used in a normal effect and a second effect button used when a special effect is being performed are provided, and the first effect button is operated while operating the second effect button. You may provide the structure which performs the production which raises a feeling of expectation further by operating one production button.

  In the present embodiment, the eco mode (power saving mode) may be set. In the eco mode, for example, when a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the production button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed, the setting screen is displayed (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation). On the screen, setting can be made by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e. At this time, every time the direction key or the determination button 137e is operated, notification to that effect (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Further, when the eco mode is set, notification to that effect (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Here, the eco mode is, for example, a decoration for the purpose of reducing power consumption when the symbol variation display is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the customer waiting demonstration display is started. In this mode, the driving of one or a plurality of driving devices is limited or stopped, such as reducing the brightness of the backlight of the symbol display device 208, turning off the various lamps 418, or turning off the output from the speaker 120. When the eco mode is set, the light emission brightness and volume of the various lamps 418 during the game may be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, an original (Daitomo) mode may be set. In the original mode, for example, when a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed, the setting screen is displayed (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation). On the screen, setting can be made by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e. Note that an original mode selection switch that switches between enabling and disabling the original mode may be provided in the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIGS. 4 and 77. The original mode selection switch is operated by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100 when the pachinko machine 100 is shipped from the factory, or operated by a store clerk of the store where the pachinko machine is installed. The original mode selection switch may be disabled after shipment by, for example, caulking a portion of the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 where the original mode selection switch is provided at the time of shipment. That is, since the original mode selection switch cannot be operated by the player, it is preferable that the original mode selection switch is configured to be operated only by a limited number of people such as a manufacturer's person or a store clerk.

  In the original mode, the gaming machine is capable of setting the original mode, and history information of the result of playing in the state set in the original mode is stored in the gaming machine. At the game stand, various privileges (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate and an effect indicating information related to the profit of the game) according to the history information are given. When the game in which the original mode is set is to be ended, individual setting information, which is individual player information, including history information stored in the game table is input to the server. Each time a game in which the original mode is set is finished, individual setting information including new history information reflecting the history of the game is issued from the gaming table. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. When the individual setting information stored in the server is input to the game machine when the next game is played, a privilege according to the history information included in the input individual setting information is also provided at the next game. This individual setting information is included in an encrypted password having a predetermined number of digits, and is exchanged between the game console-player (external device apparatus) -server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine stores a corresponding model code. In specifications where history information can be used in common between different models, there are multiple corresponding model codes. In specifications where history information can be used only between the same models, there is only one corresponding model code. .

  In the original mode, when inputting a password to store the player's history information in the pachinko machine 100, for example, in a screen for setting the original mode, a predetermined direction key (for example, the right button 137d) is pressed. By operating, it is possible to transition to the password input screen. On the password input screen, for example, while viewing the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone to which the password has been transmitted, operate the direction key to move to the position of the desired character, and press the effect button 136, the decision button 137e, etc. By doing so, the input character is determined. After the password input of a predetermined number of characters (for example, five characters) is completed, when a predetermined operation (for example, an input completion operation using the direction key and the enter button 137e) is performed, the input password is stored in the pachinko machine 100. 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  When the player history information stored in the pachinko machine 100 is initialized as described above, for example, a predetermined direction key (for example, the left button 137c) is displayed on the screen for setting the original mode. It may be possible to perform this by operating. In this case, a confirmation message as to whether or not the player's history information may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 may be displayed and a warning message may be displayed for initialization.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described auto mode function may be configured to be set to ON or OFF. The auto mode is set, for example, by performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, an operation of the production button 136 in a waiting state for a customer), to shift to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), On this setting screen, setting can be performed by appropriately operating the direction key and the determination button 137e. In addition, for example, a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the determination button 137e in the waiting state for a customer) may be performed, or the setting may be performed by a direction key other than the determination button 137e. It may be settable. For example, the auto mode function may be switched between the ON state and the OFF state each time the enter button 137e is operated in the customer waiting state.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, you may be comprised so that time setting can be performed. The time setting is performed, for example, by performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state), and the setting screen is moved (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation). On the screen, setting can be made by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e. When the screen shifts to the time setting screen as described above, for example, the time can be changed by operating a direction key.

  Further, in this embodiment, only the effect button 136 may be activated by the long press automatic repetitive function, or each button (up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, and right button 137d) constituting the direction key together with the effect button 136. , The determination button 137e, the cancel button 317f), or the two or more buttons may be effective for the long press auto-strike function.

  In the present embodiment, the setting operation (for example, the first setting operation) is performed by operating one button (for example, the right button 137d) constituting the direction key. A setting operation (for example, a second setting operation) different from the first setting operation may be configured by simultaneous operation of two buttons (for example, the left button 137c and the right button 137d). The password may be selected by operating the button 137c, and the input password may be all cleared by simultaneous operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, the setting operation may be configured by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the direction key.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the long press auto repetitive function and the auto mode are disabled only when a special effect such as a button effect requesting simultaneous pressing of two or more buttons is performed. May be. Further, even when the hidden command can be received, the automatic continuous hitting function and the auto mode may be disabled. According to this, the presence of the hidden command may be kept secret from the normal player. Further, the long-press auto-strike function or the auto mode may be enabled even when the hidden command can be received. According to this, it may be possible to notify the normal player of the presence of the hidden command.

  In the present embodiment, the operation result effect is described as being performed during the execution of the reach effect, but the symbol variation display before the reach effect is started may be performed, or the reach effect is not performed. The symbol variation display may be displayed, the re-drawing effect that is performed after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol may be executed, the decorative lottery promotion promotion lottery of the decorative symbol during the big hit, or the probability variation lottery The production may be in progress, or may be applied to various notifications or effects such as notification of a pre-reading notice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, BGM may be selected (song selection). For example, on a setting screen that can be shifted while waiting for a customer, a song selection is performed by using a direction key or an effect button 136. It may be configured to be able to. The song selection may be changed not only during the customer waiting but also during, for example, the big hit start effect or during the big hit game, and may be configured so that the song can be selected by the direction key or the effect button 136. In this case, for example, the display of the name of the song that is changed by operating the direction key and the notification that the song selection has been confirmed by the operation of the effect button 136 can be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. There is a case.

In the above description,
“First operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, etc.]
A second operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, a production button 136 or the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a volume setting display [for example, a symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (3), a volume setting screen shown in FIG. 115 (e), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 111 (12), FIG. 112 (c5), FIG. 114 (i), etc.]
The volume setting display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the right button is displayed during the symbol variation display. When 137d is operated, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (3)],
The first operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, in FIG. 111 (11) As shown, when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In the symbol display device 208, an effect display that the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the display contents when the first operating means is operated and when the plurality of operating means are operated can be made different, so that the display variations according to the operation can be increased, and the player You may be able to improve your interests.

  Here, the first operating means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the first operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the second operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the second operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may be capable of displaying other than the volume setting display and the first operation result display. . The display means may always display the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may not display the volume setting display and the first operation result display.

  In addition, the volume setting display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the first operation means, or in response to things other than the operation of the first operation means. May be displayed. Further, the volume setting display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means, or may not be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means. May be.

  The first operation result display may be displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation result may be displayed. There may be a case where the message is displayed in response to something other than the operation of both the means and the second operation means. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. There may be a case where it is not displayed in response to the operation of both of the two operation means.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the volume setting display, brightness setting display, display setting display on display means (decorative symbol display device 208, liquid crystal display device, etc.), and character selection for selecting a character to appear in the game. Display, music selection display for selecting BGM, mode selection display for selecting the production mode during the game, and user mode display for entering a password etc. to take over the player's game history can be displayed It may be configured. That is, the volume setting display can be said to be an example of an effect unit that can set a setting value by a setting operation.

  Here, the types of display settings of the display means include, for example, LCD backlight brightness adjustment, color temperature adjustment, black level adjustment (brightness adjustment of black part of video), white level adjustment (video) Brightness adjustment of white portion), color density adjustment, hue adjustment, sharpness (image outline) adjustment, resolution adjustment, and the like. In addition, when the sound output means is configured to include a high-pitched speaker and a low-pitched speaker, the volume adjustment for only the low sound, the volume adjustment for only the high sound, and the balance adjustment for the high and low sounds are also included in the settings for the sound output means. May be.

  Moreover, the display performed according to the operation of the first operation means is not limited to the setting display, but may be an effect display. For example, when two treasure chests are displayed side by side, if the right button 137d is operated, the right treasure chest opens to acquire an item, or the left button 137c is selected when selecting one of the two left and right routes. When operated, it is also possible to perform an effect display in which the left route is selected.

Further, in the period in which the “first effect [for example, the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 111 (6) to FIG. [For example, in response to the operation of both the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the decision button 137e, etc.] and the second operation means [for example, the effect button 136, etc.] The first operation result display is configured to be displayed [for example, in the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 111 (6) to (12), the effect button 136 and When the right button 137d is operated simultaneously, an effect display as shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed, etc.]
During the period in which the first effect is performed, the volume setting display is not displayed even when the first operation means is operated [for example, the simultaneous operation effect shown in FIG. 111 (6). When is started, the volume setting setting is prohibited, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also described.

  According to this gaming machine, since the volume setting display is not displayed even if the second operation means is operated during the operation of the first operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed, the first effect is performed. In some cases, the player can prevent the player from unintentionally displaying the volume adjustment display and concentrate on the first effect.

  Here, the first operation result display is displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the period during which the first effect is performed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means in a period other than the period in which the first effect is performed. The first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed. In the period during which the first performance is performed, the first operation unit and the second operation unit may not be displayed in response to the operation.

  The volume setting display may not be displayed only when the first operating means is operated during the period during which the first effect is performed, or during the period during which the first effect is performed. It may not always be displayed when one operating means is operated.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second operation result display [for example, the reach state entry preview image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j)],
The second operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (g) to FIG. 107 (j). , A reach state entry preview image 2071 may be displayed when the production button 135 is pressed during the operation valid period]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means, or other than the operation of the second operation means. It may be displayed according to the above. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means, or is not displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means. There may be cases.

In addition, during the period in which the “second effect [for example, the effect of displaying the operation promotion notification image 136P shown in FIG. 107 (g) to FIG. The second operation result display is configured to be displayed in response to the operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect may be displayed. It may be displayed in response to a matter other than the operation of the second operation means during the period when the operation is performed. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means during the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect is displayed. In the period to be performed, there may be a case where it is not displayed according to the operation of the second operation means.

  It should be noted that the second operation result display may be displayed when the first operation means is operated in addition to the second operation means in the period during which the second performance is performed, A display different from the result display (for example, a back button display) may be displayed.

  Further, the second operation result display may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means during a period other than the period during which the second effect is performed, An operation result display different from the result display may be displayed.

In addition, in the period in which the second performance is performed, the first operation result display is not displayed even if both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (f) to 116 (g), when an effect for operating the effect button 136 is performed, the operation result is obtained even if the effect button 136 and the right button 137 d are operated simultaneously. No production or volume change, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first operation result display is displayed even if both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated during the period in which the second effect is performed. The first operation result display may be displayed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed. There may be cases.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a first operation display,
The first operation display is a display relating to operations of both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, the chance button and the right key shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (10) Etc.]
The first operation result display is a display that is displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first operation result display may be displayed only until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. It may be displayed other than until both of the operating means are operated. Further, the first operation result display may be displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. There may be cases where it is not displayed until both of the means are operated.

  The first operation display is displayed during the first presentation, but the first operation display may not be displayed during the second presentation. In this case, when there is an operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, a predetermined operation result effect (for example, a back button effect) may be performed.

  In addition, during the first production, the first operation display may be performed. For example, in the tutorial production performed during the symbol variation display, “If you press the chance button and the right key, The first operation display may be performed at a timing completely different from the timing at which the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated. Further, in this tutorial effect, a display explaining the period during which the back button effect is executed and the operation method of the operation means at that time may be performed.

In addition, “the first operation display is a display that prompts the user to operate both the first operation unit and the second operation unit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The door body [for example, the front frame door 106 or the like] is provided, and the door body is provided with the first operation means and the second operation means,
The player can operate the first operating means and the second operating means at the same time with one hand [for example, a ball provided on the front frame door 106 as shown in FIG. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with a storage tray, and the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since there are two operation means at positions that are easy to operate even when performing a launch operation, simultaneous operation of both operation means can be easily performed with one hand, and familiarity with the operation of the operation means. It may be easier for non-players to participate.

  Here, the door body may be provided with only the first operation means and the second operation means, or may be provided with other than the first operation means and the second operation means. Good. Further, the door body may be provided with the first operating means and the second operating means without fail, or the first operating means and the second operating means may not be provided. Good.

  In addition to the first operating means and the second operating means, there may be one that allows the player to operate simultaneously with one hand.

Further, the second operating means is an operating means having a size larger than that of the first operating means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In other words, the second operating means can be said to be an operating means having a wider surface that can be operated than the first operating means.

  The first operating means may be smaller than the second operating means, and the first operating means and the second operating means may be the same size.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the first operation unit when the first operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 400 As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control in accordance with the operation of each button constituting the operation key unit 137],
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the second operation unit when the second operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 90. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs a control according to the operation button 136, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means. If there is, control other than the control related to the operation of the first operation means may be executable. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the first operation means may not be executed.

  Further, the production control means may be capable of executing only control related to the operation of the second operation means when the operation of the second operation means is performed, or the operation of the second operation means may be performed. If there is, control other than the control related to the operation of the second operating means may be executable. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the operation of the second operation means when the operation of the second operation means is performed, or the operation of the second operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the second operation means may not be executed.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means that can be operated by the player [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
Drive means for driving the operation means [for example, an effect button drive motor 434 and the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
The driving means moves the operating means to a first position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 125 (a3)] and a second position [for example, an inoperable position shown in FIG. 125 (a1). Etc.], and can be displaced between
One of the plurality of types of display is a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display [eg, operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 125 (b3)]”).
When the operation means is at a position different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed, the operation means may be displaced to the first position. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b2) to (b3), when the effect button 136 is in a position different from the operable position (initial position), an initial position return operation is performed to perform an operation promotion notification image. The production button 136 is returned to the operable position before is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game stand, a game stand having a feature in the operation means can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it is possible in advance that the operation valid period of the operation means is started by the movable means being the second state being transformed into the first state before the operation display is displayed. The player may be able to grasp.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the driving means may be capable of driving only the operating means, or may be capable of driving other than the operating means. Further, the drive means may necessarily drive the operation means, or may not drive the operation means.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the operation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the operation display. The display means may always display the operation display, or may not display the operation display.

  The driving means may be capable of displacing the operating means only between the first position and the second position, or the operating means may be moved between the first position and the second position. It may be possible to displace other than between. Further, the driving means may be one that necessarily displaces the operating means between the first position and the second position, or the operating means is displaced between the first position and the second position. It may not be allowed.

  The operation means may be configured to be displaced to the first position only when the operation means is different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed. The timing before the display is displayed may be configured to be displaced to the first position even when the operation means is different from the first position. In addition, the operation means may be configured to always be displaced to the first position when the operation means is different from the first position at a timing before the operation display is displayed. There may be a case where the operation means is not displaced to the first position when the operation means is different from the first position at the timing before the operation is performed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a first continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 1 shown in FIG. 126 (a1) to FIG. 126 (a3)],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b1) to FIG. 125 (b3), etc.]
In one symbol variation display, both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display may be displayed,
The second continuous effect display is a display displayed after the first continuous effect display,
The operation display is a display that is displayed during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. Etc.],
The operation display is a display that is displayed during a period in which the second continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 125 (b3), an operation promotion notification image is displayed in the effect of Step Up 2. Etc.],
When the operation means is at the second position at a timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, the operation means is the first position. [For example, as shown in FIG. 125 (b1) to FIG. 125 (b3), the operation promotion notification image is displayed after the effect of step-up 2 is started. The production button 136 is returned to the initial position, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to grasp in advance that the second operation display is displayed in the second continuous effect display.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is known in advance by the displacement state of the operation means that the second of the continuous effect display is displayed, so that the player may have a sense of expectation for the change. .

  Here, the display means may be configured to display only both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, or other than both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. Also, it may be configured to be displayable. The display means may be configured to display both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, or at least one of the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. Either of them may not be displayed.

  Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is displayed only after the first continuous effect display, or may be displayed after a display other than the first continuous effect display. Also good. Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is always displayed after the first continuous effect display, or may not be displayed after the first continuous effect display.

  Further, the operation display may be displayed only during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. There may be. In addition, the operation display may be always displayed during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may not be displayed in the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. Also good.

  Further, the operation means is displaced to the first position only when the operation means is at the second position at a timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started. In addition to the case where the operation means is at the second position at the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, It may be configured to be displaced to one position. In addition, the operation means is always displaced to the first position when the operation means is at the second position at the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started. In the timing from when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the display of the operation display is started, the first operation is performed when the operation means is at the second position. The position may not be displaced.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The first position is an initial position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 125 (a3), etc.]
The production control means is a means capable of executing control for displacing the operation means to the first position (hereinafter referred to as “initial position return control”),
The effect control means is means capable of executing the initial position return control when the operation means is not the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started [for example, FIG. As shown in (b2) to (b3) of the same figure, an initial position return control is performed when the effect button 136 is not in the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Stand. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, by performing the initial position return operation for “movable means not in the initial position” before the operation acceptance period starts, it is possible to give a misunderstanding that the movable means is not in the initial position. There are cases where it can be prevented.

  Moreover, according to this game machine, since the production control means executes the initial position return control, the control burden on the main control unit may be able to be reduced.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the initial position return control, or may be capable of executing control other than the initial position return control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the initial position return control or may not execute the initial position return control.

  The production control means may be capable of executing the initial position return control only when the operation means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. It may be possible to execute the initial position return control other than the case where the operating means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the display is started.

In addition, “providing detection means [for example, production button initial position sensor 427] that can detect that the operation means is the first position,
The production control means can execute the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started. Means
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to accurately grasp that the operating means is not at the first position.

  Here, the detecting means may be capable of detecting only that the operating means is at the first position, or may be capable of detecting other than the first position. Further, the detecting means may always detect that the operating means is at the first position, or may not detect that the operating means is at the first position.

  The effect control means can execute the initial position return control only when the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. The initial position return control can be executed in addition to the case where the detection means detects that the operation means is not the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. There may be. The effect control means always executes the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. Alternatively, the initial position return control may not be executed when the detection unit detects that the operation unit is not at the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. .

In addition, the production control means is means capable of executing retry control,
The retry control is control for executing the initial position return control again when it is determined that the operating means is not in the first position even if the initial position return control is executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the retry control, or may be executable in addition to the retry control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the retry control or may not execute the retry control.

In addition, “the first position is a position at which the player can operate the operation means [for example, an operable position, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first position may be a position where only the player can operate the operation means, or may be a position where the operation means can be operated by a player other than the player. Further, the first position may be a position where the player always operates the operation means, or the player may not operate the operation means.

In addition, “the second position [for example, inoperable position, etc.] is a position in which the player cannot operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the second position is a position where the player can operate the operation means, and may be a position different from the first position.

Further, “When the symbol variation display is started, when the operation means is at a position different from the first position [for example, an inoperable position, etc.], the operation means is displaced to the first position. Configured as
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the operation means is returned to the initial position when performing the effect of returning the operation means to the initial position by performing the operation of returning the operation means to the initial position at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be easier to get started.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a state where the operating means is not in the initial position from being continued in a plurality of symbol variation displays, and to make it easier for a game clerk to determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred. There is.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, when the initial position return operation is performed at the start of symbol variation, when operating in a range that overlaps the range of rotation of the other effect movable body, contact with the other effect movable body is performed. There are cases where it can be easily prevented.

In addition, “the operation display is a display for urging the operation of the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image or the like shown in FIG. 125 (b3)”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means that can be operated by the player [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in response to the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect for continuous hitting shown in FIG. 120 (g). Production display etc. that is reduced]
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in a first operation effective period [for example, an operation effective period in an effect for repeated hits, etc.]
The first operation effective period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, and a timing at which a long press operation in the first operation effective period is started (hereinafter referred to as “first timing [for example, FIG. 117 (B), the timing of A1, etc.] ”)) for a first time after the long pressing operation by the operating means continues [for example, time T1, etc., until the liquid crystal command for auto-tapping is transmitted. Depending on what has been done, the first effect display may be displayed,
In response to the long pressing operation being performed for a second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period, the first effect display may be displayed,
The second timing is a timing at which the long press operation has been performed for the first time after the first timing has been reached,
The first time and the second time are different,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the timing at which the first effect display is displayed can be made different between the time from the timing at which the long press operation is started and the time from the timing at which the time has elapsed, There are cases where the timing at which the performance is displayed does not become monotonous and the player can be entertained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be a display that may be displayed only during the first operation effective period, or may be displayed outside the first operation effective period. The first effect display may be displayed without fail during the first operation effective period, or may not be displayed during the first operation effective period.

In addition, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed only when the long press operation by the operation unit is continued for the first time from the first timing. In addition, it may be configured to be displayed in response to a thing other than that the long pressing operation by the operating means has been performed for the first time from the first timing, The one effect display may be configured to be always displayed in response to a long press operation performed by the operation means from the first timing and performed for the first time. According to the fact that the long press operation by the operation means has been performed for a first time from one timing, it may be configured not to be displayed,
In addition, the first effect display is displayed only when the long press operation has been performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period and is performed for the second time. There may be cases where there is a case where the first effect display is performed in response to the fact that the long press operation is continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. May be displayed. In addition, the first effect display is always displayed in accordance with the fact that the long press operation has been performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. In some cases, the first effect display may not be displayed in response to the long pressing operation being performed for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. There may be.

  Also, the first time and the second time may be the same or different, the first time may be longer, and the second time is longer. Also good.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a first result display [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 119 (n) or FIG. 120 (n)],
The first result display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (n) As described above, by operating the effect button 136 repeatedly, an operation result effect in which a bancho character throws a panda is displayed]
The first result display is a display that may be displayed even when the long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started [for example, FIG. 120 (n) As shown in FIG. 6, an operation result effect in which the chief character throws a panda away is also displayed by long pressing the effect button 136],
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means in the first operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first result display may be displayed even if a continuous hitting operation or a long press operation is performed, so that the player may be able to arbitrarily select an operation method. . In other words, a player who knows that the first result display is displayed even if the user makes a long-press operation or a long-press operation can enjoy the long-press operation. Since a player who does not have a continuous hit operation, a player who knows this may be able to do a little easier. That is, since there is an element that plays a game, participation in the game may be promoted.

  Here, the first result display may be displayed only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation may be displayed. It may be displayed even when the operation means is not repeatedly hit after the effective period starts. The first result display may be always displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period starts. In some cases, it may not be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit.

  Further, the first result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation may be displayed. It may be displayed even when a long press operation is performed after the effective period is started. In addition, the first result display may be displayed when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period may be displayed. It may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed after starting.

  In addition, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated in the first operation effective period, or the operation means may be displayed in the first operation effective period. There may be a case where it is displayed in response to an operation other than the operation. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated in the first operation effective period, or the operation means is displayed in the first operation effective period. It may not be displayed depending on the operation.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a continuous hit operation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 119 (c) to FIG. Is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility of being a big hit, and prompting the player to beat all the pandas within the effective operation period by hitting the production button 136 repeatedly. A series of displays in which an operation promotion notification image is displayed],
The continuous hit operation display is a display that prompts to repeatedly hit the operation means,
The first operation effective period is configured to start after the continuous hit operation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where it can be easily recognized that a continuous hitting operation display is performed to the player.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, a display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display of Tono-sama shown in FIG. ],
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in a second operation effective period [for example, an operation effective period in an effect for long press, etc.]
The second operation effective period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective,
The second operation effective period is a period different from the first operation effective period,
The long-pressing operation continues from the timing (hereinafter referred to as “third timing”) when the long-pressing operation is started in the second operation effective period for a third time [for example, liquid crystal for long-pressing Depending on what has been done, the second effect display may be displayed.
The second effect display is a display that is not displayed unless the long press operation is continued for the third time after the third timing [for example, shown in FIG. 121 (g). The display in which the display image of the swordsman is reduced while the display of Tono-sama is enlarged is not displayed until the time T3 has passed since the operation of the effect button 136, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even when the same long press operation is performed, the timing at which the effect display is displayed differs depending on the effect, so there may be variations in the display timing of the effect display, and the player may be entertained. is there.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, whether the player who is used to the game displays the first effect display or the second effect display depending on the time until the effect display is displayed. May be able to grasp and enjoy the operation.

  Here, the second effect display may be a display that may be displayed only in the second operation effective period, or may be displayed in a period other than the second operation effective period. Good. In addition, the second effect display may be always displayed during the second operation effective period, or may not be displayed during the second operation effective period.

  The second operation effective period may be a period in which only the operation of the operation unit is effective, or may be a period in which the operation other than the operation of the operation unit is effective. Further, it may be a period during which the operation of the operation means is always valid, or the operation of the operation means may not be valid.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only in response to the long press operation being performed for the third time from the third timing, It may be displayed in response to things other than that the long press operation has been performed for the third time from the above timing. In addition, the second effect display may be always displayed according to the fact that the long press operation has been performed for the third time from the third timing, or from the third timing. The display may not be displayed in response to the long press operation being performed for the third time.

“One of the plural types of displays is a long press operation display [for example, an operation promotion notification for promoting a long press operation of the effect button 136 shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to (h)”. Image display etc.],
The long press operation display is a display that prompts the user to press and hold the operation means.
The second operation effective period is configured to start after the long press operation display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 121 (c) to FIG. The operational validity period has started after the image is displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the second operation valid period is started after the long press operation display is seen, there may be a sufficient period of time during which the long press operation can be performed.

  Here, the second operation valid period may be configured to be able to start only after the long press operation display is started, or configured to be able to start other than after the long press operation display is started. May be. Further, the second operation valid period may be configured to always start after the long press operation display is started, or may not start after the long press operation display is started.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second result display [for example, an operation result effect by a long press operation, etc.]
The second result display is a display that may be displayed when the long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started. It may be displayed in addition to the case where the long press operation is performed after the operation valid period is started. Further, the second result display may be always displayed when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started, or the second operation effective period is displayed. It may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed after starting.

In addition, the first time [for example, time T1 until transmission of a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hit] after the first timing [for example, the timing of A1 in FIG. In response to the operation means being operated again before the passage of time, the first effect display [e.g., in the effect for repeated hits shown in FIG. Indication display etc. that the number of remaining pandas should decrease] may be displayed,
The first effect display is configured not to be displayed until the first time elapses while the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. A game table that features ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. Alternatively, it may be displayed other than when the operation means is operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. In addition, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing. There may be a case where the display is not performed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed since the first timing.

  Here, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed until only the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. Further, it may be configured not to be displayed even when a time other than the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. In addition, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed whenever the first time elapses while the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. There may be a case where the display is not performed after the first time has elapsed in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The production control means is means capable of executing control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the control burden on the main control unit may be reduced.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation, or may execute other than the control related to the long press operation in response to the long press operation. It may be a thing. Further, the production control means may always execute control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation, or may not execute control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation. Also good.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first operation effective period is a period started during display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

In addition, 'the first time is longer than the second time,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the first effect display from being displayed unintentionally.

  The first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time may be the same.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, etc.]
A second operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, a production button 136 or the like];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a volume setting display [for example, a volume gauge VG shown in FIG. 111 (3) or FIG. 115 (e)],
One of the plural types of displays is an operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 111 (12), FIG. 112 (c5), FIG. 114 (i), etc.]
A volume setting operation by the first operation means [for example, a volume setting operation by the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 111 (4) and FIG. 115 (f), etc.] is possible.
While the volume setting display is displayed, the volume setting operation is performed so that the display mode of the volume setting display changes [for example, FIG. 111 (3) to FIG. If the right button 137d is operated while the volume gauge VG in the third stage display mode is being displayed as shown in 115 (e) to (g), the volume gauge VG is changed from the third stage display mode. Change to the display mode of the fourth step,
In the first effective period, the operation result display is configured to be displayed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated [for example, When both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated as shown in FIG. 111 (11), the effect movable body 225 displays the decoration symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 111 (12). In addition to moving to the front side of the screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.]
The first valid period is a period during which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are valid [for example, the right button 137d at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9). A period in which the operation and the operation of the effect button 136 are enabled (operation effective period) is started, or a period in which the operation of both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 is enabled (operation effective period). Is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a display whose display mode changes with the passage of the first effective period (hereinafter referred to as“ first effective period display [for example, FIG. 111 (8) To the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 10 (10) and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b shown in FIG. 112 (b1)].
Even if only the first operation means is operated in the first effective period, the display mode of the first effective period display is continuously changed [for example, FIG. 112 (b1) ~ As shown in Fig. 13 (b3) and Fig. 113 (a1), the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b continue even if the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is operated. Etc.]
Even if only the second operation means is operated during the first effective period, the display mode of the first effective period display is continuously changed [for example, the right button 137d is operated. Even if only the effect button 136 is operated, the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b continuously decrease, etc.]
In the first effective period, the display of the first effective period display is terminated when both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (10) to (12) and FIG. 112 (c3) to (c5), both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are When operated, the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b are erased, and an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 shines is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display,
The operation promotion display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), and FIG. 113 (1). The operation promotion notification image that prompts both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be simultaneously operated within the effective period]
The first effective period is configured to start after the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, after displaying the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), The operation valid period starts at the timing shown in 111 (9)],
The operation promotion display is an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation image [for example, right side shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), FIG. 113 (1)]). The right button image 137dP1 etc. imitating the button 137d].
The operation promotion display is an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation image [eg, shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), FIG. 113 (1)]. A production button image 136P1 or the like imitating the button 136].
The first effective period display corresponding to the first operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 112 (b1)] and the first The first valid period display corresponding to the second operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 112 (b1)] is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “in the first effective period, the display of the first effective period display is ended when there is an operation of the second operating means during the operation of the first operating means. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated with the right button 137d being operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and the effect is movable. Effect display as if the body 225 is shining, etc.]
In the first effective period, the display of the first effective period display is ended when there is an operation of the second operating means during the operation of the second operating means. [For example, when the right button 137d is operated in a state where the effect button 136 is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display,
The operation promotion display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), FIG. 112 (b1), and FIG. 113 (1). The operation promotion notification image that prompts both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be simultaneously operated within the effective period]
The first effective period is configured to start after the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, after displaying the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 111 (8), The operation valid period starts at the timing shown in 111 (9)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The first effective period is a period that starts during execution of the symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 111 (9) to FIG. 12 (12), FIG. 112 (c1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 113 (a1) to FIG. 113 (a2), the operation valid period starts during the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the volume setting display is displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means in the second effective period [for example, FIG. 111 (2) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 (3), the volume gauge VG is displayed when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated during the operation valid period for the volume setting.
The second valid period is a period during which the volume setting operation is valid.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the first effective period and the second effective period do not overlap [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, Until the symbol variation display ends, the display of the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “in the first effective period, the operation result display is displayed when the second operation unit is operated during the operation of the first operation unit [for example, 112 (c1) to 112 (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed. ],
In the first effective period, the operation result display is displayed when the operation of the first operation means is performed during the operation of the second operation means [for example, an effect button When the right button 137d is operated while operating 136, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, when the second operation means is being operated while the volume setting display is being displayed, the display mode of the volume setting display is not changed even if the volume setting operation is performed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (f) to (g), the volume is not changed when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]. A characteristic game stand. ]
Also explained.

In addition, a “door body [for example, front frame door 106 etc.] is provided,
The door body is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means,
The player can operate the first operating means and the second operating means at the same time with one hand [for example, a ball provided on the front frame door 106 as shown in FIG. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the door 108 with a storage tray, and the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the first operation unit when the first operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 400 As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs control in accordance with the operation of each button constituting the operation key unit 137],
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing control related to the operation of the second operation unit when the second operation unit is operated [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 90. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit 500 performs a control according to the operation button 136, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate (for example, an effect button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.)
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, production movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.]
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
The configuration relating to the game machine can be set by operating the first operating means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (2) to (3) and 127 (2) to (3). When the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIG. 111 (4) to FIG. 111 (5) and FIG. 127 (4) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 5 (5), when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume increases by one level.
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12), etc.]
When both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 111. As shown in (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG.
In a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 127 (11 ), When only the effect button 136 and the right button 137d of the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 127 (12), or FIG. 11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 128 (12).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Further, according to this game table, the first effect is not performed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, so that it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give a sense of achievement to the player.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where it can also be operated by a person other than the player. Good. The plurality of operation means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Moreover, the display means, the sound output means, the light emitting means, the movable body, and the design means by displaying the design by causing the light guide plate to emit light can be appropriately used as the effecting means. Further, the rendering means such as a combination of display means and sound output means or a combination of display means and light emitting means may be constituted by a plurality of means.

  Further, only the settings relating to the gaming table may be configured by the operation of the first operating means, or other than the settings related to the gaming table may be configured by operating the first operating means. . In addition, it may be configured that the setting related to the gaming table is always performed by operating the first operating means, or the setting related to the gaming table may not be possible by operating the first operating means. .

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first effect may be executed. The first effect may also be executed in a case other than when both the operating means and the second operating means are operated. Further, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first operation means When both the second operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, only the first effect may be executed, or the first When both the operating means and the second operating means are operated, an effect other than the first effect may be executed.

  Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect is not executed, In a state where only one of the operation means and the second operation means is being operated, it may be configured such that effects other than the first effect are not executed. Further, in the state where only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed. It may be configured such that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated.

In addition, “the display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided,
The first effect is configured to be executed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (12), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the operation effective period, the effect movable body 225 displays the decorative symbols. The display moves to the front side of the display screen of the device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, an operation promotion notification image or the like shown in FIG. 111 (8)],
The first display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means,
The first display is a display including an image simulating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first image [eg, right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 111 (8)]”). Yes,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second image [eg, an effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 111 (8)]”). Yes,
The first display is an effective period display relating to the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 111 (8) and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b shown in FIG. 129 (8). Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, by providing the first effective period, it is possible to increase the difficulty of operating the plurality of operation means, and thus it may be possible to increase the sense of achievement.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first effect is configured to be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, it may be executed in a case other than when the first operating means and the second operating means are both operated in the first effective period. May be. In addition, the first effect may be configured to be executed whenever the first operation unit and the second operation unit are both operated in the first effective period. And it may be constituted so that it may not be performed when it will be in the state where both the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means are operated in the 1st effective period.

  In addition, the first effect is configured to be executed only when the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated only in the first effective period. Alternatively, it may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated even in an effective period other than the first effective period. May be.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

  Further, the first display may be a display prompting only to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means, or both the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. The display may be a prompt other than the operation.

  The first display may be a display including only the first image, the second image, and the effective period display, or may include displays other than the first image, the second image, and the effective period display. It may be a display. The first display may be a display that necessarily includes the first image, the second image, and the effective period display, or may not include the first image, the second image, and the effective period display. There may be.

“The first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operating means out of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 11) to (12), the right button image 137dP1 is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.]
The second image is an image that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 128 (11) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the effect button image 136P1 is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated.
The first image is an image that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated [for example, FIG. 111 (11) to FIG. As shown in FIG. (12), the right button image 137dP1 is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
The second image is an image that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated [for example, FIG. 111 (11) to FIG. As shown in FIG. (12), the effect button image 136P1 is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first image imitating the first operation means and the second image imitating the second operation means are prevented from disappearing when only one operation means is operated. By this, it can alert | report that effective operation is not performed. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to effectively prompt the player to operate a plurality of operation means.

  Here, the first image may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means. Even when an operating means other than is operated, it may be one that does not disappear.

  In addition, the second image may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or other than the first operation means and the second operation means. Even when the operating means is operated, it may be one that does not disappear.

  Further, the first image may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first image It may disappear even in a case other than when both the operating means and the second operating means are operated. Further, the first image may always disappear when both of the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means When both of the second operation means are operated, it may not disappear.

  Further, the second image may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first image It may disappear even in a case other than when both the operating means and the second operating means are operated. In addition, the second image may always disappear when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, or the first operation unit When both of the second operation means are operated, it may not disappear.

Further, “the first display includes only one effective period display [for example, as shown in FIG. 111 (8), the operation promotion notification image includes a remaining time display bar 136P2. Only one included],
The effective period display is a display suggesting the remaining period of the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed in a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period, etc.]
The effective period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated [for example, FIG. 111 (11) to FIG. As shown in (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, so that it is possible to recognize that an effective operation has been performed. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the effective period display may indicate only the remaining period of the first effective period, or may indicate other than the remaining period of the first effective period. The effective period display may necessarily indicate the remaining period of the first effective period, or may not indicate the remaining period of the first effective period.

  The effective period display may notify the remaining period of the first effective period.

  The effective period display may disappear only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the first operation means It may disappear even in cases other than when both of the second operating means are operated. The effective period display may always disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the operation means are operated.

Further, “the effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 127 (11) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (12) and FIG. 128 (11) to FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. If only the production button 136 is operated, it will not be erased]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effective period display does not disappear, so that an effective operation is not performed. In some cases, it is possible to prompt the player to appropriately operate the first operating means and the second operating means.

  Here, the effective period display may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or other than the first operation means and the second operation means. Even when the operating means is operated, it may be one that does not disappear.

In addition, the first display includes two effective period displays. [For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (8), the operation promotion notification image includes remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b. 2 included etc.],
The effective period display is a display indicating the remaining period of the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed in a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation effective period, etc.] ,
One of the two effective period displays (hereinafter referred to as “two effective period displays”) is an effective period display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first effective period display [for example, 129 (8), the remaining time display bar 136P2b etc. displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1].
One of the two effective period displays is an effective period display corresponding to the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second effective period display [eg, effect button image shown in FIG. 129 (8)]. The remaining time display bar 136P2a etc. displayed corresponding to 136P1].
The first effective period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated [for example, FIG. 129 (11)]. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2b is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
The second effective period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated [for example, FIG. 129 (11)]. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2a is deleted when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  If it is configured so that only the effective period display corresponding to the operated operation means disappears, it is misunderstood that an appropriate operation is performed by the player when each operation means is operated without performing an appropriate operation. However, according to this game machine, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effective period display and the second effective period are displayed. Since the display may be erased, it may be possible to recognize that an effective operation has been performed.

  Here, the first display may include only two effective period displays, or may include three or more.

  The effective period display may indicate only the remaining period of the first effective period, or may indicate other than the remaining period of the first effective period. The effective period display may necessarily indicate the remaining period of the first effective period, or may not indicate the remaining period of the first effective period.

  The effective period display may notify the remaining period of the first effective period.

  In addition, the first effective period display may disappear only when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, It may disappear even when the operating means and the second operating means are both operated. Further, the first effective period display may always disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means and There may be a case where it does not disappear when both the second operating means are operated.

  Further, the second effective period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. It may disappear even when the operating means and the second operating means are both operated. Further, the second effective period display may always disappear when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means There may be a case where it does not disappear when both the second operating means are operated.

Further, “the first effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, The time display bar 136P2b is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.]
The first effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2b is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated.
The second effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, a remaining time display bar 136P2a is not erased when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.]
The second effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2a is not erased when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. Amusement stand. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effective period display and the second effective period display do not disappear. It can be notified that an effective operation is not performed, and therefore, it may be possible to prompt the player to appropriately operate the first operation means and the second operation means.

  Here, the first effective period display may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. Even if an operating means other than the operating means is operated, the operating means may not disappear.

  Further, the second effective period display may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or the first operation means and the second operation display may be displayed. Even if an operating means other than the means is operated, it may be one that does not disappear.

“The first effective period is a period in which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are effective [for example, shown in FIG. 111 (9). A period (operation effective period) in which the operation of the right button 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are enabled at the timing is started, or it is effective that both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated. Period (operation valid period), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effective period may be a period in which only the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are effective, or the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means. It may be a period in which the operation of the operation means other than both of the operation means is valid. Further, the first effective period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are necessarily effective, or the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means. There may be cases where both operations of the operating means are not valid.

In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the first effective period is configured to be displayed [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 127 (8) is displayed. After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (9), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be easy to recognize that the first valid period is started.

  Here, after the display of the first display is started, only the first validity period may be started, or after the display of the first display is started, An effective period other than the effective period may be started. Further, the first valid period may be surely started after the display of the first display is started, or the first display is started after the display of the first display is started. The validity period may not be started.

  In addition, the first valid period may be configured to start only after the display of the first display is started, or even after the display of the first display is started. The validity period may be started.

In addition, “the setting regarding the game machine” is “a setting for executing the power saving mode [for example, eco mode, etc.]”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “table setting” means “time setting”. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during execution of the symbol variation display [For example, as illustrated in FIG. 111 (12), the variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2 Operation result presentation has begun during]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect is performed during the symbol variation display, and thus, for example, it can be applied to a notice effect, and the expectation of a big hit may be further enhanced.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect may be one that may be executed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be executed other than during the symbol variation display. It may be. Further, the first effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A plurality of operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an upper button 137 a, a lower button 137 b, a left button 137 c, a right button 137 d, a decision button 137 e, a cancel button 137 f, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate. A playground,
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.] Is configured to be executable,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
One of the plural types of notifications is a second notification [e.g., deletion of the symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5) or reach state entry notification image shown in FIG. 107 (i). 2071 etc.]
In the first effective period, the first notification may be executed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously during the operation effective period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed. Etc.],
The first notification is not executed in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (11), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated in the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 127 (12), If the operation result effect is not performed or only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 128 (11), as shown in FIG. 128 (12). , Operation result production is not performed, etc.]
In the second effective period, the second notification may be executed when the first operating means is operated [for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 111 (5) When the effect button 136 is operated while the changing setting screen is displayed, the sound volume is fixed to the set value, and the symbol changing setting screen may be deleted, or as shown in FIG. 107 (i). As shown in FIG. 107, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry preview image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed.
The first effective period and the second effective period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, Until the change display is completed, the display of the setting screen for changing the symbol including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or the operation effective period shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to (j) and FIG. 111 (7) to FIG. 12 (12) are valid operation periods, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game stand, a game stand having a feature in the operation means can be provided.

  Further, according to this game table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, so that it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, this may give a sense of achievement to the player.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where it can also be operated by a person other than the player. Good. The plurality of operation means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Moreover, it may be configured such that only a plurality of types of notifications can be executed, may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of notifications, or may not execute a plurality of types of notifications.

  In addition, the first notification may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. The first notification may be executed even in a case other than when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. Also good. Further, the first notification may be surely executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. And when it will be in the state where both the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means are operated, it may be constituted so that the 1st information may not be performed.

  Further, only the first notification may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, a notification other than the first notification may be executed. Good.

  In addition, only the first effect is not executed in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, in a state where only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is being operated, it may be configured such that an effect other than the first effect is not executed. Further, in the state where only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed. It may be configured such that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated.

  The second notification may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period, or the first operation means is operated. In other cases, the second notification may be executed. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period, the second notification may be executed without fail, or when the first operation means is operated. The second notification may not be executed in some cases.

In addition, “equipment means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, effect movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12), etc.]
The first notification is the first performance,
The second notification is a notification of the result of the setting operation [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5) is displayed, the volume is set to a set value. Etc., and the symbol change setting screen will be deleted]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first operation means may be used for different purposes.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

In addition, “equipment means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, effect movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, the reach state entry preview image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (i), etc.]
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
The first notification is the first performance,
The second notification is the second performance.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first operation means may be shared by different effects.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

In addition, 'the first operation means is an operation means that can be changed into a plurality of states,
The state of the first operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the first operating means in the second effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), In the first effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. The button lamp 138 is lit in red and the vibration is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the difference in necessary operations between the first effective period and the second effective period can be recognized due to the difference in the state of the first operation means.

  Here, the first operation means may be capable of changing only to a plurality of states, or may be capable of changing to a state other than the plurality of states. The first operating means may always change to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states.

  Further, there may be a case where only the state of the first operating means in the first effective period and the state of the first operating means in the second effective period may be different, or the first operation in the first effective period The state other than the state of the first operating means in the second effective period may be different from the state of the means. In addition, the state of the first operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the first operating means in the second effective period, or the state of the first operating means in the first effective period There may be a case where the state of the first operating means in the second effective period is not different.

“One of the plurality of states is a first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates. State etc.]
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and the operation such as vibration is performed. State that is not broken]
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first operating means is an operating means that is more likely to be in the first state than in the second state during the first effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), During the effective period, the effect button 136 is lit red and vibrated by the chance button lamp 138],
The first operating means is an operating means that is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state in the second effective period [e.g., as shown in FIG. During the effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and the vibration or the like is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the necessity of operation of a plurality of operation means can be recognized by vibrating the first operation means.

  Here, the first operating means may be in the first state during the first effective period, or may be in the second state. Further, the first operating means may be in the first state during the second effective period, or may be in the second state. Further, the first operating means may be always in the first state or not necessarily in the second state during the first effective period. Further, the first operating means may be always in the second state during the second effective period, or may not necessarily be in the first state.

In addition, “a plurality of light emitting means [for example, various lamps 418, etc.]
One of the plurality of light emitting means is a first light emitting means [for example, a chance button lamp 138, etc.]
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the first operating means,
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means capable of emitting light with a plurality of types of light emission patterns,
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a first light emission pattern [for example, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in red as shown in FIG. 140 (11)]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a second light emission pattern [for example, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in blue as shown in FIG. 140 (4)]. Yes,
The first light emission pattern and the second light emission pattern are different light emission patterns,
The first state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the first light emission pattern,
The second state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the second light emission pattern.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where necessity of operation of a plurality of operation means can be recognized by the light emission pattern of the first operation means.

  Here, the first light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only with a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may be capable of emitting light with a light emitting pattern other than the plurality of types of light emitting patterns. Further, the first light emitting means may necessarily emit light with a plurality of types of light emission patterns, or may not emit light with a plurality of types of light emission patterns.

In addition, “the first operation means is an operation means configured to be capable of vibrating at least partially,
The first state is a state where at least a part of the first operating means is vibrating [for example, a state where the effect button 136 is vibrating as shown in FIG. 137 (n), etc.] ,
The second state is a state where the first operation means does not vibrate [for example, a state where the effect button 136 is not vibrated as shown in FIG. 137 (d), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where necessity of operation of a plurality of operation means can be recognized by vibration of the first operation means.

  Here, a part of the first operating means may be configured to be able to vibrate, or may be configured to be able to vibrate entirely. Further, at least a part of the first operation means may be configured to be able to vibrate, or at least a part other than a part may be configured to be able to vibrate. Further, the first operating means may be configured such that at least a part of the first operating means always vibrates, or at least a part of the first operating means may not vibrate.

The first operating means is an operating means configured to be rotatable at least partially.
The first state is a state in which at least a part of the first operating means is rotating,
The second state is a state where the first operating means is not rotating.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where necessity of operation of a plurality of operation means can be recognized by rotation of the first operation means.

  Here, a part of the first operating means may be configured to be rotatable, or the whole may be configured to be rotatable. Further, at least a part of the first operation means may be configured to be rotatable, or at least a part other than the part may be configured to be rotatable. Further, the first operating means may be configured so that at least a part of the first operating means rotates, or at least a part of the first operating means may not rotate.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The first effective period is a period that may be started during execution of the symbol variation display [For example, as illustrated in FIG. The first valid period has started, etc.]
In the first effective period, when the first operating means is not in the first state, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the first state is in the first state [for example, As shown in FIG. 137 (m), when the production button 136 vibrates in the first effective period, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, both the first operating means and the second operating means can make a notice with one operating means in addition to the effect by operating, so the range of effects of the operating means is widened. There is a case.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effective period may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started even when the symbol variation display is not being performed. Also good. The first effective period may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Further, in the first effective period, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed with the symbol variation display only when the first operating means is in the first state, or in the first effective period, Even in cases other than the case where one operating means is in the first state, the big hit symbol may be easily displayed with the symbol variation display. Further, in the first effective period, when the first operating means is in the first state, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed by the symbol variation display, or in the first effective period, When one operating means is in the first state, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  In addition, only in the first effective period, when the first operating means is in the first state, the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the first state. In addition, even in a period other than the first effective period, it is easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display when the first operating means is in the first state than when the first operating means is not in the first state. You may do it.

  Further, in the first effective period, the first operation means may be always in the first state, or the first operation means may not be in the first state.

  Further, the first operating means may be in the second state in the first effective period, and the first operating means is in the first state than in the case where the first intention operating means is in the second state in the first effective period. In the case of the state, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed by the symbol variation display.

In addition, “a plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.] A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.]
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12)],
One of the plural types of notifications is a second notification [e.g., deletion of the symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 111 (5) or reach state entry notification image shown in FIG. 107 (i). 2071 etc.]
In the first effective period, the first notification may be executed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously during the operation effective period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 111 (12) is performed. Etc.],
The first notification is not executed in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (11), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated in the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 127 (12), If the operation result effect is not performed or only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 128 (11), as shown in FIG. 128 (12). , Operation result production is not performed, etc.]
In the second effective period, the second notification may be executed when the first operating means is operated [for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 111 (5) When the effect button 136 is operated while the changing setting screen is displayed, the sound volume is fixed to the set value, and the symbol changing setting screen may be deleted, or as shown in FIG. 107 (i). As shown in FIG. 107, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry preview image 2071 shown in FIG. 107 (j) may be displayed.
The first effective period and the second effective period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 111 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, Until the change display is completed, the display of the setting screen for changing the symbol including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or the operation valid period shown in FIGS. 107 (g) to (j) 111 (7) to FIG. 12 (12) are valid operation periods, etc.]
The state of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the second operating means in the second effective period [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (n), In the first effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. The button lamp 138 is lit in red and the vibration is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the operation means, but according to this game stand, a game stand having a feature in the operation means can be provided.

  Further, according to this game table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, so that it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, this may give a sense of achievement to the player.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the difference in required operation in a 1st effective period and a 2nd effective period may be recognized by the difference in the state of a 2nd operation means.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where it can also be operated by a person other than the player. Good. The plurality of operation means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Moreover, it may be configured such that only a plurality of types of notifications can be executed, may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of notifications, or may not execute a plurality of types of notifications.

  In addition, the first notification may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. The first notification may be executed even in a case other than when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. Also good. Further, the first notification may be surely executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. And when it will be in the state where both the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means are operated, it may be constituted so that the 1st information may not be performed.

  Further, only the first notification may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, a notification other than the first notification may be executed. Good.

  In addition, only the first effect is not executed in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, in a state where only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is being operated, it may be configured such that an effect other than the first effect is not executed. Further, in the state where only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed. It may be configured such that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated.

  The second notification may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period, or the first operation means is operated. In other cases, the second notification may be executed. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period, the second notification may be executed without fail, or when the first operation means is operated. The second notification may not be executed in some cases.

  The second operating means may be capable of changing only to a plurality of states, or may be capable of changing to a state other than a plurality of states. The second operating means may always change to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states.

  Further, there may be a case where only the state of the second operation means in the first effective period and the state of the second operation means in the second effective period may be different, or the second operation in the first effective period. The state other than the state of the second operating means in the second effective period may be different from the state of the means. Further, the state of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the second operating means in the second effective period, or the state of the second operating means in the first effective period There may be a case where the state of the second operating means in the second effective period is not different.

In addition, “the first valid period is a period during which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are valid [for example, the right button at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9) The period (operation effective period) in which the operation of 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are each started (operation effective period), or the period in which both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated (operation effective) The period) is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effective period may be a period in which only the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are effective, or the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means. It may be a period in which the operation of the operation means other than both of the operation means is valid. Further, the first effective period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means are necessarily effective, or the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means. There may be cases where both operations of the operating means are not valid.

In addition, “the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A plurality of operation means provided at positions where the player can operate (for example, an effect button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, a decision button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.)
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, production movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.]
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an operation result effect shown in FIG. 129 (12), etc.]
When both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 129. As shown in (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated simultaneously, an operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 129 (12), etc.]
In a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 127 (11 ), When only the effect button 136 and the right button 137d of the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 127 (12), or FIG. 11) and FIG. 130 (11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 128 (12) and FIG. 130 (12), The operation result effect is not performed, or as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″) and FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), not the right button 137d but the upper button 137a and the effect button 136 are the same. When operated at times, an effect different from the operation result effect shown in FIG. 130 (12) (second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) and FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″). Operation result presentation may be performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Further, according to this game table, the first effect is not performed only by the operation of one of the first operation means and the second operation means, so that it is easy for the player to find a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give a sense of achievement to the player.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where it can also be operated by a person other than the player. Good. The plurality of operation means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Moreover, the display means, the sound output means, the light emitting means, the movable body, and the design means by displaying the design by causing the light guide plate to emit light can be appropriately used as the effecting means. Further, the rendering means such as a combination of display means and sound output means or a combination of display means and light emitting means may be constituted by a plurality of means.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first effect may be executed. The first effect may also be executed in a case other than when both the operating means and the second operating means are operated. Further, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first operation means When both the second operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, only the first effect may be executed, or the first When both the operating means and the second operating means are operated, an effect other than the first effect may be executed.

  Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect is not executed, In a state where only one of the operation means and the second operation means is being operated, it may be configured such that effects other than the first effect are not executed. Further, in the state where only one operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed. It may be configured such that the first effect may be executed when only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated.

“One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect [for example, the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″”) and the result of FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″). Operation result presentation etc.]
The first effect and the third effect are different effects,
In the first effective period, the first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 129 (7) to (12), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the operation effective period, the effect movable body 225 displays the decorative symbols. In addition to moving to the front side of the display screen of the device 208, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining, and a definite sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.]
The third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 131 (11 ″) and FIG. 131 (11 ″ ″), when both the up button 137a and the effect button 136 are operated simultaneously instead of the right button 137d, FIG. When an effect different from the operation result effect shown in (12) (second operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) or operation result effect shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″ ″)) is performed. In FIG. 129 (11), there is a case where a second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect is performed by any one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means fails (when only one operating means is operated), the third effect different from the first effect is achieved. Therefore, there may be a case where a player's sense of achievement can be given when the first performance is performed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, even if the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means fails, the dissatisfaction of the player is alleviated by executing another effect (third effect). There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the third effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the third effect. Further, the effect means may always execute the third effect, or may not execute the third effect.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first effective period. The first effect may also be executed in a case other than when the first operating means and the second operating means are both operated in the first effective period. May be configured. Further, the first effect may be configured to be always executed when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated in the first effective period. In the first effective period, the first effect may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Good.

  In addition, only in the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, the first effect may be executed. The first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in a period other than the first effective period. May be configured.

  Further, the third effect may be executed only when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. Alternatively, in the first effective period, the third effect may be executed in addition to the case where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. It may be configured as follows. Further, in the first effective period, the third effect may be always executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. Even if only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated during the first effective period, the third effect may not be executed. Good.

  Further, the third effect may be executed only in the first effective period when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. The third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in a period other than the first effective period. May be configured.

In addition, the production means includes first production means [for example, production movable body 225, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and second production means [for example, speaker 120, production movable body 225, etc.]. Means,
The first effect means and the second effect means are different effect means,
The first effect is an effect that is executed by using both the first effect means and the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 is decorated. It moves to the front side of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, and a definite sound is output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the front side and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display such that the effect movable body 225 is shining]
The third effect is an effect that is executed using any one of the first effect means and the second effect means [for example, FIG. 131 (12 ''') As shown, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but there is no definite sound output from the speaker 120, or as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″) In the center of the display area of the symbol display device 208, a character display “Gekiatsu” is made, and an operation result display including a display in which ten pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display is performed around the character display. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the first effect can be executed as a flashy effect than the third effect, and the player's first operation means and second operation means are operated simultaneously. It may be possible to improve the sense of achievement.

  Here, the effect means may be configured to include only the first effect means and the second effect means, or may include effect means other than the first effect means and the second effect means. It may be configured by. Further, the production means may be configured to include the first production means and the second production means, or includes at least one of the first production means and the second production means. There may be no cases.

  The first effect may be executed only using both the first effect unit and the second effect unit, or an effect other than the first effect unit and the second effect unit. It may also be executed using means. The first effect may be always executed using both the first effect means and the second effect means, or both the first effect means and the second effect means may be performed. It may not be executed using.

  In addition, the third effect may be executed using only one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the first effect means. It may be executed by using a production means other than any one of the two production means. In addition, the third effect may be executed by using any one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the first effect means. It may be executed without using any one of the two effect means.

In addition, the first rendering means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The second effect means is a movable means [for example, the effect movable body 225 or the like]
The movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movable effects,
One of the plurality of types of movable effects is a first movable effect,
The first movable effect is a movable effect in which at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means [for example, the effect movable body 225 is located above the decorative symbol display device 208. To the front side of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, etc.]
The third effect is an effect that is executed without using the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (12 ″), the effect movable body 225 does not operate and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the center of the display area of the device 208, a character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed, and an operation result display including a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display is performed around the character display]
The first effect is an effect including the first movable effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display related to the first movable effect [for example, an effect display as shown in FIG. 129 (12) in which the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.]
The first effect is an effect including the second display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the first movable effect is performed only when the first operation means and the second operation means are successfully operated simultaneously, there may be a case where a sense of achievement can be given to the player. is there.

  Here, the movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of movable effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of types of movable effects. In addition, the movable means may always execute a plurality of types of movable effects, or may not execute the movable effects of confused alcoholic beverages.

  Further, the movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first movable effect. In addition, the movable effect may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, the first movable effect may move only to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or move forward in front of the display area of the display means. In addition to the overlapping position, at least a part of the means may move to a position. Further, the first movable effect may always move to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or the movable means in front of the display area of the display means. There may be a case where at least a part of each does not move to an overlapping position.

  In addition, the third effect may be executed without using only the second effect means, or may be executed without using any effect means other than the second effect means. Good. The third effect may be executed without using the second effect means, or may be executed using the second effect means.

  The first effect may include only the first movable effect, or may include effects other than the first movable effect. The first effect may necessarily include the first movable effect, or may not include the first movable effect.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  In addition, the second display may be a display related only to the first movable effect, or may be a display related to other than the first movable effect. The second display may be a display that is always related to the first movable effect, or may not be related to the first movable effect.

  In addition, the first effect may include only the second display, or may include a display other than the second display. The first effect may necessarily include the second display, or may not include the second display.

In addition, “the display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8)],
The third display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Of which the right button image 137dP1 is not included]
The third display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means [For example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 The production button image 136P1 is included, etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 141 (8) is displayed in the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means can be made to function as a hidden command by not displaying an image simulating the first operating means in the first effective period. In some cases, it may be possible to give a rare value to the appearance of the first performance.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display or may not display the third display.

  Further, the third display may not include only an image imitating the first operation means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the first operation means. . The third display may not necessarily include an image imitating the first operation means, or may include an image imitating the first operation means.

  Further, the third display may include only an image imitating the second operation means, or may include an image other than an image imitating the second operation means. The third display may necessarily include an image simulating the second operating means, or may not include an image simulating the second operating means.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only during the first effective period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first effective period. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed during the first effective period, or may not be displayed during the first effective period.

  Further, the third display may only be displayed during the first effective period.

In addition, “the display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8)],
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means. [For example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. Of which the right button image 137dP1 is not included]
The fourth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the second operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Our production button image 136P1 is not included]
The fourth display is a display including a display relating to the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8) includes the remaining time display bar 136P2],
The fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 142 (8) is displayed in the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, only the display relating to the first effective period may be displayed, and in order to allow the player to perform various operations during the first effective period in order to see the first effect There is.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be able to alert | report that it is a hidden button effect by the display regarding a 1st effective period.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  The fourth display may not include only an image imitating the first operation means, or may not include an image other than the image imitating the first operation means. . Further, the fourth display may not necessarily include an image imitating the first operation means, or may include an image imitating the first operation means.

  Further, the fourth display may not include only an image imitating the second operation means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the second operation means. . Further, the fourth display may not necessarily include an image imitating the second operation means, or may include an image imitating the second operation means.

  Further, the fourth display may include only a display relating to the first effective period, or may include a display other than the display relating to the first effective period. Further, the fourth display may necessarily include a display regarding the first effective period, or may not include a display regarding the first effective period.

  The fourth display may be displayed only during the first effective period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first effective period. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed during the first effective period, or may not be displayed during the first effective period.

  Further, the fourth display may only be displayed during the first effective period.

In addition, “the display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B)],
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the first operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Of which the right button image 137dP1 is not included]
The fifth display is a display that does not include an image imitating the second operation means [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 Our production button image 136P1 is not included]
The fifth display is a display that does not include a display relating to the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B) does not include a remaining time display bar, etc.]
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 143 (8B) is displayed in the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the player can be allowed to perform various operations during the first effective period in order to see the first effect.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be able to alert | report that it is a hidden button effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only an image imitating the first operation means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the first operation means. . In addition, the fifth display may not necessarily include an image imitating the first operation means, or may include an image imitating the first operation means.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only an image imitating the second operation means, or may not include an image other than an image imitating the second operation means. . Further, the fifth display may not necessarily include an image imitating the second operation means, or may include an image imitating the second operation means.

  The fifth display may not include only the display relating to the first effective period, or may include no display other than the display relating to the first effective period. Further, the fifth display may not necessarily include the display regarding the first effective period, and may include the display regarding the first effective period.

  The fifth display may be displayed only during the first effective period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first effective period. Good. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed during the first effective period, or may not be displayed during the first effective period.

  Further, the fifth display may only be displayed during the first effective period.

In addition, “a configuration relating to a gaming machine can be performed by operating the first operating means [for example, FIG. 111 (2) to FIG. 3 (3) and FIG. 127 (2) to FIG. When the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, a symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIG. 111 (4) to FIG. 111 (5) and FIG. 127 ( 4) to (5), when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the volume increases by one level, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first operation means may be used for different purposes.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the settings relating to the gaming table can be performed by the operation of the first operating means, or other than the settings relating to the gaming table can be configured by operating the first operating means. Good. In addition, it may be configured that the setting related to the gaming table is always performed by operating the first operating means, or the setting related to the gaming table may not be possible by operating the first operating means. .

In addition, “the setting regarding the game machine” is “a setting for executing the power saving mode [for example, eco mode, etc.]”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, ““ Settings related to the game machine ”means“ time setting ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may start during execution of the symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (12), the variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2 Operation result presentation has begun during]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect is performed during the symbol variation display, and thus, for example, it can be applied to a notice effect, and the expectation of a big hit may be further enhanced.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect may be one that may be executed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be executed other than during the symbol variation display. It may be. Further, the first effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, it will be noted including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A notice means capable of executing multiple kinds of notices;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means,
The on-hold display is a display according to the number of operations of the symbol variation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”).
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested,
In a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number larger than the first number than the case where the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons is consumed by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to win if the number of two is digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same form as the notice form,
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one time symbol variation display is executed. It is configured so that is more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A holding display means capable of executing display according to the holding number;
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Pre-fetch notice means that can perform pre-read notice,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
In a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is being executed, the notice icon may be digested to the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon that is digested in the period during which the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number;
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may start as the notice icon,
The first notice icon that has been displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 15 or 16,
As the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During a single symbol variation display, the second number of the first notice icons is digested rather than the first number of the first notice icons being digested. Easy to become,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the digested symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the prefetch effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Providing production control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 27,
Main control means;
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
A first display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying in the hold display area a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area, and the notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of the notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the big hit is when the second number digest is larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become,
The second display means displays in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second figure change display”), which is a target of prefetching, is started. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to appendix 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form,
The second display means can display the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
A gaming machine according to attachment 33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a holding display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
A gaming machine according to appendix 34,
The game stand, wherein the hold display means is display means including light emitting means.

(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
In the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be consumed by the fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display according to the number of suspensions is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 38,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
The notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start displaying,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 40,
The hold display area is an area that can display up to a seventh number according to the number of holds,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 41, comprising a rendering means capable of performing a plurality of types of rendering,
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 42,
Main control means;
Production control means;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 43,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple notice icons”) may be digested until the end,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed. One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon. Is a notice icon,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In a single symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first number of notice icons”) is digested, so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by showing the number of the notice icons as the symbol fluctuation before the reservation to be prefetched.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or may be three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, an effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, and when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding presentation display B may be performed, or the presentation display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. May be performed.

  In addition, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to appendix 45,
Even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “second number of notice icons”) is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers;
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon including one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol variation display. If the first effect display is not displayed, the player who can see the first effect display may be given a sense of superiority.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be digested without fail.

  In addition, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured such that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to appendix 45 or 46,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  In addition, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
48. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 45 to 47,
In the case where the loss symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”), which is a prefetch target, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed before the end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a case of loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or the case of the loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is the case where the result of the symbol variation display to be prefetched is a big hit or a case of loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the pre-read target is a big hit or a case of a loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game machine, even if a notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 49,
With hold display means,
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on hold (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The on-hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Additional remark 51) It is a game stand of Additional remark 50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

(Appendix 52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern appears by applying a lens cut to the light guide plate and irradiating with a light source from the side. , May be constituted by light emitting means such as LED, or may be constituted by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the notice icon being stocked, a display related to the notice icon being digested, or a notice of the notice icon stock. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The gaming machine according to appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  One notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the effect that a notice icon is digested with a 2nd display means.

(Appendix 56)
The game stand according to appendix 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the “display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed” may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “notice icon digest effect”) is performed.
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may also be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means where the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming machine according to appendix 59,
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be cases where the first movable means effect is not performed. Means effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect with a different operation).

  Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be given by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon is digested. Then, the production by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Appendix 61)
The game stand according to appendix 59 or 60,
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is configured not to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed. When the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be performed.

(Appendix 62)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 61,
With operating means,
The movable means is the operating means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operation means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, “change” means to include deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 62,
Comprising a second movable means;
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed. When the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be displayed without fail.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only with one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed with only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine according to appendix 64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the change at which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that a notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Additional remark 66) It is a game stand of Additional remark 64 or 65,
One icon of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of gasses in which the notice icon does not increase.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
Of the eleventh number of the notice icons indicated by the notice icon increase suggestion display, the twelfth number of the notice icons may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means;
Hold indication means,
A game machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern change display”) to be read ahead is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
In the case where the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming machine according to appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a pre-read display mode,
In the symbol fluctuation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode.

(Appendix 70)
The game stand according to appendix 68 or 69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth hold display”) of the loss symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth pattern change display”), which is the target of prefetching, is displayed. The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first display may be an explanation display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanation display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and the frequency of occurrence of one notification effect are changed. There are modes to make it happen.

  In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be displayed in advance of the display position of the animation on the way. The icon display position may be closer to the second display area.

  Here, the “notice icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only some of the notice icons, or may be all of the notice icons. The notice icon may be used. Further, the “notice icon” may be only a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of notice icons including a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. The display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon need not be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. In addition, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, and the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display is not performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game stand according to appendix 71 or 72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the current and next symbol change display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give a new expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading notice display is digested.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

  Further, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display.

  The notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may be digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be necessarily digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayed only by a single icon, or may be configured to be able to display a plurality of icons. Here, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 71 to 76,
The second display area is an area partitioned by lines.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
“The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed” as described in Supplementary Note 71. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed. "
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 78,
The number of the notice icons is consumed more in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is lost,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The big hit fluctuation is more digested than the loss fluctuation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to appendix 80, wherein
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”) in which the first explanation display is displayed.

(Appendix 82)
The game stand according to appendix 81,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 82,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current stage of production,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game stand according to appendix 83, wherein
Even if the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the stage is changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple types of notification icons”) as the notification icon.
One icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first performance,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display;
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The game stand according to appendix 86,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming machine according to appendix 87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 89,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 90,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming machine according to appendix 91, wherein
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

  The first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the expectation degree of reach for the reach.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the expected degree of jackpot of the character.

  The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first notice display.

  It should be noted that the term “notice icon” described so far is named for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience by the display mode (motif), and may be called a notice item when the notice icon is a tool, and called a notice character when the notice icon is a character. In some cases, when the notice icon is a display indicating a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , A notice medal). In addition, the term “notice” in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be called as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

(Appendix 93)
A plurality of operation means provided at positions operable by the player;
Production means capable of performing the first production;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
By the operation of the first operation means, it is possible to set a gaming table,
In the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the first effect is configured to be performed,
In the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming machine according to appendix 93,
A display means capable of displaying the first display;
The first display is a display prompting to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first image”),
The first display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second image”),
The first display is a display including an effective period display related to the first effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The gaming machine according to appendix 94, wherein the effective period display in the first display is one,
The effective period display is a display suggesting the remaining period of the first effective period,
The effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated,
The effective period display is a display that disappears when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
A gaming machine according to appendix 94 or 95,
The first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The second image is an image that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first image is an image that disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated,
The second image is an image that disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
A gaming machine according to attachment 94,
The effective period display in the first display is two,
One of the two effective period displays is an effective period display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first effective period display”),
One of the two effective period displays is an effective period display corresponding to the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second effective period display”),
The first effective period display is a display that disappears when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated,
The second effective period display is a display that disappears when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 98)
A gaming machine according to appendix 97,
The first effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first image is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated,
The second image is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated,
The first image is a display that disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated,
The second image is a display that disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Additional remark 99) It is a game stand given in any one of additional remarks 93 thru / or 98,
The “setting operation related to the gaming table” described in the supplementary note 93 is an eco-mode setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 98,
The “setting operation related to the game machine” described in the supplementary note 93 is a time setting setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 93 to 100,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 101,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 101,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
A gaming table provided with a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by a player,
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
When both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated during the first effective period, an operation result notification (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”) is performed. Is configured to be
The first notification is not performed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated in the first effective period. Is composed of
In the second effective period, when the first operating means is being operated, notification of the operation result (hereinafter referred to as “second notification”) is performed,
The first validity period and the second validity period are different periods;
The aspect of the first operation means in the first effective period may be different from the aspect of the first operation means in the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
A gaming machine according to appendix 104,
The first notification is an effect,
The second notification is notification of the result of the setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
A gaming machine according to appendix 104,
The first notification is a first effect,
The second notification is a second effect,
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 104 to 106,
The first operation means is a means capable of taking a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The first operating means is an operating means configured to take the first aspect more easily than the second aspect in the first effective period,
The first operating means is an operating means configured to take the second aspect more easily than the first aspect in the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
A gaming machine according to appendix 107,
In the first aspect, the first operating means emits light in a first light emission pattern.
In the second aspect, the first operating means emits light in a second light emission pattern.
The first light emission pattern and the light emission pattern of the valley are different light emission patterns.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
A gaming machine according to appendix 107,
The first operation means is a means in which at least a part of the first operation means is configured to be vibrated,
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least a part of the first operating means vibrates,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means does not vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
A gaming machine according to appendix 107,
The first operating means is a means in which at least a part of the first operating means is configured to be rotatable,
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least a part of the first operating means rotates,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means does not rotate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 107 to 110,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first operation means is a means that may take the first aspect during the first effective period,
In the case where the first operating means takes the first mode during the first effective period, the symbol according to the big hit is more easily determined and displayed when the second mode is used. , A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to 111,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to 112,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 104 to 112,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 115)
A gaming table comprising a plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by a player,
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
In the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the operation result is notified,
In the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the operation result is not notified. Configured,
In the second effective period, when the first operating means is in a state of being operated, the operation result is notified,
The first validity period and the second validity period are different periods;
The aspect of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different from the aspect of the second operating means in the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 116)
A plurality of operating means provided at positions operable by the player;
Production means capable of performing multiple productions;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means,
One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
In the first effective period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated, the first effect is configured to be performed,
In the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 117)
The game stand according to appendix 116,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect, and the first effect and the second effect are different effects,
In the first effective period, when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the second effect is configured to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 118)
The game stand according to appendix 117,
The production means is a means including a plurality of means,
One of the plurality of means is a first means,
One of the plurality of means is a second means,
The first means and the second means are different means,
The first effect is an effect performed using both the first means and the second means,
The second effect is an effect performed using one of the first means and the second means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 119)
The game stand according to appendix 118,
The first means is a display means,
The second means is a movable means,
The second effect is an effect performed without using the second means,
The first effect is an effect including an effect in which at least a part of the movable means is movable in front of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “movable effect”),
The first effect is an effect including a display effect related to the movable effect on the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 120)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 119,
A game table, wherein a setting operation related to a game table can be performed by operating the first operation means.

(Appendix 121)
A gaming machine according to attachment 120, wherein
The “setting operation related to the game machine” described in the supplementary note 120 is an eco-mode setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 122)
A gaming machine according to attachment 120, wherein
The “setting operation related to the game machine” described in the supplementary note 120 is a time setting setting operation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 123)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 122,
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display includes a display imitating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first image”). And
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second image”),
The second display is a display that does not include the first image,
The first display is a display displayed in association with a setting operation,
The first display is a display that may not be displayed in the first validity period,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the first effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 124)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 122,
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One of the plurality of displays is a second display;
One of the plurality of displays is a third display;
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first image”),
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second image”),
The second display is a display that does not include the first image,
The third display is an effective period display according to the first effective period,
The first display is a display that may not be displayed in the first validity period,
The second display is a display that may not be displayed in the first effective period,
The third display is a display that may be displayed even when the first display and the second display are not displayed in the first effective period.
A game hall characterized by that.

(Appendix 125)
The game stand according to appendix 124,
In the first effective period, there are cases where both the first image and the second image are not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 126)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 125,
The first operation means is a button,
The second operation means is a button.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 127)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 126,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 128)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 126,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 has been described as an example. The present invention can also be applied to an expression pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

  The gaming table of the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, a spinning machine (slot machine) that uses medals or game balls (pachinko balls).

  Here, a slot machine (cylinder gaming machine) as a game machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 1000 illustrated in FIG. 144 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 144), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the present embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Reel backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be irradiated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, every time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three are inserted one by one, two are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. A sheet is inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1041 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. It is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display device 1025, the game information display device 1026, and the payout number display device 1027 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of operation means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operations of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can perform operations related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting individual player's game history information), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation unit.

  Under the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

<Information display button>
FIG. 145 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and FIG. 145 (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. As shown in FIG. 145, the information display button 1046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 1050. That is, the information display button 1046 is a general term for a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 1050. Specifically, the information display button unit 1050 includes a determination (call) button 1046O provided in the approximate center of the information display button unit 1050, and a determination ( (Call) button 1046O, an upper selection button 1046U, a lower selection button 1046D, a left selection button 1046L, a right selection button 1046R, which are spaced apart on the left side, and a cancel, which is spaced apart on the right side of the enter (call) button 1046O. Button 1046C.

  The slot machine 1000 configured as described above is also configured to enable the above-described eco mode setting, original (daitomo) mode setting, time setting, and the like. For example, when a predetermined operation in the slot machine 1000 (for example, an operation of the chance button 1100 in the standby state) is performed, the setting screen is displayed (an example of a notification of the result of the setting operation). Various settings described above can be performed by appropriately operating the buttons constituting the button 1046.

  Further, for example, in an effect requesting a button operation, a specific button effect is performed in which both buttons of a chance button 1100 and an information display button 1046 (for example, the right selection button 1046R) are simultaneously operated. It may be configured. The buttons for requesting operations include a chance button 1100, a medal insertion button 1032, stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and buttons constituting the information display button 1046 (for example, an upper selection button 1046U, a lower selection button 1046D, a left selection button 1046L, and a right button). The selection button 1046R, the determination (call) button 1046O, and the cancel button 1046C) can be appropriately combined. Further, it may be operated in combination with the start lever 1035. Further, the title panel 1062 may be configured to be pressed and operated in combination with other buttons and the start lever 1035 so that a specific button effect is performed.

  In addition, the specific button effect described above is that the first stop operation is performed after the start lever 1035 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012, the first stop reel is stopped, and then the second stop operation is performed. It is possible to start at any timing after the second stop reel is stopped after the third stop operation is performed and the third stop reel is stopped. Further, it may be possible to start during a so-called freeze period in which the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is not accepted for a certain period of time. In addition, an RTC (Real Time Clock) may be provided and configured to be able to start in a simultaneous performance executed when a predetermined start time is detected by the RTC.

  Further, the operation valid period during which button operations can be accepted may be forcibly terminated by various operations controlled on the main control circuit side.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  As described above, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are only the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirements contained only in description of embodiment, the modification, or additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or additional remarks.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 245, other game machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 146 to 245 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 146 to 245 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 245, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 146 to 245 are given priority.
[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to a first embodiment to which the present invention is applicable will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 for launching the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the effect of changing the effect modes of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 146) by the player's operation. A card button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 148) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 147 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 146 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 149). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 148 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, and an effect display region 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of universal figure floating games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The 4th symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to FIG. 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to FIG. The fourth symbol display device 248 may include only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the 4th symbol display apparatus may be provided in the production | presentation apparatus 206 (center accessory) like this example. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in a vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is a one-way communication. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 149) for adjusting the volume to be set, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and a signal stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (video display processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 150A to 150D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 150 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 150 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 150 (a), seven types of special maps “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 150 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). The state shifts to the high probability state (see FIGS. 156 (a) and (b)). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 150 (b), four types of special figures, "Special Figure a" to "Special Figure d", are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missing symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 150 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

  FIG. 150 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 150 (d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power interruption. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later, the first sub control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms). At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a pair of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the general map A or B shown in FIG. 150 (d)) and the off symbol (the general map C shown in FIG. 150 (d)). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to be 1 or more, and is executed using a pair of the first ordinary winning random number value and the ordinary random number value in the ordinary random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the received normal figure winning random number value in the acquired normal figure start information and the value of the normal figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 154 (a) and (b) described later) (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the normal map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 154 (c)). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on When the special figure a, 7R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 150 (b) is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special map 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. ROM 2306 is obtained based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308. Is used as a big hit using the table for determining whether or not is stored (see FIGS. 155 (a) to (d) to be described later) or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 156 (a), based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determination result determination result). Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 157 (a), the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After fetching the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the reserved figure number 2 in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order fluctuation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc. that are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 153 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 153 (b) to (e)).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is displayed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 153 (b) to 153 (e) exemplify a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 153 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 153 (b), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (b), “Special Figure G” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and “Special Figure G” is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 2”. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 153 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 153 (c), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (c), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 153 (c), a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 153 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 153 (d), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (e), in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage section, not the stop symbol information but the “timer number” indicating the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game is the prefetch result. May be stored. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (e), “timer 3” is stored as the timer number information in the storage area “hold 1”, “timer 5” is stored as the timer number information in the storage area “hold 2”, No timer number information is stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In FIG. 153 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is expressed as “none”. In addition, when timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the success / failure result.

  In the above description, an example is given in which stop symbols and timer numbers are pre-determined, and stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. While being stored in the result storage unit, it may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetching result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 154 to 157 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 154 (a) and 154 (b) show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery is related to the common drawing lottery process (step S223). The determination table shown in FIGS. 154 (a) and 154 (b) is composed of items of “normal probability,” “random number range,” and “result of success”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The correct / incorrect determination table shown in FIG. 154 (a) is a normal / incorrect determination table used when the normal probability at the time of determination is low. As shown in FIG. 154 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of loss is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 154 (b) is a normal / failure determination table used when the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 154 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the correct / failure determination table shown in FIG. 154 (a), the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 154 (c) shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 154 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal diagram A and 50% for the normal diagram B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the universal figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (c), after the general figure A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), after the general figure B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electric Chu) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  155 (a) to 155 (d) show an example of a table for determining whether or not to be used in determining whether or not the lottery process is performed in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Yes. The determination table shown in FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (d) includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 155 (a) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 155 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 155 (b) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 155 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 155 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 155 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 155 (d) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of determination of success / failure is high. As shown in FIG. 155 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30, and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 155 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  FIG. 156 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 156 (a), in the case where the determination result of special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 30% for special figure A (15R special big hit), and special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG. 156 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 156 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the determination result of special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for special figure a (15R special big hit), and special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG. 157 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 157 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1, and the open time of the attacker is long (or the R number is large). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 158 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 158 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 158 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 159 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  159 (a), the electric long open effect process is started from the main control unit 300 in the usual symbol change process in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 158 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric long. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as an electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 159, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 159 (b) shows an example of the electric long open effect. FIG. 159 (b) shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric Chu long opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 160 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 160B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 160C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 173.

  FIG. 161 (a) shows an example of a pre-reading notice lottery table used when a pre-reading notice lottery is performed in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 158. The prefetch lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a prefetch result information command including prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and a display mode of a hold icon indicating a hold corresponding to the prefetch result by the prefetch notice lottery Is determined. The pre-reading notice lottery table shown in FIG. 161 (a) includes items of “prefetching notice mode”, “big hit”, and “out”.

  The “prefetching notice mode” in the left column of the figure indicates the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. “White” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a white circle, “Black” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a black circle, and “Heat” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a circle. “Heat” indicates that the character is drawn. “White → Black” indicates that a change animation (details will be described later) is executed in which the display state of the hold icon changes from a white circle to a black circle. “Black → Heat” indicates that a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from a black circle to a mode in which “Heat” is drawn in a circle. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the hold icon is a white circle. When the prefetch result includes undetermined information, the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the prefetch result may be displayed in the default display mode without executing the prefetch notice lottery.

  The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure indicates a prefetch lottery random number obtained from a prefetch lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the prefetch notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetch result is a big hit. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the prefetch notice mode (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetch notice mode) to be compared is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), when the prefetching notice result is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each prefetching notice mode is 80% for “white”, 2% for “black”, and “heat”. 7%, “white → black” is 3%, and “black → heat” is 8%.

  “Last” in the right column in the figure indicates a prefetch lottery random number acquired from a prefetch lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the prefetch notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetch result is out of order. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the prefetching notice mode (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetching notice mode) to be compared is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the case where the prefetching notice result is out of order, the distribution ratio of each prefetching notice mode is 94% for “white”, 2% for “black”, and “heat”. 1%, “white → black” is 2%, and “black → heat” is 1%.

  FIG. 161 (b) is an example of a lottery table for a notice at the start of change (after the big hit determination) used when a notice lottery is performed in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is shown. The notice lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and the notice effect type for the special figure variation game being executed is determined by the notice lottery. The lottery table for notice at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 161 (b) is composed of items of “notice mode”, “big hit”, and “out”. The “notice mode” in the left column in the figure indicates a mode of a notice that is executed using the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable body 990. “Logo drop” indicates that the announcement movable body 990 moves downward, and “Rotation” indicates that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates. "Logo drop + rotation" indicates that the presentation movable body 990 moves downward, and a notice is executed in a manner that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates. This indicates that the notice effect is not executed.

  The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure indicates the notice lottery random number acquired from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the determination is a big hit. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), when the result of the notice is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each notice mode is 4% for “logo drop”, 7% for “rotation”, and “logo drop + rotation”. "Is 14% and" None "is 75%.

  In the right column of the figure, “missing” indicates the notice lottery random number obtained from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the determination is wrong. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), when the notice result is out of sync, the distribution ratio of each notice mode is 3% for “logo drop”, 2% for “rotation”, and “logo drop + rotation”. "Is 1% and" None "is 94%.

In addition, the notice mode of “logo drop” may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, the distance that the effect movable body 990 moves downward may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or the speed that the effect movable body 990 moves may be different. In addition, the notice mode of “rotation” may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, in the case of a big hit, the image is rotated once, and in the case of a loss, the image is not rotated once and the rotation display is terminated and the normal display is restored. It should be noted that the image may be rotated once even in the case of dislocation. In addition, for example, the rotation angle of the image may be different, the angular velocity of the image rotation may be different, the rotation direction of the image may be different, The image to be rotated may be different. In addition, the notice mode of “logo drop + rotation” may be different as described above depending on whether it is a big hit or not.
Example 1
An effect example of Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 162 and each figure to be described later, an example of the special figure 1 variable game in each example is shown in time series. In addition, fluctuations in the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are represented by white thick arrows.

  First, with reference to FIG. 162 (a), common points of FIG. 162 and each drawing described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), a decoration frame f 1 having a shape obtained by vertically inverting the letter “L” is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the decoration symbol display device 208. A square-shaped special figure 1 reservation number display area 931 is provided in the upper left part of the decoration frame f1, and a square special figure 2 reservation number display area 932 is provided on the right side of the decoration frame f1. Below FIG. 931, a special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 is provided, and below that, a special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934 is provided. In the special figure 1 holding number display area 931, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 1, "0" is displayed. In the special figure 2 holding number display area 932, the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 2, "0" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 4 symbol display area 933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is notified as a change display of the 4 symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “◯”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “-” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the fourth symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “○”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “−” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game.

  Below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular decorative frame f2 is displayed. In the center of the decorative frame f2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 940 in which a part of the left and right frames is opened is provided. Note that the variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reserved orders in FIG. That is, a special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 that is the earliest (most recently stored) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 960 is roughly divided into four areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special figure 2 holding ranks, respectively. That is, a special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 stored in the first area can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960, various animations representing movement of the hold icon are executed.

  A square-shaped navigation character display area 970 is provided to the left of the special figure 1 hold display area 950. In the navigation character display area 970, a merchant character image h1 is displayed. The merchant character image h1 is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect or a notice (notice of the change or a pre-read notice) effect.

  A square effect custom state display area 980 is provided on the right side of the special figure 2 hold display area 960. In the effect custom state display area 980, “level 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 100. The level of the effect custom state is set so as to increase, for example, when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed. The level of the effect custom state may be set so as to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big win is won.

  FIG. 162 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the fourth symbol in a display form of “-” for notifying the discontinuity is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of “-” that notifies that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

  FIG. 162 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become zero.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . A right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon 941 in FIG. 162 (b) represents the moving direction of the variation icon 941.

  In FIG. 162 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is finished, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is white. The default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 in FIG. 162 (b) represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 952. In FIG. 162 (c), a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. . The balloon image is an image used for the advance notice by the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 162 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 in FIG. 162 (d) represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 953. In addition, an image of a character string of “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and an effect that is expected to develop into a reach effect is executed. In addition, a substantially square-shaped hold change image h2 including an image of the character string “hold change” is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. . The hold change image h <b> 2 is an image that is displayed to notify that a pre-reading notice for changing the display mode of the currently displayed hold icon or the change icon or an effect of the change notice is executed. In this example, it is notified that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed by the hold change image h2. The hold change image h2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is changed, The display may appear only when the hold icon and the variation icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation icon are changed. It may be a display.

  FIG. 162 (e) shows that “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Indicates a state of being notified. In addition, an erasing animation in which the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 941 is gradually deleted. FIG. 162 (e) shows a state in which a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from “white to black”. In the change animation, a lightning strike image is displayed on the special figure 1 hold icon 952 from the hold change image h2, and the effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 951. The effect image is displayed in front of the special figure 1 hold icons 952 and 953, and the whole special figure 1 hold icon 952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 162 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In FIG. 162 (f), the change animation is finished, the hold change image h2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 162 (e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 is changed from a white circle to a black circle. It has changed.

  FIG. 162 (g) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Also, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold count display area 931, the special figure 1 hold icon 952 becomes a change icon, and a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are started. ing. In FIG. 162 (g), a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. .

  FIG. 162 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 162 (h), an image of a character string of “dono-” is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and it is suggested that a character image h3 of the manuscript described later appears. Production is being performed. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 162 (i) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “Call me?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the character image h3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 162 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 162 (k) shows that all images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target images” in this embodiment) are displayed on the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 1, the rotation center is 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. In FIG. 162 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image rotated 45 ° counterclockwise is taken in the direction rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. The aspect ratio of the case. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the rotated image after rotation is the aspect ratio when the horizontal axis is taken in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis is taken in the direction perpendicular to the horizontal axis. . For example, when the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is the rotation target image in a state of being rotated 90 ° clockwise as viewed from the player. This indicates the ratio of the vertical length to the horizontal length. Further, the variation display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  The rotation target image before rotation shown in FIG. 162 (j) is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). The rotation target image shown in 162 (k) is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The Further, the variation display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  FIG. 162 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 162 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In FIG. 162 (l), the entire rotation target image is displayed without being completely viewed.

  FIG. 162 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (180 ° in total) from the state of FIG. 162 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation.

  FIG. 162 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 162 (m). Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 162 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The hold change image h <b> 2 displayed in FIG. 162 (n) is an image that is used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The

  FIG. 162 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 162 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In FIG. 162 (o), the rotation target image is not completely seen. FIG. 162 (o) shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the hold change image h2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. In FIG. 162 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 950 shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon appears.

  FIG. 162 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 162 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 162 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon 941 are erased, and a character of “heat” is drawn in a circle. The fluctuation icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 162 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 162 (p) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center (360 ° in total). FIG. 5 shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 162 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed. A downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon in FIG. 162 (r) represents the moving direction of the variation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image may be used as the rotation target image, and the presence of the character image may be enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, and a strong impression may be given to the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 ° rotation), but the rotation target image may be rotated one rotation or more. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the big hit reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio In some cases, the display image may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a random number, and generates a display image from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio, using the work area of the VRAM 436. There may be cases. In addition, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be displayed so that the display area of the rotation target image is constant. The aspect ratio may change.

In this embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation, but there are cases where an arbitrary position in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the center of rotation. Also good. Further, the rotation target image may be rotated with a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position in the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be rotated as an axis. In this embodiment, the rotational angular velocity of each image in the rotation target image is constant, but the rotational angular velocity of each image may be varied according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be decreased as the distance from the center of rotation increases. In this case, the player may be given an impression that the rotation target image is rotating faster than it looks. Further, in this embodiment, an effect of changing the change icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect as a notice of the symbol change display being executed. For this reason, it may be possible to synergistically increase expectations for the special figure variation game being executed by performing these effects simultaneously.
(Example 2)
An effect example of Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (a) to (r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIG. 163 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 162 (a). Next, FIG. 163 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 162 (b). Next, in FIG. 163 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is terminated, and the variable icon display area 940 is displayed. The change icon 941 is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. FIG. 163 (c) shows a state immediately after the speech balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 163 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 163 (e) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Indicates a state of being notified. Next, FIG. 163 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 162 (f). Next, FIG. 163 (g) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 162 (g). Next, FIG. 163 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 162 (h). Next, FIG. 163 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as FIG. 162 (i). Indicates the state.

  FIG. 163 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 163 (k) shows the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold change image h2, the character image h3 of the lord, the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the lord, the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f2. Images (holding icons, change icons, merchant character images h1, etc.) displayed in the inside, and balloon images representing the lines of the merchant character images h1 (hereinafter referred to as “rotation target images” in this embodiment). Shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in Example 1 of the present embodiment, the decoration frame f1 and the image displayed in the decoration frame f1 (reserved number display, second display) Rotation display of 4 symbol images (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images” in this embodiment) is not executed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target image does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

  The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 163 (k) is performed. The target image is displayed with an aspect ratio adapted to a screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The Further, the variation display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  FIG. 163 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 163 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In FIG. 163 (l), the entire rotation target image is displayed without being completely viewed.

  FIG. 163 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 163 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. In addition, the decorative frame f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative frame f2. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative frame f2.

  FIG. 163 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 163 (m) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 163 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 163 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The

  FIG. 163 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 163 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In FIG. 163 (o), the rotation target image is not completely seen. FIG. 163 (o) shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the hold change image h2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. FIG. 163 (o) shows that “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 950 shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon appears.

  FIG. 163 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 163 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 163 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon are deleted, and the variation of the aspect in which the characters “heat” are drawn in the circle An icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 163 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 163 (p) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center (360 ° in total). FIG. 5 shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 163 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed by moving the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated. For the non-rotation target image, the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area and the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area are used. For this reason, an image for notifying information important to the player is not rotated.
Example 3
An effect example of Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 164 (a) to (r) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIGS. 164 (a) to (h) show the same state as FIGS. 163 (a) to (h). Next, in FIG. 164 (i), a character image h3 is displayed at the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d. The character image h3 of the lord and the decorative frame f2 are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a part (chin portion) of the character image h3 of the lord is hidden by the decorative frame f2. FIG. 164 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 163 (i) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 and the character image h3 is different. Next, FIG. 164 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 163 (j) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 and the character image h3 is different.

  FIG. 164 (k) shows a balloon image representing the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image h3 of the lord, and the character image h3 of the lord (hereinafter, these images are referred to as “ ”May be referred to as a“ rotation target image ”)), showing a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment, the image displayed in the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f2, and the decoration frame f2 are displayed. The rotated image and the speech balloon image representing the speech of the character (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images” in this example) are not executed, and the non-rotation target image is not executed. The aspect ratio of does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

  In FIG. 164 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 164 (k). The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono displays the hidden chin portion. In addition, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a is out of view in the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, FIG. 164 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 164 (m) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. Next, FIG. 164 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (m) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, FIG. 164 (n) shows the decorative change image h2 displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c as the rotation target image and the character of the lord as the rotation target image during execution of the rotation display notice effect. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 164 (n) is an image used for producing the notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  FIG. 164 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. FIG. 164 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the change icon (change icon change animation) is executed. In the effect in the present embodiment, the lightning generated from the hold change image h2 is displayed so as to fall at a position different from the change icon to be changed. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image changes from a black circle to a mode in which “heat” is drawn in a circle at the timing when a lightning occurs from the hold change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. ing. In the present embodiment, since the changing variation icon is not hidden by the effect image, the changed variation icon can be visually recognized earlier than when the changing variation icon is hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 164 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. The pending change image h2, the lightning image, and the effect image are deleted. Next, FIG. 164 (q) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (p) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center and returned to the original state. Show. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio. Next, in FIG. 164 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated. For the non-rotation target image, images such as the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area, the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area, the hold icon, and the variation icon are used. For this reason, an image for notifying information important to the player is not rotated.
Example 4
An effect example of Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 165 (a) to 165 (r) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. 165 (a) to (i) show the same state as FIGS. 164 (a) to (i).

  FIG. 165 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed. FIG. 165 (j) shows a decoration frame f2, an image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (a hold icon, a change icon, a merchant character image h1, etc.), and a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1. It has been erased.

  FIG. 165 (k) is a balloon image (hereinafter, in this embodiment) representing the lines of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the pending change image h2, the lord character image h3, and the lord character image h3. "It may be referred to as a" rotation target image ") shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present example, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in Example 1 of the present embodiment, an image displayed in the decoration frame f1 and the decoration frame f1 (hereinafter, in this example, These images are sometimes referred to as “non-rotation target images”), and the rotation display of the non-rotation target images does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image. In FIG. 165 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 165 (k). The aspect ratio of the target image changes in accordance with the aspect ratio of the screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

  FIG. 165 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 165 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 165 (m), the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 165 (l). Indicates the state. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol. Next, in FIG. 165 (n), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 165 (m) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center (total 225 ° rotation). Indicates the state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In FIG. 165 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the hold change image h2g is the decoration displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed overlapping the symbol and the character image h3 of the shrine. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 165 (n) is an image used for producing the notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  FIG. 165 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 165 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. FIG. 165 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. The effect is different from the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon during the rotation display notice effect in the example 1 and the example 2 of the present embodiment, and the thunder generated from the hold change image h2 is changed. It is displayed so as not to fall on the target fluctuation icon. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image is displayed in a circle at the position of the fluctuation icon display area 940 before the execution of the rotation display announcement effect at the timing when the effect image is displayed due to the occurrence of lightning from the hold change image h2. The variation icon 942 in the form of “heat” is temporarily overlapped with the hold change image h2 and “decoration 3”, and is placed on the near side in preference to the hold change image h2 and “decoration 3”. It is displayed. Therefore, the player can temporarily confirm that the change icon has changed.

  FIG. 165 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 165 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, the pending change image h2, the lightning image, the effect image, and the variation icon 941 are deleted. Next, in FIG. 165 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 164 (p) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center (360 ° in total). It shows the state of returning to the original. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio. Further, the erased decoration frame f2, the image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (holding icon, change icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and the balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1 are displayed. Yes. Next, in FIG. 165 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated, images such as the hold icon and the fluctuation icon which are important information for the player are not displayed. In some cases, the player can be focused on the rotation display of the rotation target image. Moreover, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, an effect of changing the variation icon is performed even though the variation icon is not displayed. For this reason, an unexpected surprise may be given to the player. In addition, there may be a case where the player's expectation can be satisfied by displaying only the variation icon that has temporarily changed during the effect of changing the variation icon. Further, the variation icon may be temporarily not displayed until the rotation display of the rotation target image is completed. In this case, since a predetermined time is required until the change icon is displayed after the change icon change animation is completed, the player's expectation may be amplified. Moreover, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, there may be an effect that the hold icon is changed even though the hold icon is not displayed.
(Example 5)
An effect example of Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 166 (a) to (l) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and later-described embodiments 6 to 9 includes a sub display device 209 mounted on the effect movable body 225. The effect movable body 225 can be moved up and down and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). . The production movable body 225 may be configured to be able to operate three-dimensionally. In addition, the sub display device 209 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the sub display device 209, what is necessary is just the structure which can display various productions and various game information, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device, Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. The sub display device 209 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400 in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. In addition, FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the center upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 166 (a), the sub display device 209 (the effect movable body 225) is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is completed and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . As described above, in FIG. 166 (b), the movement animation between the hold / change icons is executed.

  FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icon is finished and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. In this example, the character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 performs rotation display of the character image h3. FIG. 166 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 displayed on the sub display device 209 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “rotation target image” in this example) has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. It shows a state rotated 45 ° counterclockwise. In FIG. 166 (d), the rotation target image is displayed with the aspect ratio of the image changed. The rotation target image before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the sub display device 209), whereas the rotation target image shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 166 (e) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 166 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 166 (f) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is the state shown in FIG. 166 (e) or is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 (a total rotation of 135 °). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5.

  FIG. 166 (g) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) from the state of FIG. 166 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. ing. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. Next, FIG. 166 (h) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 166 (g) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (total rotation of 225 °). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 166 (i) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 166 (h) around the center of the image display area of the sub-sub display device 209. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 166 (j) shows a state where the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 166 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 166 (k) shows that the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 166 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. The state has returned to. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 166 (l), “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the sub display device 209, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. This indicates a state in which this is notified. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image is used as the rotation target image. In some cases, the presence of the character image is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, and the player can be impacted. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 °), but may be configured to rotate one rotation or more. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the big hit reliability.

  Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated from the data using the work area of the VRAM 436. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a random number, and uses the work area of the VRAM 436 to display the display image from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. It may be generated. In addition, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be displayed so that the display area of the rotation target image is constant. The aspect ratio may change.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation, but there are cases where an arbitrary position in the image display area of the sub display device 209 is the center of rotation. Also good. The rotation target image may be rotated about a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position in the image display area of the sub display device 209. It may be rotated as a rotation axis.

In this embodiment, the rotational angular velocity of the rotation target image is constant. However, the rotation angular velocity of the rotation target image may be varied according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of the rotation of the rotation target image may be decreased as the distance from the rotation center increases. In this case, the player may be given the illusion that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks.
(Example 6)
An effect example of Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (a) to (l) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 has a holding display area 209b for displaying a holding number display image in the lower left part. In FIG. 167 (a), “1” is displayed in the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 as the hold number display image indicating that the hold number in FIG.

  FIG. 167 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is completed and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . In this way, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is executed. In the hold display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209, “0” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 0 is displayed as the hold number display image.

  FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icon is finished and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the character image h3 of Tono is rotated 360 ° counterclockwise. FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 moves from the front position at the center upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower position and rotates 45 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 has moved to the upper left portion of the sub display device 209. In addition, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. ° Rotated and displayed.

  FIG. 167 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 90 °) from the state of FIG. 167 (d) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Is shown. In addition, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed with a rotation of 90 ° (a total rotation of 90 °). Next, in FIG. 167 (f), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 167 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (total 135 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 209b in the upper left part of the sub display device 209 has moved to the upper right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 135 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 167 (g), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 167 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (180 ° rotation in total). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotation (total 180 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 167 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 167 (g) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the upper right part of the sub display device 209 has moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. (Total 225 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 167 (i), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 167 (h) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (total 270 ° rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. (Total 270 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 167 (j) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 167 (i). Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the lower right portion of the sub display device 209 has moved to the original position in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 315 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 167 (k), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 167 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (360 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 360 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 167 (l), “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. Further, the sub-display device 209 deletes the character image h3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the variation icon 941 by moving the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward. Animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 209. Further, when the sub display device 209 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. In addition, the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 is moved so as to be displayed at the left corner of the sub display device 209 when viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 209. For this reason, during the rotation of the sub display device 209, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see. Further, in place of the rotation of the sub display device 209, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated to produce an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 209 simultaneously or continuously, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 209 may be fixed to the game board 200 so as not to move.
(Example 7)
An effect example of Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (a) to (l) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 166 (a). Next, FIG. 168 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 166 (b). Next, in FIG. 168 (c), in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the movement animation between the hold / variation icons ends, and the variation icon display region A change icon 941 is displayed at 940. FIG. 168 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves downward and the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 168 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 168 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 209 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 209. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image h3 is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate. Next, FIGS. 168 (e) to 168 (k) show a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 168 (e) to 168 (k), the character image h3 is displayed by rotating clockwise at the same rotational speed as the rotational speed of the sub display device 209. For this reason, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the player's character image h3 is always viewed as not rotating. Next, in FIG. 168 (l), “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. Further, the sub-display device 209 deletes the character image h3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the variation icon 941 by moving the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward. Animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed while the sub display device 209 is rotated. The character image is displayed in such a manner that it is not rotated as viewed from the player. For this reason, since the image displayed on the sub display device does not rotate although the sub display device 209 is rotating, it may be possible to give the player a surprise. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. However, the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 is used. The character image may be rotated at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 209, or the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209 or The character image may be rotated at different speeds.
(Example 8)
An effect example of Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 169 (a) to (f) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 169 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 166 (a). Next, FIG. 169 (b) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved downward, and the character image h3 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and shows the same state as FIG. 168 (c). . The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 169 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the lord character image h3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with high hit reliability. FIG. 169 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the center of the image data as display data. FIG. 169 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (b-2).

  FIGS. 169 (c) to 169 (e) show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.169 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 209 before rotation. In addition, the arrows shown in FIGS. 169 (c) to 169 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 169 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (b) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the character image h4 of the princess that was out of view from the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated as viewed from the player. FIG. 169 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 169 (b-1) by 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 169 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) to display the image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (c-1) with the center of the image data as the center. FIG. 169 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2), and turns the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (b). Fig. 16 shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in Fig. 169 (c).

  FIG. 169 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (c) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 169 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (d). The image data illustrated in FIG. 169 (d-1) is image data in a form in which the image data illustrated in FIG. 169 (c-1) is rotated by 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 169 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) to display the image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. 169 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (d-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e). Fig. 16 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in Fig. 169 (d).

  FIG. 169 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (d) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h <b> 4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of view from the sub display device 209. FIG. 169 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 169 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 169 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 169 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2). 169 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (c-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (d). A state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 169 (d) is shown. FIG. 169 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 169 (c-3).

  FIG. 169 (f) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 169 (f) shows that the sub display device 209 returns to the original state by rotating 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Shows the state. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. FIG. 169 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 169 (f-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 169 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 169 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 169 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 169 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 169 (b-2). 169 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 169 (f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 169 (e). A state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 169 (f) is shown. FIG. 169 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 169 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 while rotating the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is displayed in a mode that does not rotate when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 209 before the rotation display notice effect is executed is displayed on the sub display device 209. Is displayed on the sub display device 209. Also, the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 rotates more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 209, but a character is displayed in accordance with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. You may make it do. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. Further, the princess character image h4 is displayed by rotating the sub display device 209 counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, whereas the sub display device 209 rotates by a predetermined angle clockwise to display the enemy. A character may be displayed. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 and the princess character image h4 used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect.
Example 9
An effect example of Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (a) to 170 (f) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 170 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 166 (a). Next, in FIG. 170 (b), the left and right right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 execute the variation display of the decoration symbols, the movement animation between the hold / variation icons ends, and the variation icon display area A change icon 941 is displayed at 940. In FIG. 170 (b), the sub display device 209 moves downward, and the character image h3 of the lord is displayed at the center of the sub display device 209, and the merchant character image h1 ′ is displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 209. It shows the state that was done. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b). The merchant character image h <b> 1 ′ is the same character image as the merchant character image h <b> 1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970. 170 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 on the lower left of the lord character image h3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with high hit reliability. 170 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) to display the image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the center of the image data as display data. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 170 (b-3) shows a state where an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2). Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1). However, the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) is displayed from the merchant character image h1 ′. It may be displayed with priority.

  170 (c) to 170 (e) show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.170 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 209 before rotation. In addition, the arrows shown in FIGS. 170C to 170E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 170 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b) as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 that has been seen out of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image h1 'in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. 170 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1) is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 170 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) with the center of the image data as the center. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 170 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (c-2), and rotates the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (b). Shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (c).

  FIG. 170 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (c) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (c) as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed on the right side of the merchant character image h1 'in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. 170 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 170 (c-1) is rotated by 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 170 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 170 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (d-2), and rotates the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (c). Fig. 17 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in Fig. 170 (d).

  FIG. 170 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d) as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the center. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image h1 ′ as viewed from the player and the other part is displayed from the sub display device 209. I'm out of sight. FIG. 170 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. 170 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (e). 170 (e-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 170 (d-1) by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. 170 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) with the center of the image data as the center. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 170 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 170 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (e-2), and moves the sub display device 209 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (d). A state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (d) is shown.

  FIG. 170 (f) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 170 (f) shows that the sub display device 209 returns to the original state by rotating 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e). Shows the state. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e) as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in such a manner that it rotates 30 ° clockwise around the center as the center of rotation and returns to its original position. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. 170 (f-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (f). 170 (f-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 170 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 170 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 170 (f). The generated display data is shown. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 170 (f-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 170 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 is superimposed, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 170 (b-2). 170 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 170 (f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 170 (e). This shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (f). FIG. 170 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 170 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (donor character image h3 displayed on the sub display device 209 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player while the sub display device 209 is rotated). And a princess character image h4) and a character image (merchant character image h1 ′) displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player. On the rotating sub display device 209, a character image displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player and a character image displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed simultaneously. There are cases where unexpected surprises can be given to the player.
(Example 10)
An effect example of Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (a) to 171 (f) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 171 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 169 (a). Next, FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 169 (b). FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved downward and the character image h3 is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is an image used for a lateral movement display effect as a reach effect.

  171 (c) to 171 (e) show a state in which a lateral movement display effect as a reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves in the left-right direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.171 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 209 before the movement to the left-right direction.

  FIG. 171 (c) shows a state where the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 171 (b). In addition, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. Yes. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h <b> 4 that has been overlooked in the sub display device 209 is displayed in the upper left part. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with high hit reliability.

  FIG. 171 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 171 (c). Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so that it may be visually recognized so that it may not move, seeing from a player. In the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed at the upper left.

  FIG. 171 (e) shows a state where the sub display device 209 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 171 (d). Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner as to move to the left by the same distance as the right movement distance of the sub display device 209. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image h4 is completely cut out. FIG. 171 (e) shows a state immediately before the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 171 (f) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 171 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved back to the original state from the state shown in FIG. 171 (e). Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner as to move to the left by the same distance as the right movement distance of the sub display device 209. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which it does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed.

Thus, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed while the sub display device 209 is moved laterally. The character image h3 of Tono is displayed in such a manner that the character image h3 does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 209 before the lateral movement display notice effect is executed is displayed on the sub display device 209. Displayed on the sub display device 209 by the horizontal movement display. The princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves beyond a predetermined distance. For this reason, the player pays attention to the distance moved by the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character combined with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed may be displayed. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. In addition, the princess character image h4 is displayed by moving the sub display device 209 to the left by a predetermined distance, whereas the enemy character of the lord is moved by moving the sub display device 209 to the right by a predetermined distance. May be displayed. In addition, the character ratio h3 and the princess character image h4 used for the lateral movement display notice effect in the present embodiment may change in aspect ratio during the lateral movement display notice effect.
(Example 11)
An effect example of Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 172 (a) to (n) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and in an embodiment 11 described later has an effect movable body 990. The effect movable body 990 can be moved and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). . The effect movable body 990 may be configured to be able to move and rotate three-dimensionally. The effect movable body 990 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a character string image of “CR Daito Machine” is displayed on the surface.

  FIG. 172 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. FIG. 172 (a) shows a state where the effect movable body 990 is located at the center upper position of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 172 (a), the effect movable body 990 is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 172 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become zero. In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is decreased by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is being executed. Further, in the hold display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209, “0” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0 is displayed.

  In FIG. 172 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is ended, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is white. The default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. FIG. 172 (c) shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 172 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 172 (e) shows a state where an effect that the effect movable body 990 moves downward (hereinafter may be referred to as a “logo drop effect”) is executed. The logo drop effect is an effect used for a notice of “logo drop” shown in FIG. 161 (b). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for a logo drop effect. In FIG. 172 (e), after the effect image h5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable game is out of place. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed. FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. Note that the logo drop effect shown in FIG. 172 (e) may be used as an effect combined with a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle, or is displayed in a black circle. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 may be used as an effect in combination with the display, or may be used alone as an effect of a pre-reading notice. Next, FIG. 172 (f) shows a state where the effect movable body 990 has moved upward from the position shown in FIG. 172 (e) and returned to the original position shown in FIG. 172 (a). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased as the effect movable body 990 moves upward.

  FIG. 172 (g) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and shows a state immediately after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 are started. FIG. 172 (g) shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 172 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 172 (h), an image of a character string “Tono” is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and suggests that a character image h3 of Tono later described. Production is being performed. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 172 (i) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character image h3 of Tono is displayed in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “Call me?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the character image h3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 172 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 172 (k) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In FIG. 172 (k), all images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target images” in this example) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which the center of the region is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the rotation center. In FIG. 172 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 172 (k) is performed. The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 4: 5. In addition, a part of “decoration 3” and a part of the navigation character display area 970 displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c are out of the decoration symbol display device 208. In FIG. 172 (k), the effect movable body 990 moves to a position where it cannot be visually recognized by the player above the decorative symbol display device 208 in order to make the rotation display notice effect stand out.

  FIG. 172 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 172 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 209, the image to be rotated is not completely visible. FIG. 172 (l) shows a state in which the logo drop effect is performed in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position (not shown) of FIG. 172 (k) during the rotation display notice effect. . In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed as a rotation target image. In FIG. 172 (l), the effect image h5 is displayed in a mode rotated 90 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player, unlike the state shown in FIG. 172 (e). ing. The size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 172 (l) is smaller than the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 172 (e). It is a size. The same applies to the hold icon, the change icon, the merchant character image h1, and the effect image h5.

  FIG. 172 (m) shows that the image to be rotated is rotated 270 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 172 (j). It shows the returned state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio and the original size. In FIG. 172 (m), the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position of FIG. 172 (l) and is located at the original position (position shown in FIG. 172 (a)). . In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is deleted. Next, in FIG. 172 (n), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decoration symbol display device 208. There is an effect to be displayed. The effect image displayed at the position behind the effect movable body 2990 may cause the player to emphasize the operation of the effect movable body 990, and is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990. Since the effect image is displayed at an unexpected position, the player may be surprised unexpectedly. Further, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the size, display color and display position of the effect image.
(Example 12)
An effect example of Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 173 (a) to 173 (f) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 173 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 172 (a). Next, FIG. 173 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 172 (b). Next, FIG. 173 (c) temporarily displays “Decoration 2” in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and shows the same state as FIG. 172 (c).

  FIG. 173 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, FIG. 173 (d) shows a state in which an effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. 173 (c) is executed. Show. The logo drop effect is an effect used for a notice of “logo drop” shown in FIG. 161 (b). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for a logo drop effect.

  FIG. 173 (e) shows a state in which the island simultaneous effect is started during the execution of the logo drop effect. The island simultaneous effect is an effect in which pachinko machines of the same model installed on the same island facility execute the same effect at the same timing. In the island simultaneous production of the present embodiment, a display in which the princess character image h6 sings a song is displayed on the left part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character string image of “Island Simultaneous Start!” Is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 173 (e) shows the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the effect image h5 displayed in FIG. 173 (d) is at a position different from the position displayed in FIG. 173 (d). The state is displayed in a reduced size in the lower right. FIG. 173 (e) shows a state in which a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. A special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is displayed. Note that the logo drop effect of the present embodiment may be used as an effect suggesting that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is performed. It may be used alone as an effect.

  In FIG. 173 (f), the state movable body 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 173 (d) and returns to the original position (position shown in FIG. 173 (a)) during the island simultaneous production. Is shown. In addition, a character string image of “Island Performance” is displayed to the right of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the island performance is in progress. In addition, the effect image h5 reduced and displayed at the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c reduced at the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed as “decoration 2”. “Decoration 4-Decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

  Thus, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image is displayed at a position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the displayed state and the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the back of the effect movable member 990 on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a state. The state in which the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208 may give the player an unexpectedness. It may be possible to provide a topic. Further, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the size, display color and display position of the effect image.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 173 again.
(A1)
A game machine having image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a sub display device 209),
The image display means may perform a rotation display of a first image (for example, Tono character image h3),
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIGS. 162 (j) to (q) or FIGS. 166 (c) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the first image is rotated and displayed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, a strong impression may be given to the player. In addition, any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background design, or all of them may be used as the first image, or other than these images. May be the first image.
(A2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A1) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the hold icon and the hold number display) may not be rotated (for example, FIGS. 164 (j) to (q) or FIGS. 167 (c) to (c)). k)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(A3)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A2) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the fourth pattern) does not rotate (for example, see FIGS. 163 (j) to (q)),
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the rotation display of the first image is performed, the rotation display of the first image is emphasized because the rotation display of the second image may not be performed. Meanwhile, the player can make the second image visible to the player. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the change icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.
(A4)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, the princess character image h4) that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation display is performed is displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 169 (b) to (d)),
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, an image that has been disregarded in the image display unit before the first image is rotated and displayed is displayed on the image display unit by the first rotation display. In some cases, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.
(A5)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be cut off by the image display unit by performing the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 162 (i) to (k)),
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the image displayed on the image display unit before the first image is rotated and displayed is cut off on the image display unit when the first rotation is displayed. Because of this, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.
(A6)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A7)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B1)
Production movable body (for example, production movable body 990),
Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with
When the effect movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the first state (for example, the effect image h5) is displayed in the first position (for example, in FIG. 172 (e)). The display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 173 or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 173 (d)).
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (e) or 173 (d)),
The first image is an effect image,
When the effect movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the second state in which the first image is displayed at the second position (for example, the display of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 172 (l)). Or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 173 (e)).
The second position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (l) or FIG. 173 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, when the production movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the first image is located at a second position different from the position behind the production movable body. The effect image of the first image will be displayed at a position unexpected to the player, giving the player an unexpectedness. May be possible.
(B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (B1) above,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 172 (e) or 173 (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B3)
The game stand according to (B1) or (B2) above,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size (for example, see FIGS. 172 (e) and (f), or FIGS. 173 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the first image in the first state is different from the first image in the second state, so that the player can enjoy variations of the first image. There are cases where you can not.
(B4)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above,
In the first state, a second image (for example, a decorative pattern) may be displayed in a first direction (for example, see FIG. 172 (e)),
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second direction (a direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the first direction) (see, for example, FIG. 172 (l)).
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B5)
The game stand according to (B4) above,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size (see, for example, FIGS. 172 (e) and (l)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the size of the second image in the first state is different from the size of the second image in the second state, so that the player can enjoy variations of the second image. There are cases where you can not. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the change icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.
(B6)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B7)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C1)
An image display unit (for example, a sub display device 209) capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Driving means for driving the image display unit (for example, the movable body for production 225);
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
In a period (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display a first video (for example, a video of the character image h3 of Tono and a video of the character image h4 of the princess)
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image (for example, Tono character image h3 or Princess character image h4) moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the movement period. May be able to perform operations that are not seen on a non-daily basis, allowing the player to forget the daily routine and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. In addition, with an effect as a trigger, the entire period of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect as a trigger, A part of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period.
(C2)
The game stand according to (C1) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the first image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (dono character image h3 and princess character image h4) are fixedly displayed. The outer shape or the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 169, the face of the palace that was not displayed in FIG. 169 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 169 (b), and a little smile is shown in FIG. 169 (c). An animation may be performed such that a full smile is obtained in 169 (d), a slight smile is returned in FIG. 169 (e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 169 (f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image h3 of the lord moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character strings indicating lines to the entire character strings, etc.), characters and icons Color change, character / icon movement display, etc., or a combination of these may be included.
(C3)
The game stand according to (C1) or (C2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.

In a gaming machine having such a configuration, the first orientation when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain effect (for example, arrival of the timing for starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, the left-facing direction) and other effects (for example, the timing of starting the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the big hit starts) The first direction when the display unit operates may be a different direction (for example, right direction). In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite directions. In this case, the first image is moved or rotated faster than the image display unit is moved or rotated. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is further increased in speed. Rotating and moving in the game may cause you to forget your everyday sensations and concentrate on the game.
(C4)
The game stand according to (C3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit appears to move to the player, but the display position / display angle of the first image does not seem to move, so that it is unusual for the notification means. When it is possible to perform a normal operation, the notification itself by the image display unit display can play the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both the impactful operation and the notification There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In this case, the first direction and the second direction may be different from the movement or rotation of the image display unit. One image is visually recognized by the player so as to move or rotate slowly. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is the image display unit. Since the movement and rotation are performed so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the game, it may be possible to forget a more everyday feeling and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with an emphasis on impact, by moving and rotating the first image gently, the notification itself by the image display unit display is close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.
(C5)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image h1 ′) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C6)
The game stand according to (C5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.

The gaming machine having this configuration may be configured not to display a second image that does not move in the first direction during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movement of the image display unit and the image is given a unified feeling and more impactful. There are cases where the production operation can be executed.
(C7)
The game stand according to (C5) or (C6) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) are fixedly displayed. The expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 170, the merchant's face that was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 170 (b), and a little in FIG. 170 (c). The animation may be such that the face is steep, the face is steep in FIG. 170 (d), the face is a little steep in FIG. 170 (e), and the face is returned to the true face in FIG. 170 (f). The aspect in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the animation display position does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character strings indicating lines to the entire character strings, etc.), characters and icons Color change, character / icon movement display, etc., or a combination of these may be included.
(C8)
The game stand according to (C3) or (C4) above,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in (C1) above means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction (for example, a circumferential direction) around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C9)
The gaming machine according to (C8) above,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C10)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above,
“Moving by driving the driving unit” described in (C1) above means “moving linearly by driving the driving unit”.
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means that “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The above-mentioned “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the left direction and the right direction. The above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in an oblique direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

  A modification of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the drive means (production movable body 225) shown in FIGS. 166 to 171 moves in a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, forward and backward direction as viewed from the player). There may be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. An LED may be mounted on the image display unit, or a movable body for production may be mounted. Further, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the production movable body is in the movable state performs the rotation operation or the movement operation. It may be configured to stop and then move the effect movable body to an initial state. In addition, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more effective when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 168 is performed than when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 167 is performed. The mode may be configured to easily become a big hit mode, and when the effect operation of FIG. 167 is performed during the design variation display, the effect operation of FIG. 167 is performed. It may be configured such that the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display tends to be a big hit mode. In addition, during the symbol variation display, when the effect operation of FIG. 167 is performed, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 168 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit mode. Further, FIGS. 167 and 168 show an example in which the same effect display is performed, but when the sub display device shown in FIG. 167 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effect visually recognized by the player and the effect visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device when the sub display device shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may become. For example, “One of the other effects” is an effect in which Tono fights the musician, and “The other effect in another effect” is an effect in which the princess dances. Also good. “One of the other effects” may be installed, one or more may be installed, or one of the “other effects” may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. In addition, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 167, the figure is more than the number of types of effects in which at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device rotate together. When the sub display device rotates as shown at 168, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 168, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. When the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 167, at least a part (or all) of the images displayed on the sub display device rotate together rather than the number of types of effects to be produced. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase.

Further, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 167 and the example of the effect shown in FIG. 168 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is displayed so that the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated so as to be viewed by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or the whole of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed B ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed C ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated. At least part or all of the image is rotated in the other direction (for example, clockwise) at the speed D (for example, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed E ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed F ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. During the period (period G) before the sub display device finishes rotating in the next period, the sub display device is rotated at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so as to be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. Thus, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the sub display device rotates, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually shifts from the rotation of the sub display device. The sub display device is rotated, and a part of or all of the display of the sub display device is shifted to a state where the player can visually recognize it. It may be possible to perform certain effects. Further, as illustrated in the period D to the period G, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device as the sub display device rotates. By causing the player to visually recognize the change as described above, it may be possible to provide a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced during the periods A to D, and the sub display is performed during the periods D to G. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, during the period A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased. During the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. You may comprise so that the difference in speed may be made small gradually. Also, here, the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated, but the present invention is also applicable to the sub display device that moves linearly and the image that is displayed on the sub display device that moves linearly. Is also possible.
[Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a second embodiment to which the present invention is applicable will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. In the following description excluding FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, the side closer to the player with the pachinko machine 100 installed in the island facility of the game shop is referred to as “front” (front, front side, front side, front end, etc.). In addition, the reverse is "rear" (back, rear, rear side, rear end, etc.), and the vertical upper direction as viewed from the player is "up" (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa. ”(Downward, lower, lower end, etc.), the horizontal left when viewed from the player is“ left ”(left, left, left end, etc.), and vice versa (right, right, right, right end, etc.) ).

  FIG. 174 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 1000 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is disposed in the center case at the approximate center of the game area 124 defined by the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed at substantially the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs effects by driving the decorative symbol display device 208 and the lamp, and details will be described later.

  The game board 1000 of this example is a game board for so-called right-handed machines. About the general figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232, since these general figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 are arrange | positioned on the right side path | route, the entrance of the game ball which falls on the right side path | route Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. With respect to the variable winning opening 234, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the left path, depending on the arrangement pattern of the game nails. In FIG. 174, illustration of the game nail is omitted. On the other hand, with regard to Special Figure 1 starting port 230, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of game nails, the presence of warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively difficult to enter a falling game ball. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used. In addition, general winning ports (not shown) are provided on the right route and the left route.

  On the front side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and a plurality of movable bodies are arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. Has been. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has six movable bodies: a movable body 1002, a movable body 1004, a movable body 1006, a movable body 1008, a movable body 1010, and a movable body 1012. These movable bodies are arranged in order of the movable body 1010, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1002, the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and the movable body 1012 from the front side. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are arranged so that the positions in the front-rear direction are the same. The movable body 1004 is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1002. The second sub-control unit 500 executes drive control of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1010, and the movable body 1012. The drive control may be executed by the first sub control unit 400.

  The movable body 1002 has a laterally long rectangular external shape when viewed from the front side. The movable body 1002 can move up and down behind the front stage 244. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1002 has a sub display device 1030 on the front side.

  A liquid crystal display device is used for the sub display device 1030. The sub display device 1030 has a horizontally long rectangular display area smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208, and produces an effect by displaying one or more images. In this example, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of the seascape where the yacht floats. Although the sub display device 1030 employs a liquid crystal display device, the sub display device 1030 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the display control of the sub display device 1030 is executed by the first sub control unit 400. Note that the display control of the sub display device 1030 may be executed by the second sub control unit 500, or a display control unit for executing the display control may be newly provided. Note that the display control unit may execute display control of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The movable body 1002 includes an elongated illuminating unit 1014a, an illuminating unit 1014b, an illuminating unit 1014c, and an illuminating unit 1014d arranged so as to surround the sub display device 1030. The illumination unit 1014a is disposed on the left side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014b is disposed below the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014c is disposed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014d is disposed above the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of color LEDs are used as the light sources of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and the illumination units 1014a to 1014d can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A movable body 1004 is disposed on the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 has an external shape simulating lightning. The movable body 1004 is fixed at one point in the upper left portion of the movable body 1002 outside the display area of the sub display device 1030. The movable body 1004 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the sub display device 1030 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen with the one point as a rotation center. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. The movable body 1004 overlaps the display area of the sub display device 1030 in a state where the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1004. The initial position of the movable body 1004 is a position in a state where the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. The movable body 1004 does not overlap the display area of the sub display device 1030 when positioned at the initial position.

  A movable body 1006 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1006 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1002 has a plate-like shape, and a transmission part 1006a is provided at the upper part and a transmission part 1006b is provided at the lower part. The transmission parts 1006a and 1006b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1006 is visible through the transmission parts 1006a and 1006b. Note that the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b only have to be visible on the rear side, and a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b, and the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b are openings. May be. In addition, an elongated illumination unit 1016 is disposed on the right end of the front surface side of the movable body 1006. The illumination unit 1016 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1016, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1006. The movable body 1006 moves to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. The operation range of the movable body 1006 is from the position where the right end portion of the movable body 1006 is located to the left of the left end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The movable body 1006 becomes invisible to the player in a state where it is located at the left end of the operation range. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1006 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when it is located at the initial position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transmission parts 1006a and 1006b of the movable body 1006.

  A movable body 1008 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1008 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1008 has a plate shape, and is provided with a transmission part 1008a at the upper part and a transmission part 1008b at the lower part. The transmission parts 1008a and 1008b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1008 is visible through the transmission parts 1008a and 1008b. Note that the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b only have to be visible on the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b, and the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b are openings. May be. In addition, an elongated illuminating unit 1018 is disposed at the left end of the front surface of the movable body 1008. The illumination unit 1018 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1018, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1008. The movable body 1008 moves to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. The operation range of the movable body 1008 is from the position where the left end portion of the movable body 1008 is positioned to the right of the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position positioned at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The movable body 1008 becomes invisible to the player in a state where it is located at the right end of the operation range. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1008 overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when positioned at the initial position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1008. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transmission parts 1008a and 1008b of the movable body 1008.

  The movable body 1006 functions as a left shutter, and the movable body 1008 functions as a right shutter. When the movable body 1006 moves to the right end of the moving range and the movable body 1008 moves to the left end of the moving range, the right end portion of the movable body 1006 and the left end portion of the movable body 1008 are in contact with each other. An effect that the shutter is opened and closed by the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 is executed.

  A movable body 1010 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1010 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and a character string “chance” is attached to the front side. Further, the movable body 1010 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen. When the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are closed, the movable body 1010 can move in front of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the movable body 1010 is located at the initial position.

  The movable body 1012 is disposed in the upper left part of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 has an external shape imitating the lightning bolt similar to the movable body 1004. Further, the movable body 1012 is fixed outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and at the upper left of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. When the movable body 1012 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen around the one point. The movable body 1012 can rotate 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Note that the movable body 1012 may be capable of rotating 360 ° or more.

  In the game board 1000, one sensor for detecting whether or not the movable bodies 1002 to 1012 are located at the initial position is arranged for each movable body. The sensor is included in the effect movable body sensor 424 shown in FIG. For example, a photo sensor is used as the sensor.

  A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is disposed behind the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. In the state shown in FIG. 174, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a white circular change icon a1, a white circular hold icon b1, a white circular hold icon b2, and a character “heat” in the white circle A hold icon b3 in which is drawn and a black circular hold icon b4 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icon b1 indicates the hold of the first special figure 1 variable game with the hold order, the hold icon b2 indicates the hold of the second special figure 1 variable game with the hold order, and the hold icon b3 has the third hold order. The special figure 1 variable game is on hold, and the hold icon b4 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the fourth hold order. In the effect display area 208d, a background image including images of the sun, clouds, and balloons is displayed. A part of the sun image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible to the player through the transmission part 1006a of the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible to the player through the transmission portion 1006b of the movable body 1006. A part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1002.

  The main liquid crystal unit 1001 includes an elongated illumination unit 1020, an illumination unit 1022, an illumination unit 1024, and an illumination unit 1026 disposed so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 208. The illumination unit 1020 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1022 is disposed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1024 is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1026 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light sources of the illumination units 1020 to 1026, and the illumination units 1020 to 1026 can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 174, the entire lighting units 1024 and 1026 are visible to the player, and only a part of the lighting unit 1020 is visible from the player via the transmission unit 1006a. Only a part of the upper part is visible to the player through the transmission part 1008a.

  Next, the movable body 1002 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the front. Below the movable body 1002, a motor 1040 as a drive source of the movable body 1002 is disposed. The motor 1040 is fixed to the center case of the game board 1000 so that the rotation axis is in the vertical direction. One end of a screw shaft 1042 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1040 so that the extending direction is the vertical direction.

  A lower base 1044 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the motor 1040. The lower base 1044 is fixed to the game board 1000. The motor 1040 and the lower base 1044 are disposed below the rear side of the front stage 244 and are not visible to the player. The lower base 1044 has a receiving portion 1044a having a flat surface for receiving the movable body 1002 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1044b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. The receiving portion 1044a and the shaft fixing portion 1044b are different from each other, and the receiving portion 1044a is positioned higher than the shaft fixing portion 1044b. For this reason, when the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost part of the movement range, the movable body 1002 contacts the receiving portion 1044a but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1044b.

  Further, the receiving portion 1044a is provided with a through hole that penetrates the lower base 1044 in the vertical direction, and a sliding bearing is disposed in the through hole. The screw shaft 1042 passes through the sliding bearing and is supported by the sliding bearing.

  In the state shown in FIG. 175 (a), the movable body 1004 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1004 can rotate about 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Note that the movable body 1004 may be rotatable by 60 ° or more (eg, 360 °).

  175 (b) and (c) show a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the rear right side. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (b), the movable body 1002 is positioned at the top of the movement range. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (c), the movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position in the movement range. As shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and 175 (c), the movable body 1002 includes a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a moving unit 1036. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1002, and includes a movable body 1004, illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and a sub display device 1030 as shown in FIG.

  The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a driver for the sub display device 1030, LEDs of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, an LED driver, a motor for driving the movable body 1004, and a gear. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a rectangular window portion 1034a, a window portion 1034b, a window portion 1034c, a window portion 1034d (not shown in FIG. 175B), and a window portion 1034e on the rear side. The window portion 1034a is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014a, the window portion 1034b is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014b, the window portion 1034c is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014c, and the window portion 1034d is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014d. Has been. A transparent plate is disposed in the window portions 1034a to 1034e, and the front side of the window portions 1034a to 1034e is visible. On the front side of the windows 1034a to 1034d, an LED, an LED driver mounting board, a decorative lens, and the like are arranged. The windows 1034a to 1034d are used for checking the illumination unit. Further, the window portion 1034e is disposed behind the movable body 1004. A motor for driving the movable body 1004 and a gear for transmitting power to the movable body 1004 are disposed on the front side of the window portion 1034e. The window portion 1034e is used for checking the drive mechanism of the movable body 1004.

  The moving unit 1036 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape smaller than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and is arranged on the rear surface side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The moving unit 1036 includes a motor that rotates the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and transmits the power of the motor to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 are connected via a harness. In addition, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is installed in the moving unit 1036 so as to be rotatable about the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the same plane including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 when in the initial posture. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 175 (b), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Thus, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also functions as a movable body.

  When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable unit 1036 are connected using a connection unit (slip ring or the like) shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 described later, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. May be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees, or there may be no limitation on the rotation angle.

  Further, the moving unit 1036 is provided with two through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. A nut is fixed to the right through hole, and a screw shaft 1042 is fitted to the nut. By rotating the screw shaft 1042, the nut can be moved up and down, and the movable body 1002 can be moved up and down. A guide shaft 1046 passes through the left through hole. The movable body 1004 is guided by the guide shaft 1046 and can move up and down stably.

  An upper base 1048 is disposed above the moving unit 1036. The upper base 1048 is fixed to a transparent plate (not shown) disposed at a position where the position in the front-rear direction is between the movable body 1002 and the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and is disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 1048 has a receiving portion 1048a having a flat surface for receiving the moving unit 1036 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1048b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. A sliding bearing is disposed on the receiving portion 1048b, and the other end of the screw shaft 1042 is supported by the sliding bearing. Further, the receiving portion 1048a and the shaft fixing portion 1048b are stepped, and the receiving portion 1048a is located at a position lower than the shaft fixing portion 1048b. The moving unit 1036 has an upper surface portion 1036a having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1048a when moved to the uppermost position. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the movable body 1002 is positioned at the uppermost position, the upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  Further, the moving unit 1036 has a lower surface portion 1036b having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044 when moved to the lowermost position. As shown in FIG. 175 (c), when the movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position, the lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  The moving unit 1036 includes control means for controlling the moving operation of the movable body 1002 and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 inside. Examples of movement control means arranged in the movement unit 1036 include a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like. The movement unit 1036 may include only one of these movement control means or a plurality of movement control means. In addition, a harness (not shown) having one end connected to the sub display device 1030 extends from the rear side of the moving unit 1036, and the other end of the harness is disposed on the back side of the game board 1000 (for example, Connected to the first sub-board 160). The other end of the harness may be connected to the relay board, and the sub display device 1030 and the control board may be connected via the harness and the relay board.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (b) and (c). FIG. 175 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the movement range. The upper surface portion 1036 a of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1048 a of the upper base 1048. The receiving portion 1048a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002.

  From the state shown in FIG. 175 (b), when the motor 1040 is driven to rotate the screw shaft 1042 clockwise as seen from below, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves below the shaft 1042. Thereby, the movable body 1002 moves downward.

  FIG. 175 (c) shows a state where the movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position in the movement range. The lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044. The receiving portion 1044a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002. When the screw shaft 1042 is rotated counterclockwise by the motor 1040 from the state shown in FIG. 175 (c), the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is removed. Move above the shaft 1042. Thereby, the movable body 1002 moves upward.

  Further, when the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowest position, a load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 due to the weight of the movable body 1002, so that a torque having a magnitude that matches the load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the motor 1040. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the screw shaft 1042 from rotating due to the load of the weight of the movable body 1002 and to make the movable body 1002 stationary.

Further, when the power source of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off for some reason while the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowermost position, electric power for driving the motor 1040 cannot be obtained. For this reason, the screw shaft 1042 rotates clockwise when viewed from above by the load of the movable body 1002 due to its own weight, and moves until the movable body 1002 contacts the receiving portion 1044b of the lower base 1044. Even when the movable body 1002 moves downward under its own weight, the movable body 1002 can be received by the receiving portion 1044b, so that the movable body 1002 can be prevented from being damaged.
Example 1
FIG. 176 and FIG. 177 illustrate an effect example in Example 1 of the present embodiment. 176 and 177 show the effect state in time series. 176 (a) to (q), (t), (u), (x) to (z), (b) to (d), and FIG. 177 are the games of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. FIGS. 176 (r) and (s) show only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and FIGS. 176 (v) and (w) show only the movable body 1002. In FIG. 176 and subsequent figures, illustrations of the general-purpose display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the high accuracy medium lamp 222 are omitted. In addition, illustration of the game ball is also omitted.

  FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 176 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is a position higher than the lowermost position shown in FIG. 175 (c), and is closer to the lowermost position than the uppermost position shown in FIG. 175 (b). When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 176 (b) following FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Also, the black circular hold icon is a pre-read notice mode hold icon as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

  FIG. 176 (c) continuing from FIG. 176 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 176 (d) following FIG. 176 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 176 and subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a downward white arrow. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 176 (e) following FIG. 176 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 176 (e).

  FIG. 176 (f) following FIG. 176 (e) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the operating range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image cannot be visually recognized by the player. The pachinko machine 100 is in a case where at least a part of a decorative pattern or a preview image (for example, an image of the sun, a cloud, a balloon, a hold icon, a change icon, etc.) overlaps with a movable body and cannot be seen by a player. Compared to the case where at least a part of the decorative symbol or the preview image does not overlap with the movable body, there is a higher possibility that it will be a big hit in the running special figure floating game or the pending special figure floating game It may be configured as follows.

  FIG. 176 (g) following FIG. 176 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the movable body 1010. When the movable body 1010 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1010 in the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 176 (h) following FIG. 176 (g) shows a state where the movable body 1006 has moved to the right from the initial position. A part of the sun image and a part of “Decoration 2” are visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006b. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (g) and when the movable body 1006 is moved rightward from the initial position as shown in FIG. The part where the image of the cloud is visible is different. When a sun image or a cloud image is displayed as a preview image, the visible portion of the preview image differs before and after the movable body moves. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured.

  FIG. 176 (i) following FIG. 176 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved leftward and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1006 in the reach rendering is finished.

  FIG. 176 (j) following FIG. 176 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the initial position. A part of the cloud image and a part of “Decoration 2” are visually recognized through the transmission part 1008a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b. As a result, when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 176 (i) and when the movable body 1008 is moved leftward from the initial position as shown in FIG. The portions where the image and the cloud image can be visually recognized are different. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice is executed before and after the movable body moves, the visible part of the preview image may be different. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than in the case where it is performed.

  FIG. 176 (k) continuing from FIG. 176 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1008 in the reach rendering is finished.

  FIG. 176 (l) subsequent to FIG. 176 (k) shows a state where the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position from the initial position. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and starts the effect operation.

  FIG. 176 (m) following FIG. 176 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be rotated 180 ° clockwise and counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 176 (l) in which the upper and lower ends are parallel to the horizontal direction and the left and right ends are parallel to the vertical direction. It is. In FIG. 176 (m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 176 (n) following FIG. 176 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 176 (m). As shown in FIGS. 176 (l) to (n), before and after the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the portions where the balloon image and the cloud image are visible are different. When a balloon image or a cloud image is displayed as a preview image, the visible portion of the preview image is different before and after the operation of the movable body. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice is executed before and after the movable body moves, the visible part of the preview image may be different. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than in the case where it is performed.

  FIG. 176 (o) following FIG. 176 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 176 (n) and returned to the initial posture.

  FIG. 176 (p) following FIG. 176 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved downward and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 in the reach rendering ends.

  FIG. 176 (q) subsequent to FIG. 176 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 176 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted at the same timing as in FIG. 176 (q), and shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotation of the movable body 1012, the movable body 1012 and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap. For this reason, the movable body 1012 makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the sun image and part of the “decoration 2”. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice is executed before and after the movable body moves, the visible part of the preview image may be different. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than in the case where it is performed.

  176 (s) subsequent to FIGS. 176 (q) and (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted, and the movable body 1012 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 176 (q) and (r). It shows a state where it has rotated 90 ° and has returned to its initial position. FIG. 176 (t) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 176 (s). When the movable body 1012 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1012 in the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 176 (u) subsequent to FIGS. 176 (s) and (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 176 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted at the same timing as that of FIG. 176 (u), and shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotation of the movable body 1004, the movable body 1004 and the image of the seascape displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap. For this reason, the movable body 1004 makes it impossible for the player to see part of the image of the seascape. An image of the sea view may be displayed as a preview image. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice is executed before and after the movable body moves, the visible part of the preview image may be different. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than in the case where it is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 176 (u), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 increases from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the effect display area 208d A white circular hold icon is displayed.

  FIG. 176 (w) following FIGS. 176 (u) and (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted, and the movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 176 (u) and (v). This shows the state where it has rotated and returned to its initial position. FIG. 176 (x) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 176 (w). When the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position, the rendering operation of the movable body 1004 in the reach production ends.

  FIG. 176 (y) subsequent to FIGS. 176 (w) and (x) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 176 (z) subsequent to FIG. 176 (y) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon erasing animation is executed while the special figure fluctuation game is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, the black circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

  FIG. 176 (a) following FIG. 176 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is displayed in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left.

  In FIG. 176 (b) following FIG. 176 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is started based on the fact that the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300. Indicates the state. The symbol variation start command includes variation time information. The variation time of this example is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 176 (C) following FIG. 176 (B) shows a state in which power interruption occurs when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off. Further, in this example, all the movable bodies other than the movable body 1002 are stopped at the position where the power interruption occurs.

  FIG. 176 (d) continued from FIG. 176 (c) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowest position in the moving range by its own weight. The movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state with the power off. The lowermost position of the movable body 1002 is a non-operating position of the movable body 1002. When the movable body 1002 is located at the non-operating position, only the upper end portion of the display area of the sub display device 1030 is visible from the player.

  FIG. 177 (a) following FIG. 176 (d) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

  FIG. 177 (b) following FIG. 177 (a) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. The pachinko machine 100 is activated in the order of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 when the power is turned on from off. In FIG. 177 (b), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Starting.”.

  FIG. 177 (c) following FIG. 177 (b) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 177 (d) following FIG. 177 (c) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 177 (d), the movable body 1002 has moved to the uppermost position. In addition, the sub display device 1030 provided in the movable body 1002 displays a character string image “in initial operation” in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 177 (e) following FIG. 177 (d) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 177 (f) following FIG. 177 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 177 (e). In FIG. 177 (g) following FIG. 177 (f), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. The moved state is shown. In the initial operation of the movable body 1002 of this example, first, the movable body 1002 moves from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, and then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and then The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 90 ° clockwise, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed. The initial position of movable body 1002 is the start position of the rendering operation of movable body 1002.

  FIG. 177 (h) following FIG. 177 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the movement range. FIG. 177 (i) following FIG. 177 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1010 moves upward and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position (uppermost position) to the lowermost position, and then the movable body 1010 returns from the lowermost position to the initial position. . When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 177 (j) following FIG. 177 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 177 (k) subsequent to FIG. 177 (j) shows a state where the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 returns from the rightmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  FIG. 177 (l) following FIG. 177 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 177 (m) subsequent to FIG. 177 (l) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves to the right and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1008 of this example, first, the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the leftmost position, and then the movable body 1008 returns from the leftmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1008 is completed.

  FIG. 177 (n) following FIG. 177 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 177 (o) following FIG. 177 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 returns to the initial position by rotating 60 ° counterclockwise. In the initial operation of the movable body 1012 of this example, first, the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1012 is completed.

  FIG. 177 (p) following FIG. 177 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 177 (q) subsequent to FIG. 177 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. In this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operations of all the movable bodies are completed.

  In this example, the initial operation of the movable body is executed in the order of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1010, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1012, and the movable body 1004. The execution order of the initial operation of the movable body can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 177 (r) following FIG. 177 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212. FIG. If a power interruption occurs during the execution of the special figure variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the decoration until the symbol variation stop command is received from the main control unit 300 after the initial operation of the movable body is completed. Control is performed so that the symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 become the preparation screen. As a result, the character string image “in preparation” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In addition, one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (r), but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a hold icon indicating an increased hold because of the preparation screen. Not done. It should be noted that the leftmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is one.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable game being executed is stored in the RAM 308 by the power interruption process (step S243) executed at the time of power interruption, the stop symbol, the variable time, and the special figure 1. A display symbol update timer or the like is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data. The main control unit 300 returns to the gaming state before the power interruption based on the return data by the power recovery process after power-on (step S111). As a result, the main control unit 300 executes control to end the special figure 1 variable game when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game executed at the time of the power interruption has elapsed for 30 seconds.

  FIG. 177 (s) subsequent to FIG. 177 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. The result of the special figure 1 variable game in this example is out of place. Based on the fact that the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation stop command including information indicating that the result of the determination is wrong from the main control unit 300, the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 is displayed. To resume. In the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is an outlier combination, is stopped and displayed, and in the effect display area 208d, images of the sun and clouds are displayed. The background image including the image of the balloon and the image of the balloon is displayed. In addition, since the hold in FIG. 1 is 1, one white circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game executed before the power interruption is not displayed in the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power recovery. The sub display device 1030 displays an image of the seascape.

  FIG. 177 (t) subsequent to FIG. 177 (s) shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and a special FIG. 1 variable game is started. After the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon, a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed, and then the decorative symbol change display is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 stands by at the initial position until the second sub control unit 500 receives the rendering operation start command. Moreover, the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost position. When the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible. For this reason, when the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the preview image that overlaps the movable body 1008 may be visible when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. The symbol variation display in which the notice image may be visible may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed than the symbol variation display in which the notice image remains invisible.

  FIG. 177 (u) following FIG. 177 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the rendering operation. The second sub control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of a command including a start instruction for the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub control unit 400. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 177 (v) following FIG. 177 (u) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1002 stands by at the initial position until the second sub-control unit 500 receives the rendering operation start command. Further, based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special figures in FIG. 1 increases from 0 to 1, and a black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. .

  FIG. 177 (w) subsequent to FIG. 177 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place. Moreover, the movable body 1008 has returned to the initial position. In addition, during the stop display of the decorative design, a variation icon erasing animation is executed to erase the white circular variation icon.

  FIG. 177 (x) subsequent to FIG. 177 (w) shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and a special FIG. 1 variable game is started. After the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon, a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed, and then the decorative symbol change display is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 waits to receive a start instruction for the rendering operation at the initial position.

  FIG. 177 (y) following FIG. 177 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the rendering operation. The second sub control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of a command including a start instruction for the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub control unit 400. In this example, after the movable body 1002 moves from the initial position to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 177 (z) subsequent to FIG. 177 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the movable body 1002 moves downward to return to the initial position. Note that the movable body 1002 may move downward during the execution of the rotation operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture.

  FIG. 177 (a) following FIG. 177 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 177 (B) following FIG. 177 (B) shows a state in which the animation for deleting the variation icon is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped. As a result, the black circular variation icon is deleted.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 1002 starts the effect operation from the initial position and ends the effect operation at the initial position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from a position other than the initial position and the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation from the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may end the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position, and end the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The start position of the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 and the end position of the rendering operation may be the same or different.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Further, when the power source is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position (for example, the fourth position), the movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position from the fourth position. It may be configured to move to.

  Further, when the power source is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at a third position other than the fourth position, the initial position, and the lowest position, the movable body 1002 is moved from the third position. It is configured to move to the lowest position.

  Further, a fourth control unit (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) that controls the movable body 1002 and a drive unit that drives the movable body 1002 are provided.

In addition, a sensor is provided for detecting whether or not the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, and when the sensor detects that the movable body 1002 is not located at the initial position when the power is turned off. The movable body 1002 is configured to move to the lowest position. A sensor is provided for detecting whether or not the movable body is in the initial posture. When the sensor detects that the movable body is not in the initial posture when the power is turned off, the movable body is placed in the initial posture. You may be comprised so that it may return to. Note that the drive control of the movable body 1002 in this embodiment may be applied to another movable body.
(Example 2)
FIG. 178 shows an effect example in Example 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 178 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 178 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 178 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 178 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 178 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  In FIG. 178 (b) following FIG. 178 (a), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the special FIG. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 178 (c) following FIG. 178 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started to perform the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The movement start timing of the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 may be the same, or one of them may be the first. The symbol variation display with a large number of movable bodies moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing as the symbol variation display with a small number of movable bodies moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing. The jackpot symbol pattern may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 178 (d) continuing from FIG. 178 (c) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 perform the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 performs the rendering operation. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 178 (c), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. The initial posture of the movable body 1010 is a posture in which the upper and lower ends of the movable body 1010 are parallel to the horizontal direction. In addition, a drive mechanism that rotates the movable body 1010 can be the same as the drive mechanism that rotates the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In the state shown in FIG. 178 (d), the movable body 1010 rotates 30 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 moves rightward from the initial position. The operation start timings of the movable body 1010, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1006 may be the same, the operation start timings of the two movable bodies may be the same, or the operations start of the three movable bodies. The timing may be different. The symbol variation display with a large number of movable bodies rotating in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing is a symbol variation with a small number of movable bodies rotating in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing. You may be comprised so that a big hit symbol aspect may be easy to carry out a fixed display rather than a display.

  FIG. 178 (e) following FIG. 178 (d) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs during execution of the special FIG. 1 variable game and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  178 (f) following FIG. 178 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is powered off. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a power storage control unit 660 that includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power from the outside is cut off. In preparation. When the power interruption occurs, the second sub control unit 500 drives the movable body with the power supplied from the power storage circuit to return to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when power interruption occurs, control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and control for returning the movable body 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable body 1006 remains stationary at the position when the power interruption occurs. Note that when the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and power interruption occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 remains stationary while rotating from the initial posture.

  FIG. 178 (g) following FIG. 178 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowest position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. For this reason, in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowest position below the initial position. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

  FIG. 178 (h) following FIG. 178 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 178 (i) following FIG. 178 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 178 (j) following FIG. 178 (i) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  FIG. 178 (k) following FIG. 178 (j) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 178 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Starting.”. In addition, the character image “start” of the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  FIG. 178 (l) subsequent to FIG. 178 (k) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 178 (m) subsequent to FIG. 178 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 178 (m), the movable body 1002 has moved from the lowermost position to the uppermost position. In addition, the sub display device 1030 provided in the movable body 1002 displays a character string image “in initial operation” in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 178 (n) following FIG. 178 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 178 (o) following FIG. 178 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 178 (n). In FIG. 178 (p) following FIG. 178 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 178 (o) to return to the initial position, and then the movable body 1002 returns to the initial position. The moved state is shown. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed.

  FIG. 178 (q) subsequent to FIG. 178 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started an initial operation. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position. FIG. 178 (r) following FIG. 178 (q) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 178 (s) following FIG. 178 (r) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 178 (r) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 178 (t) following FIG. 178 (s) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position, then the movable body 1010 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture, and then the movable body 1010. Rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1010 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 178 (u) following FIG. 178 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started an initial operation. If the movable body 1006 is stopped at a position other than the initial position at the start of the initial operation, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position. FIG. 178 (v) following FIG. 178 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 178 (w) following FIG. 178 (v) shows a state where the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 returns to the initial position, then the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 moves to the rightmost position. To return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  FIG. 178 (x) subsequent to FIG. 178 (w) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 178 (y) subsequent to FIG. 178 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves to the right and returns to the initial position.

  FIG. 178 (z) subsequent to FIG. 178 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 178 (a) following FIG. 178 (z) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 returns to the initial position by rotating 60 ° counterclockwise.

In FIG. 178 (A), the movable body 1004 starts an initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 178 (B) following FIG. 178 (A) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. FIG. 178 (C) following FIG. 178 (B) shows a state where the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise. FIG. 178 (2) following FIG. 178 (c) shows a state where the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise, and then returns to the initial position. The movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. As described above, the same operation may be executed a plurality of times in the initial operation of the movable body. In this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operations of all the movable bodies are completed.
Example 3
FIG. 179 shows an effect example in Example 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 178 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 179 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 179 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 179 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 179 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  In FIG. 179 (b) following FIG. 179 (a), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the special FIG. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 179 (c) continued from FIG. 179 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started to perform the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position.

  FIG. 179 (d) following FIG. 179 (c) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the movable body 1004, and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 perform the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 performs the rendering operation. Yes. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 179 (c), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the state shown in FIG. 179 (d), the movable body 1010 rotates 30 ° clockwise, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 Is moving to the right from the initial position. The operation start timings of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1004 may be the same or different.

  FIG. 179 (e) following FIG. 179 (d) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs during the execution of the special FIG. 1 variable game and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 179 (f) following FIG. 179 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-off state. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a power storage control unit 660 that includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power from the outside is cut off. In preparation. When the power interruption occurs, the second sub control unit 500 drives the movable body with the power supplied from the power storage circuit to return to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when power interruption occurs, control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable bodies 1004 and 1006 remain stationary at the position when the power interruption occurs. Note that when the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and power interruption occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 remains stationary while rotating from the initial posture. Further, control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial positions may be executed.

  FIG. 179 (g) following FIG. 179 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowest position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. For this reason, in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowest position below the initial position. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

  FIG. 179 (h) following FIG. 179 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 179 (i) following FIG. 179 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 179 (j) following FIG. 179 (i) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  FIG. 179 (k) subsequent to FIG. 179 (j) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 179 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Starting.”. In addition, the character image “start” of the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  FIG. 179 (l) subsequent to FIG. 179 (k) shows a state where the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 179 (m) subsequent to FIG. 179 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, when there is a movable body that is stopped at a position different from the initial position at the start of the initial operation of the movable body, control for returning the movable body to the initial position is executed. In FIG. 179 (m), first, the movable body 1006 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 179 (n) following FIG. 179 (m) shows a state where the movable body 1004 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 179 (o) following FIG. 179 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial value from the lowest position. FIG. 179 (p) following FIG. 179 (o) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has started the initial operation and moved to the uppermost position. The movable body 1002 starts an initial operation after returning to the initial position.
Example 4
FIG. 180 shows an effect example in Example 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 180 shows the effect state in time series. 180 (a) to 180 (n) show a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 180 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 180 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 180 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  In FIG. 180 (b) following FIG. 180 (a), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 increased from 0 to 1 and increased based on the fact that one game ball entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 180 (c) continuing from FIG. 180 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started to perform the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 180 (d) following FIG. 180 (c) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 performs a rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 180 (e) continuing from FIG. 180 (d) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 180 (f) following FIG. 180 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to its lowest position by its own weight without the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returning to the initial posture. In this example, the control for returning the movable body to the initial posture or the initial position at the time of power interruption is not executed.

  FIG. 180 (g) subsequent to FIG. 180 (g) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  FIG. 180 (h) following FIG. 180 (g) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 180 (h), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “active”. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image “active”.

  FIG. 180 (i) following FIG. 180 (h) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 180 (j) following FIG. 180 (i) shows a state where the initial operation of the movable body 1002 has started. After the movable body 1002 moves to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise. In the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 performs an operation of rotating 180 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In this example, since the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is stationary while rotating 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture at the start of the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° clockwise after the start of the initial operation.

  FIG. 180 (k) following FIG. 180 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture and is stationary. FIG. 180 (l) following FIG. 180 (k) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating counterclockwise. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 180 (k), and then rotates clockwise 180 ° to return to the initial posture. FIG. 180 (m) following FIG. 180 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 180 (n) following FIG. 180 (m) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the initial position. The movable body 1002 ends the initial operation when it moves to the initial position.

  FIG. 180 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 in the state shown in FIGS. 180 (f) to 180 (i) is viewed from the rear right side. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. As shown in FIG. 180 (o), a lower escape portion 1050 having a space for allowing the movable body 1002 to escape is provided below the front side of the lower base 1044. The lower escape portion 1050 is provided in the center case of the game board 1000 at the lower rear side of the front stage 244 of the game board 1000. A receiving portion 1052 having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is disposed at the lowermost end of the lower relief portion 1050. A buffer portion 1054 is provided on the upper surface of the receiving portion 1052. A sheet-like buffer member is used for the buffer unit 1054.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off with the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotated by 45 ° or more from the initial posture, for example, the moving unit 1036 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 cannot be received by the lower base 1044, but the lower escape portion 1050 It can be received by the receiving unit 1052. Thereby, even if the movable body 1002 having a posture different from the initial posture moves to the lower limit position, the movable body 1002 can be prevented from colliding with the peripheral device or the peripheral member.

Although illustration is omitted, when the movable body 1002 can move upward from the initial position of the movable body 1010, an upper clearance portion may be provided. Similar to the lower escape portion 1050, the upper escape portion is provided to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with a peripheral device or a peripheral member. The upper relief portion only needs to be provided with a receiving portion having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a buffer portion on the lower surface of the receiving portion.
(Example 5)
FIG. 181 shows an effect example in Example 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 181 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing in FIG. 181 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 181 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 181 (a), the movable bodies 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  FIG. 181 (b) following FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

  FIG. 181 (c) following FIG. 181 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 181 (d) following FIG. 181 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 181 (e) following FIG. 181 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect starts after FIG. 181 (e).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. The drive mechanism that executes the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is the same as the drive mechanism that executes the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the above embodiment. Thus, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 also functions as a movable body. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise around the center of the display area from the initial posture in which the upper and lower sides of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are parallel to the horizontal direction. Is possible. When the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may not be able to rotate, or both units may be able to rotate. In this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot rotate. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 cannot be rotated as in the above embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be rotatable or may not be rotated.

  FIG. 181 (f) continued from FIG. 181 (e) shows a state in which an effect in the previous stage of the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. In this example, before the main liquid crystal unit 1001 starts the rotation operation, the change icon, the hold icon, and the decorative design are displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then these displays are erased from the decorative design display device 208. . In this example, first, a black circular variation icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then the variation icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. If a hold icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then the hold icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is the same as the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 181 (g) continued from FIG. 181 (f) shows a state in which the decorative design is displayed on the sub display device 1030. After the sub display device 1030 temporarily stops and displays “decoration 2” as the left and right symbols, and the middle symbol is variably displayed, the decoration symbol display is deleted from the ornament symbol display device 208.

  When the display of the variation icon, the hold icon, the decoration symbol, and the like is deleted on the decorative symbol display device 208, another display that overlaps the display may be visible to the player. The other display may be displayed as a preview image. The symbol variation display in which the other display may be visible to the player so that the big hit symbol mode is more easily displayed than the symbol variation display in which the other display remains invisible to the player. It may be configured.

  FIG. 181 (h) following FIG. 181 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started the rendering operation. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 181 (i) following FIG. 181 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 181 (h). Further, based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special figures in FIG. 1 increases from 0 to 1, and a white circular hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. .

  FIG. 181 (j) following FIG. 181 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 181 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In addition, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a middle symbol on the sub display device 1030, and the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the device 1030, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol.

  FIG. 181 (k) continuing from FIG. 181 (j) shows a state where the animation for deleting the variation icon is executed. In the sub display device 1030, the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed, and the black circular fluctuation icon is deleted.

  FIG. 181 (l) subsequent to FIG. 181 (k) shows a non-execution state of the special figure variable game. The special figure 1 of the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), and “decoration 2 -decoration 3 -decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 181 (m) following FIG. 181 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). As shown in FIG. 1, after the start of the variable game, the sub-display device 1030 displays a moving animation between the hold icon and the change icon that moves to the left. In addition, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movable body 1006 has moved to the leftmost end. For this reason, the movable body 1006 cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 181 (n) following FIG. 181 (m) shows a state in which the decorative display variable display is started on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 181 (o) following FIG. 181 (n) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this example, the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during execution of the special symbol variable game after the special graphic variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the decorative symbol variation display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub-display device 1030 erases the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 181 (n) following FIG. 181 (o) shows a state in which the display of the variation icon is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the display of the variation icon and the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during execution of the special figure variable game following the special figure variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the display of the variation icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030. When the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030 after the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started.

  FIG. 181 (q) subsequent to FIG. 181 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place. Note that the movable body 1006 may return to the initial position after the end of the special figure 1 variable game.

FIG. 181 (r) subsequent to FIG. 181 (q) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed while the special figure fluctuation game is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.
(Example 6)
FIG. 182 shows an effect example in Example 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 182 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing in FIG. 182 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 182 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot be moved or rotated, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is moved in the vertical direction by a driving mechanism similar to the movable body 1002 shown in FIG. It is possible. Further, as in the fifth embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. In the state shown in FIG. 182 (a), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is in the initial position in the initial posture. Note that both the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be movable up and down.

  FIG. 182 (b) continued from FIG. 182 (a) shows a state in which power interruption occurs during the non-execution of the special figure variable game and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 182 (c) following FIG. 182 (b) shows a state where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position. Similar to the movable body 1002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves to the lowest position in the moving range by its own weight. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the lowest position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state with the power off. In addition, the second sub control unit 500 may execute drive control for moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 to the lowest position with the power supplied from the power storage circuit provided in the power control unit 660.

  FIG. 182 (d) following FIG. 182 (c) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

  FIG. 182 (e) subsequent to FIG. 182 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 182 (e), the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the character string image of “being activated” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 that are controlled by the first sub control unit 400. Has been.

  FIG. 182 (f) following FIG. 182 (e) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed. Note that the character string image “Active” is continuously displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 182 (g) following FIG. 182 (f) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, only the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is executed. As shown in FIG. 182 (g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves upward and is positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 182 (h) following FIG. 182 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 182 (i) subsequent to FIG. 182 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 182 (h). FIG. 182 (j) following FIG. 182 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 182 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 of this example, first, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves from the lowest position (non-operating operation position) to the initial position, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates counterclockwise from the initial posture. Then, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 90 ° clockwise, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is completed.

  FIG. 182 (k) subsequent to FIG. 182 (j) shows a state where the initial operation of the movable body is completed and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is resumed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. The stop symbol “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is a default stop symbol. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (k), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero.

176 (c) and (d), the movable body 1002 moves from the initial position to the lowest position, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 in FIGS. 182 (b) and 182 (c) moves from the initial position to the lowest position. The movement of the first movable body to the first position when the power source is turned off, such as movement, may be performed not only when the power source is turned off, but also as a big hit notice. The symbol variation display with the jackpot notice may be configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol form to be stopped and displayed in the end than the symbol variation display without the jackpot notice. The symbol variation display that has been performed may always be finally stopped and displayed. On the contrary, even if it is the symbol variation display for which the jackpot notice is made, the symbol pattern may be finally removed and the symbol pattern may be stopped and displayed. Of course, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is finally stopped even if the symbol variation display in which the big hit announcement is not performed.
(Example 7)
FIG. 183 shows an effect example in Example 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 183 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 183 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 183 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can execute vertical movement and rotation, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can execute vertical movement and rotation. In the state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are positioned at the initial position, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is positioned at the initial position in the initial posture, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is initially positioned. Still in posture.

  FIG. 183 (b), which continues from FIG. 183 (a), shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

  FIG. 183 (c) following FIG. 183 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 183 (d) following FIG. 183 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 183 (e) following FIG. 183 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 183 (e).

  FIG. 183 (f) continued from FIG. 183 (e) shows a state in which the rendering operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is started. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 183 (g) subsequent to FIG. 183 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (g).

  FIG. 183 (h) continued from FIG. 183 (g) shows a state in which the rendering operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 183 (i) following FIG. 183 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (h). The rotation start timing of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be the same, or one of them may be the first. In the rotation operation, the rotation speeds of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are the same.

  FIG. 183 (j) following FIG. 183 (i) shows a state where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (h). In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a rotation speed larger than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. At the time shown in FIG. 183 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (i). The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (i).

  In FIG. 183 (k) following FIG. 183 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (j), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 shows the state shown in FIG. 183 (j). It shows the state rotated 30 ° clockwise. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  In FIG. 183 (l) following FIG. 183 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 183 (k), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 starts from the state shown in FIG. 183 (k). A state rotated 30 ° counterclockwise is shown. As a result, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 return to the initial posture.

  FIG. 183 (m) subsequent to FIG. 183 (l) shows a state in which an effect operation in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in the vertical direction is executed. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves downward, and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves upward. Thus, in the effect operation of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in opposite directions.

  FIG. 183 (n) subsequent to FIG. 183 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Prior to the end of the special figure 1 variable game, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are returned to the initial positions. Moreover, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

FIG. 183 (o) subsequent to FIG. 183 (n) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed while the special figure fluctuation game is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.
(Example 8)
Next, a connection unit 1060 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A slip ring is used for the connection unit 1060 of the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 184 (a) to (d) are external perspective views of the connection unit 1060 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. First, the external structure of the connection unit 1060 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1060 includes an upper case 1062 and a lower case 1064. The upper case 1062 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1062 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (d) and (f), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  A lower case 1064 is disposed below the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1064 is opened. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1062 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1064 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1062 have the same size, and the lower case 1064 is disposed so that the upper surface matches the lower surface of the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 is shorter in the vertical direction than the upper case 1062 when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 184 (a) to 184 (e), the lower case 1064 is hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1062 and the lower case 1064 are disposed on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed-side connector 1066 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1062. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the fixed connector 1066 is connected to the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

  A circular opening 1068 is provided at the center of the upper surface of the upper case 1062. A circular rotation side case 1070 is disposed in the opening 1068. The rotation side case 1070 is disposed on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. A rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the rotation side case 1070. The rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 has one end fixed to the rotation shaft of a motor disposed in the moving unit 1036 and the other end fixed to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the rotation side case 1070. It arrange | positions so that it may extend | stretch. The rotation side case 1070 is provided with a rotation side connector 1074. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotation side connector 1074 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  The rotation side case 1070 rotates with the shaft. FIGS. 184 (b) to 184 (d) show a state where the rotation side case 1070 has been rotated. FIG. 184 (b) shows a state where the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 184 (c) shows a state where the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 184 (d) shows a state where the rotating side case 1070 is rotated 270 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 184 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above.

  FIG. 184 (e) shows a state where the inside of the lower case 1064 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the upper case 1062 side. A circular rotation shaft hole 1076 is provided at the center of the lower case 1064. A shaft for rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 passes through the rotation shaft hole 1076.

  The fixed connector 1066 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1064 is provided with conductive portions 1078, 1080, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1088 connected to the pins of the fixed connector 1066, respectively. Yes. Taking the conductive portion 1078 as an example, the conductive portion 1078 has an elongated conductive plate 1078a and a fixture 1078b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064. The fixture 1078b fixes the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064 so that the conductive plate 1078b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1078b. The conductive portions 1080 to 1088 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1078.

  FIG. 184 (f) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the lower case 1064 side. A rotation side substrate 1090 is disposed on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070. The rotation side substrate 1090 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1090 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1092. In addition, circumferential wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1092 of the rotation side substrate 1090. The wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. The insulating portion 1092 and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are concentrically arranged, and a rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. Note that in FIG. 184 (f), the insulating portion 1092 and the wiring portions 1094 to 1104 are hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  The rotation side connector 1074 of the rotation side case 1070 is provided with 6 pins, and each pin is connected to the wirings 1094 to 1104. The wiring 1094 is connected to the conductive portion 1078 shown in FIG. 184 (e), the wiring 1096 is connected to the conductive portion 1080 shown in FIG. 184 (e), and the wiring 1098 is connected to the conductive portion 1082 shown in FIG. 184 (e). The wiring 1100 is connected to the conductive portion 1084 shown in FIG. 184 (e), the wiring 1102 is connected to the conductive portion 1086 shown in FIG. 184 (e), and the wiring 1104 is connected to the conductive portion 1088 shown in FIG. 184 (e). Connected.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 (g) and (h), the connection state between each conductive portion and each wiring will be described taking the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 as an example. FIGS. 184 (g) and (h) show the conductive portion 1078 extracted along the line AA in FIG. 184 (e). The conductive plate 1078a has a shape extending obliquely upward from the lower case 1064. When the lower case 1064 is placed on the upper case 1062 with the upper surface of the lower case 1064 and the lower surface of the upper case 1062 aligned, as shown in FIG. 184 (h), the wiring 1094 has the other end of the conductive plate 1078a downward. It contacts the conductive plate 1078a so as to be pushed in. In this way, the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are connected. The connection state between the conductive portions 1080 to 1088 and the wirings 1096 to 1104 is the same.

  The conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1080 and the wiring 1096 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1082 and the wiring 1098 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub board 160. The conductive portion 1084 and the wiring 1100 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1086 and the wiring 1102 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-substrate 160 to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1088 and the wiring 1104 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-board 160 to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  As an example of various signals, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), the first sub-control unit 400 applies to the microcomputer. Examples include a production command (a command for designating production, progression of production, still image, moving image, progression of image display scenario, and the like).

  Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be provided with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, image control provided on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer. Image commands (commands that specify the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) for the means.

Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub board 160 or the moving unit 1036 to The image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means or the like) may be mounted on 1032. In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted for a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.).
Example 9
Next, a connection unit of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, a connection unit 1110 is used as the connection unit.

  FIG. 185 (a) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 is disposed in the moving unit 1036 shown in FIG. 175, and is electrically connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  First, an external configuration of the connection unit 1110 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1110 includes an upper case 1112 and a lower case 1114. The upper case 1112 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1112 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 185 (a) and 185 (c), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to make it easy to distinguish the configuration.

  A lower case 1114 is disposed below the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1114 is opened. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1112 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1114 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1112 have the same size, and the lower case 1114 is arranged such that the upper surface coincides with the lower surface of the upper case 1112. Further, the lower case 1114 is shorter in the vertical direction than the upper case 1112 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 185 (a) to 185 (b), the lower case 1114 is hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1112 and the lower case 1114 are disposed on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed-side connector 1116 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1112. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the fixed connector 1116 is connected to the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

  A circular opening 1118 is provided at the center of the upper bottom surface of the upper case 1112. A circular rotation side case 1120 is disposed in the opening 1118. The rotation side case 1120 is disposed on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The rotation side case 1120 is provided with a rotation side connector 1022. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotation side connector 1122 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  Fixed to the upper surface of the rotation-side case 1112 are columnar rotor connecting shafts 1124, 1126, and 1128 that extend perpendicularly to the upper surface and extend upward. The rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126, and 1128 have the same length. Further, the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are arranged at equal intervals on the rotating side case 1112. Bearings are attached to the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is attached to the bearings. Further, when the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are connected, an equilateral triangle is formed, and data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 described later are arranged at the center of gravity of the equilateral triangle.

  FIG. 185 (b) shows a state where the inside of the lower case 1114 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the upper case 1112 side. The fixed connector 1116 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1164 is provided with conductive portions 1130, 1132, 1134, 1136 respectively connected to 4 of the 6 pins of the fixed connector 1164. . Taking the conductive portion 1130 as an example, the conductive portion 1130 includes an elongated conductive plate 1130a and a fixture 1130b that fixes one end of the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114. The fixture 1130b fixes the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114 so that the conductive plate 1130b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1130b. The conductive portions 1132 to 1136 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1130.

  In the present embodiment, the conductive portions 1130 to 1136 are used for power supply and GND connection, and signal communication is performed by optical communication (wireless communication). In the center of the lower case 1114, a data transmission / reception unit 1138 for optical communication is arranged. The data transmission / reception unit 1138 is connected to two of the six pins of the fixed connector 1114. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1138 is used for signal transmission, but signal reception is also possible.

  FIG. 185 (c) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the lower case 1114 side. A rotation side substrate 1140 is disposed on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120. The rotation side substrate 1140 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1140 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1142. A data transmission / reception unit 1144 is arranged at the center of the rotation side substrate 1140. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is disposed to face the data transmission / reception unit 1138 so as to overlap the data transmission / reception unit 1138 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from above. Signal transmission / reception is performed between the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 by optical communication. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is connected to two of the six pins of the rotation-side connector 1122. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is used for signal reception, but signal transmission is also possible.

  In addition, circumferential wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, and 1522 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1142 of the rotation side substrate 1140. The wirings 1146, 1148, 1150 and 1152 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating portion 1142 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are concentrically arranged, and the data transmitting / receiving portion 1144 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. Note that in FIG. 185 (c), the insulating portion 1142 and the wiring portions 1146 to 1152 are hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  Four of the six pins and wirings 1146 to 1152 are connected to the rotation-side connector 1122 of the rotation-side case 1120, respectively. The wiring 1146 is connected to the conductive portion 1130 shown in FIG. 185 (b), the wiring 1148 is connected to the conductive portion 1132 shown in FIG. 185 (b), and the wiring 1150 is connected to the conductive portion 1134 shown in FIG. 185 (b). The wiring 1152 is connected to the conductive portion 1136 shown in FIG. 185 (b).

  185 (d) and (e) show the connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146. FIG. 185 (d) and (e) show the conductive portion 1130 extracted by the AA line in FIG. 185 (b). The connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 is similar to the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 shown in FIGS. 184 (e) and 184 (f). The connection state between the conductive portions 1132 to 1136 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 is the same.

  The conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1132 and the wiring 1148 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1134 and the wiring 1150 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub board 160. The conductive portion 1136 and the wiring 1152 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-substrate 160.

  As an example of various signals transmitted / received between the data transmitting / receiving units 1138 and 1144, when a sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.). Includes an effect command (command for specifying the effect, the progress of the effect, the still image, the moving image, the progress of the image display scenario, etc.) from the first sub-control unit 400 to the microcomputer.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be provided with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, image control provided on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer. Image commands (commands that specify the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) for the means.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub board 160 or the moving unit 1036 to The image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means or the like) may be mounted on 1032. In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted for a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 is optical wireless communication. Laser light is used for optical wireless communication. Note that data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 may be radio wave communication instead of optical wireless communication. In addition, in the optical wireless communication, LED light may be used instead of laser light.

  When both the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the data transmission / reception unit 1138 to the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is as described above. For the unit 138, an ACK signal and a status signal from a control means provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 (for example, an image control means, a microcomputer for controlling the image control means, an image drive means (liquid crystal drive means), etc.) Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (for example, a detection signal output when a sensor provided on the rotation side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side, an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotation side, etc. ) May be transmitted.

  FIG. 185 (f) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has only the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 as the rotating body connecting shaft. The rotating body connection shaft 1124 is disposed at the center (rotation center) of the rotation side case 1120.

FIG. 185 (g) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has rotating body connecting shafts 1124 and 1126 as rotating body connecting shafts. A straight line connecting the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the tip of the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 passes through the center (rotation center) of the rotating case 1120. Further, the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 are arranged at an equal distance from the center.
(Example 10)
FIG. 186 shows Production Example 1 in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 186 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 186 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Also, the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 of the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment and Examples 11 to 16 described later are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. And is movable in the left-right direction on the front side of the movable body 1002.

  FIG. 186 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Also, in the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 186 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 186 (b) following FIG. 186 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the arrival of one game ball in the special FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Also, the black circular hold icon is a pre-read notice mode hold icon as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

  FIG. 186 (c) following FIG. 186 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 186 (d) following FIG. 186 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 186 and subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a downward white bold arrow. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 186 (e) following FIG. 186 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 186 (d).

  In FIG. 186 (f) following FIG. 186 (e), the movable body 1008 starts an effect operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 186 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 shields the player so that it is difficult to visually recognize the right half area of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. A cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, a partial region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008b. Note that the yacht image or cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the yacht image and the cloud image may be shielded by the movable body 1008 is determined in comparison with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily.

  FIG. 186 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 186 (f). The movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 186 (h) to 186 (g) continuing from FIG. 186 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. In FIG. 186 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. Note that although a cloud image is displayed at a position behind the movable body 1008 below the transmission portion 1008b, the cloud image is not visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008. In this embodiment, the cloud image is an image displayed as a preview image.

  FIG. 186 (h) following FIGS. 186 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating. In FIG. 186 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated about 10 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 186 (i) following FIG. 186 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (h). In FIG. 186 (i), in the state of FIGS. 186 (g) and (h), an image of a cloud that cannot be visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008 is caused by the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The state which became visible via 1008b is shown. The symbol fluctuation display in which the cloud image may be visually recognized through 1008b as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates is the case where the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display that is not present. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (h), so that the entire cloud image is visible through 1008b. Only a part of the cloud image may be visible through 1008b.

  FIG. 186 (j) following FIG. 186 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (i). In FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (j) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (h) are the same, but in the state shown in FIG. 186 (h), the rotation angle is visually recognized through 1008b. Since the image of the cloud that did not exist is displayed so as to move upward in accordance with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, in FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008 b. In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. There may be a case where the moving display of the image is performed.

  FIG. 186 (k) following FIG. 186 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 186 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 186 (k), a cloud image that was not visually recognized via 1008b in the state shown in FIG. 186 (g) is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (k) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 186 (g) are the same, but after the state shown in FIG. Since the display is moved upward in accordance with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, it is visually recognized through 1008 b in FIG. 186 (k). In addition, since the display of moving the cloud image upward is performed, the area of the cloud image visible through 1008b in FIG. 186 (k) is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 186 (j). It is wider than possible cloud image area. In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. There may be a case where a moving image of a cloud image is displayed.

  In FIG. 186 (l) following FIG. 186 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of variable display is a big hit.

  FIG. 187 shows Production Example 2 in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 187 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 187 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  187 (a) to (f) show the same state as FIGS. 186 (a) to (f). FIG. 187 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 187 (f). The movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 187 (h) to 187 (k) continuing from FIG. 187 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b are extracted and shown. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. FIG. 187 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 186 (g). FIG. 187 (h) following FIGS. 187 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating, and shows the same state as FIG. 186 (h).

  FIG. 187 (i) following FIG. 187 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 187 (i). In FIG. 187 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (i), the cloud image displayed behind the movable body 1008 is moved and displayed to the left as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. , 1008b, a state that is not visually recognized. In addition, the cloud image may be erased as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates, or may not be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 187 (j) following FIG. 187 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 187 (i). FIG. 187 (j) shows a state where a cloud image is not visually recognized, unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (j).

  FIG. 187 (k) following FIG. 187 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 187 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 187 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 186 (k), the cloud image is not visually recognized.

  In FIG. 187 (l) following FIG. 187 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable display is out of sync.

  As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may execute a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the player may be able to visually recognize the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 via the movable body 1006 and the transmission portion of the movable body 1008. is there. In this embodiment, the cloud image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that cannot be visually recognized by the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 moves to the left is displayed as a preview image. In the present embodiment, the movement of the movable body 1008 causes the player to visually recognize at least a part of the notice image via the transmission part 1008b, and at least the notice image via the transmission part 1008b. There is an effect when not letting the player visually recognize some images. In addition, when a part of the notice image is visually recognized by the player through the transmission part 1008b of the movable body 1008 due to the moving operation of the movable body 1008, the notice image is displayed via the transmission part 1008b of the movable body 1008. As compared with a case where at least a part of the image is not visually recognized by the player, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed as a final result of the symbol variation display.

The cloud, balloon, and sun images displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be able to be moved and displayed as the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. For example, the cloud image displayed at the upper center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 206 moves so that the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission part 1008a when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position. The balloon or the sun image may be displayed so that when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, it can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a and the transmissive portion 1008b. Display may be performed. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the symbol variation display in which images of clouds, balloons, and the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a and the transmission unit 1008b is transmitted through the transmission unit 1008a and the transmission unit 1008b. The big hit symbol mode may be configured to be displayed more easily than the symbol variation display in which images of clouds, balloons, and the sun are not visible. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the images of clouds, balloons, and sun are displayed so that the images of the clouds, balloons, and sun are not visible through the transmission parts 1008a and 1008b. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the movement of the cloud 100, the balloon, or the sun image is not displayed when the movable body 1008 moves to the left. Compared with the symbol variation display in which the balloon or the sun image remains visible, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed. Further, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, images of clouds, balloons, and the sun when viewed through the transmissive portion 1008a and the transmissive portion 1008b are displayed in a color different from the normal time. There may be cases. For example, when the cloud image is normally displayed in white, and is visible through the transmissive part 1008a or the transmissive part 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, blue, green, or It may be displayed in red. The symbol variation display in which the cloud image may be displayed in a different color from the normal time is more likely to display the big hit symbol form in comparison with the symbol variation display in which the cloud image is displayed in the normal color. It may be configured. Further, there may be a case where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 186 (g) to (k) or FIGS. 187 (g) to (k) of the present embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the sub display device 1030. There may be.
(Example 11)
FIG. 188 shows Production Example 1 in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 188 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 188 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 188 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 188 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 188 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 188 (b) following FIG. 188 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Also, the black circular hold icon is a pre-read notice mode hold icon as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

  FIG. 188 (c) following FIG. 188 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 188 (d) following FIG. 188 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 186 and subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a downward white bold arrow. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 188 (e) following FIG. 188 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 188 (d).

  In FIG. 188 (f) following FIG. 188 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 188 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 shields the player so that the right half area of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is difficult to see. A cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, a partial region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008b. Note that the yacht image or cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the image of the yacht or the cloud may be shielded by the movable body 1008 is determined in comparison with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily.

  FIG. 188 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as that in FIG. 188 (f). The movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 188 (h) to 188 (k) continuing from FIG. 188 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. In FIG. 188 (g), the movable body 1008 shields a part excluding the right portion of the illumination portion 1014b, the lower end portion of the illumination portion 1014c, and the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d, and illuminates via the transmission portion 1008b. The portion excluding the shielded portion of the portion 1014c and the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d are visually recognized. In addition, FIG. 188 (g) shows a state where the portions of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d that are visible from the player emit light in blue. In FIG. 188 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 188 (h) following FIGS. 188 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating. In FIG. 188 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated about 10 ° counterclockwise. Further, in FIG. 188 (h), the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is reduced through the transmission unit 1008b as compared to the state shown in FIG. 188 (g). Further, in a region that is not shielded by the movable body 1008, the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is increased.

  FIG. 188 (i) following FIG. 188 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 35 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 188 (h). In FIG. 188 (i), a black portion of the illumination unit 1014d indicates a portion that emits blue light, and a white portion indicates a portion that emits red light. In FIG. 188 (i), in a region that is not shielded by the movable body 1008, the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that has not been visually recognized by the player by overlapping with the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized by the player. This shows the state. The symbol variation display in which the red light emission portion may be visible due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is the symbol variation display in which the red light emission portion may not be visible because the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. Compared with, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is easier to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 188 (j) subsequent to FIG. 188 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 35 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 188 (i). FIG. 188 (j) shows a state in which the area of the portion that emits red light in the illumination unit 1014d is large and the area of the portion that emits blue light is small. In FIG. 188 (j), a part of the cloud image as the preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. In some cases, the image may be displayed. When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, at least a part of the cloud image as the preview image may be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Compared with the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the symbol is not visually recognized, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 188 (k) following FIG. 188 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 188 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 188 (k) shows a state in which the area of the illuminating unit 1014d that emits red light is further increased, and the illuminating unit 1014d emits all red light. In FIG. 188 (k), a part of the cloud image as the preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, the display of moving the cloud image upward is performed, so that the cloud image region visible through 1008b in FIG. 188 (k) is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 188 (j). It is wider than possible cloud image area. In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 188 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. There may be a case where a moving image of a cloud image is displayed.

  In FIG. 188 (l) following FIG. 188 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of variable display is a big hit.

  FIG. 189 shows Production Example 2 in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 189 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 189 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  189 (a) to (f) show the same state as FIGS. 188 (a) to (f). FIG. 189 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 189 (f). The movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 189 (h) to (k) continuing from FIG. 189 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. FIG. 189 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 188 (g). FIG. 189 (h) following FIGS. 189 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started to rotate, and shows the same state as FIG. 188 (h).

  FIG. 189 (i) following FIG. 189 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 189 (i). Further, FIG. 189 (i) is different from the state shown in FIG. 188 (i) because the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is small, so that the illumination unit 1014d that is not visible to the player by overlapping with the movable body 1008 is red. The state which the light emission part is not visually recognized is shown.

  FIG. 189 (j) following FIG. 189 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 189 (i). Further, in FIG. 189 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), the area of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is not large, so that the portion of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is visible. Indicates a state that is not. Also, in FIG. 189 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), a state where a cloud image as a notice image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

  FIG. 189 (k) following FIG. 189 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 189 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 189 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), the area of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is not large, so the portion of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is not visually recognized. Indicates the state. Also, in FIG. 189 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 188 (j), a state where a cloud image as a notice image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

  In FIG. 189 (l) following FIG. 189 (k), after the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable display is out of sync.

As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may perform a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. The light emission mode of 1014d may change. In this embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by a maximum of 45 ° in the clockwise direction behind the movable body 1008, an effect of changing the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d is performed, and the sub liquid crystal is behind the movable body 1008. When the unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 30 °, an effect that the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change is performed. The symbol variation display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d may change due to the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.
(Example 12)
FIG. 190 shows an example effect in Example 12 of the present embodiment. FIG. 190 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 190 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 190 (b), which continues from FIG. 190 (a), shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Also, the black circular hold icon is a pre-read notice mode hold icon as shown in FIG. 161 (a).

  FIG. 190 (c) continuing from FIG. 190 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 190 (d) subsequent to FIG. 190 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 190 (e) following FIG. 190 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 190 (d).

  In FIG. 190 (f) continued from FIG. 190 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the production operation from the state shown in FIG. 190 (e), and the left end of the transmissive portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008 is the screen of the sub display device 1030. The state which moved to the position located in the left end is shown. FIG. 190 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 is shielded so that the player can hardly see the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the display area of the sub display device 1030 and the illumination unit 1014d are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. In addition, the yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 190 (g) continued from FIG. 190 (f) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 190 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 displays a cloud image as a preview image. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed.

  In FIG. 190 (h) following FIG. 190 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state of FIG. 190 (g) behind the movable body 1008, and passes through the transmission portion 1008b. The screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown visually. FIG. 190 (h) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 190 (i) following FIG. 190 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 190 (h). FIG. 190 (i) shows a state in which a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

  190 (j) following FIG. 190 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has moved upward from the state of FIG. 190 (i) behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 190 (j) shows a state in which a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 that has been viewed through the transmission unit 1008b cannot be viewed.

  FIG. 190 (k) continuing from FIG. 190 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 190 (k) shows a state in which a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. In FIG. 190 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated through the transmission portion 1008b while the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized changes. Further, the cloud image is moved upward from the state shown in FIG. 190 (i).

  In FIG. 190 (l) following FIG. 190 (k), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 190 (k) (total 90 °). Rotated) is shown. FIG. 190 (l) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. In FIG. 190 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates with the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 hidden behind the movable body 1008. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized changes.

  FIG. 190 (m) following FIG. 190 (l) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates clockwise by 110 ° from the state shown in FIG. 190 (l) behind the movable body 1008 (total 200 °). Rotated) is shown. FIG. 190 (m) shows a state in which the cloud image as the preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  In FIG. 190 (n) following FIG. 190 (m), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 160 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 190 (l) (total 360 °). Rotation) and the initial posture is returned. FIG. 190 (m) shows a state in which the cloud image as the preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 190 (o) following FIG. 190 (n) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 190 (o) and returns to the initial position behind the movable body 1008. Shows the state. FIG. 190 (o) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 190 (p) following FIG. 190 (o) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 190 (o) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 190 (p) shows a state where the rendering operation of each movable body (movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012) has been completed.

  FIG. 190 (q) continued from FIG. 190 (p) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates behind the movable body 1008, so that the player can visually recognize the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 through the transmission portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008. In some cases, the area of an image (for example, a cloud image as a preview image) is configured to change. The symbol variation display in which the area may change may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed than the symbol variation display in which the area does not change. Further, there may be a case where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs a moving and rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.
(Example 13)
FIG. 191 shows an effect example in Example 13 of the present embodiment. FIG. 191 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 191 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 191 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 191 (b) following FIG. 191 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Also, the black circular hold icon is a pre-read notice mode hold icon as shown in FIG. 161 (a). The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Compared with the variable display, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 191 (c) following FIG. 191 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 191 (d) following FIG. 191 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 191 (e) following FIG. 191 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 191 (d).

  FIG. 191 (f) following FIG. 191 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position where the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Is shown. FIG. 191 (f) shows a state in which the player has shielded the movable body 1008 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 191 (f) shows a state in which the balloon image displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1008 and cannot be viewed. In addition, an image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

  FIG. 191 (g) continued from FIG. 191 (f) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The balloon image and the yacht image displayed on are shown in a state where they cannot be visually recognized. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 191 (h) following FIG. 191 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 191 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 191 (h), an image of a balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b, and an image of a yacht cannot be visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 191 (i) following FIG. 191 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 191 (h). FIG. 191 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 240 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 191 (h) (total 300 ° rotation) behind the movable body 1008. ing. In FIG. 191 (i), an image of a part of a balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized in an area that is not shielded by the movable body 1008, and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Indicates a state where it cannot be visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 191 (j) following FIG. 191 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 191 (i). FIG. 191 (j) shows an operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 191 (g) (total 360 ° rotation) behind the movable body 1008. Both of the movements to the lower initial position are performed in parallel, and the initial posture and the state returned to the initial position are shown. FIG. 191 (j) shows a state in which both the balloon image and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are erased.

  FIG. 191 (k) subsequent to FIG. 191 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 191 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 191 (l) following FIG. 191 (k) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. Among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is moved to a position behind the movable body 1008 when the image is configured not to be visible to the player. In some cases, only one character image is configured to be visible to the player. In addition, when the one character image that can be visually recognized at that time is a specific character image (for example, a preview image), the symbol variation display indicates that there is one character image that can be visually recognized at that time. Compared to the symbol variation display when the character image is not, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed. Further, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. In some cases, it may be visible. One of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. The symbol variation display in this case is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visible even if the movable body performs the moving operation. May be. In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 being moved. The symbol variation display in the case where it can be visually recognized is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol mode than the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. It may be configured. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.
(Example 14)
FIG. 192 shows an effect example in Example 14 of the present embodiment. FIG. 192 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 192 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Unlike the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174, the pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment 14 of the present embodiment and the 15th and 16th examples described later are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1030. .

  FIG. 192 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 192 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 192 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 192 (b) following FIG. 192 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Compared with the variable display, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 192 (c) following FIG. 192 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 192 (d) following FIG. 192 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In addition, FIG. 192 (d) shows a state in the sub display device 1030 where the movement animation between the hold / change icon, in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game, has ended. ing.

  FIG. 192 (e) following FIG. 192 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 192 (d).

  In FIG. 192 (f) following FIG. 192 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 is in a position to hide the fluctuation icon on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030. The moved state is shown. FIG. 192 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 shields the player so that the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 192 (f) shows a state where the fluctuation icon cannot be visually recognized because the fluctuation icon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 overlaps the movable body 1008. In addition, an image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

  FIG. 192 (g) following FIG. 192 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 192 (f). In FIG. 192 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon and the yacht image are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 192 (h) following FIG. 192 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. FIG. 192 (h) shows a state in which an image of a balloon is displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the image of the balloon is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008. Further, in FIG. 192 (h), when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the notice mode (white rhombus). , The state where the change icon of the notice mode is visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b. In the effect of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the variation icon of the normal mode changes to the notification mode via the transmission unit 1008b. In some cases, the player may visually recognize the change icon of the normal mode after the change icon has changed to the notification mode.

  FIG. 192 (i) following FIG. 192 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 200 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (h) (total 360 ° rotation) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 192 (i) shows a state where the balloon image, the yacht image, and the notice mode change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 192 (j) following FIG. 192 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 192 (i) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 192 (j) shows a state in which the notice mode change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, FIG. 192 (j) shows a state in which the yacht image and the balloon image cannot be visually recognized in the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 192 (k) following FIG. 192 (j) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 192 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 192 (l) subsequent to FIG. 192 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit.

  Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variation icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image, the change icon, and the hold icon are configured not to be visible to the player, and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008, the sub display device 1030 displays the image. In some cases, only one character image of the plurality of character images and the variation icon are configured to be visible to the player. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the one character image that can be visually recognized at that time is a specific character image (for example, a preview image) or the variation icon is in a notification mode. In this case, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display when the variation icon is not a notice mode, rather than a specific character image that is visible at that time. It may be. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icons, and the like among the plurality of character images by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. May be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon, or may be configured so that only the hold icon can be viewed by the player.

In addition, one of the character images and the change icons displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may be possible to visually recognize by performing. One of the character image and the change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. The symbol variation display when it can be visually recognized is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern as compared to the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visible even if they move. It may be configured as follows. In addition, one of the character images and the change icons displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display that may be visually recognized by performing is determined by the big hit symbol form as compared to the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visually recognized by not performing the moving operation. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.
(Example 15)
FIG. 193 shows an effect example in Example 15 of the present embodiment. FIG. 193 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 193 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 174.

  FIG. 193 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Moreover, in the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 193 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 193 (b) following FIG. 193 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Compared with the variable display, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 193 (c) following FIG. 193 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 193 (d) following FIG. 193 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. Further, FIG. 193 (d) shows a state where the sub-display device 1030 has finished the moving animation between the holding / changing icons in which the holding icon becomes a changing icon and moves to the left after the special figure 1 variable game is started. ing. Further, FIG. 193 (d) shows a state in which the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG.

  FIG. 193 (e) following FIG. 193 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 193 (d).

  In FIG. 193 (f) following FIG. 193 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Shows the state. FIG. 193 (f) shows a state in which the player has shielded the movable body 1008 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 193 (f) shows a state where the hold icon cannot be visually recognized because the hold icon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 overlaps the movable body 1008. In addition, the fluctuation icon displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized in an area that is not shielded by the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 193 (g) following FIG. 193 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 193 (f). In FIG. 193 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. Then, the jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 193 (h) following FIG. 193 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 193 (h), when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white rhombus). In addition, the state where the fluctuation icon of the normal mode and the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b is shown. In the production of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode through the transmission unit 1008b. In some cases, the player may visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the pre-read notice mode is changed.

  FIG. 193 (i) following FIG. 193 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 193 (h) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. Further, in FIG. 193 (i), the balloon image, the yacht image, the variation icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008. Indicates a state that cannot be performed.

  FIG. 193 (j) following FIG. 193 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 193 (i) and returned to the initial position. Further, FIG. 193 (j) shows a state in which the variation icon in the normal mode and the variation icon in the notification mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008 b. Further, in FIG. 193 (j), in the sub display device 1030, the yacht image shows a state where it cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 193 (k) subsequent to FIG. 193 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 193 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 193 (l) subsequent to FIG. 193 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 193 (m) following FIG. 193 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started.

  In FIG. 193 (n) following FIG. 193 (m), the sub-display device 1030 shows a moving animation between the holding / fluctuating icons in which the holding icon becomes a changing icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 variable game. The completed state is shown. FIG. 193 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. A predetermined reach effect is started after FIG. 193 (n).

  FIG. 193 (o) following FIG. 193 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the predetermined reach effect is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. As described above, the symbol variation started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the pre-reading notice mode is finally performed more than the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the normal mode. You may be comprised so that a big hit symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed easily.

  Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variation icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image, the change icon, and the hold icon are configured not to be visible to the player, and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008, the sub display device 1030 displays the image. In some cases, only the variation icon and the hold icon are configured to be visible to the player. Moreover, when the hold icon which became visible at that time is a prefetch notice mode, compared with the case where the hold icon which became visible at that time is not a prefetch notice mode, there is a hold corresponding to the hold icon. In a special figure variable game that is started after being digested, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icons, and the like among the plurality of character images by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. May be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon, or may be configured so that only the hold icon can be viewed by the player.

Further, the movable icon 1006 and the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008 are used to move both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Thus, it may be visible. Among the movable body 1006 and the sub-display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008, the fluctuation icon and the hold icon are visually recognized when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. The symbol variation display that can be performed is likely to be a definite display of the big hit symbol pattern as compared to the symbol variation display that is not visible even when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. It may be configured as follows. When the pre-reading notice is executed, the visible part of the variable icon or the hold icon may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than when the prefetching notice without the symbol is executed. Further, the movable icon 1006 and the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008 are used to move both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Thus, the symbol variation display that may be visually recognized is determined by the big hit symbol pattern as compared to the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visible because the movable body does not move. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.
(Example 16)
FIG. 194 shows an effect example in Example 16 of the present embodiment. FIG. 194 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 194 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 194 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 194 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 194 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 194 (b) following FIG. 194 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special FIG. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is the symbol variation display in the case where the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Compared with, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is easier to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 194 (c) following FIG. 194 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 194 (d) following FIG. 194 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. Further, FIG. 194 (d) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icon in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game is ended in the sub display device 1030. ing.

  FIG. 194 (e) following FIG. 194 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 194 (d).

  FIG. 194 (f) following FIG. 194 (e) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. Further, in FIG. 194 (f), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b of the movable body 1008. It shows a state where it has moved to a position. FIG. 194 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 is shielded so that the player cannot easily see the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 194 (g) continued from FIG. 194 (f) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The state where the fluctuation icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image displayed on are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 194 (h) following FIG. 194 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 192 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 193 (h), when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white rhombus). In addition, the state where the fluctuation icon of the normal mode and the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b is shown. In the production of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode through the transmission unit 1008b. In some cases, the player may visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the pre-read notice mode is changed.

  FIG. 194 (i) following FIG. 194 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 194 (h) (total 360 ° rotation) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 194 (i) shows a state where the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030, the fluctuation icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode are not visible because they overlap with the movable body 1008. ing.

  FIG. 194 (j) following FIG. 194 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 194 (i) and returned to the initial position. In addition, on the sub display device 1030, an image simulating a button, a character string image of “push” above it, and a meter image displaying the effective period of pressing the button are displayed overlapping the hold icon. Yes. In addition, the hold icon in the pre-read notice mode may be changed to an image imitating a button. Further, FIG. 194 (j) shows a state in which an image imitating a variation icon and a button and a character string image “push” above it are visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b, and the meter image is a movable body 1008. The state which cannot be visually recognized by being hidden by is shown. In FIG. 194 (j), the yacht image is not visible on the sub display device 1030.

  In FIG. 194 (k) following FIG. 194 (j), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the state of FIG. 194 (j), and the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a. The possible states are shown. FIG. 194 (k) shows a state in which the character string image of “push” displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, the fluctuation icon, the image imitating the button, and the meter image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are in a state where they cannot be visually recognized by being hidden by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a is larger in the jackpot symbol in comparison with the symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is not visually recognized. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may be easy.

  FIG. 194 (l) following FIG. 194 (k) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the sub display device 1030, when the player presses the chance button 136, the character string image of “push” is erased, and an image imitating the button and an effect image are displayed around it. FIG. 194 (l) shows a state in which the effect image is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 194 (m) following FIG. 194 (l) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is shown in FIG. 194 (l) based on the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation effective period of the chance button 136. The state which moved to the uppermost position from the state of is shown. In addition, FIG. 194 (m) shows a state in which a part of the button image and the effect image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a.

  FIG. 194 (n) following FIG. 194 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 194 (m) and returned to the initial position. The sub display device 1030 displays a variation icon, a button image, and an effect image.

  In FIG. 194 (o) following FIG. 194 (n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation effective period of the chance button 136. Shows the state. FIG. 194 (o) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 194 (n).

  In FIG. 194 (p) following FIG. 194 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 194 (o) by 300 ° (total 360 ° rotation) to return to the initial posture. After that, a state in which the lower initial position is restored is shown. In addition, the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 that is executed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 includes both the operation of rotating counterclockwise and the operation of moving to the initial position below in parallel. In some cases, the initial posture and the initial position may be returned.

  FIG. 194 (q) subsequent to FIG. 194 (p) shows a state in which the button image and the effect image are erased and the change icon of the normal state is changed to the change icon of the notice mode in the sub display device 1030. Further, FIG. 194 (q) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. The symbol variation display in which the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed is a big hit symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not performed based on the pressing of the chance button 136. May be configured to be easily displayed.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may display a plurality of character images, a variation icon, a hold icon, and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image that prompts the player to press the change icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 is configured to be invisible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is positioned at a position behind the movable body 1008, There may be a case where only a variation icon displayed on the display device 1030 and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 are both visible to the player. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icon, The player may be able to visually recognize the hold icon and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the player can visually recognize only the hold icon and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. May be configured so that the player can view only the variable icon, or may be configured so that the player can view only the hold icon Or the player may be able to see only the image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136. .

In addition, the movable body 1006 and the image that prompts the user to press the hold icon 136 or the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1008 are displayed on the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may be possible to visually recognize both movable bodies by performing a moving operation. Of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, the image that prompts the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1008 is displayed on both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display that may be visible when the movable body performs the moving operation is compared with the symbol variation display that is not visible even when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the movement operation. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. When a pre-reading notice is executed in which the visible portion of the image that prompts the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136 is different before and after the movement of the movable body, the change icon or the hold before and after the movement of the movable body is executed. It is configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than when the prefetching notice is executed in which the visible portion of the image that prompts the user to press the icon or the chance button 136 is not different. It may be. Of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, the image that prompts the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1008 is displayed on both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. When the movable body can be visually recognized by performing the moving operation, the symbol variation display to be read ahead is compared with the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visually recognized by not performing the moving operation. You may be comprised so that a big hit symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed easily. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.
(Example 17)
An effect example in sub display device 1030 of Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 195 and each figure described later, an example of the special figure 1 variable game effect in each example is shown in time series. In addition, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030 is represented by white thick arrows. In the period during which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 described later is displayed, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. As another effect, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character without displaying a decorative design, or an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character by displaying a decorative design may be used. Good. Further, during the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 is being executed, the same effect as the effect of the sub display device 1030 may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  First, common points of FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 described later will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 195 (a), a decoration frame F1 having a shape obtained by vertically inverting the letter “L” is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the sub display device 1030. A square-shaped special figure 1 reservation number display area 1931 is provided in the upper left part of the decorative frame F1, and a square special figure 2 reservation number display area 1932 is provided on the right side thereof. Below 1931, a special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 is provided, and below that, a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934 is provided. In the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 1, "0" is displayed. In the special figure 2 holding number display area 1932, the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no special figure 2 holding, "0" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 4 symbol display area 1933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the 4 symbol “/”. , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “◯”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “-” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the fourth symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “○”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “−” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game.

  A horizontally-long rectangular decorative frame F2 is displayed below the display area of the sub display device 1030. In the center of the decorative frame F2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 1940 in which a part of the left and right frames is opened is provided. Note that the variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 1930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 1940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 1940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reserved orders in FIG. That is, a special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 that is the earliest (most recently stored) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 1960 is roughly divided into four areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special figure 2 holding ranks, respectively. That is, a special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 stored in the first area can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960, various animations representing movement of the hold icon are executed.

  A square-shaped navigation character display area 1970 is provided to the left of the special figure 1 hold display area 1950. In the navigation character display area 1970, a merchant character image H1 is displayed. The merchant character image H1 is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect or a notice (notice of the change or a pre-read notice) effect.

  A square-shaped effect custom state display area 1980 is provided to the right of the special figure 2 hold display area 1960. In the effect custom state display area 1980, “level 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 1000. The level of the effect custom state is set so as to increase, for example, when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed. The level of the effect custom state may be set so as to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big win is won.

  FIG. 195 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. ing. In the 4th symbol display area 1933 of the special figure 1, the 4th symbol of the display mode of “−” for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 1934, the 4th symbol of the display form of “-” for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 displays “1” indicating that the special figure 1 hold number is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 1932 indicates that the special figure 2 hold number is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

  FIG. 195 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is completed and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol variation display is executed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and it is informed that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 has become zero.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 1940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 of the sub-display device 1030 display the interval between the hold and change icons. The moving animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 becomes the change icon 1941 and moves to the change icon display area 1940. . A right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the variation icon 1941 in FIG. 195 (b) represents the moving direction of the variation icon 1941.

  In FIG. 195 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is finished, and the change icon 1941 is displayed in the change icon display area 1940. The displayed state is shown. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 is white. The default special figure 1 hold icon 1952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 in FIG. 195 (b) represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952. In FIG. 195 (c), a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 1030d. The balloon image is an image used for the advance notice by the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 195 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a and the right symbol display area 1030 c of the sub display device 1030. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 1953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 in FIG. 195 (d) represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953. In addition, an image of a character string of “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1, and an effect that expects to develop into a reach effect is executed. In addition, a substantially square-shaped retained change image H2 including an image of a character string “suspended change” is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b and the right symbol display area 1030c. . The hold change image H2 is an image that is displayed to notify that a pre-reading advance notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon being displayed or an effect of the change notice is executed. In this example, it is notified that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed by the hold change image H2. The hold change image H2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is changed, The display may appear only when the hold icon and the variation icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation icon are changed. It may be a display.

  FIG. 195 (e) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date. The informed state is shown. Further, an erasing animation in which the fluctuation icon 1941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 1940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 1941 is gradually deleted. FIG. 195 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of lightning strike is displayed on the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 from the hold change image H2, and the effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 1951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special figure 1 hold icons 1952 and 1953, and the whole special figure 1 hold icon 1952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 195 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. ing. Also, in FIG. 195 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image H2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 195 (e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from white circle to black circle. It has changed.

  FIG. 195 (g) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol variation display is executed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Also, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 becomes a change icon, and a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are started. ing. In FIG. 195 (g), a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 1030d.

  FIG. 195 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 195 (h), an image of a character string of “dono-” is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1, and it is suggested that a character image H3 of the manuscript described later appears. Production is being performed. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 195 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 1030d, and a character string image of “Call me?” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 195 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the speech of the merchant character image H1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech speech image representing the speech of the character image H3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of a character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 195 (k) shows a screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player around the center of the sub display device 1030. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 1030b displayed in the fourth symbol display region 1933 of the special symbol 1 is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 1030b displayed in the fourth symbol display region 1933 of the special symbol 1 is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 195 (k) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 compressed in the longitudinal direction due to space problems.

  FIG. 195 (l) shows the sub display device 1030 rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 195 (k) around the center of the sub display device 1030 as viewed from the player (total 90 ° rotation). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Also, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 195 (j) and (k) has an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). ), The image displayed on the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 195 (l) has an aspect ratio adjusted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. It is displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise is taken in the direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and is orthogonal to the horizontal axis. It is an aspect ratio when the vertical axis is taken in the direction. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 after rotation takes the horizontal axis in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and the vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. The aspect ratio is

  FIG. 195 (m) shows the sub display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 195 (k) around the center of the sub display device 1030 as viewed from the player (180 ° total rotation). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed to the aspect ratio before rotation.

  FIG. 195 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 195 (m). Show. In FIG. 195 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the lord during execution of the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The on-hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 195 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In FIG. 195 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 195 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 195 (n) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. FIG. 195 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, a display indicating that lightning is generated from the on-hold change image H2 is performed, and an animation of lightning strike on the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle is executed. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. FIG. 195 (o) shows that “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 1950 appears as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 954 is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared with other hold icons. For this reason, it may be possible to draw attention to the hold icon displayed in an enlarged manner to the player during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. In FIG. 195 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 195 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 195 (o) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 195 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping the entire variation icon 1941 are erased, and a character of “heat” is drawn in a circle. The fluctuation icon is enlarged. For this reason, it may be possible to draw attention to the variable icon displayed in an enlarged manner to the player during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. In FIG. 195 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. Next, in FIG. 195 (q), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 195 (p) around the center of the sub display device 1030 (360 ° in total). 1030 shows a state in which it has made one revolution and returned to its original state. Further, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon that have been displayed in an enlarged manner have returned to their normal sizes. Next, in FIG. 195 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. This indicates a state in which this is notified. Further, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed. A downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon in FIG. 195 (r) represents the moving direction of the variation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change. A character image or a decorative pattern may be used for the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the presence of the character image or the decorative pattern is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image or the decorative pattern. There are cases where a strong impression can be given to the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is rotated once (360 ° rotation). May be. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the big hit reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change in relation to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030 as a variable, and based on the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change randomly. For example, when the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a random number, and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio There may be. Further, the display area of the image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may be reduced. The aspect ratio of the image may change so that the display area is constant.

  In addition, the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. . Further, the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change is compared with the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the greater the frequency with which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. The greater the degree to which the aspect ratio changes, the higher the jackpot reliability may be.

Further, in this embodiment, an effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon and the change icon during the rotation display notice effect is performed. When an effect to enlarge and display the hold icon and the variation icon is performed, the big hit symbol pattern is finally stopped and displayed, compared to a case where the effect to enlarge and display the hold icon and the variation icon is not performed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy. In addition, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, an effect of rotating the sub display device 1030 is performed, but instead of the rotation of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated to rotate the decorative symbol display device. There may be an effect that the image displayed on 208 is rotated, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately to thereby rotate the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display. There may be a case where an effect of rotating the image displayed on the device 1030 is performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that the sub display device 1030 cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 18)
A sub display device 1030 production example of Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a) to 196 (r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIG. 196 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 195 (a). Next, FIG. 196 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 195 (b). Next, in FIG. 196 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 is ended, and the variable icon display area 1940 is displayed. A change icon 1941 is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. FIG. 196 (c) shows a state immediately after the speech balloon image representing the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 196 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a and the right symbol display area 1030 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 196 (e) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Indicates a state of being notified. Next, FIG. 196 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 195 (f). Next, FIG. 196 (g) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, showing the same state as FIG. 195 (g). Next, FIG. 196 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 have been completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 195 (h). Next, FIG. 196 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the shrine is displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as FIG. 195 (i). Indicates the state.

  FIG. 196 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the speech of the merchant character image H1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the speech of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 196 (k) shows a screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player around the center of the sub display device 1030. The decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the image displayed in the decoration frame F1 (reserved number display, fourth pattern image) (hereinafter, these images are referred to as “non-rotation target images”) Is prioritized over images other than the non-rotation target image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “rotation target image”) in a non-rotation manner as viewed from the player. It is displayed in the upper left. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 1030b displayed in the fourth symbol display region 1933 of the special symbol 1 is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that FIG. 196 (k) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 196 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 196 (k) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the non-rotation target image has priority over a part of the character image H3 of Yoshimune and a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030. The movement is displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from above. Note that FIG. 196 (l) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 196 (m) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) around the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 196 (l). . Further, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, in preference to the decoration frame F2.

  FIG. 196 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. . Further, in FIG. 196 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the lord during execution of the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The on-hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 196 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image is rotated in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 as viewed from the player in preference to a part of the decoration frame F2 and a part of the balloon image representing the merchant character image H1. It is displayed in a moving manner. Note that FIG. 196 (n) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 196 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 196 (n) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. . Further, FIG. 196 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the hold change image H2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, FIG. 196 (o) shows that “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 1954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 1950 appears as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image is given priority over a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area and a part of a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1. In addition, the movement is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. Note that FIG. 196 (o) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 196 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 196 (o) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 196 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap with the entire variation icon are erased, and the variation of the mode in which the characters “heat” are drawn in the circle An icon is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed smaller than the other hold icons. In addition, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area. Has been. Note that FIG. 196 (p) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems. Next, in FIG. 196 (q), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 196 (p) (a total rotation of 360 °). 1030 shows a state in which it has made one revolution and returned to its original state. In addition, the non-rotation target image is displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a state where the non-rotation target image is not rotated as viewed from the player, and has returned to the state before the rotation display notice effect is executed. The special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in the same size as other hold icons. Next, in FIG. 196 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. This indicates a state in which this is notified. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 1941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated and displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the non-rotation target of the image (holding number display, fourth pattern image) displayed in the decoration frame F1 The image is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. Further, the non-rotation target image of the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed so as to be displayed at a conspicuous position of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player, in conjunction with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Further, any one of the decorative pattern, the character image H3 of Yoshimune, the character image H1 of the spear, the hold icon, the change icon, the decoration frame F2, or the like, or all the images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are not rotated. There may be a case where the image is displayed in an unrotated manner as viewed from the player. Further, in this case, the larger the number of non-rotation target images, the higher the big hit reliability. Further, in place of the rotation of the sub display device 1030, there may be an effect that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol may be performed. The display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated simultaneously or separately to produce an effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 19)
An effect example of the sub display device 1030 of Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (a) to (l) show the special figure 1 variable game in time series. In the period in which the effects of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 197 and FIGS. 198 to 202 described later are displayed, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. ing. The other effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character.

  FIG. 197 (a) shows a state in which “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed as a hold number display image in the hold display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. Yes. Next, FIG. 197 (b) shows that the hold in FIG. 1 is digested and the hold number in FIG. 1 is 0 as a hold number display image in the hold display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. In this state, “0” is displayed.

  FIG. 197 (c) shows a state in which the character image H <b> 3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030 d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 197 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030. The “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. ° Rotated and displayed.

  FIG. 197 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 197 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. The “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed with a rotation of 90 ° (a total rotation of 90 °). Next, in FIG. 197 (f), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 197 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 135 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the upper left part of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 135 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 197 (g), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 197 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (180 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotation (total 180 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 197 (H) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 197 (g) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. (Total 225 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 197 (i), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 197 (H) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 270 ° rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. (Total 270 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 197 (j), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 197 (i) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (a total rotation of 315 °). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the original position in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 315 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 197 (k), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 197 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (360 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 360 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, FIG. 197 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect has ended, and the character image H3 of the lord is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image of the lord is rotated by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. In addition, the hold display area 1030e of the sub display device 1030 is moved so as to be displayed at the left corner of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, during the rotation of the sub display device 1030, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate once (360 ° rotation). It may be configured to. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the big hit reliability may be set. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the decoration design display device 208 may produce the effect of the present embodiment, or the decoration design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. Thus, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 20)
An effect example of Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 198 (a) to 198 (k) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 198 (a) shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 198 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 198 (c) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 198 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIGS. 198 (d) to (j) show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. In FIGS. 198 (d) to 198 (j), the character image H3 is displayed by rotating clockwise at the same rotational speed as that of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always viewed as not rotating. Next, FIG. 198 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the lord is erased in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. For this reason, since the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, there are cases where the player can be surprised. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Alternatively, the character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, there may be an effect that the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. An effect may be performed.
(Example 21)
An effect example of Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 199 (a) to (l) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 199 (a) shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 199 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b).

  FIG. 199 (c) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 199 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. The character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a slightly compressed state in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (b). Next, in FIG. 199 (d), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 199 (c) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as a rotation center (total 90 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. The character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a slightly compressed state in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (c). Next, FIG. 199 (e) shows that the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 199 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 135 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Moreover, the character image H3 of Tono is slightly expanded in the horizontal direction and compressed and displayed in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (d). Next, in FIG. 199 (f), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 199 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (180 ° total rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of the lord is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction from the state displayed in FIG. 199 (e) and enlarged in the vertical direction, and the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the lord is shown in FIG. It has returned to the state of (b). Next, FIGS. 199 (g) to (j) show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. In FIGS. 199 (g) to 199 (j), the character image H <b> 3 is rotated clockwise and displayed at the same rotational speed as that of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always viewed as not rotating. Further, in FIGS. 199 (g) to (j), the aspect ratio of the character image H3 is not changed. Next, FIG. 198 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect has been completed, and the character image H3 of the lord is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes. For this reason, since the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player may be surprised and the character image By changing the aspect ratio, the presence of the character image is enhanced, and a strong impression may be given to the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Alternatively, the character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, it may be configured such that the greater the frequency with which the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the sub image is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The greater the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 22)
An effect example of Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200A to 200F show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 200A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 200B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is an image used for a lateral movement display effect as a reach effect.

  FIGS. 200C to 200E show a state in which a lateral movement display effect as a reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 moves in the left-right direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawings of FIGS. 200C to 200E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before moving in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 200 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 200 (b). In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner of moving to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the left direction. Yes. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been overlooked in the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the upper left part. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability.

  FIG. 200D illustrates a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state illustrated in FIG. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner of moving to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so that it may be visually recognized so that it may not move, seeing from a player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed at the upper left.

  FIG. 200 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 200 (d). Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the left by the same distance as the right movement distance of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image H4 is out of view.

  FIG. 200 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 200 (e), and the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect has ended. The character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the left by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the right direction. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which it does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while moving the sub display device 1030 horizontally. Therefore, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which the character image H3 does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display preview effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been overlooked in the sub display device 1030 before the lateral movement display preview effect is executed is displayed next to the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. When the moving display is performed, the display is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance. For this reason, the player pays attention to the distance traveled by the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the effect during the symbol variation, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally the jackpot symbol aspect as compared to the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character combined with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed may be displayed. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. The princess character image H4 is displayed when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance in the left direction, whereas the enemy character of the lord is displayed when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance in the right direction. May be displayed. In addition, the character ratio H3 and the princess character image H4 used for the horizontal movement display notice effect in the present embodiment may change in aspect ratio during the horizontal movement display notice effect. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 23)
An effect example of Example 23 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201 (a) to 201 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 201 (a) shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 201 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 201 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the lord character image H3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability. 201 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the center of the image data as display data. FIG. 201 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (b-2).

  201 (c) to 201 (e) show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.201 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 1030 before rotation. In addition, the arrows shown in FIGS. 201C to 201E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 201C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been seen from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 201C-1 illustrates image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201C. The image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 201 (b-1) 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 201 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) with the center of the image data as the center. 201 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2), and turns the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (b). Shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG.

  FIG. 201D shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 201D-1 illustrates image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201D. The image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 201 (c-1) is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 201 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. 201 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (d-2), and turns the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e). Shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (d).

  FIG. 201 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of view from the sub display device 1030. FIG. 201 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 201 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 201 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 201 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2). 201 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (c-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (d). A state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (d) is shown. FIG. 201 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 201 (c-3).

  FIG. 201 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e) by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. FIG. 201 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 201 (f-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 201 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 201 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 201 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 201 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 201 (b-2). 201 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 201 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 201 (e). A state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 201 (f) is shown. FIG. 201 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 201 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is displayed in such a manner that it is not rotated when viewed from the player. In addition, in the rotation display announcement effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation display announcement effect is executed is rotated and displayed on the sub display device 1030. Is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Also, the princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 rotates more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the princess character image H4 may be displayed at the upper left of the character image. In this case, the princess character image H4 displayed before the rotation is not visible on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. Further, by adjusting the display position of the princess character image H4, the sub display device 1030 can be seen from the sub display device 1030 by rotating more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. However, the character is displayed in accordance with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. It may be. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. In addition, the princess character image H4 is displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, whereas the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the enemy of the lord. A character may be displayed. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 and the princess character image H4 used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect. In addition, in the effect during the symbol variation, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally the jackpot symbol aspect as compared to the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.
(Example 24)
An effect example of Example 24 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 202 (a) to 202 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 202 (a) shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, in FIG. 202 (b), the sub display device 1030 moves downward, and the character image H 3 of the lord is displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 and the merchant character image H 1 is displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. Shows the state. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. 161 (b). 202 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the lord character image H3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability. 202 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (b). The generated display data is shown. A predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) as the display data from the center of the image data. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 202 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2). The merchant character image H1 is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) is given priority over the merchant character image H1. May be displayed.

  202 (c) to 202 (e) show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect has been executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawings of FIGS. 202C to 202E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. In addition, the arrows shown in FIGS. 202C to 202E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 202 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (b) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed on the lower left of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 202B by the rotation of the sub display device 1030, so that the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been seen from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image H1 in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. 202 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1) by 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 202 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) with the center of the image data as the center. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1). This is display data in which merchant character images H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 202 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (c-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (b). Shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (c).

  FIG. 202 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (c) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. Is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed on the right side of the merchant character image H1 in an unrotated manner as viewed from the player. 202 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 202 (c-1) is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 202 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1). This is display data in which merchant character images H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 202 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (d-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (c). Shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (d).

  FIG. 202 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 202D by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed in a manner that it is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the rotation center. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image H1 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of the sub display device 1030. ing. FIG. 202 (e) shows a state immediately before the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect ends. FIG. 202 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 202 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. 202 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) with the center of the image data as the center. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 202 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1). This is display data in which merchant character images H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 202 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (e-2) and moves the sub display device 1030 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (d). A state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (d) is shown.

  FIG. 202 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e) by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e) by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of rotation and returned to its original state. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. 202 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 202 (f-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 202 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 202 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 202 (f). The generated display data is shown. In addition, the display data shown in FIG. 202 (f-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 202 (b-1). This is display data obtained by superimposing the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 202 (b-2). 202 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 202 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 202 (e). A state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 202 (f) is shown. FIG. 202 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 202 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030 in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player (the character image H3 of Tono). And a princess character image H4) and a character image (merchant character image H1) displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the rotating sub display device 1030, a character image displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player and a character image displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed at the same time. There are cases where unexpected surprises can be given to the player. In addition, in the effect during the symbol variation, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally the jackpot symbol aspect as compared to the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 202 again.
(D1)
A gaming machine including a first movable body (for example, a movable body 1002) capable of performing a production operation that produces a game,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from a second position (for example, an initial position) to a first position (for example, a lowermost position),
When the power is turned on, the first movable body is configured to move from the first position (for example, the lowest position) to the second position (for example, the initial position). ,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The production operation is configured to start from the second position (for example, an initial position) and end at the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the durability of the driving means for driving the first movable body may be improved.
(D2)
The game stand according to (D1) above,
When the first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is located at a position different from the second position (for example, the initial position) and the power is turned off, Configured to move to the first position,
A game stand characterized by that.
(D3)
The game stand according to (D1) or (D2) above,
The production operation includes an operation of moving to a third position (for example, the uppermost position),
The third position and the first position are different positions;
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(D4)
The game table according to (D3) above,
Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(D5)
The game stand according to (D4) above,
A big hit action (for example, directing a big hit game) can be executed,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided in front of the image display means (for example, the decorative design display device 208),
When the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, the uppermost position), at least a preview image (for example, a cloud image or a balloon image) displayed on the image display means In some cases, the first movable body may overlap,
The preview image is the jackpot notification image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(D6)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can execute an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in (D1) above means that “the first movable body moves from the first position to the initial operation. And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation ”(see, for example, FIGS. 177 (c) to (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(D7)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can execute an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in (D1) above means that “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position. After moving to the position, the initial operation is started and moved again to the second position at the end of the initial operation ”(see, for example, FIGS. 179 (n) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(D8)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above,
“When the power is turned off” described in (D1) above is “when the main power of the game machine is turned off”
“When the power is turned on” as described in (D1) above is “when the main power of the game machine is turned on”.
A game stand characterized by that.
(D9)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D8) above,
The first movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is a movable body whose posture can be changed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(D10)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above,
A second movable body (for example, a movable body 1006) capable of performing a production operation for producing a game;
The second movable body is a movable body that starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that.
(D11)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(D12)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

All the rendering operations of the first rendering movable body are configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.
(D13)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (12) above,
The production operation may start from the second position and end at the fourth position,
The production operation may start from the fourth position and end at the second position,
The fourth position is a position different from the first position;
The fourth position is a position different from the second position;
The fourth position is a position different from the third position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(D14)
The game table according to (D13) above,
The production operation may start from the fourth position and end at the fourth position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(D15)
The game stand according to (D13) or (14) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the fourth position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the fourth position. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.
(D16)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D15) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the third position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the third position. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.
(D17)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D16) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body;
And a driving means for driving the movable body.

  The first control means is the main control unit 300 that performs a lottery (for example, a big hit lottery or the like) advantageous to the player. The first control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards.

  The second control means is an effect means (for example, an illumination unit (LED, etc.), a sound output means (speaker, etc.), an image display means (liquid crystal display) that produces a game in response to a command signal from the first control means. Sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for effect control of the apparatus, dot matrix, etc. The second control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits. Alternatively, the second control means may, for example, draw lots of effects to be performed by the effect means according to the drive control of the effect means and the command signal from the first control means. Make a selection.

  The third control unit is an effect control unit that communicates with the second control unit and performs effect control (for example, drive control) of the effect means. The effect control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The third control means may control the effect means according to the effect command from the second control means, determine the effect to be executed according to the effect command from the second control means, Information based on the determined result may be returned to the second control means, or the rendering means may be driven.

The fourth control means is an effect control means that performs communication with the third control means and performs effect control of one or more or all of the sub liquid crystal unit 1030 and the movable bodies 1002 to 1012. The fourth control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards, and the fourth control means is supplied from the third control means. You may make it control an effect means according to an effect command, determine the effect performed according to the effect command from a 3rd control means, and return the information based on the determined result to a 3rd control means. The fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036. The fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036.
(D18)
The game stand according to (D17) above,
The fourth control means is mounted on a drive unit (for example, the moving unit 1036),
The drive unit performs the same operation during at least one operation (for example, up and down movement) of a plurality of operations by the movable body.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above embodiment, since the moving unit 1036 is provided on the movable body 1002, when the movable body 1002 moves up and down, the moving unit 1036 also operates together with the movable body 1002, but the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. In this case, the moving unit 1036 is configured not to rotate. Note that the moving unit 1036 may be arranged separately from the movable body 1002 so that the moving unit 1036 does not operate together when the movable body 1002 is moved up and down, and also when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, The moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together, or the moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together during all operations of the movable body 1002.

Although the movable body 1002 has shown an example capable of executing an up / down operation (position change, movement) and a rotation operation (posture change), it is also possible to execute an operation other than up / down (for example, position change / movement in the left-right direction). Tilt operation (for example, an operation in which the left and right sides of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are tilted forward and rearward with respect to the vertical rotation axis, and an upper side and a lower side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are forward and backward with respect to the horizontal rotation axis. It may be possible to execute an operation of tilting backward.
(D19)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D18) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body;
Driving means for driving the movable body;
Detecting means for detecting the position of the first movable body,
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the position of the first movable body is confirmed,
When the position of the first movable body is not the first position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position;
The confirmation condition is a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off.
A game stand (E1) characterized by
An image display unit (for example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 or the sub liquid crystal unit 1032) capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Drive means (for example, a motor) for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
In a period (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display a first moving image (for example, a moving image of Tono character image H3 or Princess character image H4),
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the movement period. May be able to perform operations that are not seen on a daily basis, and may allow the player to forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. In addition, with an effect as a trigger, the entire period of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect as a trigger, A part of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period.
(E2)
The game stand according to (E1) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the first image (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (dono character image H3 and princess character image H4) are fixedly displayed. The outer shape or the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, FIG. 202 will be described as an example. The face of the palace that was not displayed in FIG. 202 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 202 (b) and a little smile in FIG. In 202 (d), an animation may be performed such that a full smile is achieved, a slight smile is returned in FIG. 202 (e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 202 (f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image H3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image H3 of the lord moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character strings indicating lines to the entire character strings, etc.), characters and icons Color change, character / icon movement display, etc., or a combination of these may be included.
(E3)
The game stand according to (E1) or (E2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction) (see, for example, FIGS. 202B to 202D),
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction (for example, a clockwise direction) (for example, FIG. 202 (b-1), (c-1), (See (d-1))
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.

In a gaming machine having such a configuration, the first orientation when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain effect (for example, arrival of the timing for starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, the left-facing direction) and other effects (for example, the timing of starting the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the big hit starts) The first direction when the display unit operates may be a different direction (for example, right direction). In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite directions. In this case, the first image is moved or rotated faster than the image display unit is moved or rotated. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is further increased in speed. Rotating and moving in the game may cause you to forget your everyday sensations and concentrate on the game.
(E4)
The game stand according to (E3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same (for example, FIGS. 202 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 202 (b-1), (c-1), and (d-1). )reference),
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit appears to move to the player, but the display position / display angle of the first image does not seem to move, so that it is unusual for the notification means. When it is possible to perform a normal operation, the notification itself by the image display unit display can play the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both the impactful operation and the notification There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In this case, the first direction and the second direction may be different from the movement or rotation of the image display unit. One image is visually recognized by the player so as to move or rotate slowly. For this reason, a mode in which an image rotates in a fixed image display unit is routinely seen on a TV, a network, or the like. The first image in the image display unit is moved and rotated so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the image display unit. You may be able to forget and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with an emphasis on impact, by moving and rotating the first image gently, the notification itself by the image display unit display is close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.
(E5)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an aspect in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image H1) is displayed (for example, see FIG. 202).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E6)
The game stand according to (E5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 202 (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2)). ),
A game stand characterized by that.

The gaming machine having this configuration may be configured not to display a second image that does not move in the first direction during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movement of the image display unit and the image is given a unified feeling and more impactful. There are cases where the production operation can be executed.
(E7)
The game stand according to (E5) or (E6) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) are fixedly displayed. The expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 170, the merchant's face that was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 170 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 170 (b), and a little in FIG. 170 (c). The animation may be such that the face is steep, the face is steep in FIG. 170 (d), the face is a little steep in FIG. 170 (e), and the face is returned to the true face in FIG. 170 (f). The aspect in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the animation display position does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character strings indicating lines to the entire character strings, etc.), characters and icons Color change, character / icon movement display, etc., or a combination of these may be included.
(E8)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in (E1) means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (E1) above means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit (see, for example, FIG. 202).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E9)
The game stand according to (E3) or (E4) above,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise (for example, see FIG. 202),
A game stand characterized by that.
(E10)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Moving by driving the driving means” described in (E1) means “moving linearly by driving the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (E1) above means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction” (for example, see FIG. 200). ),
A game stand characterized by that.

  The above-mentioned “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the left direction and the right direction. The above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in an oblique direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

  A modification of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the movement of the driving means may be a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, left-right direction, diagonal direction, front-rear direction as viewed from the player). Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. An LED may be mounted on the image display unit, or a movable body for production may be mounted. Further, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the production movable body is in the movable state performs the rotation operation or the movement operation. It may be configured to stop and then move the effect movable body to an initial state. In addition, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more effective when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 198 is performed than when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 197 is performed. The mode may be configured to easily become a big hit mode, and when the effect operation of FIG. 197 is performed during the symbol variation display, the effect operation of FIG. 197 is performed. It may be configured such that the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display tends to be a big hit mode. In addition, when the effect operation of FIG. 197 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 198 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit mode. Further, FIGS. 197 and 198 show an example in which the same effect display is performed. However, when the sub display device shown in FIG. 197 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effect visually recognized by the player and the effect visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device when the sub display device shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may become. For example, “One of the other effects” is an effect in which Tono fights the musician, and “The other effect in another effect” is an effect in which the princess dances. Also good. “One of the other effects” may be installed, one or more may be installed, or one of the “other effects” may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. In addition, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 167, the figure is more than the number of types of effects in which at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device rotate together. When the sub display device rotates as shown at 198, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 198, at least a part (or all of the image) displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player so that it is not rotated together. When the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 197, at least a part (or all) of the images displayed on the sub display device rotate together rather than the number of types of effects to be produced. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase.

Moreover, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 197 and the example of the effect shown in FIG. 198 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is displayed so that the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated so as to be viewed by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or the whole of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed B ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed C ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated. At least part or all of the image is rotated in the other direction (for example, clockwise) at the speed D (for example, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed E ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed F ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. During the period (period G) before the sub display device finishes rotating in the next period, the sub display device is rotated at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so as to be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. Thus, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the sub display device rotates, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually shifts from the rotation of the sub display device. The sub display device is rotated, and a part of or all of the display of the sub display device is shifted to a state where the player can visually recognize it. It may be possible to perform certain effects. Further, as illustrated in the period D to the period G, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device as the sub display device rotates. By causing the player to visually recognize the change as described above, it may be possible to provide a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced during the periods A to D, and the sub display is performed during the periods D to G. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, during the period A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased. During the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. You may comprise so that the difference in speed may be made small gradually. Also, here, the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated, but the present invention is also applicable to the sub display device that moves linearly and the image that is displayed on the sub display device that moves linearly. Is also possible.
(F1)
A production movable body (for example, the movable body 1001 or the movable body 1002) capable of performing a movable operation for producing a game;
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with window parts (for example, transmission parts 1008a and 1008b);
A game machine equipped with
In some cases, the effect movable body performs an operation behind the decorative body (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body can make the player visually recognize the operation of the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body. It is possible to perform an operation that is not seen on a daily basis, and sometimes the player can forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game.
(F2)
The game stand according to (F1) above,
The production movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body is configured to be able to display an image, and therefore the operation and image of the effect movable body are displayed to the player through the window portion of the decorative body. As a notification means, it is possible to perform an operation that cannot be seen on a daily basis, and the player may forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. In addition, a plurality of effect movable bodies that can display images may be provided, or only one may be provided. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image that can be operated behind the decorative body may have a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image that can be operated behind the decorative body may include both the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, or may include two or more sub liquid crystal units. There may be.
(F3)
The game stand according to (F2) above,
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, an image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change (for example, see FIGS. 186 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the image displayed on the effect movable body that is visually recognized through the window portion of the decorative body changes by performing the operation behind the decorative body, There are cases where it can give you unbelievable surprises. In addition, the above-mentioned “the image of the effect movable body changes” means a case where an image displayed on the effect movable body is changed (for example, the shape or display color of a cloud image is changed). And the case where the appearance of the image displayed on the production movable body changes.
(F4)
The game stand according to any one of (F1) to (F3) above,
The decorative body is operable (see, for example, FIGS. 186 (e) and (f)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the decorative body can be operated, so that it may be possible to perform an effect that links the operation of the decorative body and the operation of the effect movable body.
(F5)
The game stand according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above,
Provided with symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing variable display of symbols
A game stand characterized by that.
(F6)
The game stand according to (F5) above,
In the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of the image (for example, a cloud image) on the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament. If it is possible, the final result of the variable display of the symbol is larger than the case where the player cannot visually see a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body. It is configured so that the symbol pattern is easily confirmed (see, for example, FIG. 186 and FIG. 187),
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the preview image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(F7)
The game stand according to (F5) or (F6) above,
A part of an image of a reserved icon that has a look-ahead mode (for example, a white rhombus mode) in the effect movable body is played through the window portion (for example, the transmissive portion 1008b) of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body. When the player becomes visible, than when the player does not become able to visually recognize a part of the image of the hold icon that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body, As a final result of the variable display of the symbol that has been started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested, the jackpot symbol mode is configured to be easily displayed (for example, see FIG. 193).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F8)
The game stand according to any one of F1 to F7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(G1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030) can perform a rotation operation (for example, see FIG. 195),
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image (for example, a character image H1, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a change icon, etc.)
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIG. 195 (l)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the rotation operation of the image display means is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so the presence of the first image is amplified. There is a case where a strong impression can be given to the player. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background pattern, or all of these images is used as the first image. May have a different image as the first image. Further, the image display means capable of executing the rotation operation may be a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. In both cases, the aspect ratio of the first image may be displayed so as to change. For example, when the first image is displayed on the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit are rotated simultaneously or separately, and the aspect ratio of the first image is changed simultaneously or separately. There may be. Further, the first image may be displayed by two sub liquid crystal units by arranging two sub liquid crystal units. In this case, the aspect ratio of the first image may be changed by rotating the two sub liquid crystal units in a line.
(G2)
The gaming machine according to (G1) above,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image (for example, a decorative frame F1, a hold number display, an image of a fourth pattern),
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (k) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(G3)
The gaming machine described in (G2) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image is not rotated (see, for example, FIGS. 196 (k) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the first image rotates, the second image may not rotate. Therefore, the second image is firmly fixed while emphasizing the rotation of the first image. It can be made visible to the player. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the change icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.
(G4)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G3) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, the princess character image H4) that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation. (For example, see FIGS. 201 (b) and (c)),
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, an image that has been disregarded in the image display unit before the image display unit is rotated is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation operation of the image display unit. In some cases, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.
(G5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G4) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the image (for example, the princess character image H4) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is performed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation. May be closed,
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the image displayed on the image display unit before the image display unit is rotated can be cut off on the image display unit by the rotation of the image display unit. Because of this, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.
(G6)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(G7)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H1)
An effect movable body (for example, a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing an effect operation for producing a game,
A base body (for example, a moving unit 1036) capable of supporting the effect movable body;
A game machine equipped with
The effect movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is capable of executing a rotation operation,
One of the effect movable body and the base body is provided with a slip ring (for example, rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140),
Conductive parts (for example, conductive parts 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the other of the effect movable body and the base body,
When the slip ring and the conductive portion are in contact with each other, power is supplied from the base body side to the rendering movable body side.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H2)
The gaming machine according to (H1) above,
The base body is provided with a first communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1138),
The effect movable body is provided with a second communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1144),
The second communication means is means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H3)
The game stand according to (H1) or (H2) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H4)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H5)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above,
The slip ring (for example, the rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140) is provided on the effect movable body,
The conductive portions (for example, conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the base body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H6)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above,
The effect movable body is provided with image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The second communication means is means capable of receiving an image information signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game stand characterized by that.
[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment to which the present invention is applicable will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 231. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, an opportunity button 139 is arranged alongside the chance button 136 in addition to the chance button 136. The opportunity button 139 has the same function as the chance button 136.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an outline of the effect pattern shown in each example of the present embodiment. FIG. 203 shows an effect pattern in which effects related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are executed in each example of the present embodiment. The effects related to these buttons can be roughly classified into five effect patterns (effect patterns 1 to 5). The effect related to the button is an effect related to the operation of the chance button 136 and / or the opportunity button 139. In FIGS. 203A to 203D, time elapses from left to right.
<Direction pattern 1>
The production pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern 1 is an effect related to the chance button 136 and is an effect that does not use the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation waiting display 1 displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and a chance during the button operation waiting display 1 being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the button response display 1 of the display performed in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 1 is a display that does not include a display that is performed when the opportunity button 139 is waiting to be pressed. Thus, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation wait display 1 and operates the button does not include the opportunity button press wait display.
<Direction pattern 2>
The effect pattern 2 will be described using the upper part of FIG. The effect pattern 2 is an effect related to the chance button 136. The effect pattern 2 starts from the button operation waiting display 3 displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 during the button operation waiting display 3 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid period, the button response display 3 of the display performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 3 is a display that does not include a part of the display performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed.
<Direction pattern 3>
The effect pattern 3 will be described using the lower part of FIG. The effect pattern 3 is an effect related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation waiting display 3 displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the chance during the button operation waiting display 3 being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the operation of the chance button 136, and is performed when the opportunity button 139 is waited to be pressed. When the button response display 4 including the display is displayed and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 displayed on the button response display 4, the opportunity button 139 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A button response display 5 that is performed in response to the pressing is displayed.

When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed and the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 and operates the chance button 136, the effect pattern 2 (effect relating to the chance button) or the effect pattern 3 (chance button and opportunity) One of the production patterns of the production of buttons) is determined. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the effect pattern may be determined in advance, or the effect pattern is determined by the timing at which the player presses the chance button 136, the number of times the button is pressed, and the like. There may be cases. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 and operates the button includes the opportunity button pressing waiting display (or a part of the opportunity button pressing waiting display). May or may not be included.
<Direction pattern 4>
The effect pattern 4 is demonstrated using FIG.203 (c). The effect pattern 4 is an effect related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 4 starts from the button operation waiting display 4 displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the effective period, the button is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and includes a display that is displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. When the response display 4 is displayed, and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in the middle of displaying the button response display 4 on the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration symbol display device A button response display 5 is displayed in 208 in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 4 and operates the button includes the opportunity button pressing wait display.
<Direction pattern 5>
The effect pattern 5 is demonstrated using FIG.203 (d). The effect pattern 5 is an effect related to the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 5 starts from the button operation waiting display 5 displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed, and the operation of the opportunity button 139 in the middle of displaying the button operation waiting display 5 on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the effective period, the button response display 2 of the display performed according to the operation of the opportunity button 139 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, in the effect pattern 5, the button operation waiting display 5 prompting the operation of the opportunity button 139 is displayed when the effect related to the button is started.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, the easiness of the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is varied depending on the effect pattern. In the present embodiment, among the effect patterns 1 to 5, the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 4 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is most easily displayed, whereas only the effect pattern 2 is performed. The broken symbol variation display is configured such that the jackpot symbol pattern is hard to be confirmed and displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed without the effect pattern 3 being performed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed without the effect pattern 3 being performed. When the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without the effect pattern 5 being performed, or the effect pattern 5 is In the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without being performed and the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without the effect pattern 1 are configured to display the big hit symbol mode with the same probability. There is also. In the production pattern 4 that is most likely to stop and display the big hit mode, the chance button 136 must be pressed in order to press the opportunity button 139, so that the player's motivation to operate the opportunity button 139 is increased at the same time. The motivation to operate the button 136 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, other than the examples given above can be adopted. In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the easiness of the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is made the same depending on the effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 203, in the production patterns 1 to 5, it is determined that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button 136 is pressed. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the chance button 136 is configured to be rotatable, it is determined that the chance button 136 has been operated when the player rotates the chance button 136 at a predetermined angle or more from the normal state. It may be configured.

  As shown in FIG. 203, in the production patterns 1 to 5, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 has been operated when the opportunity button 139 is pressed. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the opportunity button 139 is configured to be rotatable, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 has been operated when the player rotates the opportunity button 139 beyond a normal angle from a normal state. It may be configured. The predetermined angle at the chance button 136 and the predetermined angle at the opportunity button 139 may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 203, in the production patterns 1 to 5, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are used, but other operation means may be used. For example, instead of the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139, an operation unit using the setting operation unit 137 or the transparent member 118 as a button may be used, or a handle operation unit may be used. The start and end times of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the production patterns 1 to 5 are determined before the button operation waiting display 1 or the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. The start time and end time of the period are determined before the button operation waiting display 2 or the button response display 4 is displayed. The effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed by the sub display device 1030 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be executed by both.
(Example 1-1)
An effect example of Example 1-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect states in time series. 204A shows a schematic front view of the gaming board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and FIGS. 204B to 204F show the main liquid crystal unit from the gaming board 1000. 1001 and the movable body 1002 are extracted and shown. 204 to 231, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. A character string “push” is written on the pressing surface of the chance button 136, and a character string “pressing” is written on the pressing surface of the opportunity button 139. Note that the movable bodies 1006, 1008, and 1012 are not shown in FIG.

  FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 204 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero.

  204 (b) following FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 204 and the subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is represented by a downward white bold arrow. FIG. 204B shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 uses an LED as a light source. The opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 uses an LED as a light source. When the chance button 136 is in the normal state, the chance button lamp 138 may not be emitting light, or the chance button lamp 138 may be emitting light in a predetermined manner. When the opportunity button 139 is in the normal state, the opportunity button lamp 141 may not be emitting light, or the opportunity button lamp 141 may be emitting light in a predetermined manner. Note that light sources other than LEDs may be used as the light sources of the chance button lamp 138 and the opportunity button lamp 141.

  FIG. 204 (c) continuing from FIG. 204 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 204 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 204 (d) continuing from FIG. 204 (c) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 in this example may be an image (hereinafter referred to as a “chance button image”) displayed with the chance button 136 displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter referred to as “chance button image”). ) Corresponds to an image in which three inverted triangles overlap (hereinafter may be referred to as a “button press instruction image”). When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 204D, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents a state. A plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicate a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 204 (e) following FIG. 204 (d) is performed in response to the button response display 1 (pressing the chance button 136) when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. As a display), a character string image of “chance” is displayed at a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

FIG. 204 (f) subsequent to FIG. 204 (e) shows a state in which the definite symbol mode is displayed as the notice animation ends. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is confirmed.
(Example 1-2)
An effect example of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 205 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. 205A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 205 (b) following FIG. 205 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 205 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  205 (c) following FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The button operation waiting display 1 of the present example corresponds to the button pressing instruction image having the same form as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1, in which three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button image. In FIG. 205 (c), a state in which the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that the color of the chance button image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same, or may be configured to be different. May be. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 205 (d) following FIG. 205 (c) shows a button response display 1 () when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 205 (c) is displayed. (Display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 1 of this example corresponds to a character string image of “chance !!” that is different from the button response display 1 shown in the example 1-1. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be effective. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

  FIG. 205 (e) following FIG. 205 (d) shows a state in which the definite symbol mode is displayed as the notice animation ends. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  An effect example of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 shows an example in which the special figure variable game that executes the example of the effect shown in FIG. 205 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. 206 (a) to 206 (d) show the same effects as in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (d).

  FIG. 206 (e), which continues from FIG. 206 (d), shows a state where the big hit symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed at the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

As described above, FIGS. 204 to 206 show an example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a). In the effect shown in Example 1-1, the character string image of “chance” is displayed as the button response display 1, and in the effect shown in Example 1-2, the character string image of “chance!” Is displayed as the button response display 1. Is displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display is more than the symbol variation display in which the “chance!” Character string image is displayed as the button response display 1 and the “chance” character string image is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “chance !!” is displayed as 1 may be configured such that the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is easier to perform. Even in the case of the same type of effect pattern 1, the player's interest may be improved by changing the ease with which the big hit symbol pattern is determined and displayed depending on the display of the button response display 1. . It should be noted that in the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display 1 does not display the “chance” character string image but displays the “chance!” Character string image, rather than the symbol variation display. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “chance” is displayed as the response display 1 may be configured so that the decisive display of the big hit symbol mode is easier, or the “chance” is displayed as the button response display 1. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “chance !!” is displayed without displaying the character string image, and the symbol variation display in which the character string image of “chance !!” is displayed as the button response display 1 is a big hit. You may comprise so that the fixed display of a pattern aspect may become the same.
(Example 1-3)
An effect example of Example 1-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 207 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 207 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 207 (b) following FIG. 207 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 207 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 207 (c) following FIG. 207 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 in this example corresponds to a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap with a chance button image that is the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1. In FIG. 207 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 1, the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or different from the normal state). This represents a state where light is emitted in a manner. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

FIG. 207 (d) following FIG. 207 (c) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 207 (c) is displayed. The period ends, and after that, the button response display is not displayed and the effect by the notice animation is ended, and the confirmed symbol mode is displayed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed may be a confirmation display of the big hit symbol mode.
(Example 1-4)
An effect example of Example 1-4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 1, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 208 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 208 (b) following FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. An effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 208 (b).

  FIG. 208 (c) continued from FIG. 208 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is a button press instruction image displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped, and “Press!” Corresponds to the character string image. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. FIG. 208 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 208 (d) continued from FIG. 208 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 208 (c) is displayed, so that the button response display 1 ( A character string image of “Large Chance” is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display) performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. Instead of displaying the character image of “chance” or “chance!” Without displaying the character image of “great chance” as the button response display 1, the character of “great chance” as the button response display 1 is displayed. There may be a case where the symbol variation display for displaying the row image is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed.

FIG. 208 (e) continuing from FIG. 208 (d) shows a state in which the definite symbol form is displayed as the notice animation ends. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.
(Example 1-5)
An effect example of Example 1-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 1 and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 209 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 209 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 209 (b) following FIG. 209 (a) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 209 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 209 (c) following FIG. 209 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-4. A character string image corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. FIG. 209 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 209 (d) following FIG. 209 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. A character string image of “Large chance!” Different from the button response display 1 shown in Example 1-4 is displayed at a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state displayed in is shown. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. The button response display 1 does not display the character string image of “Great Chance!”, But displays the character image of “Great Chance!” As the button response display 1, rather than the symbol variation display that displays the character image of “Great Chance!”. The symbol variation display to be displayed may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed, or vice versa.

FIG. 209 (e) continuing from FIG. 209 (d) shows a state in which the definite symbol form is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is confirmed.
(Example 1-6)
An effect example of Example 1-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203A, and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 210 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 210 (b) following FIG. 210 (a) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 210 (b).

  FIG. 210 (c) continued from FIG. 210 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 in this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3, and the button pressing instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button image and “Press!” Corresponds to the character string image. FIG. 210C shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation effective period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 210 (d) following FIG. 210 (c) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 210 (c) is displayed. The state immediately before the period ends is shown.

  FIG. 210 (e) following FIG. 210 (d) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 210 (c) is displayed. Even when the period is over, as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136), the same “large chance” character string image as the button response display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3 is decorated. The state displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is shown. In the example 1-3 in which the character string image of “large chance” is displayed by pressing the chance button 136 even in the effect of displaying the character string image of “large chance” same as the button response display 1. The symbol variation display in which the effect of this example has been executed may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol aspect than the symbol variation display in which the effect shown has been performed. There may be the opposite case. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-3 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured to be the same in the probability that the big hit symbol mode is determined and displayed. There may be. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved.

FIG. 210 (f) continued from FIG. 210 (e) shows a state in which the definite symbol mode is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is confirmed.
(Example 1-7)
An effect example of Example 1-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a) and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 211 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 211A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

  211 (b) following FIG. 211 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 210 (b).

  FIG. 211 (c) continuing from FIG. 211 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 in this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3, and the button pressing instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button image and “Press!” Corresponds to the character string image. FIG. 211 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 211 (d) continued from FIG. 211 (c) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) is displayed. The state immediately before the period ends is shown.

  FIG. 211 (e) following FIG. 211 (d) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 211 (c) is displayed. Even when the period is over, as a button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “Large chance?” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state that was done. The button response display 1 of the character string image of “Large chance?” Shown in this example is a button response display that is not displayed when the player operates the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, if the player does not operate the chance button 136, a character string image of “Great chance” is displayed. Instead, the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present example is executed may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more easily confirmed and vice versa. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-6 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is easily displayed in the same manner. There may be. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved.

  FIG. 211 (f) following FIG. 211 (e) shows a state in which the final symbol pattern is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is confirmed.

  Thus, in the production examples shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, when the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the middle of the button operation waiting display 1. The button response display 1 displayed on the screen and the button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. The button response display 1 that is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated and the button response display 1 that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated may perform the same display or different displays. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the middle of the button operation waiting display 1, the button response display 1 may not be displayed.

In the production examples shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, the button response display 1 depends on the timing when the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even the effects of the same effect pattern 1 may be configured so that the jackpot reliability differs depending on the display of the button response display 1. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is the same as long as any button response display 1 is displayed as long as the effect is the same effect pattern 1. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.
(Example 2-1)
An effect example of Example 2-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 212A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 212 (b) following FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 212 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 212 (c) continuing from FIG. 212 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, an image (hereinafter referred to as “chance button light emission image”) that is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and in which the chance button 136 emits light is displayed. And a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap each other. The chance button emission image is an image that is not displayed in the production pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 212C, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents a state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are displayed rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may have the same ease of decisive display of the big hit symbol mode. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

  In FIG. 212 (d) following FIG. 212 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the middle of the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 212 (c). By pressing the button, the beginning of the button response display 3 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the button response display 3 in this example corresponds to a character string image of “further chance” and an image deceiving an opportunity button 139 for moving display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “opportunity button image”). When the button response display 3 starts to be displayed, the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 212 (e) following FIG. 212 (d) shows a state in which the middle of the button response display 3 is displayed. In FIG. 212 (e), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 passes through the center of the display area, moves to the left end, and is displayed so as to be out of the frame. It will be erased by displaying on the screen. The arrow shown in FIG. 212 (e) represents the direction and locus of movement of the opportunity button image, but it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 3. .

  FIG. 212 (f) continuing from FIG. 212 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 3 is displayed. The button response display 3 shows a state in which a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 212 (g) subsequent to FIG. 212 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is terminated and the final symbol pattern display is displayed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  As described above, the button response display 3 of this example is configured not to be displayed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

  An effect example of Example 2-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 shows an example in which the special figure variable game that executes the example of the effect shown in FIG. 212 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (f) show the same effect state as FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (f).

  In FIG. 213 (g) following FIG. 213 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are shifted in the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” pattern mode. The temporarily stopped display state is shown.

FIG. 213 (h), which continues from FIG. 213 (g), shows a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed again and the big hit symbol pattern display is confirmed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed after FIG. 213 (g), the decorative symbol may be displayed in a variable manner.
(Example 2-2)
An effect example of Example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 shows a modification of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (a), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 2-1.

  FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 214 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

  214 (b) following FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 214 (b).

  FIG. 214 (c) continued from FIG. 214 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 3 in this example corresponds to a button press instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles overlap the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. An image in which the chance button 136 emits light is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 214 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents a state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are displayed rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may have the same ease of decisive display of the big hit symbol mode. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

  FIG. 214 (d) continued from FIG. 214 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 214 (e), which continues from FIG. 214 (d), shows that the player has not pressed the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. Shows the state.

  In FIG. 214 (f) following FIG. 214 (e), the button operation waiting display 3 is deleted when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and a character string image of “sorry” is displayed as the button response display 3. Shows the state. In this example, compared with Example 2-1, since it took time until the button response display 3 was displayed after the symbol variation display was started, the beginning of the button response display 3 shown in Example 2-2 and It is configured not to display the character string image of “More chance” and the opportunity button image of the middle display. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 3 of the character string image of “sorry” may not be displayed.

  FIG. 214 (g) following FIG. 214 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is finished and the definite symbol mode is displayed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  An effect example of Example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 shows an example in which the special figure variable game that executes the example of the effect shown in FIG. 214 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. 215 (a) to (f) show the same effect state as FIGS. 214 (a) to (f).

  In FIG. 215 (g) following FIG. 215 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are shifted to “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The temporarily stopped display state is shown.

  FIG. 215 (h), which continues from FIG. 215 (g), shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed again, and the big hit symbol pattern display is confirmed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed after FIG. 215 (g), it may be configured such that the decorative symbol variation display is performed.

In the effects shown in Examples 2-1 and 2-2, the button response display 3 depends on the timing when the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and whether or not the button is pressed. May be configured differently. Even the effects of the same effect pattern 2 may be configured so that the jackpot reliability differs depending on the display of the button response display 3. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is the same as long as it is an effect of the same effect pattern 2 regardless of which button response display 3 is displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.
(Example 3-1)
An effect example of Example 3-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203B, and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 216 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 216 (b) following FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 216 (b).

  FIG. 216 (c) continuing from FIG. 216 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. The chance button emission image is an image that is not displayed in the production pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 216 (c), during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents a state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are displayed rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may have the same ease of decisive display of the big hit symbol mode. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

  FIG. 216 (d) following FIG. 216 (c) shows a button response display 4 (chance button 136) when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 216 (c). The initial stage of the display performed in response to the pressing of is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 in this example corresponds to a character string image of “More chances !!”. The character string image “Further chance !!” is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 216 (e) following FIG. 216 (d) shows a state where the middle panel of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of this example, after displaying the character string image of “More chances !!”, the opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 deceived is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state is displayed as follows.

  FIG. 216 (f) following FIG. 216 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 216 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “More chances !!” is deleted. Thus, a state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The button press instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 216 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Note that the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the up and down direction and the left and right direction), and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside.

  The display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. Good. The display color of the opportunity button image as the button and the response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are different from the symbol variation display in which the display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are the same. The different symbol variation display may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol, and vice versa.

  FIG. 216 (g) following FIG. 216 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed. As a display displayed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 216 (h), which continues from FIG. 216 (g), shows a state in which a definite symbol form is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Note that, as the button response display 5, even if a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed.
(Example 3-2)
An effect example of Example 3-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 shows an example in which the special figure variable game for executing the example shown in FIG. 216 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. FIGS. 217 (a) to (f) show the same effect state as FIGS. 216 (a) to (f).

  FIG. 217 (g) following FIG. 217 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 217 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 217 (h), which continues from FIG. 217 (g), shows a state in which the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is performed at the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that, as the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the final symbol pattern display may be displayed.

In the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present embodiment is performed, the button response display 5 has a button rather than the symbol variation display in which the character image of “sorry” is displayed without displaying the character string image of “big hit !?”. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed as the response display 5 is configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more easily confirmed. As the button response display 5, when the character string image of “unfortunate” is displayed and when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed, the ease of confirming display of the big hit symbol pattern is the same. It may be configured to be.
(Example 3-3)
An effect example of Example 3-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203B, and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 218 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 218 (b) following FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 218 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 218 (c) following FIG. 218 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 218 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 218 (d) following FIG. 218 (c) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 218 (c) is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 218 (e) following FIG. 218 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 218 (c) and 218 (d) is displayed. The button response display 4 shown in 216 (e) is displayed. In this example, since it takes more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 starts to be displayed than in the case of Example 3-1, FIG. 216 (d) shows. The middle part of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (e) is displayed without displaying the initial stage of the button response display 4 shown. It should be noted that all the buttons from the beginning to the end of the button response display 4 shown in the embodiment 3-1 according to the time required from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4 are displayed. The display may be displayed so as to be played back at double speed.

  FIG. 218 (f) following FIG. 218 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed. In FIG. 218 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “More chances !!” is deleted. Thus, a state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed, so that it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is valid for operation. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 218 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 218 (g) following FIG. 218 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 218 (f) is displayed. As a display displayed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 218 (h) following FIG. 218 (g) shows a state in which the final symbol pattern is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Note that, as the button response display 5, even if a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed.
(Example 3-4)
An effect example of Example 3-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203B, and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 219 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 219 (b) following FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 219 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 219 (c) continuing from FIG. 219 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 219 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 219 (d) following FIG. 219 (c) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 219 (c) is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 219 (e) following FIG. 219 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 219 (c) and (d) is displayed. 216 (d) shows a state in which the early stage of the button response display 4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 219 (f) following FIG. 219 (e) shows a state where the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed and the opportunity button 139 is informed that the operation is valid. Yes. In this example, since it takes more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 starts to be displayed than in the case of Example 3-1, FIG. 216 (e) shows. The middle of the button response display 4 shown is not displayed, but the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed. It should be noted that all the buttons from the beginning to the end of the button response display 4 shown in the embodiment 3-1 according to the time required from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4 are displayed. The display may be displayed so as to be played back at double speed. In FIG. 219 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 219 (g) following FIG. 219 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 219 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 219 (h), which continues from FIG. 219 (g), shows a state in which the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is performed at the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that, as the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the final symbol pattern display may be displayed.
(Example 3-5)
An effect example of Example 3-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203B, and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 220A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  220 (b) following FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 216 (b).

  FIG. 220 (c) following FIG. 220 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 220 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 220D following FIG. 220C shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 220C is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 220 (e) following FIG. 220 (d) shows the operation of the chance button 136 without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 220 (f) is displayed. The state immediately before the validity period ends is shown.

  In FIG. 220 (f) following FIG. 220 (e), the button operation waiting display 3 is erased when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f). Is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 was not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the early stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (d) shown in Example 3-1 and FIG. 216 (e). The end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f) is displayed without displaying the middle of the button response display 4 shown. By displaying the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (f), it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is in the operation effective period. In FIG. 220 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, all the button response displays 5 shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to 216 (f) may not be displayed.

  FIG. 220 (g) following FIG. 220 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 220 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 220 (h), which continues from FIG. 220 (g), shows a state in which the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is performed at the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that, as the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the final symbol pattern display may be displayed.
(Example 3-6)
An effect example of Example 3-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203B, and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 221 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 221 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 221 (b) following FIG. 221 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 216 (b).

  FIG. 221 (c) continued from FIG. 221 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 221 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 221 (d) following FIG. 221 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 221 (c) is displayed, and the button response display 4 ( As an early stage of display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136, a character string image of “More chances !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 221 (e) continuing from FIG. 221 (d) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed, and shows a state in which it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is in an operation valid period. In FIG. 221 (e), the image of “More chances !!” displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. An image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and showing the state where the opportunity button 139 protrudes (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “opportunity button protruding image”) is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. it's shown. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an upper image from the middle part of the opportunity button protruding image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image lower than the middle part of the opportunity button protruding image, so that the entire opportunity button protruding image is displayed. it's shown. In FIG. 221 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139, and the normal state. It represents a more prominent state. The player operates the opportunity button 139 by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined manner (or to emit light in a manner different from the normal state) and protrude from the normal state. You may be able to know that. Note that the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes during the display of the button response display 4 is more likely to stop and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude during the display of the button response display 4. May be configured, and vice versa. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved. On the other hand, the symbol change display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude during the display of the button response display 4 and the symbol change display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes during the display of the button response display 4 facilitates the stop display of the big hit symbol form. May be configured to be the same. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved.

  FIG. 221 (f) following FIG. 221 (e) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 221 (f) is displayed. As a display displayed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “Super Extreme !!!!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as the button response display 5, rather than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of “Sorry! The symbol variation display in which the character string image “Gekiatsu !!!” is displayed is configured such that the jackpot symbol pattern is more easily stopped and displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

FIG. 221 (g) following FIG. 221 (f) shows a state in which the big hit symbol pattern is stopped and displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that it is a big hit as a result of the special figure 1 variable game. Note that, as the button response display 5, even if a character string image of “Super Extreme !!!!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off symbol pattern may be stopped and displayed. Good.
(Example 3-7)
An effect example of Example 3-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b) and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. 222A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 222 (b) following FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 216 (b).

  FIG. 222 (c) following FIG. 222 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 222 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 222 (d) continued from FIG. 222 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 222 (c) is displayed, so that the button response display 4 ( As an early stage of display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136, a character string image of “More chances !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 222 (e) following FIG. 222 (d) shows a state in which the middle of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 222 (e), the image of “further chance !!” displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. Both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 display the opportunity button protruding image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and showing the state where the opportunity button 139 protrudes. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an upper image from the middle part of the opportunity button protruding image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image lower than the middle part of the opportunity button protruding image, so that the entire opportunity button protruding image is displayed. it's shown. In FIG. 222 (e), the opportunity button 139 protrudes from the normal state, but the opportunity button lamp 141 is in the normal state.

  FIG. 222 (f) subsequent to FIG. 222 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 222 (f), an opportunity button image is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the opportunity button 139 that has returned to the normal state, and the opportunity button 139 has returned from the protruding state to the normal state. .

  FIG. 222 (g) following FIG. 222 (f) deletes the button response display 4 without starting the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 and displays a character string image of “sorry” as the button response display 5. Shows the state.

  FIG. 222 (h), which continues from FIG. 222 (g), shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. As the button response display 5, even when a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit symbol mode may be stopped.

In the production examples shown in Examples 3-1 to 3-7, the button response display 4 depends on the timing when the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and whether or not the button is pressed. The button response display 5 may be configured differently depending on the timing when the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button response display 4 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. There is a case. Even with the same effect pattern 3, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 4 or the button response display 5. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is the same as long as it is an effect of the same effect pattern 3 regardless of which button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.
(Example 4-1)
An effect example of Example 4-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 203 (c), and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 223 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 223 (b) following FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 223 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 223 (c) following FIG. 223 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is in effect. In the button operation waiting display 4 of this example, an image (hereinafter referred to as “chance button special”) in which a chance button 136 that emits light in a special manner displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. And an image in which three inverted triangles displayed in a special color overlap each other (hereinafter may be referred to as a “button press special instruction image”). . The chance button special light emitting image and the button pressing special instruction image are images that are not displayed in the button operation waiting displays 1 to 3, and these images are displayed, so that the button response display is always displayed after the button operation waiting display 4. 4 is displayed. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 223 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 4, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the chance button special emission image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4.

  FIG. 223 (d) following FIG. 223 (c) shows that the button response display 4 is displayed when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 223 (c) is displayed. As an early stage (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “More chance !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 223 (e) following FIG. 223 (d) is displayed as a middle panel of the button response display 4 so that the opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state that was done.

  FIG. 223 (f) following FIG. 223 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 223 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “More chances !!” is deleted. Thus, a state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed, so that it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is valid for operation. In FIG. 223 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button response display 4, an image showing an opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “opportunity button special light emission image”) and the button press shown in FIG. 223 (c). A special instruction image may be displayed.

  FIG. 223 (g) following FIG. 223 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 223 (f) is displayed. As a display displayed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 223 (h) following FIG. 223 (g), the display of the button response display 4 is terminated, and the left, middle and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are shifted to “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The temporarily stopped display state is shown.

FIG. 223 (u), which continues from FIG. 223 (h), shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed again and the jackpot symbol pattern is stopped. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed after FIG. 223 (h), it may be configured such that the decorative symbols are changed and displayed.
(Example 4-2)
An effect example of Example 4-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 203 (c), and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 4-1.

  FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 224 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 224 (b) following FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 224 (b).

  FIG. 224 (c) following FIG. 224 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is in effect. The button operation waiting display 4 in this example includes a chance button special light-emitting image and a special light-emitting image in which a chance button 136 that emits light in a special manner displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A button pressing special instruction image in which three inverted triangles displayed in color overlap each other corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 223 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the chance button special light image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4.

  FIG. 224 (d) following FIG. 224 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 224 (c) is displayed, so that the button response display 4 ( As a display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136, a character string image of “More chances !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with Example 4-1, the time from when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed until the player presses the chance button 136 is longer.

  FIG. 224 (e) following FIG. 224 (d) displays a character string image of “More chances !!” on the button response display 4 shown in FIG. An opportunity button image in which an opportunity button 139 to be moved is displayed is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 224 (f) following FIG. 224 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 224 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “More chances !!” is deleted. Thus, a state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The button press instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the opportunity button 139 is in an effective operation period. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 224 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button response display 4, an image showing an opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “opportunity button special light emission image”) and the button press shown in FIG. 223 (c). A special instruction image may be displayed.

  FIG. 224 (g) following FIG. 224 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 224 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, compared with Example 4-1, since it takes a long time for the player to press the opportunity button 139 after the button response display 4 is displayed, the button response is displayed after the symbol variation display is started. The time until the display 5 is displayed is longer.

  FIG. 224 (h), which continues from FIG. 224 (g), shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed again and the jackpot symbol pattern is stopped. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this example, since the time from displaying the button response display 5 to ending the symbol variation display is shorter than in Example 4-1, an effect of temporarily stopping the off symbol shown in FIG. 223 (h) is performed. Is configured to not. When the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed and immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is finished, the beginning or middle display of the button response display 4 is displayed. , And an effect of temporarily stopping the off symbol shown in FIG. 223 (h) may be performed.

In the production examples shown in Examples 4-1 and 4-2, the button response display 4 depends on the timing when the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, and whether or not the button is pressed. When configured differently, the button response display 5 is configured differently depending on the timing when the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button response display 4 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. There is a case. Even with the same effect pattern 4, depending on the display of the button response display 4 or the button response display 5, the jackpot reliability may be different. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, when the same effect pattern 4 is displayed regardless of which button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed, the jackpot reliability may be configured to be the same. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.
(Example 5-1)
An effect example of Example 5-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 225 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 225 (b) following FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 225 (b).

  FIG. 225 (c) following FIG. 225 (b) shows a chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in Example 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button press instruction image in a form in which the image and three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button press instruction image in which the inverted triangle is overlapped with the chance button emission image is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 225 (d) following FIG. 225 (c) shows that the button pressing instruction image is erased and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle panel of the button operation waiting display 2. The state is shown in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with moving and displaying at the left end of the area and erasing the frame out. Note that the left arrow in the figure represents the direction and locus of the movement of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side of the figure represents the movement direction and locus of the chance button emission image. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button wait display 2.

  FIG. 225 (e) following FIG. 225 (d) shows the end of the button operation waiting display 2, and the button press in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 225 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, an image showing the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “opportunity button special emission image”) and the button shown in FIG. 223 (c). A special press instruction image may be displayed.

  In FIG. 225 (f) following FIG. 225 (e), the button press instruction image in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped and displayed from the position displayed in FIG. 225 (e). Shows the state. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed at a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 225 (g) following FIG. 225 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. As a display performed in response to the press of the opportunity button 139, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 225 (g) subsequent to FIG. 225 (f) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Note that, as the button response display 2, even when a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit symbol pattern may be stopped.
(Example 5-2)
An effect example of Example 5-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 226 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 226 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 226 (b) following FIG. 226 (a) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 225 (b).

  FIG. 226 (c), which continues from FIG. 226 (b), shows the chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in Example 3-1 or the like as the initial stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button press instruction image in a form in which the image and three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button press instruction image in which the inverted triangle is overlapped with the chance button emission image is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 226 (d) continued from FIG. 226 (c) is the middle panel of the button operation waiting display 2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button pressing instruction image is deleted and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The state is shown in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with moving and displaying at the left end of the area and erasing the frame out. Note that the left arrow in the figure represents the direction and locus of the movement of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side of the figure represents the movement direction and locus of the chance button emission image. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  FIG. 226 (e) following FIG. 226 (d) is an end of the button operation waiting display 2, and the button press in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 226 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special emission image in which the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner is deceived and a button pressing special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) may be displayed. Good.

  In FIG. 226 (f) following FIG. 226 (e), the button press instruction image in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped and displayed from the position displayed in FIG. 226 (e). Shows the state. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed at a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 226 (g) following FIG. 226 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 226 (f) is displayed, so that the button response display 2 ( A character string image of “big hit?” Is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as an early stage of display) performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139.

  FIG. 226 (h) following FIG. 226 (g) is a middle panel of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139), and “big hit ?!” is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. "Is displayed.

  FIG. 226 (i) following FIG. 226 (h) is the end of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139), and “big hit ?!” is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ! "Is displayed. It should be noted that the character images of “big hit ?!” and “big hit ?!” displayed in the middle and end of the button response display 2 are displayed when the opportunity button 139 is pressed for a predetermined time or longer, or for a predetermined time. It may be configured to be displayed when the button is pressed a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 226 (j) following FIG. 226 (i) shows a state in which the big hit symbol pattern is stopped and displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Even when a character string image such as “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the off symbol mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

In this example, the button response display 2 displays “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, and “big hit ?!” in this order to increase the player's expectation of jackpot in stages. There are cases where it is possible. Note that the jackpot reliability may be displayed as a number of “!”. For example, when the button response display 2 displays “big hit?” And “big hit ?!” in this order (“big hit ?!” is not displayed), “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, “ "Big hits !!" and "Big hits !!!!" may be displayed in this order.
(Example 5-3)
An effect example of Example 5-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 shows a modification of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

  FIG. 227 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 227 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 227 (b) following FIG. 227 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 225 (b).

  FIG. 227 (c), which continues from FIG. 227 (b), shows a chance button emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an initial stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button press instruction image in a form in which the image and three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button press instruction image in which the inverted triangle is overlapped with the chance button emission image is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 227 (d) following FIG. 227 (c) is the middle panel of the button operation waiting display 2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button press instruction image is erased and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The state is shown in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with moving and displaying at the left end of the area and erasing the frame out. Note that the left arrow in the figure represents the direction and locus of the movement of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side of the figure represents the movement direction and locus of the chance button emission image. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  FIG. 227 (e) following FIG. 227 (d) shows the end of the button operation waiting display 2, and the button press in a mode in which an opportunity button image and three inverted triangles overlap in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 227 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special emission image in which the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner is deceived and a button pressing special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) may be displayed. Good.

  In FIG. 227 (f) following FIG. 227 (e), the button press instruction image in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped and displayed from the position displayed in FIG. 227 (e). Shows the state. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed at a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 227 (g) following FIG. 227 (f) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 227 (f) is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 227 (h) following FIG. 227 (g) shows a state immediately before the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 227 (f) is continuously displayed and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. Yes.

  FIG. 227 (i), which continues from FIG. 227 (h), shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139) as the button response display 2 at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. The character string image of “big hit ?!” at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since it took more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the case of Example 5-1, the early stage of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-2 It is configured not to display the midfield.

FIG. 226 (j) following FIG. 227 (i) shows a state where the big hit symbol pattern is stopped and displayed at the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that even when a character image of “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, A stop display may be displayed.
(Example 5-4)
An effect example of Example 5-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 shows a modification of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 203 (d), and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

  FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 228 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 228 (b) following FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 225 (b).

  FIG. 228 (c) following FIG. 228 (b) shows a chance button emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button press instruction image in a form in which the image and three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button press instruction image in which the inverted triangle is overlapped with the chance button emission image is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 228 (d) following FIG. 228 (c) is the middle panel of the button operation waiting display 2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button press instruction image is erased and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The state is shown in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with moving and displaying at the left end of the area and erasing the frame out. Note that the left arrow in the figure represents the direction and locus of the movement of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side of the figure represents the movement direction and locus of the chance button emission image. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  FIG. 228 (e) following FIG. 228 (d) shows the end of the button operation waiting display 2, and the button press in the form in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 228 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special emission image in which the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner is deceived and a button pressing special instruction image shown in FIG. 223 (c) may be displayed. Good.

  In FIG. 228 (f) following FIG. 228 (e), the button press instruction image in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped and displayed from the position displayed in FIG. 228 (e). Shows the state. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed at a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 228 (g) following FIG. 228 (f) shows a state immediately before the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 228 (f) is continuously displayed and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. Yes.

  FIG. 228 (h) following FIG. 228 (g) shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139) as the button response display 2 at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. The character string image of “big hit ?!” at the beginning of the button response display 2 shown is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 228 (i), which continues from FIG. 228 (h), shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139) as the button response display 2 at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. The character string image of “big hit ?!” at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since it took more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the case of Example 5-1, the middle of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-2 is displayed. Thinning out so as not to display. In addition, according to the time required from the start of the symbol variation display until the button response display 2 is displayed, all the displays from the beginning to the end of the button response display 2 shown in the embodiment 5-1 are doubled. There may be a case where it is displayed to be reproduced.

  FIG. 228 (j) following FIG. 228 (i) shows a state in which the big hit symbol pattern is stopped and displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Even when a character string image such as “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the off symbol mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

In the production examples shown in Examples 5-1 to 5-4, the button response display 2 depends on the timing when the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button operation waiting display 2 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even the effects of the same effect pattern 2 may be configured so that the jackpot reliability differs depending on the display of the button response display 2. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is the same as long as it is an effect of the same effect pattern 2 regardless of which button response display 2 is displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.
(Example 6-1)
An effect example of Example 6-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 shows a modification of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 203 (b) and shows the effect states in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 shown in FIG. In and after FIG. 229, the movable body 1002 is located at a position that does not overlap the main liquid crystal unit 1001 when viewed from the player.

  FIG. 229 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 229 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 229 (b), which continues from FIG. 229 (a), shows a state in which the symbol variation display is started after one of the reservations in FIG. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and the movement animation between the hold / change icon that moves to the left and the hold icon b2 that moves the hold icon b2 to the left are displayed, the decorative symbols change display. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 229 (c) following FIG. 229 (b) shows a default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230 during execution of the symbol variation display. An increased display state is shown. The “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 229 (d) following FIG. 229 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 229 (c) is being executed.

  In FIG. 229 (e) following FIG. 229 (d), one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 229 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the state where the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner is shown. In this example, the button operation waiting display 3 corresponds to a hold icon of an image in which the chance button 136 is put on (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “chance button hold icon”). In FIG. 229 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 229 (f) following FIG. 229 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 229 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 229 (g) following FIG. 229 (f), one hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the chance button hold icon 3 is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and the move animation between the hold and change icons that move to the left and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left are displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 229 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  In FIG. 229 (h) following FIG. 229 (g), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 229 (g) is being continuously displayed, the player can play during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 3 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 3 in this example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “chance button emission hold icon”) of an image in which the chance button 136 emitting light in a mode different from the normal state is displayed. ing.

  FIG. 229 (i) following FIG. 229 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 229 (i) shows a state in which the chance button emission hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 229 (h).

  FIG. 229 (j) following FIG. 229 (i) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 229 (j), the chance button light emission suspension icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3.

  In FIG. 229 (k) following FIG. 229 (j), one hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b3 becomes the change icon a3 and the move animation between the hold and change icons that move to the left and the hold icon move animation that the hold icon b4 moves to the left are displayed, and the decorative symbol change display and the chance button The operation effective period 136 is started. FIG. 229 (k) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Thus, in this example, the button response display 3 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed.

  In FIG. 229 (l) following FIG. 229 (k), the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 229 (k) is being continuously displayed. By pressing the chance button 136, the chance button emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 is changed to the black circular hold icon b4 of the pre-reading notice mode. In this example, the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested is larger than the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon is consumed. The pattern mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed. Note that the chance button emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 may be changed to a white circle hold icon, a white diamond hold icon, or a hold icon other than these.

  In FIG. 229 (m) following FIG. 229 (l), “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

  FIG. 229 (n) following FIG. 229 (m) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In FIG. 229 (o) following FIG. 229 (n), one hold of the special figure 1 is digested, the next symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. It shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / variation icons moving to the left becomes the black circular variation icon a4.

  FIG. 229 (p) following FIG. 229 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 229 (p), an effect (reach effect) by a predetermined notice animation is started.

  FIG. 229 (q) subsequent to FIG. 229 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the off symbol pattern is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 229 (r) subsequent to FIG. 229 (q) shows a state in which the off symbol mode is stopped. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 3 when the player operates the chance button 136, and then the player presses the chunk button. By operating 136, it is changed to a black circular hold icon that is a pre-reading notice mode. As described above, the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 of the present example are configured to include a display that is performed when the chance button 136 is waited for because the hold icon corresponds to the hold icon.

  In this example, when displaying the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although configured, there may be other cases. For example, the chance button 136 is determined based on the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display that starts after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The operation effective period start timing and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. However, when the hold icon is reduced, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to a hold icon as the display 3, or a specific hold icon as a button operation waiting display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to

  In this example, one of the plurality of held icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but one or more of the plurality of held icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon of a plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 3, but one or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 3. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon and button response corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to the display 3 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the default white circle hold icon at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 is displayed, or a pre-reading notice other than the white circle is displayed. It may be changed to the hold icon having the form.
(Example 6-2)
An effect example of Example 6-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b), and shows the effect states in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 230 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 230A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 230 (b), which continues from FIG. 230 (a), shows a state in which one hold in FIG. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and the movement animation between the hold / change icon that moves to the left and the hold icon b2 that moves the hold icon b2 to the left are displayed, the decorative symbols change display. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 230 (c) following FIG. 230 (b) shows a default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the symbol variation display. An increased display state is shown. The “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 230 (d) following FIG. 230 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 230 (c) is being executed.

  FIG. 230 (e) following FIG. 230 (d) shows that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 230 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the state where the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner is shown. In this example, the button for waiting for button operation 3 corresponds to a chance button hold icon of an image in which the chance button 136 is displayed. In FIG. 230 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 230 (f) subsequent to FIG. 230 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a 1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 230 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 230 (g) continuing from FIG. 230 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then a chance button hold icon is displayed as button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and the move animation between the hold and change icons that move to the left and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left are displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 230G shows a state where the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. In this example, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left.

  In FIG. 230 (h) following FIG. 230 (g), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 230 (g) is being continuously displayed, the player plays during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an “opportunity button hold icon”) of an image in which the opportunity button 139 is tricked.

  In FIG. 230 (i) following FIG. 230 (h), “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 230 (i) shows a state where the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 230 (h).

  FIG. 230 (j) following FIG. 230 (i) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a 1 is deleted. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 230 (j), the opportunity button hold icon b 4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

  In FIG. 230 (k) following FIG. 230 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then an opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as button response display 4. It shows the state. The hold icon b3 is changed to the change icon a3 and the movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left and the hold icon b4 is moved to the left are displayed. The decorative icon change display and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation valid period of 139 is started. FIG. 230 (k) shows a state where the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Thus, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display that is performed when the opportunity button 139 is waiting to be pressed.

  In FIG. 230 (l) following FIG. 230 (k), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 230 (k) is being continuously displayed, the player plays during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139. By pressing the opportunity button 139, the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is changed to the white diamond-shaped hold icon b4 as the button response display 5. In this example, the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the white diamond hold icon is digested is larger than the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the white circle hold icon is digested. The pattern mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed. The symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the white diamond-shaped hold icon is digested is stopped more than the symbol change display that starts when the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is consumed. It is configured to be easily displayed. In addition, as the button response display 5, a white circular hold icon, a black circular hold icon, or a hold icon other than these may be displayed.

  230 (m) following FIG. 230 (l) is a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

  FIG. 230 (n) following FIG. 230 (m) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In FIG. 230 (o) following FIG. 230 (n), one hold of the special figure 1 is digested, the next symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. It shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / variation icons moving to the left becomes the black circular variation icon a4.

  FIG. 230 (p) following FIG. 230 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. An effect (reach effect) by a predetermined notice animation is started after FIG. 230 (p).

  FIG. 230 (q) continued from FIG. 230 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the off symbol pattern is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 230 (r) subsequent to FIG. 230 (q) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 when the player operates the chance button 136, and then the player presses the opportunity button By operating 139, the button response display 5 is changed to a black circular hold icon which is a pre-reading notice mode displayed as the button response display 5. Thus, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 includes a display performed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

  In this example, when displaying the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although configured, there may be other cases. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is determined based on the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display that starts after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The start timing of the effective period and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, after the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 displays a moving animation of the hold icon that moves to the left, the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. There may be other cases. For example, when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased, the hold order, the time required to start the symbol variation display that is started after the hold of the hold icon is consumed, and the player selects the chance button The start timing of the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined from the timing of operating the 136.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. However, when the hold icon is reduced, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to a hold icon as the display 3, or a specific hold icon as a button operation waiting display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation wait display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 4. There may be.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 5. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon and button response corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to the display 4 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the default white circle hold icon at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 is displayed, or a pre-reading notice other than the white circle is displayed. It may be changed to the hold icon having the form.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are configured with the same hold icon, but the hold icon and the button response display 5 corresponding to the button response display 4 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.
(Example 6-3)
An effect example of Example 6-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b) and shows the effect states in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 231 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 231 (b), which continues from FIG. 231 (a), shows a state in which one hold in FIG. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and the movement animation between the hold / change icon that moves to the left and the hold icon b2 that moves the hold icon b2 to the left are displayed, the decorative symbols change display. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 231 (c) following FIG. 231 (b) shows a default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the symbol variation display. An increased display state is shown. The “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 231 (d) following FIG. 231 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (c) is being executed.

  In FIG. 231 (e) following FIG. 231 (d), one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230 while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the state where the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner is shown. In this example, the button for waiting for button operation 3 corresponds to a chance button hold icon of an image in which the chance button 136 is displayed. In FIG. 231 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 231 (f) following FIG. 231 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 231 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 231 (g) continuing from FIG. 231 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then a chance button hold icon is displayed as button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and the move animation between the hold and change icons that move to the left and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left are displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 231 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. In this example, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left.

  FIG. 231 (h), which continues from FIG. 231 (g), shows that the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. The hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 4 in this example corresponds to an opportunity button hold icon of an image in which the opportunity button 139 is turned off.

  FIG. 231 (i) following FIG. 231 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 231 (i) shows a state where the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 231 (h).

  FIG. 231 (j) following FIG. 231 (i) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 231 (j), the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

  In FIG. 231 (k) following FIG. 231 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then an opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as button response display 4. It shows the state. The hold icon b3 is changed to the change icon a3 and the movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left and the hold icon b4 is moved to the left are displayed. The decorative icon change display and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation valid period of 139 is started. FIG. 231 (k) shows a state in which the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Thus, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display that is performed when the opportunity button 139 is waiting to be pressed.

  In FIG. 231 (l) following FIG. 231 (k), the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (k) is being continuously displayed. By depressing the opportunity button 139, an animation representing the state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is changing in the area where the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “pending icon changing animation”). In this case, the state is displayed.

  In FIG. 231 (m) following FIG. 231 (l), “Decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “Decoration 2” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c. At the end of the display of the on-hold icon changing animation, an on-hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “opportunity button protrusion hold”) is displayed with the opportunity button 139 in a state of protruding the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 being displayed. It may be referred to as an “icon”.) The changed state is shown in b5. In FIG. 231 (m), the opportunity button 139 protrudes in relation to displaying the button response display 5. However, since the opportunity button 139 is not in an effective operation period, the opportunity button 139 is not emitting light. Or it remains a normal light emission state. In this example, the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is digested is larger than the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon is digested. The symbol mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is digested and started rather than the symbol variation display starting after the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is more likely to stop display, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon than the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the white diamond hold icon is digested The symbol variation display which is started after the digestion is digested is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed.

  FIG. 231 (n) subsequent to FIG. 231 (m) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is confirmed and the variation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In FIG. 231 (o) following FIG. 231 (n), one hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the opportunity button protruding hold icon b4 is a protruding opportunity button. The movement icon between the hold / change icons that move to the left is displayed as a change icon (hereinafter, also referred to as “opportunity button protrusion change icon”) a4 in the image of 139, and the decoration pattern changes. The display and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 are started. FIG. 231 (o) shows a state where the projecting opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state).

  FIG. 231 (p), which continues from FIG. 231 (o), continues to display the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 231 (o), and the player plays during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. By pressing the opportunity button 139 in a protruding state, the “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” in the big hit symbol form is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. If the player does not press down the opportunity button 139 in a state in which the player protrudes during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are hit big at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. The symbol “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 231 (r) subsequent to FIG. 231 (q) shows a state in which the big hit symbol pattern is stopped. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 when the player operates the chance button 136, and then the player presses the opportunity button By operating 139, it is changed to the opportunity button protruding hold icon that is the pre-reading notice mode displayed as the button response display 5, and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 in a state protruding from the normal state, A temporary stop display of the decorative design is performed. Thus, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 are configured including a display performed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139. The

  In this example, when displaying the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although configured, there may be other cases. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is determined based on the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display that starts after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The start timing of the effective period and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, after the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 displays a moving animation of the hold icon that moves to the left, the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. There may be other cases. For example, when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased, the hold order, the time required to start the symbol variation display that is started after the hold of the hold icon is consumed, and the player selects the chance button The start timing of the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined from the timing of operating the 136.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. However, when the hold icon is reduced, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to a hold icon as the display 3, or a specific hold icon as a button operation waiting display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation wait display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 4. There may be.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 5. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon and button response corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to the display 4 may be composed of different hold icons.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are configured with the same hold icon, but the hold icon and the button response display 5 corresponding to the button response display 4 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.

  As described above, in Examples 6-1 to 6-3, there is shown an effect example in which the hold icon is associated with the operation waiting display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 2 and the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. However, there may be a case where the hold icon is associated with the operation waiting display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 1, the effect pattern 4, and the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game machine according to the third embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 231 again.
(I1)
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing a symbol variation display;
Image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a sub display device 209);
A first operating means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position operable by the player;
A second operating means (for example, an opportunity button 139) provided at a position operable by the player;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 203B),
The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means (for example, FIGS. 212 (c) to (d), FIGS. 216 (c) to (d)). Etc.),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display (for example, button response display 3 shown in FIG. 203 (b)),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIG. 203 (b)),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display (for example, button response display 5 shown in FIG. 203 (c)),
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 203B and 212C to 212F). ),
The third type of operation response display does not include a part of a display (for example, a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped) that is displayed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means. A configured display (see, eg, FIG. 203 (b), FIGS. 212 (c)-(f)),
The fourth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 203 (c) and 216 (c) to (f)). ),
The fourth type of operation response display is a display that includes the part of the display that is performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 203 (c), FIG. 216). (See (f)),
The fifth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means (for example, see FIGS. 203 (d) and 216 (g)),
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the fifth type of operation response display that is displayed by causing the player to operate the first operation unit and the second operation unit step by step is performed. The display is not the fifth type of operation response display, but rather the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed by causing the player to operate only the first operation means. Since the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased step by step, and the interest of the game can be improved.
(I2)
The game stand according to (I1) above,
The third type operation response display and the fourth type operation in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display (for example, the chance button emission image). Which type of response display is displayed is determined before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means,
The third operation waiting display is one of the third types of operation waiting displays (see, for example, FIGS. 212 (c) and 216 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I3)
The game stand according to (I1) or (I2) above,
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 203 (c)),
The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (c) and FIGS. 223 (c) to (d)),
The fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the fourth type operation waiting display is displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 203 (c) and FIGS. 223 (d) to (f)),
The symbol variation display in which the fourth type operation waiting display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type operation waiting display is performed without performing the fourth type operation waiting display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I4)
The gaming machine according to (I3) above,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation waiting display (for example, operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a)),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation response display (for example, the operation response display 1 shown in FIG. 203 (a)),
The first type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means (for example, see FIGS. 203 (a) and 204 (d)),
The first type of operation response display is a display that does not include a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 203 (a), FIG. 204 (e)). reference),
The first type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the first type operation waiting display is displayed. (For example, refer to FIG. 203 (a), FIG. 204 (d) to (e)),
A first operation response display (for example, a character string image of “chance !!”) is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during display of the first operation waiting display. (For example, see FIGS. 205 (c) to (d)),
A fourth operation response display (for example, an opportunity button image and a button press instruction image) is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during display of the fourth operation waiting display. Cage (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (c) to (f)),
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even when the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display (for example, FIG. 219 (c) to FIG. 219). (See (f)),
The first operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the first type operation waiting display,
The first operation response display is an operation response display of the first type of operation response display,
The fourth operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the fourth type operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is an operation response display of the fourth type of operation response display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I5)
A gaming machine as set forth in (I4) above,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the first type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I6)
The game stand according to (I4) or (I5) above,
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the first type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I7)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above,
The fourth type operation response display when the time from when the third type operation waiting display is displayed until the first operation means is operated is the first time is the first type Display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 216 (d) to (f)) (for example, see FIGS. 216 (c) to (f)),
The fourth type operation response display when the time from when the third type operation waiting display is displayed until the first operation means is operated is the second time is the second type Display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 219 (e) to (f)) (for example, see FIGS. 219 (c) to (f)),
The second time is longer than the first time,
The initial display of the first display and the initial display of the second display are the same (for example, see FIGS. 216 (d) and 219 (e)),
The display at the end of the first display and the display at the end of the second display are the same (for example, see FIGS. 216 (f) and 219 (f)),
The display of at least a part of the middle display of the first display (for example, the display of the middle display of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 216 (e)) is not displayed in the second display (for example, FIGS. 219 (e) to 219). (See (f)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(I8)
The game stand according to (I7) above,
When the first operation means is operated between the time when the third type operation waiting display is displayed and before the expiration of the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type operation waiting display. It is configured to perform display in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 216 (d) to (f)),
The first time is a time from when the third type operation waiting display is started until the first operation means is operated at the shortest timing (for example, FIG. 216 (c)). ) To (d))
The second time is a time when the first operating means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the third type operation waiting display is started ( For example, see FIGS. 219 (c) to (d)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(I9)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above,
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 2),
The second type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means (for example, see FIG. 203 (d)).
The second type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the second operation means is operated while the second type operation waiting display is being displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 203 (d)),
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the second type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I10)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I9) above,
The display of the character displayed in the fourth type of operation response display (for example, a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles shown in FIG. 223 (f) overlap) is awaiting the fourth type of operation. It is configured to be displayed on the display (see, for example, FIG. 223 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I11)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I10) above,
The display of the character displayed in the fourth type of operation response display (for example, a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped as shown in FIG. 216 (f)) is waiting for the third type of operation. It is configured to be displayed on the display (see, for example, FIG. 216 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I12)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above,
The second operating means is configured to be determined to be operated when pressed by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I13)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above,
The first operating means is configured to be determined to be operated when rotated by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.
[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applicable will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 239. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
Example 1
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 232 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and FIG. 232 (b) and subsequent figures show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body from the game board 1000. 1002 is extracted and shown.

  FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 232 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In FIG. 232, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 232 (b) following FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  FIG. 232 (c) following FIG. 232 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 232 (d) subsequent to FIG. 232 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Normal reach production is started after FIG. 232 (d).

  FIG. 232 (e) following FIG. 232 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the operating range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image cannot be visually recognized by the player. Symbol variation display where at least part of decorative symbols and preview images (for example, images of sun, clouds, balloons, hold icons, variation icons, etc.) may overlap the movable body and become invisible to the player Is a pre-reading notice that the noticeable part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable object, compared to the symbol fluctuation display in which at least a part of the decorative pattern or the notice image does not overlap the movable object When the pre-reading notice is executed when the visible part of the noticeable image does not differ before and after the movement of the movable body, the big hit symbol form is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be performed.

  FIG. 232 (f) following FIG. 232 (e) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 232 (g) following FIG. 232 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in such a manner that “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol aspect, swings to the left and right. In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display described later is not executed during the normal reach effect.

  FIG. 232 (h) following FIG. 232 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 232 (i) following FIG. 232 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  FIG. 232 (j) following FIG. 232 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 232 (k) following FIG. 232 (j) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 232 (k). In this example, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 232 (l) subsequent to FIG. 232 (k) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during execution of a normal effect or normal reach effect, and the background image of a mountain road is displayed during execution of a super reach effect.

  FIG. 232 (m) following FIG. 232 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sea background image including a yacht image and a cloud image to a partial image of a mountain road background displayed on the decorative design display device 208. The sub display device 1030 displays an image of a portion that the sub display device 1030 hides on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 232 (n) following FIG. 232 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right from the initial position shown in FIG. 232 (m). The sub display device 1030 displays an image of a portion that the sub display device 1030 hides on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the movable body 1002 is a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as a display screen front flat surface) by a drive system (not shown). ) Can be moved two-dimensionally. The drive system of the movable body 1002 can take various configurations. For example, one end of two connecting rods connected so as to be rotatable is fixed to a predetermined position of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 outside the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to be rotatable in a two-dimensional manner in the front plane of the display screen. A movable link mechanism is configured. The movable body 1002 is fixed to the other end of the two connecting rods connected so as to be rotatable in the plane. A motor for driving the connecting rod is disposed at one end of the two connecting rods and the connecting node. Thereby, the movable body 1002 can be moved two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen. In addition, a motor for rotating the effect movable body may be arranged at the other end of the two connecting rods, and the effect movable body 1002 may be configured to be rotatable within the front plane of the display screen.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 232 (o) following FIG. 232 (n) shows a state in which a character string image of “sorry” is displayed as a display suggesting a shift at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (center of the effect display area 208d). Is shown. The sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping with a part of the character image of “n” displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the lower half of the character of “n” is displayed on the sub display device 1030. It is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (p) following FIG. 232 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 232 (q) subsequent to FIG. 232 (p) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started after “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” indicating a shift is displayed during the super reach effect. . The wipe effect display is an effect of erasing the image so as to wipe off the edge of the display screen of the display device. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes two display devices, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a sub display device 1030. In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is first started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the sub display device 208 is displayed. Starts on display device 1030. Hereinafter, the wipe effect display executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe effect display, the wipe display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe display, and the sub display device 1030 The executed wipe effect display is referred to as a second wipe effect display, and the wipe display displayed on the sub display device 208 is referred to as a second wipe display.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (q), the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. To do. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbols and the background image displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 232, the patterns are shown by hatching that goes up to the right.

  The effect movable body 1002 is moving toward the initial position, and the sub display device 1030 is located at a position that overlaps a part of the character string image of “sorry” displayed on the decorative design display device 208. On the display device 1030, the lower half portion of the word “mind” is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (r) continuing from FIG. 232 (q) shows a state where the wipe displays w1a and w1b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  FIG. 232 (s) following FIG. 232 (r) shows a state in which the second wipe effect display is started on the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 (the effect movable body 1002) is moving. The wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display 1030, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The appearance of the wipe display w2a and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to start the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the appearance of the second wipe display is the start of the second wipe effect display. The wipe displays w2a and w2b are displayed on the foreground in the sub display device 1030, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the background image and the like displayed before the start of the second wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w2a and w2b are the same. In FIG. 232, the patterns are shown as white dots on a black background.

  The pattern of the first wipe display is different from the pattern of the second wipe display. The first wipe display appears from the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the screen, and the second wipe display appears from the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the screen.

  In the present embodiment, the second wipe effect display is started during the execution of the effect operation in which the sub display device 1030 moves to the initial position, but the second wipe effect display after the sub display device 1030 stops at the initial position. The display may be started, the sub display device 1030 may start to move to the initial position after the second wipe effect display ends, or the timing at which the sub display device 1030 starts to move to the initial position and The start timing of the second wipe effect display may be the same.

  FIG. 232 (t) following FIG. 232 (s) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position. The first wipe display and the second wipe display are appearing. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. . The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  FIG. 232 (u) following FIG. 232 (t) shows a state where the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed. The end portion of the wipe display w2a and the end portion of the wipe display w2b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b. When the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b, the wipe displays w2a and w2b are in a standby display state in which the display is not moved. When the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The first wipe display is an appearance display, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed from the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed to gradually spread in the center.

  FIG. 232 (v) continuing from FIG. 232 (u) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are in a standby display state in which they are not moved and displayed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 232 (w) following FIG. 232 (v) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The second wipe display is a standby display.

  FIG. 232 (x) following FIG. 232 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is started. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 232 (y) subsequent to FIG. 232 (x) shows a state during withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, a part of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped are displayed.

  FIG. 232 (z) following FIG. 232 (y) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is completed. The wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. When the wipe display w2b is erased from the screen, withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed, the second wipe effect display ends. The first wipe effect display is being withdrawn.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (r), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the start of the second wipe effect display. As shown in FIG. 232 (z), the second wipe effect display is displayed. After the end, the sub display device 1030 displays the sea background image. Thus, the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes before and after the second wipe effect display.

  In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen and appears at the lower left corner of the display screen. Complete withdrawal. Note that the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen and is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. You may complete the withdrawal.

  FIG. 232 (a) following FIG. 232 (z) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order symbol pattern, shakes in a display manner that swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Fluctuation display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a reduced display mode before the first wipe effect display is started, but as shown in FIG. After the display of the wipe effect is finished, the decorative symbols are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a normal display mode. Thus, the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display. In the present embodiment, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (p), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the start of the first wipe effect display. As shown in FIG. 232 (a), the first wipe effect is displayed. After the display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

  In the present embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen, and is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Complete withdrawal. Note that the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen and appears at the upper right corner of the display screen. You may complete the withdrawal.

  FIG. 232 (b) following FIG. 232 (b) is a display of fluctuation variation in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” fluctuates left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. Indicates a state where is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (C) continuing from FIG. 232 (B) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 variable game has been completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an effect display means capable of executing an effect display. The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means, and one image display means of the plurality of image display means is a decorative symbol display device 208, of the plurality of image display means. One image display means is a sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can perform the first wipe effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the display indicating the shift in the super reach effect is performed. After the display suggesting the above is performed, the second wipe effect display can be performed on the sub display device 208. A scene change is performed in which the background image or the like is changed by the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the player's mood can be renewed by making the scene change of the effect gorgeous.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 232 (s) to (t), a part of the second wipe effect display is performed in the sub display device 1030 performing the moving operation. The entire second wipe effect display may be performed while the sub display device 1030 is moving. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 can perform a moving operation, and at least a part of the first wipe effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 performing the moving operation.
(Example 2)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each figure of FIG. 233, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 233 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays three hold icons indicating the number of holds in FIG. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 233 (b) following FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, and the hold icon moving animation is executed in which the two hold icons move to the left. Is done.

  FIG. 233 (c) following FIG. 233 (b) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 233 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 233 (d) following FIG. 233 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during execution of a normal effect or normal reach effect, and the background image of a mountain road is displayed during execution of a super reach effect. All the hold icons are erased as the background image changes. The timing at which the hold icon is deleted may be simultaneously with the change of the background image, may be before the change, or may be after the change.

  FIG. 233 (e) following FIG. 233 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  In this example, it is assumed that one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display screen. Thus, the special figure 1 start information is acquired, and the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process in which the newly acquired start information is prefetched and the stop symbol is preliminarily determined before the success / failure determination process. After executing the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 transmits a prefetching result information command including a prior determination result to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice based on the pre-determination result. In this example, it is determined that the prefetch notice is not executed.

  FIG. 233 (f) continued from FIG. 233 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display suggesting a shift, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display region 208b, and the left middle right symbol display region 208a. In -208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a design pattern of the dislocation, swings up and down.

  FIG. 233 (g) following FIG. 233 (f) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display indicating the shift is displayed during the super reach effect. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbols and the background image displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 233, the patterns are shown by hatching that goes up to the right.

  FIG. 233 (h) following FIG. 233 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 233 (i) following FIG. 233 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b.

  In the withdrawal display of the first wipe display, at least a part of the hold icon corresponding to the hold with a young hold order is displayed, and the hold icon corresponding to the later hold is displayed with the hold order that has been increased last. The player completes the wipe display withdrawal display while expecting whether the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed corresponding to the hold increased during the reach effect is the pre-reading notice mode. Sometimes you can wait.

  FIG. 233 (j) following FIG. 233 (i) shows a state where the first wipe display is being withdrawn. The decorative symbols and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At the time shown in FIG. 233 (j), a part of the left symbol, the middle symbol, the right symbol, and all of the hold icons are displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 233 (c), the number of held icons before erasure is two. However, since the number of held icons in FIG. As shown in 233 (j), the number of held icons after redisplay is three. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 233 (k) subsequent to FIG. 233 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order symbol pattern, shakes in a display manner that swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 233 (l) subsequent to FIG. 233 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can draw a lottery whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice using the wipe effect display when the holding of the special figure increases before the wipe effect display is executed. In this example, since it is determined not to execute the prefetching notice using the wipe effect display, the prefetching notice is not executed.
Example 3
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 234 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 234 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 234 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays three hold icons indicating the number of holds in FIG. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 234 (b) following FIG. 234 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, and the hold icon moving animation is executed in which the two hold icons move to the left. Is done.

  FIG. 234 (c) continued from FIG. 234 (b) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208 a and 208 c. Super reach production is started after FIG. 234 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 234 (d) following FIG. 234 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during execution of a normal effect or normal reach effect, and the background image of a mountain road is displayed during execution of a super reach effect. All the hold icons are erased as the background image changes.

  FIG. 234 (e) following FIG. 234 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  In this example, it is assumed that one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display screen. Thus, the special figure 1 start information is acquired, and the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process in which the newly acquired start information is prefetched and the stop symbol is preliminarily determined before the success / failure determination process. After executing the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 transmits a prefetching result information command including a prior determination result to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice based on the pre-determination result. In this example, it is determined that the prefetch notice is executed, and the prefetch notice is executed by the first wipe effect display and the hold icon display.

  FIG. 234 (f) following FIG. 234 (e) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display indicating the dislocation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbols and the background image displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 234, the patterns are solid black.

  In this embodiment, the black plain wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed as the first wipe effect display as a pre-reading notice. When the first wipe effect display is displayed as the pre-reading notice, the first wipe effect display is started when the first wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice is displayed. It is earlier than the start timing. When the pre-reading notice is executed, the first wipe effect display is started immediately after the display indicating the shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 234 (f). If not executed, a display suggesting a shift as shown in FIG. 233 (f) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a first wipe effect display is displayed as shown in FIG. 233 (g) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Has been started.

  The appearance positions of the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is the pre-reading notice is displayed are the positions of the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice is displayed. It is different from the appearance position. In the case of the first wipe effect display that is a pre-reading notice, as shown in FIG. 234 (f), the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper right corner of the display screen, and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the lower left corner of the display screen. is there. On the other hand, in the case of the first wipe effect display that is not a pre-reading notice, the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper left corner of the display screen as shown in FIG. 233 (g), and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the right side of the display screen. The bottom corner.

  The speed of the appearance display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is the pre-reading notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice is displayed. It is faster than the appearance display speed of w1b.

  As described above, when the first wipe effect display is executed as the pre-reading notice, the first wipe effect display in which the pattern, the appearance position, and the speed of the appearance display of the first wipe display are not the pre-reading notice is executed. It is different from the case. When the first wipe effect display is executed as the pre-reading notice, the first wipe effect display in which at least one of the first wipe display pattern, the appearance position, or the speed of the appearance display is not the pre-reading notice is executed. It only has to be different.

  In this example, the prefetch process is executed during the execution of the reach effect, and the prefetch notice based on the result of the prefetch process is executed during the execution of the reach effect. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display as the pre-reading notice is different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice. In addition, when a pre-reading notice is executed based on the pre-reading process before the start of the reach effect and the result of the pre-reading process before the special figure variable game in which the reach effect is executed, a hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode is displayed. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display may be different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display.

  FIG. 234 (g) following FIG. 234 (f) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  FIG. 234 (h) following FIG. 234 (g) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 234 (i) following FIG. 234 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The speed of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is the pre-reading notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice is displayed. It may be faster than the withdrawal display speed of w1b, may be the same, or may be slower.

  In the withdrawal display of the first wipe display, at least a part of the hold icon corresponding to the hold with a young hold order is displayed, and the hold icon corresponding to the later hold is displayed with the hold order that has been increased last. The player completes the wipe display withdrawal display while expecting whether the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed corresponding to the hold increased during the reach effect is the pre-reading notice mode. Sometimes you can wait.

  FIG. 234 (j) following FIG. 234 (i) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order symbol pattern, shakes in a display manner that swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Fluctuation display is displayed. The hold icon is also displayed again, and the third hold icon from the left is displayed in a white square display mode. The hold icon is displayed in a pre-read notice display mode.

  FIG. 234 (k) continuing from FIG. 234 (j) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. ing.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pre-reading notice by the first wipe effect display. When the first wipe effect display is executed as the pre-reading notice, the big win may be always won before all the pending special figure variable games are consumed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the pre-reading notice by the second wipe effect display. Similar to the first wipe effect display, the second wipe effect display as the pre-reading notice is a second wipe in which at least one of the second wipe display pattern, appearance position, or appearance display speed is not the pre-reading notice. It may be different from the case where the effect display is executed.
Example 4
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 235 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 235 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 235 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each figure of FIG. 235, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. At the time shown in FIG. 235 (a), the number of remaining special figure variable games in the electric support state is nine. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image of “9 times” indicating the number of remaining special figure variable games in the electric support state.

  FIG. 235 (b) following FIG. 235 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image of “8 times” indicating the number of remaining special figure variable games in the electric support state.

  FIG. 235 (c) following FIG. 235 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 235 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 235 (d) following FIG. 235 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character are changed. This shows a state in which an effect in which a moving image of a scene to be confronted is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. An image of a hero character (hereinafter referred to as “hero”) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as “enemy”) on the right side of the display screen. ) Is displayed, and a character string image of “due” is displayed in the upper left of the display screen. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 235 (e) following FIG. 235 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  At the time shown in FIG. 235 (e), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is displayed a lower pan full tank error notification image in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower pan full error notification image is displayed overlapping the effect display. In FIG. 235 (d), the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “due”. The lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 235 (f) subsequent to FIG. 235 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 235 (g) following FIG. 235 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down. The lower pan full tank error notification image is changed to a display mode in which the character color is black.

  FIG. 235 (h) following FIG. 235 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display are started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. w2a starts to appear, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display. The appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display, and the wipe display w2a The appearance of the second wipe display is started by combining the appearance and the appearance of the wipe display w2b, and the second wipe effect display is started when the second wipe display appears.

  The first wipe display appears so as to wipe out the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe display w1a. In the lower pan full tank error notification image, as shown in FIG. 235 (f), before the start of the wiping effect, a character string image of “please pull out the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. As shown in FIG. 235 (h), after the start of the wiping effect, the character string image “Remove the sphere” is displayed in black. In this embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is just before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 235 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. Or after the start of the wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display which is one of the message displays is erased by the first wipe display, and the error display which is one of the message displays is displayed overlapping the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower pan full tank error notification image is taken as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays. For example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error, or an abnormal winning In addition, an error notification image for notification of illegal winning, an error notification image for notification of magnetic detection, and the like are also displayed overlapping the first wipe display.

  FIG. 235 (i) subsequent to FIG. 235 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display and the appearance display of the second wipe display are completed. The completion of the appearance display of the first wipe display may be simultaneous with the completion of the appearance display of the second wipe display, or the completion of any appearance display may be first. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started, and when the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The pattern of the second wipe display is a solid black color. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect is erased, and all the displays displayed on the sub display device 1030 during the super reach effect are displayed. Erased.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 235 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the hero's face included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero's face that has lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 235 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 235 (j) following FIG. 235 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols and the like are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The start of the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be simultaneously with the start of the withdrawal display of the second wipe display, or the start of any withdrawal display may be first.

  FIG. 235 (k) continued from FIG. 235 (j) shows a state where the first wipe display and the withdrawal display of the second wipe display are completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order symbol pattern, shakes in a display manner that swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Fluctuation display is displayed. The lower-plate full-tank error notification image is displayed in a display form in which a character string image “Pull out a sphere” is displayed in a white horizontally-long rectangular image. In the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen.

  FIG. 235 (l) subsequent to FIG. 235 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a wipe effect when the result of determining whether the special figure variation game is right or wrong is out of place. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget an effect suggesting a loss.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the display of a plurality of characters on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the super reach effect. One of the plurality of character displays is a hero character display, and one of the plurality of character displays is an enemy character display. The display of the hero or enemy character is erased when the first wipe effect display is displayed. In the super reach effect, the display of the hero or enemy character may be displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the display of the hero or enemy character is erased when the second wipe effect display is displayed. May be.
(Example 5)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 236 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 236 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each figure of FIG. 236, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. It should be noted that the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the electric support state may not be displayed on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030, or may be displayed.

  FIG. 236 (b) following FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 236 (c) following FIG. 236 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 236 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 236 (d) following FIG. 236 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character are changed. This shows a state in which an effect in which a moving image of a scene to be confronted is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 236 (e) following FIG. 236 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 236 (f) following FIG. 236 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit.

  FIG. 236 (g) following FIG. 236 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in such a manner that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings up and down.

  FIG. 236 (h) following FIG. 236 (g) shows a state in which the super reach effect has ended. Along with the end of the super reach production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d have a normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, swings left and right The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 236 (i) following FIG. 236 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not display the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. Even when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, the first wipe effect display may not be displayed and the first wipe effect display may not be displayed. The second wipe effect display may be displayed, or the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be displayed.
(Example 6)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 237 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 237 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 237 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 4, for example.

  FIG. 237 (b) following FIG. 237 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 237 (c) following FIG. 237 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 237 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 237 (d) following FIG. 237 (c) shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 20 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. A character string image “Confrontation start!” Is displayed below the display screen. A “decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image of “duel”, and a part of the character string image is not visible. The character string image of “Confrontation start!” Is one of the message displays, and is a tutorial display for explaining the production and the like. In this embodiment, during the execution of the super reach effect, a tutorial display for explaining the contents of the effect of the super reach effect is displayed.

  FIG. 237 (e) following FIG. 237 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode. In the lower part of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image “Long wins if the lord wins” is displayed, and in the case of a big win, it is explained that the main character who is the lord wins.

  At the time shown in FIG. 237 (e), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is displayed a lower pan full tank error notification image in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of message displays, and is displayed overlapping the effect display. In FIG. 237 (d), a lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “due”. The lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 237 (f) continued from FIG. 237 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 237 (g) following FIG. 237 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down. In the lower part of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image “If the shrine rises ...” is displayed, and it is explained that the resurrection effect is executed when the main character as the shrine stands. The lower pan full tank error notification image is changed to a display mode in which the character color is black.

  FIG. 237 (h) following FIG. 237 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display appears so as to wipe out the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe display w1a. In the lower pan full tank error notification image, as shown in FIG. 237 (f), before the start of the wiping effect, a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. As shown in FIG. 237 (h), after the start of the wiping effect, the character string image “Remove the sphere” is displayed in black. In this embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 237 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. Or after the start of the wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display which is one of the message displays is erased by the first wipe display, and the error display which is one of the message displays is displayed overlapping the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower pan full tank error notification image is taken as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays. For example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error, or an abnormal winning In addition, an error notification image for notification of illegal winning, an error notification image for notification of magnetic detection, and the like are also displayed overlapping the first wipe display.

  FIG. 237 (i) following FIG. 237 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed during the super reach effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 237 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 237 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 237 (j) following FIG. 237 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols and the tutorial display are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In FIG. 237 (j), a character string image of “empty step” which is a part of the tutorial display is displayed.

  FIG. 237 (k) continued from FIG. 237 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out-of-context pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display manner that fluctuates left and right. Is displayed. The lower-plate full-tank error notification image is displayed in a display form in which a character string image “Pull out a sphere” is displayed in a white horizontally-long rectangular image. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image of “the empty stage may be hidden” is displayed. The super reach production ends at the time shown in FIG. 237 (i), and after the super reach production ends, for example, a tutorial display explaining the stage production is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

  FIG. 237 (l) continuing from FIG. 237 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing. A lower pan full error notification image is displayed at the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a tutorial display of a character string image of “possibility. The sea stage is ...” below the display screen. Is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is erased by the wipe effect display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is not erased by the wipe effect display and continues during the display of the wipe effect display. Displayed. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display is not displayed after the end of the wipe effect display, and the tutorial display that was not displayed before the start of the wipe effect display (for example, describes the stage) (Tutorial display) is displayed in a scrolling display mode after the end of the wipe effect display. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may also be displayed in the scroll display mode. The tutorial display that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may be displayed after the end of the wipe effect display. Note that at least one of error display and tutorial display may be displayed on the sub display device 1030.
(Example 7)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 238 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 238 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 238 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 238, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 238 (b) following FIG. 238 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 238 (c) following FIG. 238 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 238 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 238 (d) following FIG. 238 (c) shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 238 (e) following FIG. 238 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 238 (f) continued from FIG. 238 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 238 (g) following FIG. 238 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 238 (h) following FIG. 238 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 238 (i) following FIG. 238 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 238 (i), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 238 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 238 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 238 (j) following FIG. 238 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 238 (k) following FIG. 238 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner in which it swings left and right. Is displayed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 238 (l) following FIG. 238 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In the present embodiment, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a symbol aspect that suggests a shift, is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, and after the end of the wipe effect display, the symbol aspect that suggests a big hit “ “Decoration 2—Decoration 2—Decoration 2” is displayed. Wipe effect is provided by providing an effect pattern in which a wipe effect display is executed after a symbol aspect that suggests a loss is displayed even when a big win is won, and a symbol aspect that suggests a big hit is displayed after the wipe effect display There may be a case where it is possible to contribute to helping the player forget the effect suggesting the losing before the display is executed.
(Example 8)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 239, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 239 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 239 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 239, the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown.

  FIG. 239 (b) following FIG. 239 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 239 (c) following FIG. 239 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 239 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 239 (d) following FIG. 239 (c) shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 239 (e) following FIG. 239 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 239 (f) continued from FIG. 239 (e) shows a state in which the display indicating the shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  At the time shown in FIG. 239 (f), the lower pan 128 is filled with prize balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is displayed a lower pan full tank error notification image in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of message displays, and is displayed overlapping the effect display. In FIG. 239 (f), the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “due”. The lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 239 (g) following FIG. 239 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 239 (h) following FIG. 239 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 239 (i) following FIG. 239 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 239 (i), the lower pan 128 is filled with prize balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 239 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 239 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to helping the player forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 239 (j) following FIG. 239 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 239 (k) continuing from FIG. 239 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out-of-context pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display manner that fluctuates left and right. Is displayed.

  FIG. 239 (l) following FIG. 239 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started again. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 239 (m) continuing from FIG. 239 (l) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 239 (m), the lower pan 128 is filled with prize balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  FIG. 239 (n) following FIG. 239 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 239 (o) following FIG. 239 (n) shows a state in which the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “due” is displayed.

  FIG. 239 (p) following FIG. 239 (o) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display mode that swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 239 (q) continued from FIG. 239 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is finished. Along with the end of the super reach production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d have a normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, swings left and right The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 239 (r) following FIG. 239 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variable game. In this embodiment, the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the first wipe effect display for the second time are the same as the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the first wipe effect display for the first time. Good. Note that the second wipe effect display may be executed twice during the execution of one special figure variable game.

The first wipe effect display may be displayed before and after the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 239 (c) to (d). At this time, a wipe display for scene change may be displayed. The wipe display for scene change may cover the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may cover only a part of the display screen. In FIGS. 239 (l) to (n), a wipe display for scene change may be displayed. The same applies to the second wipe effect display.
Example 9
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 240, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 240 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 240 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 240, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 240 (b) following FIG. 240 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 240 (c) following FIG. 240 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 240 (c). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 240 (d) following FIG. 240 (c) shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 240 (e) following FIG. 240 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 240 (f) continued from FIG. 240 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  240 (g) following FIG. 240 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 240 (h) following FIG. 240 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 240 (i) following FIG. 240 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 240 (i), the lower pan 128 becomes full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pattern of the first wipe display is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 240 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 240 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 240 (i ′) following FIG. 240 (i) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 240 (i ′). At the time shown in FIG. 240 (i ′), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be the same, or one of them may be the first.

  In FIG. 240 (i ′), during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Yes. A plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicate a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner or in a manner different from the normal state, the player knows that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. There may be a case where it is stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

  In FIG. 240 (j) following FIG. 240 (i ′), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Shows the state. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 240 (j). The button operation waiting display 1 is erased when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed as the first wipe display. A withdrawal indication is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the first wipe display withdrawal display may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be configured. In some cases, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period. For example, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 240 (k) following FIG. 240 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner in which it swings left and right. Has been. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 (h) and (i), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is performed with priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. Accordingly, the display of the wipe effect display is ended, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the swing variation display of the jackpot symbol (“decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”) is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. The display expected by the player may be a jackpot notice display or the like. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is performed in preference to the wipe effect display as in this example is the final one than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed in preference to the wipe effect display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is given priority over the wipe effect display may be the jackpot confirmed, or from the wipe effect display Alternatively, the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display is preferentially performed may be off. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be confirmed as lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 240 (l) continuing from FIG. 240 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In the present embodiment, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a pattern that suggests a shift, is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, a button operation waiting display is displayed during the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is displayed. The wipe effect display is terminated in response to the operation. After the end of the wipe effect display, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a design pattern suggesting a big hit, is displayed. Even when winning a big hit, a display pattern that suggests losing is displayed after the display of a pattern that suggests a loss, and an effect pattern that displays a design that suggests a big hit after the display of the wipe is provided. Thus, there may be a case where it is possible to contribute to helping the player forget the effect suggesting the loss before the wipe effect display is executed.
(Example 10)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 241, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 241 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 241 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each figure of FIG. 241, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 241 (b) following FIG. 241 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 241 (c) following FIG. 241 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production starts after FIG. 241 (c). The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

  FIG. 241 (d) following FIG. 241 (c) shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 241 (e) following FIG. 241 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 241 (f) following FIG. 241 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  At the time shown in FIG. 241 (f), the lower pan 128 is filled with prize balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is displayed a lower pan full tank error notification image in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of message displays, and is displayed overlapping the effect display. In FIG. 241 (f), a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “due”. The lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 241 (g) following FIG. 241 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 241 (h) following FIG. 241 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 241 (i) following FIG. 241 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 241 (i), the lower pan 128 is filled with prize balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 241 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 241 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to helping the player forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 241 (j) following FIG. 241 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 241 (k) subsequent to FIG. 241 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out-of-context pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display manner that fluctuates left and right. Is displayed.

  FIG. 241 (l) following FIG. 241 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started again. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 241 (m) following FIG. 241 (l) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 241 (m), the lower pan 128 is full of prize balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 241 (m ′) subsequent to FIG. 241 (m) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. At the time shown in FIG. 241 (m ′), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be the same, or one of them may be the first.

  In FIG. 241 (m ′), during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Yes. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. A plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicate a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner or in a manner different from the normal state, the player knows that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. There may be a case where it is stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

  In FIG. 241 (n) following FIG. 241 (m ′), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Shows the state. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 241 (n), a chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. The button operation waiting display 1 is deleted when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed as the first wipe display. A withdrawal indication is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the first wipe display withdrawal display may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be configured. In some cases, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period. For example, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation effective period ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 (l) to (m '), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is performed with priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. In response to this, the display of the wipe effect is ended, and a display that causes the player to expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a jackpot notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a jackpot. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is performed in preference to the wipe effect display as in this example is the final one than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed in preference to the wipe effect display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is given priority over the wipe effect display may be the jackpot confirmed, or from the wipe effect display Alternatively, the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display is preferentially performed may be off. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be confirmed as lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 241 (o) following FIG. 241 (n) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 241 (o), the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started after the end of the first wipe effect display. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “due” is displayed.

  FIG. 241 (p) following FIG. 241 (o) shows a state where a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display mode that swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 241 (q) continued from FIG. 241 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is finished. Along with the end of the super reach production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d have a normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, swings left and right The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 241 (r) subsequent to FIG. 241 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variable game, and the button operation waiting display is displayed in the second wipe effect display. The button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first wipe effect display, or the button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first and second wipe effect displays. Effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display.
(Example 11)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 242, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 242 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 242 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 242, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 242 (b) following FIG. 242 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 has been digested.

  FIG. 242 (c) following FIG. 242 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 242 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 242 (d) following FIG. 242 (c) is a movie of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 242 (e) following FIG. 242 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 242 (f) subsequent to FIG. 242 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 242 (g) following FIG. 242 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 242 (h) following FIG. 242 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 242 (i) following FIG. 242 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 242 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 242 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  At the time shown in FIG. 242 (i), the lower pan 128 is filled with prize balls and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 242 (i ′) subsequent to FIG. 242 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIGS. 242 (i ′) to (j). In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. The button operation waiting display 3 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In FIG. 242 (i ′), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). It represents the state of being. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state), the player can confirm that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. Sometimes you can know.

  FIG. 242 (i ″) following FIG. 242 (i ′) shows a button response in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 242 (i ′) is displayed. The initial stage of the display 4 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is shown in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 in this example is “More chance! "Corresponds to the character string image. The button response display 4 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 242 (i ′ ″) following FIG. 242 (i ″) shows a state in which the middle of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of the present example, after displaying the character string image of “More chances !!”, the opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 deceived is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state displayed in is shown.

  FIG. 242 (i ″ ″) following FIG. 242 (i ′ ″) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 242 (i ″ ″), the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Opportunity button image displayed to frame in from the right edge of the area is stopped at the center of the display area, the image of “More chances !!” is erased, and the button is pressed in the form of three inverted triangles overlapping The state where the image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed, thereby informing that the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 242 (i ″ ″), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It represents the state. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Note that the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the up and down direction and the left and right direction), and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside.

  FIG. 242 (j) following FIG. 242 (i ″ ″) starts the withdrawal display of the first wipe display in response to the opportunity button 139 being pressed by the player during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. It shows the state that was done. The opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are deleted when the opportunity button 139 is pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  In this example, when the player presses the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the button response display 5 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139) is used as the first wipe display. A withdrawal indication is displayed. Note that when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the first wipe display withdrawal display may not be displayed, or the opportunity button 139 may be configured. In some cases, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period. For example, when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation effective period ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 242 (h) to (i ""), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display and the button response display are performed with priority over the wipe effect display. In response to the operation of the button 136, the display of the wipe effect display is ended, and a display that allows the player to expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a jackpot notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a jackpot. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are given priority over the wipe effect display as in this example is the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not given priority over the wipe effect display. Instead, the jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easier to be confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or button response display is performed preferentially over the wipe effect display is determined to be the jackpot confirmed. Alternatively, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is performed with priority over the wipe effect display may be omitted. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be confirmed as lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display and the button response display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 242 (k) continuing from FIG. 242 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 242 (k), the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started after the end of the first wipe effect display. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “due” is displayed.

  FIG. 242 (l) subsequent to FIG. 242 (k) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display mode that swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 242 (m) subsequent to FIG. 242 (l) shows a state where the super reach effect is finished. Along with the end of the super reach production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d have a normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, swings left and right The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 242 (n) following FIG. 242 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In the present embodiment, the effect of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 216 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. Of course, the effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. During the execution of the wipe effect display, effects related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 shown in FIGS. 203 to 231 may be executed. At this time, a button operation waiting display and a button response display are displayed overlapping the first wipe display and the second wipe display. The symbol variation display where the effect display that the button operation waiting display and the button response display are displayed overlapping the first wipe display and the second wipe display overlaps the button operation waiting display and the button response display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the symbol variation display in which the effect display in which the first wipe display or the second wipe display is performed is performed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are performed in an overlapped manner with the second wipe display or the second wipe display may be confirmed as a big hit. In addition, even if it is configured so that the symbol variation display in which the effect display that can display the first wipe display or the second wipe display is performed overlapping the button operation waiting display or the button response display may be removed. It is also possible to confirm the deviation. The wipe effect display and the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 203 can be executed even in the electric support state and the non-electric support state.
(Example 12)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 243 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 243, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 174, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 243 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each figure of FIG. 243, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 243 (b) following FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 243 (c) following FIG. 243 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 243 (c). The symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 243 (d) following FIG. 243 (c) shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 243 (e) following FIG. 243 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 243 (f) following FIG. 243 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 243 (g) following FIG. 243 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 243 (h) following FIG. 243 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 243 (i) following FIG. 243 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 243 (i), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 243 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 243 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 243 (j), which continues from FIG. 243 (i), shows a state in which the island simultaneous performance is started. In the island simultaneous production, the same model of the pachinko machine 100 executes the same production at the same timing. At the start of the simultaneous island effect, a character string image of “Start an island simultaneous effect!” Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the island simultaneous effect of this example, an effect in which a princess character image is displayed is executed. When the simultaneous island effect is started, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the princess character image displayed in the island simultaneous effect, and is displayed with priority over the image displayed in the island simultaneous effect. .

  FIG. 243 (k) continuing from FIG. 243 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started during the execution of the island simultaneous performance. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. During execution of the island simultaneous production, a character string image of “island simultaneous production” is displayed. The lower pan full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 243 (l) continued from FIG. 243 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is ended after the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing.

  In this embodiment, the island simultaneous effect is started during the execution of the wipe effect display. During the execution of the simultaneous island effect, the effect display that was displayed before the start of the simultaneous island effect such as the wipe effect display, the reach effect display, and the decorative symbol display is reduced to the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. The error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed while maintaining the display position, display size, and display mode from before the start of the island simultaneous effect even during the execution of the island simultaneous effect.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of performing island simultaneous effects. The pachinko machine 100 includes a light emitting means (for example, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp 542 shown in FIG. 149), a transmission region (for example, a transparent plate member 118), and a display means (for example, A decorative design display device 208), and configured to accept a brightness setting operation (hereinafter referred to as "first brightness setting operation") by a player, and when the first effect is being performed. In addition, the luminance according to the first luminance setting operation (for example, “medium (duty ratio 70%)” luminance set by the player's luminance setting operation. Note that the luminance is set by the player's luminance setting operation. If not, the light emitting means can emit light at a brightness of “bright (duty ratio 100%)” initially set on the game machine), and the second effect is being performed. One The light emitting means emits light at a brightness not corresponding to the degree setting operation (for example, a brightness of “bright (duty ratio 100%)” initially set on the game machine), and the first effect is an island simultaneous effect This is not a reach effect, the second effect is the island simultaneous effect, the light emitting means is a means provided above the transmission area, and the game table Is capable of executing the island simultaneous effect alone, and even when the second effect is being performed, the display means displays on the brightness of the light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “brightness setting display”). The brightness setting display is a display showing the brightness according to the first brightness setting operation, and according to the first brightness setting operation even when the second effect is performed. The brightness setting display is displayed. When the second effect is not performed, the light emitting means can emit light with a luminance corresponding to the first luminance setting operation. The “brightness not responding to the first brightness setting operation” described above is a maximum value of the brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation. The “brightness not depending on the setting operation” is a luminance that is initially set. When the second effect is finished, the light emitting means may be able to emit light at a luminance corresponding to the first luminance setting operation. The reach effect is an effect that may be executed when the island simultaneous effect is not being executed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the sharpness of the effect can be given while the island simultaneous effect is being executed and when the island simultaneous effect is not being executed.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 243 again.
(I1)
Effect display means capable of executing effect display (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 1030)
A game machine equipped with
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing symbol variation display (for example, decorative symbol variation display),
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects (for example, a normal reach effect and a super reach effect),
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is second image display means (for example, sub display device 1030),
One reach effect of the plurality of types of reach effects is a first reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect),
One reach effect of the plurality of types of reach effects is a second reach effect (for example, a super reach effect),
The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed,
After the display that suggests the shift is performed in the second reach effect, it is possible to perform the first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b) on the first image display means. Yes,
In the second reach effect, after a display suggesting a shift is made, a second wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b) can be performed on the second image display means. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it may be possible to renew the player's mood that has been shifted from the symbol variation display by the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.
(I2)
The game stand according to (I1) above,
According to the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out,
By the second wipe effect display, the image in the second image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I3)
The game stand according to (I1) or (I2) above,
A pre-reading notice is performed by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display (for example, see FIG. 234).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I4)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I3) above,
The image display means (for example, the decorative design display device 208) constituting the first image display means and the image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) constituting the second image display means are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I5)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I4) above,
In the second reach production, multiple types of symbols can be variably displayed,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is displayed. It is configured to redisplay when the display ends,
The one design is configured to change from a first display mode (for example, a reduced display mode) to a second display mode (for example, a normal display mode),
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed,
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I6)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I5) above,
In the second reach production, it is configured to be able to display a plurality of characters,
One of the plurality of character displays is a display of the first character (for example, a display of Yoshimune's character),
The display of the first character is erased when the wipe effect display of at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is displayed. .
(I7)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above,
A background display (see, for example, FIG. 232) changes before and after at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I8)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I7) above,
Provided with a ball storage means (for example, a lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls,
The first image display means can display a display (for example, a lower pan full tank error notification image) (hereinafter referred to as a “ball removal display”) for notifying that a game ball is to be removed from the ball storage means.
The ball removal display is a display that is displayed overlapping the first wipe effect display,
The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player during the display of the first wipe effect display,
The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I9)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above,
The first wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the first wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 232 (q) to (v)),
The first wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the first wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 232 (w) to (b)),
The second wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the second wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 232 (s) to (u)),
The second wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the second wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 232 (x) to (z)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I10)
The gaming machine according to (I9) above,
The pattern of the first wipe display (for example, the pattern of wipe displays w1a and w1b shown in FIG. 235) and the pattern of the second wipe display (for example, the pattern of wipe displays w2a and w2b shown in FIG. 235) are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I11)
The game stand according to (I9) or (I10) above,
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (q) and (s)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I12)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above,
The second image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
In the second image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 232 (s) and (t)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I13)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above,
The first image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I14)
A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp and illumination until now is an example of a light emission means, and if a lamp | ramp emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube, it can replace.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine. The enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and modifications shown in the first to fourth embodiments can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.

  The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 240, “a plurality of reels 2002 on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, a start lever 2004 for instructing rotation of the reels”. A stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery (winning prize internal lottery), and based on the lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 2008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 2010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 2014 that launches a ball into the game area 2012, a winning port 2016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 2018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning port 2016, A payout means 2020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 2018 detects a ball, a variable display device 2022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 movable to a position where the variable display device 2022 is shielded. And a movable body 2026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 2022 is designed to be triggered by a game ball entering the winning opening. And in is stopped and displayed after the change, it is also suitable to the slot machine 2000 ", which is the effect device 2010, such as to produce a game.

  The game stand according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 241 (a), “Bills are inserted into the bill insertion slot 3002, lottery is executed based on the bet 3004 and the start 3006 operation, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 3008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 3009 is selected, a casino machine 3000 that issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 3010. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing the image data and a home video game machine 6000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the cellular phone 4000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data via a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 6000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data about the game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
A game machine having display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of displays,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a third display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a fourth display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode different from the third display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the fourth display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
The display means is display means capable of displaying the second display at least in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the third display in a fifth display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The amount of change from the first display mode to the third display mode is the first amount of change,
The amount of change from the second display mode to the fourth display mode is the second amount of change,
The first change amount is the same change amount as the second change amount.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
At least a part of the first display displayed in the first display mode is one in which visibility is at least lowered when the display means is in the first state,
The first state is a state in which at least the second display is displayed on the display unit in the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The first display is a display including at least a first animation display,
The second display is a display including at least a second animation display,
The first animation display is at least an animation display different from the second animation display,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the first animation display even when the display mode of the first display is switched from the first display mode to the third display mode. Yes,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the second animation display even when the display mode of the second display is switched from the second display mode to the fourth display mode. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The display means is a display means that does not display the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
The display unit is a display unit that does not display the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means may perform a rotation display of the first image,
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image may not rotate.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
The second image does not rotate when the rotation display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a3,
When the rotation display is performed, there is a case where an image that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation display is performed is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,
When the rotation display is performed, the image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be cut off on the image display unit by performing the rotation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b1)
Directing movable body,
Image display means;
A game machine equipped with
When the production movable body is operated in front of the image display means, there may be a first state in which a first image is displayed at a first position.
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means,
The first image is an effect image,
When operating the movable body for production in front of the image display means, there may be a second state in which the first image is displayed at a second position,
The second position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
A gaming table as set forth in appendix b1 or b2,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
In the first state, the second image may be displayed in the first direction,
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second orientation,
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c1)
An image display unit capable of displaying an effect image for directing a game;
Drive means for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The game stand according to appendix c1,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the first image.
(Appendix c3)
The game stand according to appendix c1 or c2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
A game machine according to appendix c3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c4,
The first video is a video including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
The game stand according to appendix c5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
A gaming table according to appendix c5 or c6,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix c8)
A gaming table according to appendix c3 or c4,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in Appendix c1 means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the supplementary note c1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c9)
The game stand according to appendix c8,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in Appendix c1 means “moving linearly by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the supplementary note c1 means “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d1)
A game machine having a first movable body capable of performing a production operation to produce a game,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from the second position to the first position,
When the power is turned on, the first movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position;
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The production operation is configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
The first movable body is configured to move to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is located at a position different from the second position. Yes,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
A game machine as set forth in appendix d1 or d2,
The production operation includes an operation of moving to a third position,
The third position and the first position are different positions;
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
A game machine according to appendix d3,
Image display means,
The first movable body is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
A game machine according to appendix d4,
Can perform a big hit
The first movable body is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
When the first movable body is located at the third position, the first movable body may overlap at least a part of the preview image displayed on the image display means,
The preview image is the jackpot notification image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of executing an initial operation on condition that a power source is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in the appendix d1 means “the first movable body starts the initial operation from the first position. And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of executing an initial operation on condition that a power source is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in appendix d1 means “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position. The game machine is to start the initial operation after moving to, and move to the second position again at the end of the initial operation ".
(Appendix d8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d7,
“When the power is turned off” described in the appendix d1 means “when the main power of the game machine is turned off”
“When the power is turned on” described in the supplementary note d1 is “when the main power of the game machine is turned on”.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The first movable body is a movable body whose posture can be changed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d9,
Provided with a second movable body capable of performing a production operation to produce a game,
The second movable body is a movable body that starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e1)
An image display unit capable of displaying an effect image for directing a game;
Drive means for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e2)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the first image.
(Appendix e3)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1 or e2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e4)
A gaming machine according to appendix e3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The first video is a video including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e6)
A gaming machine according to appendix e5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e7)
A gaming machine according to appendix e5 or e6,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix e8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in appendix e1 means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix e1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”;
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e9)
A gaming machine according to appendix e3 or e4,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in Appendix e1 means “moving linearly by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the appendix e1 means “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f1)
A direction movable body capable of performing a movable operation for directing a game,
A decorative body provided with a window,
A game machine equipped with
The stage movable body may perform an operation behind the decorative body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f2)
A game machine according to appendix f1,
The production movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f3)
A game machine according to appendix f2,
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f3,
The decorative body is operable;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing a variable display of symbols,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f6)
A gaming machine according to appendix f5,
In the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body, The jackpot symbol form is more easily displayed as a final result of the symbol variation display than when the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament. Is configured to be
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the preview image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f7)
A gaming machine according to appendix f5 or f6,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the hold icon image that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body, The hold corresponding to the hold icon has been digested and started compared to the case where the player cannot visually recognize a part of the hold icon image that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window portion. As a final result of the symbol variation display, it is configured so that the big hit symbol mode is easily displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means can execute a rotation operation,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g2)
The game stand according to appendix g1,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g3)
A gaming machine according to appendix g2,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image is not rotated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g3,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image that has been cut off in the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed may be displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g4,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed may be cut off on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h1)
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Image display means capable of displaying an image;
A first operating means provided at a position operable by the player;
A second operating means provided at a position operable by the player;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display,
The third type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display,
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means,
The third type of operation response display is a display configured without including a part of the display performed when waiting for operation of the second operation means,
The fourth type operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means,
The fourth type of operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for operation of the second operation means,
The fifth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h2)
A game machine according to appendix h1,
Any type of the third type operation response display and the fourth type operation response display in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display Is displayed before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means,
The third operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the third type operation waiting display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h3)
A gaming machine according to appendix h1 or h2,
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display,
The fourth type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means,
The fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the fourth type operation waiting display is displayed. ,
The symbol variation display in which the fourth type operation waiting display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type operation waiting display is performed without performing the fourth type operation waiting display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h4)
A game machine according to appendix h3,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type operation waiting display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation response display,
The first type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means,
The first type of operation response display is a display configured without including a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means,
The first type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the first type operation waiting display is displayed. ,
The first operation response display is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during display of the first operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during display of the fourth operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even when the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display,
The first operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the first type operation waiting display,
The first operation response display is an operation response display of the first type of operation response display,
The fourth operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the fourth type operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is an operation response display of the fourth type of operation response display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h5)
A game machine according to appendix h4,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the first type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h6)
A gaming machine according to appendix h4 or h5,
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the first type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h6,
The fourth type operation response display when the time from when the third type operation waiting display is displayed until the first operation means is operated is the first time is the first type Display,
The fourth type operation response display when the time from when the third type operation waiting display is displayed until the first operation means is operated is the second time is the second type Display,
The second time is longer than the first time,
The initial display of the first display and the initial display of the second display are the same,
The end display of the first display and the end display of the second display are the same,
The display of at least a part of the middle of the first display is not displayed in the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h8)
A game machine according to appendix h7,
When the first operation means is operated between the time when the third type operation waiting display is displayed and before the expiration of the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type operation waiting display. The display according to the operation of the first operation means is performed,
The first time is the time from when the third type operation waiting display is started until the first operation means is operated at the shortest timing,
The second time is a time when the first operation means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the third type operation waiting display is started. A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h8,
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display,
The second type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means,
The second type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the second operation means is operated while the second type operation waiting display is being displayed. ,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the second type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h9,
The character displayed on the fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed on the fourth type operation waiting display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h10,
The character displayed on the fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed on the third type operation waiting display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h11,
The second operating means is configured to be determined to be operated when pressed by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h12,
The first operating means is configured to be determined to be operated when rotated by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i1)
A game machine equipped with an effect display means capable of executing an effect display,
The effect display means is display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects,
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
One reach production of the plurality of types of reach production is a first reach production,
One reach production of the plurality of types of reach production is a second reach production,
The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed,
It is possible to perform a first wipe effect display in the first image display means after a display suggesting a shift is performed in the second reach effect.
It is possible to perform a second wipe effect display in the second image display means after a display suggesting a shift is performed in the second reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i2)
The game stand according to appendix i1,
According to the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out,
By the second wipe effect display, the image in the second image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i3)
A game machine according to appendix i1 or i2,
The pre-reading notice is configured to be performed by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i3,
The image display means constituting the first image display means and the image display means constituting the second image display means are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i4,
In the second reach production, multiple types of symbols can be variably displayed,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is displayed. It is configured to redisplay when the display ends,
The one symbol is configured to change from the first display mode to the second display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed,
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i5,
In the second reach production, it is configured to be able to display a plurality of characters,
One of the plurality of character displays is a display of the first character,
The display of the first character is erased when the wipe effect display of at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is displayed. .
(Appendix i7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i6,
The background display changes before and after at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i7,
Provided with a ball storage means capable of storing game balls,
The first image display means can display a display (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal display”) for notifying that a game ball is removed from the ball storage means.
The ball removal display is a display that is displayed overlapping the first wipe effect display,
The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player during the display of the first wipe effect display,
The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i8,
The first wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the first wipe display,
The first wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the first wipe display,
The second wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the second wipe display,
The second wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the second wipe display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i10)
The game stand according to appendix i9,
The pattern of the first wipe display and the pattern of the second wipe display are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i11)
The game stand according to appendix i9 or i10,
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i11,
The second image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
In the second image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i12,
The first image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Next, other ball game machines (including the enclosed type) such as the pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. Note that the enclosed type here means an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 279 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 246 to 279 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 279, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 279 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this specification, an LED whose light source is an LED is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player Built in the ball launch handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, a chance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (see FIG. 247) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 The chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the player's A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the balance and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 has been filled with game balls.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 246, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 247 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 246 as seen from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing of the entire game, and the processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls 249) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 249) that performs control processing related to the launch of a sphere, and a power management section 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines (see FIG. 249). And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. The board case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 248 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. Here, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In this example, only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the state where the pair of blade members 2321 is closed (first state) is a difficult-to-win state. . On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open (second state) is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  The production movable body 224 shown in FIG. 248 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Accordingly, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by predetermined control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means). (500)), or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second control unit 400 One unit combined with the sub-control unit 500 can also be regarded as a predetermined control unit (for example, a sub-control unit).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, an operation lever sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the operation lever 190, a shield device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shield device 246, and detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed. Detection unit 710, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the operation lever sensor 425, shielding device sensor 430, and detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Read data etc. and use VRAM 436 work area to display image And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 forms (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal to the basic circuit 502 is connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 is connected.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 249, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In this example, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is shut off and immediately recovered, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically recovered without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 250A to 250C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 250 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display ends, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started. The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 250 (a), ten types of special drawings from “Special Figure 246” to “Special Figure J” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 250 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special figure 246” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure 247” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246, as will be described later, determination of whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not the special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure 246”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure 247”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. These “special figure 246” and “special figure 247” are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  “Special figure 248” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure 248” is 2R compared to “Special Figure 246” which is 15R. "Special figure 249" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden shortening, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special figure 249” is 2R, compared with “Special figure 247” which is 15R.

  “Special figure 250” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure 251" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing 250” and “special drawing 251” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time reduction state.

  “Special figure 252” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure 253” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure 252” and “Special Figure 253” are in the same state as “Special Figure 251”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. “252”, “Special Figure 253”, and “Special Figure 251” are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, “Special Figure 254” is the first off symbol and “Special Figure J” is the second off symbol, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246, symbols other than “Special Figure 246” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 250 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure 247” is notified, a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”). 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure 246” is notified, a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3” or “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure 250”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure 251” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure 252”, “Special Figure 253” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “Sudden Probability” in “Special Figure 248” or the 2R jackpot called “Short Time Reduction” in “Special Figure 249”, “Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special figure 254” and the second deviation of “Special figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 248 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 250 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map 246” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol 247” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “general figure 246” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game being lost, the “normal figure 247” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 250 (c), a white portion in the drawing indicates a segment location where the light is extinguished, and a black portion indicates a location where the segment is illuminated.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 251 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. Here, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9v). If it is less than the threshold voltage, it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 249 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random number values is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 2 ms). Start with a predetermined period.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (for example, the main value is not detected) so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (for example, 32.8 ms) and no WDT interruption occurs. Restart once every approximately 2ms, which is the control unit timer interrupt period.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. Here, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 249, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, the previous detection signal is present, and the current detection signal is present) is stored. In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the normal figure starting port 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. Here, the counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is acquired from the register for use, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. Only the special figure 1 winning random number value, or both the special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value correspond to the starting information of the special figure 1. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value. Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. Only the special figure 2 winning random value, or both the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value correspond to the starting information of the special figure 2.

  Further, when the winning determination process (step S217) is completed, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S217) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of holdings increases, the increment of the random number value in the special figure 1 in the random number value storage area of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the special value in the random value storage area in the special figure 2 is read. Figure 2 Prefetch the increase in the winning random value. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 winning random value or the special figure 2 winning random value ends, this time, the pre-reading special figure 1 winning random value or the special figure 2 winning random value becomes any random number range in the success / failure determination table. To determine whether it belongs to. That is, with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of a special figure low probability state, if the pre-read special figure 1 winning random number value or the special figure winning random number value is within a predetermined numerical range, a pass / fail judgment is made. The result is pre-determined as “big hit”, and otherwise, the pre-determined result is pre-determined as “lost”. In the special figure-related processing (steps S229 and S231) described later, whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is determined again using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The result is only a result of prior determination.

  Next, the special figure 1 random value in the random value storage area of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 or the special figure 2 random value in the random value storage area of the special figure 2 is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure predetermination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure 246" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 250 (a) is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 250 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Note that the determination result of the special figure here is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related processing (step S229, step S231) described later. Note that the special figure predetermination result may be obtained only when the success / failure predetermination result is “big hit”.

  The pre-reading of the start information described above and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information are executed before the determination of whether or not the special figure related process (step S229, step S231) described later is performed (main lottery) is performed. It is.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process here, when the big hit game is being played, and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time reduction flag is in the on state), the prefetching of the start information in FIG. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 has not been performed corresponds to the pre-read information temporary storage unit. Store in the reserved area. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). Pre-determination based on the started information is not performed, and the pre-determination result is not notified. By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification may not be performed. Further, the pre-reading and the preliminary determination are performed, but the preliminary determination result is notified. There may be no aspect.

  Here, the preliminary determination is performed by the main control unit 300, but may be performed by the first sub control unit 400. For example, the main control unit 300 may perform the pre-judgment determination, the first sub-control unit 400 may perform the special figure pre-determination result, and the first sub-control unit 400 may perform the pre-judgment determination. Good.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general map 246 shown in FIG. 250 (c)) or the off symbol (general symbol 247 shown in FIG. 250 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure 246 and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 250 (a) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure 247, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure 248, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure 249, the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure 250, the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure Sure When the fluctuation flag is off and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure 251; when the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure 252; when the second small hitting flag is on, the special figure 253; The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on so that the special figure 254 is displayed when the first off flag is on and the special figure 254 is on when the second off flag is on.・ Light-off drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (Special Fig. 246), a 15R jackpot symbol (Special Fig. 247), a sudden probability variation symbol (Special Fig. 248), and a sudden time-short symbol (Special Fig.). 249), hidden probability change symbol (special diagram 250), sudden normal symbol (special diagram 251), first small hit symbol (special symbol 252), second small hit symbol (special symbol 253), first off-set symbol (special symbol) 254) and the first off-set symbol (special symbol J) are confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In this example, a special figure variable game (for example, special figure 2 variable game) with a high advantage is performed in preference to a special figure variable game (for example, special figure 1 variable game) with a low advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process at step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the random value storage area of the special figure 2). Special figure 2 winning random value and set of special figure 2 random value), and based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc. It is determined (whether or not) that a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is made using the winning / decision determination table stored in the ROM 306. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 takes out the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and then deletes the earliest special figure 2 start information from the random number value storage area of the special figure 2. Then, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 holding number in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information taken out from the random value storage area of the special figure 2 is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may make it perform. After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (for example, error command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, door open command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  Further, when a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the door opening command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The same applies to a case where a door opening command is directly transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 without going through the payout control unit 600. When the main control unit 300 directly receives the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609, the main control unit 300 transmits a door opening command to the first sub control unit 400 when the detection signal is transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting for outputting this control command is made. And return to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 253 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, after performing a movable body control process, it returns to step S703. In this movable body control process, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224 is received from the first sub-control unit 400, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed to control the operation of the effect movable body 224.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 254 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, a game board that can be mounted on the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 246 instead of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 248 will be described. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 255 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 to be described from the front. Hereinafter, the difference from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 248 will be mainly described, and description of common items will be omitted.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 255 is a so-called right-handed machine. A generally known right-handed game board can be divided into right-handed and left-handed by changing the strength of launching a game ball by the player's operation. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255, the general figure starting port 228 (gate) and the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) are arranged in the right region, and the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are the central region. Is arranged. The second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 255 is of an attacker type, and the door member 2325 shown in FIG. It becomes a ball easy state (open state). The game area 124 rolls the first area (the left area in the game area) that is a route to enter the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232 by arranging game nails or the like. The game ball to be played is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the normal start port 228 (gate) and the variable prize opening 234 (attacker), and vice versa. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right area in the game area) provided with H.234 (attacker) is difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232. It is configured to be possible. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  In addition, a special figure display device 213 serving as both the first special figure display device and the second special figure display device is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 200 shown in FIG. This special figure display device 213 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when a predetermined set of LEDs among the plurality of LEDs is blinking, the special figure display is changing, and another LED is in a different state. When the group is blinking, the special figure 2 is changing, and the result of determining whether or not the special figure is appropriate is displayed by various lighting patterns.

  In addition, a game board 200 shown in FIG. 255 has a decorative case display device 208 that is a liquid crystal display device, a first movable body 260 that is also a liquid crystal display device, a chance and display, in a center case 250 indicated by a thick line in the drawing. The second movable body 270 and the POV display 280 as POV (Persistence Of Vision) means are directly or indirectly attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 includes a panel 208p that is a display screen, and a bezel 208q that is a frame member that supports the panel 208p. The bezel 208q is inevitably required to have a certain width along the edge of the panel 208p for the purpose of supporting the panel 208p. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of an image display panel. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255, four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include a hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and a hold icon shown in FIG. 2, which are displayed separately. The area where the hold icon is displayed is determined in advance and becomes the hold icon display area 208f. However, the place of the hold icon display area 208f may change depending on the production mode and the game state (probability change state or the like). In the example shown in FIG. 255, the hold icon shown on the left side becomes the hold icon with the older winning timing, and hereinafter, the oldest hold icon is the first hold icon h1, and the second old hold icon is the second hold icon. h2, the third oldest hold icon is called the third hold icon h3, and the newest hold icon is called the fourth hold icon h4. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. In FIG. 255, the first hold icon h1 and the fourth hold icon h4 are the white circle display modes that are the default display modes, and the second hold icon h2 and the third hold icon h3 are the display modes of the prefetch notice. . That is, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is a display mode in which the reliability or expectation level of the jackpot is relatively high, and the display mode of the third hold icon h3 is the jackpot reliability. This is a display mode of a black circle having a relatively low degree or expectation. The reliability or expectation level of jackpot here refers to the reliability or expectation level of whether or not a big hit is made in the symbol variation display started by digesting the hold indicated by the hold icon. In addition, an animation related to the hold icon may be performed. For example, an increase animation executed when a hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold icon changes to another display position (for example, left Moving animation executed when moving to (next position), change animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the prefetch result, etc., when the hold icon is digested and the hold icon is deleted An erase animation to be executed, a save animation to be executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the reservation of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority change machine may be performed. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  In addition, a changing icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first hold icon h1 in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The area where the changing icon h0 is displayed is also determined in advance and becomes the changing icon display area 208e. However, the location of the changing icon display area 208e may change depending on the effect mode and the game state (probability change state or the like). The changing icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a changing icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure changing game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon h1 with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the changing icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a changing icon, or the changing icon is moved. Then it may be expressed. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the changing icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a changing icon. The changing icon h0 is displayed in a display size (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icons h1 to h4. This may facilitate identification of the changing icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h4, but they may be the same size. Further, the changing icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icons h1 to h4, or may have a completely unrelated display mode. The changing icon h0 can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (displaying the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the changing icon h0 can be regarded as an icon related to holding, and can be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure changing game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  The first movable body 260 also includes a panel 260p which is a display screen and a bezel 260b having a certain width. The panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is smaller than the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. From this size relationship, the decorative design display device 208 becomes the main liquid crystal unit, and the first movable body 260 becomes the sub liquid crystal. Each unit is controlled by the sub-control unit side (for example, the first sub-control unit 400). The first movable body 260 is provided on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 and on the back side of the foremost surface 251 of the center case 250, and is shown in FIG. One movable body 260 overlaps the lower left portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the panel 208p. The position of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255 is the initial position. The first movable body 260 can be lowered to a retracted position (corresponding to an example of a moving position) that is below the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 and does not overlap the panel 208p. The first movable body 260 is visible to the player even in this retracted position. The first movable body 260 can be moved up and down between an initial position and a retracted position. A mechanism for raising and lowering the first movable body 260 will be described later. Note that the first movable body 260 in the retracted position may be hidden by the forefront 251 of the center case 250 from the front view.

  The center case 250 is provided with a large window 252, and the panel 208 p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is located in the window 252. However, the lower right part of the panel 208 p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the forefront 251 of the center case 250. Further, the left corner portion of the bezel 260 b of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255 is also hidden by the forefront surface 251 of the center case 250. Note that a space 253 between the foremost surface 251 of the center case 250 and the edge of the window portion 252 is transparent.

  The second movable body 270 is also provided on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 and on the back side of the frontmost surface 251 of the center case 250. The second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255 is partially hidden by the forefront 251 of the center case 250, and the position of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255 is the initial position. The second movable body 270 in the initial position has a lower edge 271 that coincides with an upper edge of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second movable body 270 can be lowered to a maximum lowered position (corresponding to an example of a moving position) that overlaps a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the second movable body 270 moves up and down by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion between the initial position and the maximum lowered position. LEDs are embedded in the second movable body 270, and these LEDs emit light or blink during operation. When the second movable body 270 stops at the maximum lowered position, for example, the LED blinks violently. Note that the initial position of the second movable body 270 may be higher than the initial position of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 255. In such a case, the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. Is located between the initial position and the maximum lowered position.

  Note that the first movable body 260 may not be a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured as the second movable body 270. Conversely, the second movable body 270 may be a liquid crystal display device, and both the first movable body 260 and the second movable body 270 may be liquid crystal display devices.

  The POV display 280 is also referred to as a versatile lighter. The POV display 280 is also on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is provided behind the frontmost surface 251 of the center case 250. It has been. Further, the POV display 280 is provided on the back side of the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255 is completely hidden by the second movable body 270 in the initial position. The position of the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 255 becomes the initial position of the POV display 280 (a position corresponding to an example of the first position). Note that the position where the entire front surface 251 of the center case 250 is hidden may be set as the initial position. The POV display 280 moves from this initial position to a position on the front side of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the POV display 280 can move to a position overlapping with a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display on the panel 208p is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the POV display 280 shown in FIG. FIG. 4A is an external perspective view of the POV display 280 as viewed from the front side (player side), and FIG. 4B is a side view of the POV display 280.

  The POV display 280 includes a lift arm 281 and an LED array 282 that is rotatably attached to the tip of the lift arm 281. The elevating arm 281 performs an elevating operation by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256 (a), LEDs 2821 are arranged in a horizontal row, and the posture of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256 (a) is the initial posture. A motor is built in the tip portion 2811 of the lifting arm 281, and the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256 (a) is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the left-right direction. The LED array 282 rotates around the central portion as the motor rotates. On the side of the sub-control unit (the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500), for each of the plurality of LEDs 2821 arranged in the rotating LED array 282, one lighting control is performed for each type of effect data. Based on data. By doing so, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs 2821 changes during rotation of the LED array 282, and an afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED 2821 and a pattern is represented.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for moving the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 255, including the first movable body 260 in the initial position described with reference to FIG. 255. (A) is the figure seen from the front side (player side), The figure (b) is the perspective view seen from the back side. FIG. 3C is a perspective view of the first movable body 260 in the retracted position as seen from the back side.

  FIG. 257 shows a screw shaft driving motor 2671, a screw shaft 2672, a guide shaft 2673, an upper base 2674, a lower base 2675, and a drive unit 268.

  The screw shaft driving motor 2671 is fixed to the center case 250 shown in FIG. 255, and this screw shaft driving motor 2671 is a motor for rotating the screw shaft 2672 extending in the vertical direction.

  The drive unit 268 is provided with a screw shaft nut (not shown) in the vertical direction, and the screw shaft 2672 is screwed into the screw shaft nut to penetrate the drive unit 268 in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 2673 also penetrates the drive unit 268 in the vertical direction.

  The upper base 2673 is fixed to a transparent plate provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper base 2673 itself is disposed at a position that is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 2674 is provided with a sliding bearing for the screw shaft 2672, and the screw shaft 2672 is rotatably passed through the sliding bearing. Further, an upper end of a guide shaft 2673 extending in the vertical direction along with the screw shaft 2672 is fixed to the upper base 2673. Further, the upper base 2673 is provided with a drive unit upper receiving portion 2673a. The drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a protrudes downward, and the upper surface 268a of the drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 257 (c) abuts on the drive unit upper receiving portion 2673a (see FIG. 257 (b)), and the first movable unit The body 260 stops at the initial position.

  The lower base 2675 is fixed to the game board 200. The lower base 2675 is also provided with a screw bearing for a screw shaft, and a screw shaft 2672 is rotatably passed through the screw bearing. Further, the lower end of the guide shaft 2673 is fixed to the lower base 2675. Further, the lower base 2675 is provided with a drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a. The drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a protrudes upward, and the lower surface 268b of the drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 257 (b) abuts on the drive unit lower receiving portion 2675a (see FIG. 257 (c)), and the first movable The body 260 stops at the retracted position. The upper limit of the movement range of the first movable body 260 is a position (initial position) where the upper surface 268a of the drive unit 268 abuts the drive unit upper receiving portion 2674a, and the lower limit is the lower surface 268b of the drive unit 268. It becomes a position (retracted position) in contact with the lower receiving portion 2675a.

  Furthermore, the first movable body 260 can also rotate.

  FIG. 257 (d) is a perspective view showing the state in which the first movable body 260 is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side (player side).

  Although not shown, the drive unit 268 incorporates a rotation drive motor, a driven gear, a slip ring, a movement control means, and the like. The movement control means is composed of one or more of a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like, for example.

  The first movable body 260 can be rotated up to 180 degrees in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front side (player side) by the rotation driving motor. It is impossible to rotate beyond 180 degrees, and rotation in the counterclockwise direction is also impossible.

  When the first movable body 260 is in the horizontal posture shown in FIG. 257 (c), the initial movable posture is returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 258 is a view showing a modified example of the drive unit shown in FIG. 257, and is a view for explaining a so-called slip ring structure.

  258 (a) to (d) show perspective views of the drive unit when the front side (player side) is turned upward. In the example shown in FIG. 257, the rotational drive motor is built in the drive unit 268, but in this modification, it is built in the back side of the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. The drive unit 268 shown in FIG. 258 includes a fixed case body 261 that is arranged so as not to rotate, and a rotary case body 262 that is arranged so as to be rotatable within the fixed case body 261. The fixed case body 261 is composed of a front case body 261f and a rear case body 261r. The fixed side case body 261 is provided with a fixed side connector 261c. In addition, a rotation shaft fixing hole 262h is provided at the center of the surface on the front side (player side) of the rotation-side case body 262, that is, the surface on the first movable body 260 side, and on the outside thereof A rotation-side connector 262c is disposed. A rotation shaft that is rotated by a rotation driving motor built in the first movable body 260 is fixed to the rotation shaft fixing hole 262h, and the rotation-side case body 262 rotates together with the first movable body 260. .

  In this modification, the first movable body 260 can rotate in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, for example, to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees. Or there is no restriction on the rotation angle.

  The state shown in FIG. 258 (a) is a diagram showing the state of the drive unit 26 when the first movable body 260 is in an initial posture in which the first movable body 260 is horizontally long, and FIG. Is a diagram showing the state of the drive unit 26 when it is rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the initial posture. FIG. 8C is a diagram in which the first movable body 260 is further rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction ( It is a figure which shows the state of the drive unit 26 when it rotates 180 degree | times from an initial attitude | position, The same figure (d) is a 90 degree rotation (270 degree | times from an initial attitude | position) in which the 1st movable body 260 rotates clockwise. It is a figure which shows the state of the drive unit 26 when it rotates. From these figures, it can be seen that the rotation-side case body 262 is rotating.

  FIG. 258 (e) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the rear case body 261r constituting the fixed side case body 261, and FIG. 258 (f) shows the rotation with the front case body 261f constituting the fixed side case body 261. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the side case body 262. FIG. In other words, the edge R of the rear case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e) and the inner side surface F of the front case body 261f shown in FIG. It becomes the drive unit 26 shown to a). Note that a fixed connector 261c is placed on the edge R of the rear case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e). When the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined, the fixed connector 261c is combined. Is sandwiched by a notch groove 261g provided in the front case body 261f.

  The rear case body 261r shown in FIG. 258 (e) is provided with a rotation shaft insertion hole 261h at the center. A fixed side substrate 261b connected to the fixed side connector 261c is disposed outside the rotation shaft insertion hole 261h, and six J-shaped conductive plates 2611 to 2616 are provided on the fixed side substrate 261b. Has been placed. That is, on the right side, three relatively short conductive plates 2611 to 2613 are arranged in the same direction (the direction in which the letter J is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise). Hereinafter, among these three short conductive plates 2611 to 2613, the conductive plate shown at the bottom in FIG. The uppermost conductive plate may be referred to as a third conductive plate 2613. Further, on the left side, three relatively long conductive plates 2614 to 2616 are arranged in the same direction (direction in which the letter J is rotated 90 degrees clockwise). Hereinafter, among these three long conductive plates 2614 to 2616, the uppermost conductive plate shown in FIG. 258 (e) is referred to as a fourth conductive plate 2614, and the lower conductive plate is the fifth conductive plate 2615. The lowermost conductive plate may be referred to as a sixth conductive plate 2616. A fastener 261m, which is a protrusion of an anti-detachment insulator, is provided at an intermediate portion of the R portion of each of the conductive plates 2611 to 2616. A certain fastener 261e is provided.

  The rotation-side case body 262 shown in FIG. 258 (f) is when viewed from the opposite side (back side) to the rotation-side case body 262 shown in FIG. A rotation shaft fixing hole 262h is shown at the center, and an edge 262e of the rotation side case body 262 is shown at the outermost periphery. As is apparent from FIG. 258 (f), a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the rotating case body 262 and the inner peripheral surface of the front case body 261f. In addition, a rotation side substrate 262b is arranged inside the edge 262e of the rotation side case body 262, and six concentric wirings around the rotation shaft fixing hole 262h are arranged on the rotation side substrate 262b. Patterns 2621 to 2626 are formed. Hereinafter, the outermost wiring pattern is referred to as a first wiring pattern 2621, the inner wiring pattern is referred to as a second wiring pattern 2622, and the number increases toward the inner side, and the innermost wiring pattern is referred to as a sixth wiring pattern. Sometimes referred to as a pattern 2626. In addition, the dotted line shown in FIG. 258 (f) represents the rotation side connector 262c (see FIG. 5 (a), etc.) provided on the surface which becomes the front side (player side). 262b is connected to the rotation side connector 262c.

  FIG. 258 (g) is an AA cross-sectional view of FIG. As shown in FIG. 258 (g), before the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined, the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are separated from each other and no electrical contact is established. .

  FIG. 258 (g) is a cross-sectional view showing a state after the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined. The first conductive plate 2611 is elastically deformed and always contacts the first wiring pattern 2621. In addition, both the 2611 and 2621 can be kept in electrical contact with each other regardless of whether they are rotating or stopped.

  Here, the combination of the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 has been described as an example, but the same applies to other combinations such as the second conductive plate 2612 and the second wiring pattern 2621.

  The first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are used for power supply used in a circuit (for example, a circuit of the first movable body 260) provided on the rotation side, and the second conductive plate 2612 and the second wiring pattern 2621 are used. The same applies to the wiring pattern 2622. The third conductive plate 2613 and the third wiring pattern 2623 are used to connect the GND of the circuit on the rotation side and the GND of the circuit on the fixed side (for example, the circuit on the game board 200 side). The fourth wiring pattern 2624 is the same. The fifth conductive plate 2615 and the fifth wiring pattern 2625 are used for transmission of various signals transmitted from the fixed side circuit to the rotation side circuit, and the sixth conductive plate 2616 and the sixth wiring pattern 2626 are the same. is there.

  The fixed side that is the game board 200 side and the rotation side that is the first movable body 260 side are the fixed side connector 261c-fixed side substrate 261b-conductive plates 2611 to 2616-wiring patterns 2621 to 2626-rotation side substrate 262b- It is electrically connected through the path of the rotation-side connector 262c, and can supply power and transmit / receive signals whether it is rotating or stopped.

  Then, the further modification of a drive unit is demonstrated.

  FIG. 259 is a diagram showing a modification of the drive unit shown in FIG. In this modification, the power supply is exchanged by a so-called slip ring structure, and the signal is transmitted by optical communication. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals as those used so far are used for the components having the same names as the names of the components of the drive unit described with reference to FIG. 258, and differences will be mainly described.

  FIG. 259 (a) shows a perspective view of the drive unit when the front side (player side) is directed upward. As apparent from FIG. 259 (a), in this modification, the rotation shaft fixing hole 262h provided at the center of the rotation side case body 262 is eliminated, and the three rotation body connection shafts 263 are replaced with the rotation side case. It is fixed to the body 262. These three rotating body connecting shafts 263 are arranged at the vertices of an equilateral triangle with the center of the rotating side case body 262 as the center of gravity. The rotational force generated on the movable body 260 side is transmitted to the rotation-side case body 262.

  FIG. 259 (b) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the rear case body 261r in this modification, and FIG. Ƒ (f) shows the internal structure of the front case body 261f and the rotation side case body 262 in this modification. FIG. In this modification, instead of the rotation shaft insertion hole 261h provided at the center of the rear case body 261r, a fixed data transmission / reception unit 261t by optical communication is provided. In addition, among the relatively long three conductive plates 2614 to 2616, the fourth conductive plate 2614 which is the uppermost conductive plate is left, and the remaining two conductive plates (the fifth conductive plate 2615, the sixth conductive plate 2616). ) Is lost. In this modification, a rotation-side data transmission / reception unit 262t by optical communication is provided at the center of the rear side surface of the rotation-side case body 262 instead of the rotation shaft fixing hole 262h. Further, the sixth wiring pattern 2626 that is the innermost wiring pattern and the fifth wiring pattern 2625 on the outer side thereof are also eliminated in accordance with the conductive plate.

  FIG. 259 (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 25 (b). Even in this modification, the first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring are combined before the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined. It is separated from the pattern 2621 and no electrical contact is established.

  FIG. 259 (e) is a cross-sectional view showing a state after the rear case body 261r and the front case body 261f are combined. In this modification as well, the first conductive plate 2611 is elastically deformed and the first wiring pattern 2621 is obtained. The two 2611 and 2621 can be kept in electrical contact with each other regardless of whether they are rotating or stopped.

  The first conductive plate 2611 and the first wiring pattern 2621 are used for power supply used in a circuit (for example, a circuit of the first movable body 260) provided on the rotation side, and the second conductive plate 2612 and the second wiring pattern 2621 are used. The same applies to the wiring pattern 2622. The third conductive plate 2613 and the third wiring pattern 2623 are used to connect the GND of the circuit on the rotation side and the GND of the circuit on the fixed side (for example, the circuit on the game board 200 side). The fourth wiring pattern 2624 is the same.

  The data communication transmitted from the fixed-side data transmission / reception unit 261t shown in FIG. 259 (b) and received by the rotation-side data transmission / reception unit 262t shown in FIG. 259 (c) is optical communication (optical wireless communication). The optical communication (optical wireless communication) here is communication using laser light, but may be communication using LED light. The data communication here is communication of various signals (for example, image data or RGB information of each dot). In the case where an image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) and a microcomputer for controlling the image control means are mounted on the rotation side (first movable body 260 side), the fixed side sub-control means ( For example, from the first sub-control unit 400 or the effect control means), an effect command (command specifying the effect, the progress of the effect, the still image, the moving image, the progress of the image display scenario, etc.) for the microcomputer You may send as. Further, on the rotation side, the microcomputer for controlling the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) is not mounted, and when the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) is mounted, the fixed side Image commands (commands for designating the progress of still images, moving images, image display scenarios, etc.) from the microcomputer for controlling the image control means provided to the image control means provided on the rotation side, It may be transmitted as a signal. Further, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) and the microcomputer are not mounted on the rotation side, but they are mounted on the fixed side, and the image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.) are on the rotation side. In this case, the image data from the image control means provided on the fixed side to the image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.) on the rotation side, as the various signals, For example, it may be transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second.

  Note that both the fixed-side data transmission / reception unit 261t and the rotation-side data transmission / reception unit 262t may be capable of data transmission / reception. Further, radio wave communication may be used instead of optical communication.

  Further, when both the fixed-side data transmission / reception unit 261t and the rotation-side data transmission / reception unit 262t are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the fixed-side data transmission / reception unit 261t to the rotation-side data transmission / reception unit 262t is as described above. However, from the rotation-side data transmission / reception unit 262t to the fixed-side data transmission / reception unit 261t, control means provided in the rotation-side circuit (the image control means, the microcomputer, the image drive means (liquid crystal drive means), etc. Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (here, the first movable body 260) (for example, when a sensor provided on the rotating side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side) An output detection signal or an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotation side may be transmitted.

  FIG. 259 (f) is a diagram showing an example in which the number of rotating body connecting shafts 263 shown in FIG. 259 (a) is one. In FIG. 259 (f), one rotating body connecting shaft 263 is fixed at the center of the rotating side case body 262, and the rotating side data transmitting / receiving unit 262t shown in FIG. 259 (c) is provided on the back side. It has been.

  FIG. 259 (g) is a diagram showing an example in which the number of the rotating body connecting shafts 263 shown in FIG. 259 (a) is two. In FIG. 259 (g), each of the two rotating body connecting shafts 263 is fixed at a position facing each other by 180 degrees that is equidistant from the center of the rotating side case body 262.

  Subsequently, a point that is one of the features of the present invention will be described.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the pachinko machine provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 255 in stages. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (z), and (z) is followed by (b) to (g). FIG. 260 shows a decorative symbol display device 208 that becomes a main liquid crystal unit, a first movable body 260 that becomes a sub liquid crystal unit, a second movable body 270 that displays a chance, and a POV display 280. . The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 260 is that an image is displayed on the POV display 280 as a pre-reading notice, and a confrontation animation is performed on the POV display 280 in the design change subject to the pre-reading notice. Win and win. It becomes something like that. This will be described in detail below.

  In FIG. 260 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position, and part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is not visible to the player. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols lost (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed on the sky background image. In addition, four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and this state is a state in which four holds of the special figure 2 are stored. Note that this state may be a state in which four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored. Of the four hold icons, only the second hold icon h2 is not a default display mode but a display mode of a black rhombus prefetch notice. In the display mode of the black rhombus pre-reading notice, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that of the black circle pre-reading notice display in the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 255, and the “heat” in the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. The display mode is lower than the display mode of the pre-reading notice marked “ In the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 260 (a), only the sea background image is displayed.

  In FIG. 260 (b), one hold is digested, and the special figure display device 213 shown in FIG. 255 starts the special figure variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 responds to the start of the special figure variation display. Then, the variation display of the decorative design is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (b), the first hold icon h1 moved to the changing icon display area is displayed as the changing icon h0, and the remaining hold icons are moved one by one to the left. . As a result, the first hold icon h1 is in a display form of a black diamond-shaped prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 260 (c), the first movable body 260 has moved to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a reach state. Also, the POV display 280 starts preparing for operation. The preparation of the operation here means that the lifting arm 281 shown in FIG. 256 meshes with the pinion gear of the rack and pinion mechanism that moves up and down, and further, the lifting arm 281 starts to descend. Preparation, or the sub-control unit (the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500) draws whether or not to operate the POV display 280, or the effect data for controlling the POV display 280. It may be a preparation on a program for performing a selection lottery or reading the effect data. In addition, the preparation for the operation may be started in response to the first movable body 260 starting the operation of moving to the retracted position, or in response to the first movable body 260 reaching the retracted position. It may be started, or may be started in response to the development to the reach state by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 260 (d), the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state also disappears. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (d), the changing icon h0 and the three pending icons are displayed on the patternless background. The background image also disappears in the first movable body 260 that has moved to the retracted position, and the first movable body 260 displays a combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state. It can be seen that the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state seems to be retracted from the decorative symbol display device 208 serving as the main liquid crystal unit to the first movable body 260 serving as the sub liquid crystal unit. Note that the POV display 280 is also preparing for operation at the timing of FIG. 260 (d).

  In FIG. 260 (e), the POV display 280 appears from the back side of the second movable body 270. That is, the LED array 282 maintaining the initial horizontal posture together with the lifting arm 281 is lowered to the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the plurality of LEDs arranged in the horizontal row in the LED array 282 are lit, but may be blinking or may be turned off. When the LED is turned on or blinking, it is an effect that appeals the appearance of the LED array 282. On the other hand, when the LED is turned off, the appearance of the LED array 282 is still hidden.

  In FIG. 260 (f), the lowering of the POV display 280 continues, and in FIG. The operation start position here is the center position of the panel 208p in the decorative symbol display device 208. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 282 may start to light up or blink when the LED array 282 reaches the operation start position, or may continue to light up or blink from the time of appearance. However, even if the operation start position is reached, it may remain off.

  In FIG. 260 (h), the LED array 282 starts to rotate counterclockwise at the operation start position, and in FIG. 260 (i), the LED array 282 is in the process of accelerating the rotation. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 282 may start lighting or flashing when the LED array 282 starts rotating, or may start lighting or flashing after reaching a certain rotational speed. Good. Further, the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps all or part of the changing icon h0 and the hold icon. That is, as shown in FIG. 260 (i), the changing icon h0 entirely overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282, and a part of the first hold icon h1 also overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282. Yes. In addition, it does not overlap with the hold icons after the second hold icon h2.

  In FIG. 260 (j), the LED array 282 has finished accelerating rotation and has shifted to constant speed rotation. When the LED array 282 shifts to constant speed rotation, it can display a pattern due to the afterimage effect, but the pattern is not yet displayed at the timing of FIG. 260 (j). It is also possible to display an afterimage effect pattern at the same time as reaching the constant speed rotation, or to display an afterimage effect pattern before reaching the constant speed rotation and displaying the pattern before reaching the constant speed rotation. May be.

  On the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 (k), the display of the design k of the enemy character is started. At this timing, the first movable body 260 may operate or the second movable body 270 may operate.

  In FIG. 260 (l), the stop symbol (lighting pattern) of the loss is displayed on the special symbol display device 213 shown in FIG. 255, and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is displayed according to the display of the special symbol stop symbol. In addition, a combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 3” − “decoration 2” − “decoration 3”) is displayed.

  In FIG. 260 (m), the hold indicated by the first hold icon h1 that has been the display form of the black rhombus prefetching notice is digested, and the special figure display device 213 shown in FIG. In response to the start of the variation display of the special figure, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. That is, the symbol variation display that was the subject of the pre-reading notice is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (m), although it is difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282, the first hold icon h1, which has been the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the black rhombus so far, is the notice of the black rhombus. The mode change icon h0 is displayed, and the remaining hold icons are moved one by one to the left. That is, the special display change display (decoration display change display) started in FIG. 260 (m) has been executed by changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display form of the pre-reading notice so far. It is a variable display of the object. The black rhombus notice mode, which is the display mode of the changing icon h0 here, is a display mode in which a big hit is announced in the current symbol variation display started here. Further, in this example, the rotation area s of the LED array 282, that is, the display on the POV display 280 (the display of the design k of the enemy character) is continued across the symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 260 (n), the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. In FIG. 260 (o), the second movable body 270 that has been in the initial position so far is displayed. It descends to the maximum lowered position, and overlaps with a part of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and also overlaps with the rotating LED array 282. Only a part can be seen. When the second movable body 270 is lowered to the maximum lowered position, it immediately returns to the initial position, and the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 260 (p) has returned to the initial position. As a result, the display of the pattern k of the enemy character that is displayed on the POV display 280 can be visually recognized again.

  260 (q), the LED array 282 that has been rotated at the operation start position is further lowered, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the lower end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 260 (q), all the changing icons h0 and the held icons are erased in a state where all the changing icons h0 and the held icons overlap with the rotation region s of the LED array 282. That is, when the LED array 282 starts moving from the operation start position (first operation position) toward the second operation position different from the initial position, all the changing icons h0 and the hold icons are erased. . However, only the changing icon h0 may be deleted, only the hold icon may be deleted, or neither the changing icon h0 nor the hold icon may be deleted. Further, the rotation region s of the LED array 282 overlaps with a part of the first movable body 260 including the bezel 260b.

  The movement of the POV display 280 (the LED array 282 rotating at a constant speed) displaying the design k of the enemy character is always performed when the POV display 280 displays the design, or the POV display 280 is moved. May be performed whenever the image is rotating at a constant speed without displaying a pattern, or may be performed only when the POV display 280 displays a predetermined pattern. However, it may or may not be performed according to the selection lottery result regarding the effect on the sub-control unit side (the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500).

  FIG. 261 (a) is an enlarged view of FIG. 260 (q), and FIG. 261 (b) is a view showing the display area by hatching.

  The rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps with the lower end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative design display device 208 and a part including the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260, so that the POV display 280 is used. Although the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 appear to be connected, the three parties (280, 208p, 260p) have different arrangements in the front-rear direction (depth direction). It is integrated (see the display area shown by hatching in FIG. 261 (b)), and it seems that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is enlarged, and the display area of the POV display 280 seems to be enlarged. It seems that the display area of the first movable body 260 is enlarged. As described above, the fact that the display is performed even in a place where the display is not originally performed, such as the bezels 208q and 260b, can give the player a great visual effect.

  Here, since the upper edge 260bu of the bezel 260b of the first movable body 260 is coincident with the lower edge 208pd of the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208, the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208 and the first edge The panel 260 p of the movable body 260 is separated by the bezel 260 b of the first movable body 260, but the two 208 p and 260 p are connected by the rotation region s of the LED array 282. Further, even if the first movable body 260 is slightly below, the two 208p and 260p are connected by the rotation region s of the LED array 282, and become integrated.

  In addition, the bangs k1 of the design k of the character of the enemy character is displayed on the panel p of the decorative design display device 208, and the foot k2 is displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. That is, the pattern k of the enemy character is displayed across the POV display 280, the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260. This also increases the sense of unity of the display areas of the three parties (280, 208p, 260p). Moreover, when viewed in the front-rear direction (depth direction), the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is on the farthest side, the POV display 280 is on the foremost side, and the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 is between them. There is also a distance in the depth direction between these three members (208p, 280, 260p), so that the bangs portion k1 can be seen on the back side and the foot portion k2 can be seen on the back side. A sense of depth that cannot be compared with a picture display can be provided.

  In the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 (p) (the rotation area s of the LED array 282), the display position (the center position of the rotation area s) of the character k of the enemy character is shown, and the POV shown in FIG. It is different from the display position of the character k of the enemy character (position close to the left end of the rotation region s) on the display 280 (the rotation region s of the LED array 282). Looks like it has moved. That is, the moving display of the pattern is performed.

  In FIG. 260 (r), the horizontal movement is started after the LED array 282 rises diagonally to the left. The rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (r) overlaps the left end portion of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the POV display 280, since the display of the design k of the enemy character is started in FIG. 260 (k), the display is continued. In FIG. 260 (r), the design k is still displayed. The LED array 282 moves. In addition, in the part on the rear side of the rotating LED array 282 of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (r), the display of the pattern t of the character of the main character starts, but rotates. The LED array 282 overlaps and is difficult to see.

  In FIG. 260 (s), as the LED array 282 moves toward the right, a part of the display of the pattern t of the main character's character displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208 is starting to be visible. . That is, in this FIG. 260 (s), the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps a part of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  In FIG. 260 (t), the LED array 282 is further moved toward the right, so that the display of the character t of the main character's character appears on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. The pattern t of the Tono-sama character corresponds to an example of a first pattern, and the display of the pattern t corresponds to an example of a first effect display. It should be noted that only a part of the pattern t of the Tonosama character may correspond to an example of the first pattern. Alternatively, on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208, in addition to the design t of the Tono-sama character, another design (for example, a horse design or a character design such as a game) may be displayed. It is good also as an example of the 1st production | presentation display including "a picture of". The rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (t) overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the POV display 280 is moved until it exceeds the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the region of the panel 208p), and overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q, so that the POV display 280 and the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 are POV. The display 280 appears to be connected, and both (280, 208p) are integrated, although there is a difference in arrangement in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is expanded to the right. Looks like.

  In FIG. 260 (u), the LED array 282 further moves downward, and the rotation region s of the LED array 282 overlaps the lower end portion as well as the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. . As a result, the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 appears to expand to the lower side in addition to the right side. From FIG. 260 (r) to FIG. (U), the display position of the pattern k of the character of the enemy character on the moving POV display 280 (the rotation area s of the LED array 282) is the center position of the rotation area s. Match. However, since the POV display 280 (the rotation region s of the LED array 282) itself is moving, it seems that the pattern k is also moving. That is, the moving display of the pattern is performed.

  In FIG. 260 (v), the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves toward the right side. Until now, a part of the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character displayed only on the panel 208p (here, the toe of the right foot, etc.) is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. become. That is, the display of the pattern t of the Tonosama character is displayed across both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280. As described above, the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps the right end and the lower end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 expands to the lower side in addition to the right side. Therefore, although the display of the pattern t of the Tono-like character displayed across both (208, 280) looks integral, there is a front-rear direction between the two (208, 280) ( Since there is a difference in arrangement (distance) in the depth direction), it is possible to give a sense of depth to the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character as compared to the case of a simple three-dimensional pattern display. That is, since the POV display 280 is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, it seems that the character of Tono-sama is moving diagonally right forward, and the player gradually moves the character of Tono-sama. I feel like I ’m approaching.

  In FIG. 260 (w), a confrontation animation of the Tono-sama character and the enemy character is displayed. Here, the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is not completely moved to the POV display 280, and the toe of the left foot is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 (w), the enemy character's spear character has fallen, and the pattern t of the Tono-sama character displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280 has won. It is displayed. Further, on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, in accordance with the victory of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character, a combination of jackpot decoration patterns (here "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") Shake display (temporary stop display) is started.

  In FIG. 260 (x), the display of the design t of the Tono-sama character has completely moved to the POV display 280, and the entire display of the design t of the Tono-sama character is displayed on the POV display 280. The entire display of the pattern t of the Tonosama character is displayed on the left side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. It should be noted that the display of the pattern k of the enemy character is disappearing.

  In FIG. 260 (y), the LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position at the upper left, and the rotation region s of the LED array 282 moves. That is, the POV display 280 on which the entire display of the pattern t of the Tonosama character is displayed starts to move toward the upper left. At this time, the relative display position in the left-right direction of the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is displayed so as not to change. That is, in FIG. 260 (y), the entire display of the pattern t of Tonosama's character is displayed on the right side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 moves toward the upper left. On the other hand, the entire display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character displayed in the rotation area s is displayed so as to move to the right. On the other hand, the relative display position in the vertical direction of the display of the pattern t of the character-like character has changed, and the entire display of the pattern t of the character-like character is caused by the movement of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 in the upper left direction. In addition, it is displayed to move upward. It should be noted that the relative display position in the vertical direction of the display of the pattern t of the Tonosama character may not be changed. In this case, the entire display of the pattern t of the Tonosama character is displayed on the LED array 282. Although it moves within the rotation area s, it is recognized by the player as being relatively completely stationary.

  The display of the pattern t of some or all of the lord-like characters displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) corresponds to an example of a second effect display. . In addition, in the rotation area s of the LED array 282, other patterns (for example, a horse pattern or a character pattern such as a game) may be displayed in addition to the pattern t of the Tono-sama character. It is good also as an example of the 2nd production display including a design.

  In FIG. 260 (z), the LED array 282 stops moving, the rotation decelerates at the movement start position, and the display of the picture t of the Tono-sama character disappears from the POV display 280. However, in the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208, at the back side position of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 at the operation start position, the same design as the design t of the Tono-sama character that has been displayed on the POV display 280 until now. The display of the pattern in which the character in the same pose is started. In FIG. 260 (v), the same display of the portion applied to the POV display 280 may be started at the back side position from the stage where a part of the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is applied to the POV display 280. Then, the same display of the entire display may be started at the back side position from the stage where the entire display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character in FIG. 260 (x) has moved to the POV display 280.

  In FIG. 260 (a), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial posture, and the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character displayed at the back side position is visible. In FIG. 260 (b), the LED array 282 rises toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. When the LED array 282 starts to rise toward the initial position, the display of all the changing icons h0 and the hold icons that have disappeared so far is restored. Note that these displays may be restored in response to the rotation of the LED array 282 being stopped. Here, the changing icon h0 whose display has been restored is a black rhombus notice mode. In FIG. 260C, the POV display 280 has returned to the initial position. It should be noted that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (“decoration 2” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2”) on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 started in FIG. Stop display) continues until this stage.

  In FIG. 260 (d), the decorative symbol that has been displayed on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 so far returns to the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the jackpot is displayed on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”) is displayed in a shaking manner (temporary stop display). In accordance with this return, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 also returns to the sky background image, and the background image of the first movable body 260 also returns to the sea background image. Although the decorative symbol is not displayed on the first movable body 260, the decorative symbol may be displayed together with the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 260 (e), the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position so far returns to the initial position. In the special figure display device 213 shown in FIG. 255, the fluctuation display of the special figure is finished, and the big hit stop symbol (lighting pattern) is displayed, and the special symbol display device 213 shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the big hit decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") is finished, and the display is fixed (stop display). That is, the change display of the notice target of the prefetch notice is finished, and the jackpot symbol is displayed. In FIG. 260 (G), a big hit character for notifying the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a dedicated character pattern that appears when Super Reach develops, a character pattern that appears during the jackpot game, and the like, which are examples of the second pattern. Equivalent to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 260 described above, the pattern is displayed on the rotation region s of the LED array 282, that is, the POV display 280, and the display of the pattern on the POV display 280 may be hereinafter referred to as a Berser notice. . Even if the varsa notice is executed during the symbol variation, the big hit symbol mode is finally determined and displayed more easily in the symbol variation than when it is not performed. Good. In other words, the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is high (hereinafter the same), and when any of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this versatility notice is executed is started. Eventually, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol pattern is always displayed in a definitive manner, or is configured so that the symbol pattern mode is always finalized in the event of a symbol change for which this barr notice has not been executed. May be. Or, if the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the time when this Versa notice is executed is started, it may be likely that the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, during execution of symbol variation, when the POV display 280 appears as shown in FIG. 260 (e), the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed in the symbol variation than when it does not appear. It may be configured so that it is easy to be played, or when one of the symbol variations that are held at the time when the POV display 280 appears, when the symbol variation is started, the final jackpot symbol mode is surely displayed. It may be configured to be configured, or it may be configured to be surely displayed in a definite manner in the event that the POV display 280 does not appear. Or, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when the POV display 280 appears is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed or may be displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, when the second movable body 270 is operated as shown in FIG. 260 (o) during the execution of the symbol variation, the big hit symbol pattern is finally determined in the symbol variation than when the second movable body 270 is not operated. It may be configured so as to be easily displayed, and when the symbol variation of one of the symbol variations held at the time when the second movable body 270 is operated, the big hit symbol mode is finally achieved. May be configured to be surely displayed, or may be configured to be surely displayed in a definite manner when the second movable body 270 does not operate. . Or, when the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations held at the time when the second movable body 270 is operated, the big hit symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed or confirmed. It may be configured to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 260 (q), when the symbol variation is being executed, when the POV display 280 displaying the pattern is moved, it is finally a big hit in the symbol variation than when the symbol is not moved. The design may be configured so that the symbol form is easily displayed, or any of the symbol variations that are held when the POV display 280 displaying the symbol starts moving starts. In this case, the big win symbol pattern may be surely displayed in the final case, or the symbol pattern mode is not always changed when the POV display 280 displaying the symbol does not move. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may be carried out. Or, when one of the symbol variations of the symbol variation held at the time when the POV display 280 displaying the symbol starts moving, the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finalized and displayed. , May be configured to be. It should be noted that the greater the amount of movement of the POV display 280, the higher the reliability (expectation) for big hits.

  In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation, as shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (w), the case where the display of the pattern t is displayed across both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280. However, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is finally displayed in the final pattern variation more easily than when the symbol t is not displayed, or the display of the symbol t is displayed across both 208 and 280. In the event that any of the symbol variations that have been suspended at the time of the start of the symbol variation is started, the jackpot symbol aspect may be surely displayed in a final manner, or the symbol t It may be configured such that the symbol pattern mode is surely displayed in a definite manner in the event that the symbols are not displayed across both 208 and 280. Or, when the display of the symbol t starts to display over both 208 and 280, when any of the symbol variations that are held is started, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy.

  In addition, when the confrontation animation is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed with a certainty in the symbol variation than when the animation is not displayed. In addition, when one of the symbol variations that are held at the start of the display of the confrontation animation is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the symbol pattern is surely displayed in a definite manner in the event of the symbol variation in which the confrontation animation is not displayed. Or, in the event that any of the symbol variations that have been put on hold at the start of the display of the confrontation animation has started, the big hit symbol pattern may be easily displayed or finalized. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, when the character variation of the protagonist wins in the confrontation animation during symbol variation, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in the symbol variation more easily than when it is defeated. If the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the start of the display of the confrontation animation in which the character of the main character wins is started, it is finally a big hit symbol aspect It may be configured to be surely displayed, or it is configured to be surely displayed in the final design in the case of a symbol variation where the confrontation animation that the hero's character wins is not displayed. It may be. Alternatively, when the symbol variation of one of the symbol variations held at the start of the display of the confrontation animation in which the character of the main character wins starts, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy.

  Further, during the execution of the symbol variation, as shown in FIGS. 260 (a) to (c), the design t of the Tono-sama character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 even if it disappears from the POV display 280. In some cases, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in the final pattern variation more easily than in the case where the symbol is not displayed, and the symbol t is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the event that any of the symbol variations that have been put on hold at the time when the symbol variation is started, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in a definite manner. It may be configured such that a symbol pattern that is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is finally displayed in a final pattern variation without fail. Alternatively, when the symbol variation of the symbol variation held when the symbol t is started to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed. , May be configured to be.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram showing an example of an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 in stages. In this figure, the process proceeds in the order from (a) to (t). FIG. 262 also shows a decorative symbol display device 208 that becomes a main liquid crystal unit, a first movable body 260 that becomes a sub liquid crystal unit, a second movable body 270 that displays a chance, and a POV display 280. . The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 262 is that the main character (Tono-sama) character appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and moves to the POV display 280 to make a big hit as a notice in the currently displayed variable display. It becomes something like that. This will be described in detail below.

  In FIG. 262 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position, and part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is not visible to the player. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols lost (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed on the sky background image. In this example, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260. Hereafter, since FIG. 262 (j) is the same as FIG. 260 (j), the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 262 (k), the LED array 282 that is rotating at a constant speed at the motion start position does not start to display the image of the character of the enemy character, and the LED array 282 moves from the motion start position toward the right side. Starting, the rotation region s of the LED array 282 overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 262 (l), on the left side of the decorative design display device 208, the display of the design t of the character of the main character (Tono-sama) is started. The pattern t of the Tono-sama character corresponds to an example of a first pattern, and the display of the pattern t corresponds to an example of a first effect display. Thereafter, the pattern t of Tonosama's character approaches the rotation area s of the LED array 282 that has moved to the right. Nothing is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. In FIG. 262 (m), a part (here, the left half) of the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining part (here, the right half) is displayed on the POV display 280. Has been. That is, the design t of the Tono-sama character is displayed across the decorative design display device 208 and the POV display 280. In FIG. 262 (n), the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character has completely moved to the POV display 280, and the entire display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character has moved to the right, the center of the rotation area s of the LED array 282. Is displayed. The display of the pattern t of some or all of the lord-like characters displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (m) to (n) corresponds to an example of a second effect display. . Contrary to this example, the display of the character's character pattern on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started, and the rotation area s of the LED array 282 is displayed on the display of the character's character pattern. After the approach, the right part of the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the left part is displayed on the POV display 280. The LED array 282 moved to the right side may be displayed at the center of the rotation area s.

  In FIG. 262 (o), the rotating LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position. In the center of the rotation area s of the moving LED array 282, the pattern t of the Tono-sama character continues to be displayed. In FIG. 262 (p), the LED array 282 returns to the operation start position, and in response to this, on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, the combination of jackpot decorative symbols (here “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”). "-" Decoration 3 ") starts shaking display (temporary stop display).

  In FIG. 262 (q), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated at the movement start position, and the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character disappears from the POV display 280. In FIG. 262 (r), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial posture. Unlike the example shown in FIG. 260, the same pattern as the pattern t of the Tono-sama character that has been displayed on the POV display 280 so far is not displayed at the back side position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282. In FIG. 262 (s), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. It should be noted that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols ("decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3") on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260, which was started in FIG. Stop display) continues. This shaking display may be continued until the LED array 282 returns to the initial position, or may continue only until the LED array 282 starts the ascending operation.

  In FIG. 262 (t), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. In addition, the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable member 260 returns to the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the decorative symbol display. In the device 208, the combination of the big hit decoration symbols ("decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3") is confirmed (stopped). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image returns to the sea background image.

  It should be noted that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols stopped in the example in FIG. 262 (“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) and the jackpot decorative symbols stopped in the example in FIG. When the combinations ("decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2") are compared, the combination of the big hit decoration symbols stopped and displayed in the example in FIG. . That is, the combination of the jackpot decoration symbol in FIG. 260 is a combination of the jackpot decoration design without probability change, whereas the combination of the jackpot decoration symbol in FIG. 262 is a combination of the jackpot decoration design with probability change. Alternatively, the combination of the jackpot decoration symbol in FIG. 262 may have a larger number of rounds of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the jackpot decorative symbol combination in FIG. 260 may be a jackpot that is more advantageous than the jackpot decorative symbol combination in FIG. 262.

  FIG. 263 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of button notices continuing from FIG. 262 (k).

  FIG. 263 (l ′) is a state continued from FIG. 262 (k). The rotation region s of the LED array 282 that overlaps the right end of the bezel 208q in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (l ′) includes the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 262 (l). As with, nothing is displayed. However, in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (l ′), the pattern 136 ′ of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 246 is displayed with a dotted line. This indicates that the pattern 136 ′ of the chance button 136 is displayed on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208 p in the decorative symbol display device 208. The displayed pattern 136 ′ of the chance button 136 is difficult to visually recognize. The chance button pattern 136 ′ displayed on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p in the decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern 136 ′ is as follows: This corresponds to an example of a first effect display.

  In the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (l ′) shown in FIG. 263 (l ′), a chance button pattern 136 ′ is displayed by a solid line. This represents that the chance button pattern 136 ′ is displayed in the rotation area s of the POV display 280, that is, the LED array 282. A picture of a chance button is also displayed on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (m ′). That is, the chance button pattern 136 ′ is displayed so as to overlap the positions of the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display device 208 that coincide with each other.

  In FIG. 263 (n ′), the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 is not changed, but the chance button pattern 136 ′ is moving to the left, and the right half of the chance button pattern 136 ′ is It is displayed on the POV display 280, and the left half is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, an animation in which the chance button pattern 136 ′ exits from the rotation area s of the LED array 282 is displayed. In FIG. 263 (n ′), the chance button pattern 136 ′ is displayed on the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display. It is displayed across the device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire chance button pattern 136 ′, and the right half of the chance button pattern 136 ′ overlaps with the right half of the LED array 282.

  The display of some or all chance button patterns 136 ′ displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. Correspondingly, in this example, in FIGS. 263 (m ′) to (n ′), the first effect display (display of the pattern 136 ′ of the decorative symbol display device 208) and the second effect display (POV display 280). Display 136 ') is configured to be performed together.

  In FIG. 263 (o ′), the chance button pattern 136 ′ completely leaves the rotation area s of the LED array 282 and is displayed only on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the POV display 280 and the decorative pattern display device 208. Yes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (p ′), a pattern (a character pattern “press” and a downward arrow pattern) that prompts the operation of the chance button 136 is added to the chance button pattern 136 ′. ing. The display of the pattern for prompting the operation of the chance button pattern 136 ′ and the chance button 136 corresponds to an example of a first effect display. The actual chance button 136 also has a built-in chance button lamp 138 that emits light, and the word “push” appears. In the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 263 (p ′), a combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed.

  In FIG. 263 (q ′), the chance button 136 is pressed down. When the chance button 136 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 263 (r ′), the chance button pattern 136 ′ and the pattern prompting its operation disappear from the decorative pattern display device 208, and the POV display 280 is displayed with a “big hit”. A character pattern is displayed. Further, in the first movable body 260, the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is started.

  In FIG. 263 (s ′), the rotating LED array 282 starts moving toward the operation start position. In the rotating area s of the moving LED array 282, the big hit character picture continues to be displayed. In FIG. 263 (t ′), the LED array 282 returns to the operation start position, the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated at the operation start position, and the display of the big hit character / picture disappears from the POV display 280. In FIG. 263 (u ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial posture. In FIG. 263 (v ′), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. Yes. In addition, the shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the big hit decorative symbols on the panel 260p of the first movable body 260 started in FIG. 263 (r ′) is continued.

  In FIG. 263 (w ′), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. In addition, the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable member 260 returns to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 208, the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image returns to the sea background image.

  Even if the button notification described above is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is finally displayed in the symbol variation more easily than the case where it is not performed. In addition, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this button notice is executed is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is surely finalized and displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the symbol pattern is surely displayed in the final state in the symbol variation in which the button notice is not executed. Or, if any of the symbol variations that are on hold at the time this button notice is executed starts, the big-hit symbol mode is likely to be finalized and displayed. It may be configured.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing another example following step 262 (g) step by step.

  FIG. 264 (h ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 262 (g) in which the LED array 282 has reached the operation start position. In FIG. 264 (h ′), the LED array 282 does not start rotating and starts to rise from the operation start position while maintaining the initial posture. In FIG. 264 (i ′), the LED array 282 reaches the initial position. doing. In addition, the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable body 260 is returned to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 uses a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (here, “decoration 3”-“decoration 2”). "-" Decoration 3 ") is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image returns to the sea background image. In this example, although the LED array 282 has been lowered to the operation start position, the LED array 282 does not start rotating, and the display of the POV display 280 is not displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display device 208 is confirmed. Is displayed. In other words, it is an example in which the Berser notice is not actually started with the expectation that the Berser notice is started.

  During the execution of the symbol variation, when the LED array 282 starts rotating as shown in FIG. 260 (h), the final symbol variation occurs in the symbol variation than when the LED array 282 does not start rotating as shown in FIG. 264. In particular, the big hit symbol pattern may be configured to be confirmed and displayed easily, or when any symbol variation of the symbol variation held when the LED array 282 starts rotating is started. Eventually, it may be configured such that the big win symbol mode is always displayed in a definite manner, or it is configured so that the final symbol mode is surely displayed in the event that the LED array 282 does not start rotating. May be. Alternatively, in the event that any one of the symbol variations that are held at the time when the LED array 282 starts rotating, the big hit symbol pattern may be easily displayed or finalized. It may be configured as follows.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing another example following FIG. 263 (l ′) step by step.

  FIG. 265 (m ″) is a state continued from FIG. 263 (l ′) in which the pattern 136 ′ of the chance button 136 is displayed on the back side portion of the rotation region s of the LED array 282. In FIG. 265 (m ″), nothing is still displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, and a chance button pattern 136 ′ is displayed on the back side portion. The rotation area s of the non-displayed LED array 282 starts to move toward the operation start position (FIG. 265 (n ″)). In FIG. 265 (o ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 starts the operation. The position is decelerated, and in FIG. 265 (p ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial posture. The pattern 136 ′ of the chance button 136 displayed on the back side portion of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208 p in the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears when the LED array 282 begins to decelerate the rotation. Alternatively, the LED array 282 that rotates at a constant speed disappears when it reaches the operation start position. Even when the LED array 282 begins to decelerate, the first movable body 260 displays the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state. In this example, eventually, the picture 136 ′ of the chance button 136 is not clearly or completely visible to the player, and the picture prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed at all. Therefore, the chance button 136 is operated. There is nothing.

  In FIG. 265 (q ″), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. In the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 265 (q ″), the combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state is still displayed.

  In FIG. 265 (r ″), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. In addition, the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable member 260 returns to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 208, the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image returns to the sea background image.

  During the execution of the symbol variation, when the chance button pattern 136 ′ is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 as shown in FIG. 263 (m ′), as shown in FIG. 265, the LED array 282 is displayed. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in the final pattern variation more easily than when the symbol is not displayed even when the symbol is rotated, or the chance button symbol 136 ′ is displayed in the rotation region s. When the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the time of starting is started, the jackpot symbol aspect may be surely finally displayed and the rotation region s thereof may be displayed. It may be configured such that the symbol pattern is surely displayed in a definite manner in the event that the chance button pattern 136 ′ is not displayed at the end. Alternatively, when one of the symbol variations held at the time when the chance button symbol 136 ′ starts to be displayed in the rotation area s, the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy.

  FIG. 266 is a diagram showing another example following step 262 (c) step by step.

  FIG. 266 (d ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 262 (c) in which the first movable body 260 is in the initial position. In FIG. 266 (d ′), the first movable body 260 does not move to the retracted position but remains in the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of symbols is confirmed (stopped).

  During the execution of the symbol variation, the case where the first movable body 260 moves to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 260 (c), rather than the case where it remains in the initial position as shown in FIG. 266, The player can expect the POV display 280 to start preparing for operation and, in turn, to start a versatility notice. In fact, the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed in the symbol variation. Easy to be. In addition, in the event that any of the symbol variations that are held when the first movable body 260 starts to move to the retracted position, the big hit symbol pattern is surely finalized. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finalized or displayed in the end, or the first movable body 260 is in the initial position. It may be configured such that, in the symbol variation that remains in position, the symbol pattern mode is finally displayed in a definite manner.

  FIG. 267 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a big hit that continues from FIG. 262 (i).

  FIG. 267 (j ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 262 (i) when the LED array 282 starts to rotate and accelerates. In FIG. 267 (j ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 is further accelerated, and a picture is displayed before reaching a constant speed. That is, in the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 267 (j ′), the display of the picture t of Tonosama's character is started, and even in the same figure (k ′) in which the rotation speed of the LED array 282 reaches a constant speed, The display of the pattern t is maintained. In this example, when a pattern is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 that has reached a constant speed, the first movable body 260 that has been in the reach state until then has displayed a swing display of a combination of jackpot decorative symbols ( Temporary stop display) is started. In FIG. 267 (k ′), the rotation region s of the LED array 282 is not moved.

  In FIG. 267 (l ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated, and the display of the picture t of the Tono-sama character disappears from the POV display 280. Even if the rotation of the LED array 282 begins to decelerate, the pattern t of the Tono-sama character may continue to be displayed for a certain period of time (for example, until it decreases to a certain speed).

  In FIG. 267 (m ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 stops in the initial posture, and in FIG. 267 (n ′), the LED array 282 rises toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. Yes. In FIG. 267 (o ′), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. In addition, the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable member 260 returns to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 208, a combination of the big hit decoration symbols (here, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image returns to the sea background image.

  FIG. 268 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of losing, continuing from FIG. 262 (i).

  FIG. 268 (j ″) shows a state continued from FIG. 262 (i) when the LED array 282 starts to rotate and accelerates. In FIG. 268 (j ″), similarly to the previous FIG. 267 (j ′), the rotation of the LED array 282 is further accelerated, and the pattern is displayed before reaching the constant speed. That is, during the acceleration of the rotation of the LED array 282, the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is displayed. When the rotation speed of the LED array 282 reaches a constant speed, the display of the picture t disappears as shown in FIG. In this example, nothing is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 that has reached a constant speed, and the first movable body 260 remains in the reach state.

  In FIG. 268 (l ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 is decelerated. In FIG. 268 (m ″), the rotation of the LED array 282 is stopped in the initial posture. The LED array 282 rotates at a constant speed, and the POV display 280 may display a character pattern “sorry” instead of the ton character's pattern t disappearing, or the LED array 282 may rotate. May be displayed for a certain period of time (for example, until the speed is reduced to a certain speed) after starting to decelerate.

  In FIG. 268 (n ″), the LED array 282 is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. In FIG. 268 (o ″), the LED array 282 has reached the initial position. The first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position so far has also returned to the initial position. Furthermore, the display of the decorative symbol that was in the reach state on the first movable body 260 is restored to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination (here “decoration 3” − “decoration 2” − “decoration 3”) is fixedly displayed (stopped display). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image returns to the sea background image.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (k ″), when the symbol variation is being performed, a pattern is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 that has reached a constant speed as shown in FIG. 267 (k ′). It may be configured to make it easier to finally display the big hit symbol form in the symbol variation than when it disappears or is not displayed, or when the symbol starts to be displayed in the rotation area s It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed when any symbol variation of the displayed symbol variation is started, or the symbol disappears or is displayed. It may be configured such that the symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner in the case of a symbol variation that has not occurred. Alternatively, when the symbol variation of the symbol variation held when the symbol is started to be displayed in the rotation area s is started, the big hit symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed. You may be comprised so that there may be a case.

  FIG. 269 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which the first movable body 260 that becomes the sub liquid crystal unit is rotated at a high speed by the mechanism shown in FIGS. 258 and 259 to display a picture due to the afterimage effect. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (r). FIG. 269 also shows the decorative symbol display device 208 that becomes the main liquid crystal unit, the first movable body 260 that becomes the sub liquid crystal unit, and the second movable body 270 that displays the chance. The POV display 280 shown in FIG. 268 is omitted. The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 269 is a versatility notice of the currently displayed variable display using the first movable body 260 that becomes the sub liquid crystal unit. That is, in the performance here, the first movable body 260 corresponds to an example of a POV display. This will be described in detail below.

  In FIG. 269 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position, and part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols lost on the empty background image is stopped and displayed. In this example, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260.

  In FIG. 269 (b), the special symbol variation display is started, and in response to the start of the special symbol variation display, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the decorative symbol variation display. In FIG. 269 (c), the first movable body 260 moves to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 develops a reach state in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 9D, the display of the decorative pattern in the reach state is reduced and displayed on the upper right.

  In FIG. 269 (e), the first movable body 260 in the retracted position at the left end moves toward the right side along the lower end portion of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in FIG. The first movable body 260 that is moving toward the position starts to rise when it slightly passes the center in the left-right direction. The first movable body 260 that has started to rise stops in the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 269 (g). In the first movable body 260 that has stopped rising, the background image of the sea is switched from the background image of the sea in preparation for the first movable body 260 to start the rotation operation.

  In FIG. 269 (h), the first movable body 260 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the player, and in FIG. ), The first movable body 260 has finished accelerating rotation and has shifted to constant speed rotation. The rotation area 206 s of the first movable body 260 does not overlap the display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed on the upper right, but may overlap a part or all of the display of the decorative symbol. When the first movable body 260 shifts to constant speed rotation, it can display a pattern due to the afterimage effect, but at the timing of FIG. 269 (j), the pattern is not yet displayed. It is also possible to display an afterimage effect pattern at the same time as reaching the constant speed rotation, or to display an afterimage effect pattern before reaching the constant speed rotation and displaying the pattern before reaching the constant speed rotation. May be.

  In the first movable body 260 that rotates at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. In addition, in response to the start of the display of the jackpot character design, the display of the decorative symbol reduced in the upper right, which has been displayed in the reach state until now, is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbol (here, “ (Decoration 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”) is displayed (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 269 (l)). It should be noted that the shaking display of the jackpot decoration symbol combination may be performed at the same time when the display of the jackpot character design is started or after the start.

  In FIG. 269 (m), the position of the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 is not changed, but the big hit character design is moving diagonally to the upper left, and the “hit” character design is the first. The “Large” character design is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. That is, an animation is displayed in which the big hit character pattern comes out of the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260. In FIG. 269 (m), the big hit character design is the first movable body 260 and the decorative design. It is displayed across the display device 208. The display of a part or all of the jackpot character pattern displayed in the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to (m) corresponds to an example of a second effect display. To do. In addition to the jackpot character pattern, other patterns (for example, a pattern representing an oval pattern or an effect) may be displayed on the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260. It is good also as an example of the 2nd production display including "a picture of".

  Further, in response to the fact that a big hit character / picture has started to be displayed on the rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260 (FIG. 269 (k)), the decorative symbol display device 208 also has a big hit on the back side of the rotation area 206s. The display of the character pattern may be started. The display of the jackpot character design on the decorative design display device 208 may be performed at the same time as the jackpot character design is displayed in the rotation area 206s, or even after the jackpot character design is displayed. Good. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (m), all the big hit character designs are displayed. In the “hit” character design portion, there is a rotation area 206s of the first movable body 260. The aspect which has overlapped may be sufficient.

  In FIG. 269 (n), the big hit character pattern is completely removed from the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. This jackpot character design corresponds to an example of a first design, and the display of the design corresponds to an example of a first effect display. On the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208, in addition to the jackpot character design, other design (for example, a design representing an oval design or an effect) may be displayed. It is good also as an example of the 1st production display including. Note that nothing is displayed in the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (n). In FIG. 269 (o), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is decelerated, and in FIG. 269 (p), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is stopped in the initial posture. In FIG. 269 (q), the first movable body 260 is lowered, and the background image of the first movable body 260 is restored to the sea background image. Further, in FIG. 269 (r), the first movable body 260 moves toward the left side along the lower end portion of the bezel 208q of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. In response to the return of the first movable body 260 to the initial position, a reduced display of the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating in the upper right region until then is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol. Returning to the symbol display area 208c, the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 returns the background image to an empty background image. The confirmation display may be performed at the same time when the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position or may be after the return.

  In the example shown in FIG. 269 described above, a pattern due to the afterimage effect is displayed in the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260, and the pattern due to this afterimage effect is also displayed as an example of the Berser notice. It is structured so that when the varsa notice is executed during the symbol change, the big hit symbol form is finally determined and displayed easily in the symbol change than when the verse notice is not executed. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this versatility notice is executed is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the symbol pattern mode is finally displayed in a definite manner in the symbol variation in which this versatility notice is not executed. Or, if the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the time when this Versa notice is executed is started, it may be likely that the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed. It may be configured.

  FIG. 270 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of button notices continued from FIG. 269 (g).

  FIG. 270 (h ′) is a state continuing from FIG. 269 (g) in which the first movable body 260 is raised to the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 270 (h ′), the first movable body 260 in a stopped state has a chance button pattern 136 ″ and a pattern (“press”) for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow. (Picture) is displayed. The actual chance button 136 also has a built-in chance button lamp 138 that emits light, and the word “push” appears. Such an effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 corresponds to an example of a button notice, and the button notice is started in FIG. 270 (h ′).

  In FIG. 270 (i ′), the chance button 136 is pressed down. When the chance button 136 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 270 (j ′), the chance button pattern 136 ″ and the pattern prompting its operation disappear from the first movable body 260, and the first movable body 260 is removed. Starts to rotate. That is, the first movable body 260 starts rotating in response to the operation of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 270 (k ′), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is accelerated. In FIG. 270 ′, the first movable body 260 finishes the acceleration rotation and shifts to the constant speed rotation. In the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 270 (l '), a big hit character pattern due to the afterimage effect is displayed, and a Berser notice is started. In this example, at the same time as the rotational speed of the first movable body 260 reaches a constant speed, a big hit character pattern is displayed. From the start of rotation of the first movable body 260 until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, there is an instant. In this example, a big hit character pattern is displayed by the afterimage effect according to the operation of the chance button 136. Looks like you are. That is, it develops from a button notice to a Versa notice.

  In FIG. 270 (m ′), the display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size in the upper right, which has been displayed in the reach state until now, is a shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the big hit decorative symbol. In this example, the big hit character pattern does not move and remains in the rotation region 206 s of the first movable body 260.

  In FIG. 270 (n ′), the rotation of the first movable body 260 is decelerated, and the jackpot character design displayed in the rotation area 206s disappears. In FIG. 270 (o ′), the rotation of the first movable body 260 stops in the initial posture. In FIG. 270 (p ′), the first movable body 260 is lowered, and the background image of the first movable body 260 is restored to the sea background image. Further, in FIG. 270 (q ′), as in FIG. 269 (r), the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to an empty background image. A combination of the big hit decorative symbols is fixedly displayed (stopped display) in the display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which the button notification does not evolve to the versatility notification, continuing from FIG. 270 (i ′).

  FIG. 271 (j ″) is a view from FIG. 270 (i ′) in which the chance button 136 is pushed down in a state in which the chance button pattern 136 ″ and the pattern prompting the operation are displayed on the first movable body 260. It is a continuing state. When the chance button 136 is pushed down, as shown in FIG. 271 (j ″), the pattern 136 ″ of the chance button and the pattern prompting the operation disappear from the first movable body 260. In this example, The rotation of the first movable body 260 is not started.

  In FIG. 271 (k ″), the first movable body 260 starts to descend, and the background image of the first movable body 260 is restored to the sea background image. In the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (k ″), the decorative symbol in the reach state is still displayed. In FIG. 271 (l ″), the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 returns the background image to an empty background image and loses the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of the decorative symbols is finalized (stopped).

  When the button notice as shown in FIG. 270 (h ′) is displayed during the symbol variation, the big hit symbol pattern is finally more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation than when it is not displayed. It may be configured, and when a symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the time this button notice is executed is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is surely finalized and displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the symbol pattern is surely displayed in a final manner in a symbol variation in which the button notice is not executed. Or, if any of the symbol variations that are on hold at the time this button notice is executed starts, the big-hit symbol mode is likely to be finalized and displayed. It may be configured. Furthermore, as described above, during the execution of the symbol variation, the case where the verse notice is executed as shown in FIG. 271 is more effective when the verse notice shown in FIG. The symbol variation may be configured so that the symbol pattern design is finally easily displayed in the symbol variation, or any symbol variation of the symbol variation that is held at the time when this versatility notice is executed starts. In such a case, it may be configured that the big win symbol mode is always displayed in a definite manner in the event that it is performed, or the symbol pattern mode is finally displayed in a definite manner in the case of the symbol variation for which this barr notice has not been executed. It may be configured. Or, if the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the time when this Versa notice is executed is started, it may be likely that the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed. It may be configured.

  FIG. 272 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which a big hit is made with another type of Berser notice using the first movable body 260, continuing from FIG. 269 (i).

  FIG. 272 (h ′) is a state continuing from FIG. 269 (i) in which the first movable body 260 rising to the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In FIG. 272 (h ′), the first movable body 260 starts moving to the right while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower right side shown in FIG. 272 (h ′), a “hit” character pattern is displayed on the upper left.

  As shown in FIGS. 272 (i ') to (k'), the first movable body 260 starts to circulate while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper right side shown in FIG. 272 (i ′), a “hit” character pattern is displayed on the lower left. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper left side as shown in FIG. 272 (j ′), a “big hit” character pattern is displayed on the lower right. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower left side shown in FIG. 272 (k ′), the character pattern “big hit” is displayed on the upper right. As described above, when the first movable body 260 that circulates changes the character pattern according to the position and the moving speed of the circulatory movement increases, as shown in FIG. It looks like a jackpot text pattern is displayed. The circular movement area 260s' of the first movable body 260 does not overlap the display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size in the upper right, but may overlap a part or all of the display of the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 272 (m ′), the decoration in the reach state displayed in a reduced size on the upper right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the big hit character pattern due to the afterimage effect is displayed on the first movable body 260 that circulates and moves. The symbol display becomes a shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. Note that the start of the shaking display may be the same as the timing at which the big hit character pattern due to the afterimage effect starts to be displayed on the first movable body 260, or may be after that timing.

  In FIG. 272 (n ′), the first movable body 260 that has performed the circular movement stops, and the jackpot character pattern due to the afterimage effect disappears. In FIG. 272 (o ′), the first movable body 260 is in the initial state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to an empty background image, and the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is fixedly displayed (stopped display) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 273 is an example of the Versa notice that continues from FIG. 269 (i), as in FIG.

  FIG. 273 (h ′) is a state continuing from FIG. 269 (i) in which the first movable body 260 rising to the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In FIG. 273 (h ′), the first movable body 260 starts moving to the right while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower right side shown in FIG. 273 (h ′), a display including the character pattern “S” is performed on the upper left.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 273, the first movable body 260 starts to circulate while maintaining the initial posture. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper right side shown in FIG. 273 (i ′), a display including a character pattern of “su” is performed on the lower left. In the first movable body 260 located on the upper left side as shown in FIG. 273 (j ′), the display including the character pattern “Cha” is performed on the lower right. In the first movable body 260 located on the lower left side shown in FIG. 273 (k ′), the display including the character pattern “Cha” is performed on the upper right.

  In FIG. 273 (l ′), the moving speed of the circular movement reaches a constant speed, and it appears that a chance character pattern is displayed in the circular movement area 260s ′ of the first movable body 260 due to the afterimage effect. . In addition, when the moving speed of the first movable body 260 reaches a certain speed, that is, a chance character pattern is displayed due to the afterimage effect, and at the same time, the reach is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 The display of the decorative pattern in the state becomes a shaking display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss. It should be noted that before the display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern is displayed, the display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot may be displayed once, and then the display of the combination of the decorative patterns of the losing pattern may be displayed.

  In FIG. 273 (m ′), the state shown in FIG. 273 continues (l ′), and in FIG. 273 (n ′), the first movable body 260 that has performed the circular movement is stopped, and the big hit by the afterimage effect is stopped. The character pattern disappears. In FIG. 273 (o ′), the first movable body 260 returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 returns the background image to an empty background image, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are lost. The combination of decorative symbols is confirmed (stopped). Note that the display may be switched from the shaking display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing to the fixed display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot.

  In the example shown in FIG. 272, a pattern of the afterimage effect due to the circular movement of the first movable body 260 is displayed, and the display of the image of the afterimage effect is also an example of the Berser notice. When the varsa notice is executed during the execution of the symbol variation, the big hit symbol form is finally determined and displayed more easily in the symbol variation than when the verse notice is not executed. In addition, in the Versa notice, the jackpot character pattern has higher reliability (expectation) for the jackpot than the chance character pattern. In addition, even if the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the time when this Versa notice is executed is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the symbol form is surely displayed in the final state in the symbol variation in which this versatility notice is not executed. Or, if the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the time when this Versa notice is executed is started, it may be likely that the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed. It may be configured.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 269 to 273 described above, the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 is omitted, but the POV display 280 is also mounted and the first movable body 260 is mounted. The effects shown in FIGS. 269 to 273 performed by rotating or circulating movement and the effects by the POV display 280 shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 may be performed simultaneously or may be shifted.

  FIG. 274 is a diagram showing an example of changing the display mode of the hold icon step by step using the Versa notice. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (p). FIG. 274 also shows a decorative symbol display device 208 that becomes a main liquid crystal unit, a first movable body 260 that becomes a sub liquid crystal unit, a second movable body 270 that displays a chance, and a POV display 280. . The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 274 is that the design displayed as the hold icon on the decorative design display device 208 moves onto the POV display 280, the display mode changes on the POV display 280, and the decorative design display device 208 Looks like to return to. It becomes something like that. This will be described in detail below.

  In FIG. 274 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position, and part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display 280 is also in the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270, and the POV display 280 is not visible to the player. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols lost on the empty background image is stopped and displayed. In addition, four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and each of them is a white circle display mode which is a default display mode. The four hold icons may all be the hold icons shown in FIG. 1, the four hold icons may be the hold icons shown in FIG. 2, or the hold icon and the special figure 2 shown in FIG. 1. The hold icon may be mixed. Further, only the sea background image is displayed on the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 274 (a). Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 260 will be mainly described, and description of common matters may be omitted.

  In FIG. 274 (b), one hold is consumed and three hold icons are displayed, and any display mode is a default display mode. In FIG. 274 (c), the first movable body 260 has moved to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a reach state. Also, the POV display 280 starts preparing for operation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (d), a changing icon h0 and three hold icons are displayed on a patternless background.

  In FIG. 274 (e), the POV display 280 appears from the back side of the second movable body 270, and in FIG. Reach the start position. In FIG. 274 (h), the LED array 282 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction at the operation start position, and in FIG. In FIG. 274 (j), the LED array 282 has finished accelerating rotation and has shifted to constant speed rotation. Here, the rotation area s of the LED array 282 overlaps with a part of the changing icon h0 but does not overlap with the hold icon. That is, it is possible to confirm all the display modes of the three hold icons. Until this stage, all three hold icons continue to be displayed in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 208f. Of the three hold icons, the design of the third hold icon h3 corresponds to an example of the first design, and the display of the design of the three hold icons including the design corresponds to an example of the first effect display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (k), an animation is displayed in which the third hold icon h3 of the three hold icons moves from the hold icon display area 208f toward the rotation area s of the LED array 282. In the hold icon display area 208f, only two hold icons are displayed. In FIG. 274 (l), the right half of the pattern h3 'representing the third hold icon h3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left half is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. That is, the pattern h3 'representing the third hold icon is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280. In FIG. 274 (m), the display mode of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 280 changes from a white circle to a black rhombus, and shines for a moment. Increase. As shown in FIG. 274 (n), the picture h3 'whose display mode has changed is temporarily displayed on the POV display 280. That is, the pattern h3 ′ that has been displayed near the edge of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 across the decorative design display device 208 and the POV display 280 so far enters the rotation area s of the LED array 282. Moving. Thereafter, the black rhombus pattern h3 'moves again to the vicinity of the edge of the rotation region s of the LED array 282, as shown in FIG. 274 (o). In FIG. 274 (o), a black rhombus pattern h3 'is displayed across the POV display 280 and the decorative symbol display device 208 again. The display of the pattern h3 representing some or all of the third reserved icons displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (o) is an example of the second effect display. Equivalent to.

  In FIG. 274 (p), the black rhombus pattern h3 ′ displayed across the POV display 280 and the decorative symbol display device 208 returns to the hold icon display region 208f, and the hold icon display region 208f is also black. It is displayed as a diamond-shaped third hold icon h3, and a pre-reading notice is made.

  Note that even if the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (j) is rotated at a constant speed, the display state of the hold icon is not changed, and the rotation of the LED array 282 may end. From 274 (l) to (o) in the figure, a Versa notice is given, and the Versa notice here corresponds to the start of a prefetch notice.

  Further, in the example in FIG. 274, the default display mode (white circle display mode) is changed to the pre-read preview display mode (black rhombus display mode) by using the Berser notice. The aspect can also be regarded as a kind of display aspect of the pre-reading notice with a big hit reliability [expectation] of 0% or extremely low. In addition, the display mode of the pre-reading notice with a black circle having a lower reliability than the display form of the black rhombus may be changed to the display form of the black rhombus, or conversely, the display form of the black rhombus is used. However, the display mode of the pre-reading notice marked “heat” with high reliability may be changed to a black rhombus display mode.

  FIG. 275 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of changing the display mode of the changing icon using the Berser notice, continuing from FIG. 274 (l).

  FIG. 275 (l ′) is a state continued from FIG. 274 (k) in which an animation in which the third hold icon h3 moves toward the rotation region s of the LED array 282 is performed. Nothing is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (l '). However, in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (l ′), a circle represented by a dotted line is shown. This represents that the pattern h3 '' of the third hold icon h3 in the default display mode is displayed on the back side of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p in the decorative symbol display device 208. is there. However, the pattern h3 ″ is difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282. It seems to the player that the moved third hold icon h3 has disappeared in the rotation area s of the LED array 282.

  In the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (m ′), a rhombus represented by a dotted line is shown. This represents that the pattern h3 ″ of the third hold icon h3 changed to a rhombus display mode is displayed on the back side portion. However, this pattern h3 ″ is also difficult to see due to the rotating LED array 282. In FIG. 275 (n ′), the diamond-shaped display pattern h3 ″ displayed on the back side portion returns to the hold icon display area 208f, and the black diamond-shaped third pattern is also displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. It is displayed as a hold icon h3 and a pre-reading notice is made. The state of the return here may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 with a moving animation or an increasing animation, and the black diamond-shaped third hold icon h3 is suddenly displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. It may be. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 275 (n ′), a changing icon h0 with a white circle display mode is displayed. The pattern of the changing icon h0 in the display mode of the white circle corresponds to an example of the first pattern, and the display of the pattern corresponds to an example of the first effect display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 275 (o ′), the changing icon h0 of the white circle display mode that partially overlaps the rotation region s of the LED array 282 enters the rotation region s. Is displayed on the rotation area s, that is, the POV display 280. In the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (o ′), a picture h0 ′ representing the changing icon h0 in the display mode of a white circle is displayed. In the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 275 (p ′), the picture h0 ′ in the white circle display mode is changed to a white square display mode. The display of the pattern h0 'representing the changing icon displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282 corresponds to an example of a second effect display.

  In FIG. 275 (p ′), the picture h0 ′ changed to a white square display mode returns to the changing icon display area 208e, and the changing icon display area 208e is also displayed as a changing icon h0 of a white square. Is done. The in-fluctuating icon has a default display mode in which white circles are displayed, and a white square display mode corresponds to a notice mode of currently displayed variable display.

  FIG. 276 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of changing the display mode of the changing icon following FIG. 275 (n ′).

  FIG. 276 (o ″) is a state continued from FIG. 275 (n ′) in which the display mode of the third hold icon h3 is changed. Nothing is displayed in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (o ″). However, in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (o ″), a circle represented by a dotted line is shown. This represents that the pattern h0 ″ of the changing icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the back side portion of the rotation area s of the LED array 282 of the panel 208p in the decorative symbol display device 208. . However, this pattern h0 ″ is difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282. It seems to the player that the changing icon h0 that partially overlaps the rotation area s of the LED array 282 has disappeared as it is sucked into the rotation area s.

  A square represented by a dotted line is shown in the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 276 (p ″). This represents that the pattern h0 ″ of the changing icon h0 that has been changed to a square display mode is displayed on the back side portion. However, this pattern h0 ″ is also difficult to visually recognize due to the rotating LED array 282. In FIG. 276 (q ″), the rectangular pattern h0 ″ displayed on the back side portion returns to the changing icon display area 208e, and the changing icon display area 208e also has a rectangular shape. It is displayed as a changing icon h0, and a notice of change display currently being made (normal notice) is made. The state of the return here may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 with a moving animation or an increasing animation, and a square changing icon h0 is suddenly displayed in the changing icon display area 208e. May be.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the black rhombus) during execution of the symbol variation, the default display mode remains Rather, it is easy to confirm and display the big hit symbol form before all the pending symbol variations are digested. That is, the display of the pre-reading notice mode, which is a pre-read notice mode, is not displayed as the mode of the hold icon. The big hit symbol mode is easy to be confirmed and displayed. Note that there are a plurality of types of display modes of the pre-reading notice, and the reliability (expectation) of the big hit differs depending on the display form of the pre-reading notice. In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, or when the display of the hold icon is started, any one of the pattern changes is held. In the event that is started, it may be configured that the jackpot symbol pattern is surely displayed in a final manner,
It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finalized and displayed in the end. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the symbol pattern is surely displayed in a final manner in the symbol variation in which the change in the display mode of the hold icon is not executed.

  The examples shown in FIGS. 274 to 276 described above can be combined with the examples shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 using a common POV display 280. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 269 to 273, the POV display 280 is omitted, but the POV display 280 is also mounted, and the first movable body 260 is rotated or circulated and moved. The effects shown in FIG. 273 and the effects shown in FIGS. 274 to 276 by the POV display 280 may be performed simultaneously or may be shifted.

  FIG. 277 is a diagram showing a modification of the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, FIG. 260, and the like.

  The POV display 280 'of this modification has a pair of left and right lifting arms 281' and an LED array 282 'disposed between the pair of lifting arms 281'. FIG. 277 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the LED array 282 'is in the initial posture, with the front side of the paper being the front side (player side) and the back side of the paper being the back side. In the LED array 282 ', LEDs 2821' are arranged in a horizontal row on each of the front surface 282f and the back surface 282r. As shown in FIG. 277 (a), the rotation shaft of the rotary motor 283 fixed to the right lifting arm 281 'is connected to the right end of the LED array 282'. On the other hand, the left end of the LED array 282 'is rotatably supported by the left lifting arm 281'.

  FIG. 277 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the LED array 282 ′ is rotated 90 degrees. In this figure, the front surface 282f of the LED array 282 ′ in which the LEDs 2821 ′ are respectively arranged is located downward, and the LED array The back surface 282r of 282 ′ is upward.

  In this modified POV display 280 ′, the LED array 282 ′ rotates around the horizontal axis as the center of rotation, and the light emission mode of each LED 2821 ′ arranged on the front and back surfaces is changed, thereby giving an afterimage to the player. Is visible. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED 2821 ', and a pattern is represented.

  FIG. 278 is a diagram illustrating an example of a versa warning notice using the POV display 280 ′ illustrated in FIG. 277. In this figure, the process proceeds from (a) to (p). The outline of the effect shown in FIG. 278 is a versatility notice of the currently displayed variable display using the POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277.

  In FIG. 278 (a), the first movable body 260 is in the initial position, and part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden. The second movable body 270 is also in the initial position. The POV display is also in the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270, and the POV display is not visible to the player. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (a), the combination of decorative symbol loss is stopped and displayed on an empty background image. In this example, neither the hold icon nor the changing icon is displayed, but may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. Only the background image of the sea is displayed on the first movable body 260.

  In FIG. 278 (b), the special symbol variation display is started, and in response to the start of the special symbol variation display, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the decorative symbol variation display. In FIG. 278 (c), the first movable body 260 moves to the retracted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 develops to a reach state. The POV display also starts preparing for operation. In FIG. 278 (d), the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and the combination of decorative symbols in the reach state also disappears. The background image also disappears in the first movable body 260 that has moved to the retracted position, and the first movable body 260 displays a combination of the decorative symbols in the reach state. Note that the POV display is preparing for operation even at the timing of FIG. 278 (d).

  In FIG. 278 (e), the POV display 280 ′ appears from the back side of the second movable body 270. In FIG. 278 (f), the lowering of the POV display 280 ′ continues, and in FIG. 282 ′ reaches the operation start position. In FIG. 278 (h), the LED array 282 ′ starts rotating around the horizontal axis at the operation start position. In FIG. 278 (i), the LED array 282 ′ is accelerating the rotation. It is. In FIG. 278 (j), the LED array 282 'finishes the acceleration rotation and shifts to the constant speed rotation at the operation start position. In the LED array 282 ', the display of the big hit character picture by the afterimage effect is started at the same time as shifting to the constant speed rotation. In FIG. 278 (k), the swing display (temporary stop display) of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is started on the first movable body 260 that has been in the reach state until then. The pattern by the afterimage effect is not limited to the jackpot character pattern, but may be another character pattern (for example, a chance character pattern). Furthermore, the pattern is not limited to the character pattern, but is a pattern such as a figure or a symbol. There may be.

  In FIG. 278 (l), the rotation of the LED array 282 'decelerates at the operation start position, and the display of the big hit character / picture disappears from the POV display 280'. In FIG. 278 (m), the rotation of the LED array 282 ′ stops in the initial posture. In FIG. 278 (n), the LED array 282 ′ is raised toward the initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270. Yes.

  In FIG. 278 (o), the LED array 282 'has reached its initial position. In FIG. 278 (p), the first movable body 260 that has been in the retracted position returns to the initial position, and the decorative symbol displayed on the first movable member 260 is the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is fixedly displayed (stopped display). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image returns to the sky background image, and in the first movable body 260, the background image returns to the sea background image.

  In the example shown in FIG. 278, an afterimage effect pattern by the rotation of the LED array 282 'is displayed, and the display of the afterimage effect pattern is also an example of a Berser notice. It is structured so that when the varsa notice is executed during the symbol change, the big hit symbol form is finally determined and displayed easily in the symbol change than when the verse notice is not executed. Alternatively, when one of the symbol fluctuations held at the time when this versatility notice is executed is started, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the symbol pattern mode is finally displayed in a definite manner in the symbol variation in which this versatility notice is not executed. Or, if the symbol variation of any of the symbol variations that are held at the time when this Versa notice is executed is started, it may be likely that the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed. It may be configured.

  The effects shown in FIG. 278 described above may be performed simultaneously with the effects shown in FIGS. 260 to 268 using the POV display 280 and the effects shown in FIGS. 274 to 276 or may be performed alternately. . In the examples shown in FIGS. 269 to 273, the POV display 280 is omitted, but the POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277 is also mounted, and the first movable body 260 is rotated or circulated. The effects shown in FIGS. 269 to 273 to be performed and the effects shown in FIG. 278 by the POV display 280 ′ may be performed simultaneously or may be performed in a shifted manner.

  Further, the Versa notice described above is a so-called normal notice in which the current symbol change display is a notice object, but it can also be applied to a pre-read notice. For example, there may be a case in which the big hit symbol form is fixedly displayed until all the reserved symbol variations are exhausted, although the big symbol change display in which the big hit character picture is displayed on the POV display is not a big hit. . In this way, when the Versa notice is made as a look-ahead notice, the symbol pattern of the jackpot is always displayed and confirmed before all the pending symbol changes are digested, rather than when it is not done. Easy to display. Alternatively, if the Versa notice is not performed as a prefetch notice, the symbol pattern of losing is surely displayed until all the reserved symbol variations are exhausted. Furthermore, regardless of whether it is a normal notice or a look-ahead notice, the character pattern of the jackpot or the pattern won by the character of the main character may correspond to the pattern of the jackpot confirmed.

  FIG. 279 is a diagram illustrating an example of a versa warning notice when ball removal notification is performed.

  When a lower pan full error occurs, an error notification is made. In FIG. 279 (a), for example, a bottom pan full error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 260 (c), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character pattern “please remove the ball” as a kind of error notification. Has been. This character design is displayed from the top of the character's design t displayed on the decorative design display device 208. That is, the character pattern “please remove the ball” is drawn on the layer on the near side (player side) of the layer on which the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is drawn. As a result, the character pattern “please remove the sphere” overlaps the pattern t of the character of Tono-sama, and the pattern t of the character of Tono-sama is more visible than when there is no character pattern “please remove the ball”. It has become difficult.

  FIG. 279 (b) shows an example when a lower pan full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 262 (m), for example. In FIG. 279 (b), the Berser notice is started before the lower plate full tank error occurs, and a part (here, the left half) of the display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The remaining portion (here, the right half) is displayed in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. That is, the design t of the Tono-sama character is displayed across the decorative design display device 208 and the POV display 280. In this state, when the lower plate full tank error occurs, the character pattern “please pull out the sphere” overlaps the pattern t of the Tono-like character displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Here, Since only the left half of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, only the left half of the pattern t overlaps. That is, as shown in FIG. 279 (b), only the character pattern “extracted” overlaps the pattern t of the Tono-sama character. As in the example shown in FIG. 279 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire character pattern “please remove the sphere”, but it is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the rotation region s of the LED array 282, the character pattern “Please” is invisible or difficult to see, and only a part of the right end of the character pattern “I” is visible.

  In the example described above, the error notification pattern is not displayed on the rotation area s of the LED array 282, that is, the POV display 280, and the effect pattern is preferentially displayed. Note that an error notification pattern may be displayed on the POV display 280. In this case, instead of displaying the directing pattern (here, the right half of the pattern t of Tono-sama's character), “Please” A character design may be displayed.

  In addition, error related notifications such as error occurrence notification (for example, display of a character pattern “door is open”), error elimination notification, etc. Display) is handled in the same way as the display of the character pattern “please remove the sphere” described here.

  In the above description, as the POV display, the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the first movable body 260 circulatingly shown in FIGS. The POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277 is taken as an example, but the POV display is not limited to these, and the light emission mode of the light emitter is changed during the operation of the movable body provided with the light emitter such as an LED or a panel. Thus, any structure may be used as long as it allows the player to visually recognize the afterimage. For example, a plurality of LED arrays may be arranged on the rotatable disk at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be arranged on the peripheral surface of a rotatable sphere.

  Further, the POV displays 280, 280 'and 260 described so far are all configured to be movable, but may be configured not to be movable. Further, the POV display 280 shown in FIG. 260 or the like may not move from the operation start position to other than the initial position like the POV display 280 'shown in FIG. 278. However, even if it does not move, operations such as rotation, rotation, and swinging are performed. In addition, when the POV displays 280, 280 ′, 260 are arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the player views the front, the entire display area of the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the POV display 280. , 280 ′, 260 and the POV displays 280, 280 ′, 260 and the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided.

  Furthermore, when the POV displays 280, 280 ′, 260 are arranged behind a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 208 and viewed from the front, they may be misaligned, or part or all of them overlap. May be. When part or all overlap, the display panel of the liquid crystal display device is a transmissive display panel (for example, a transparent liquid crystal panel or a liquid crystal shutter). Further, the display panel of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 208 can be moved, the POV displays 280, 280 ′, 260 can be moved, or both can be moved, and the POV display 280 can be moved. , 280 ′, 260 are behind the display panel of the liquid crystal display device, and can be changed between a state in which part or all of the display panel is hidden and a state in which part or all is not hidden. May be.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines. More specifically, a gaming machine equipped with a POV display may be used, and if it is a gaming machine equipped with an image display panel (for example, a liquid crystal display device or the like) capable of performing effect display separately from the POV display, It is possible to produce an effect by a combination of a POV display and an image display panel.

In the above description,
“Image display panel capable of performing effect display [for example, panel 208p of decorative design display device 208, panel 260p of first movable body 260, etc.]
POV display capable of performing effect display [e.g., POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and circulating first moving body shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. 260, the POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
A game machine equipped with
A first effect display may be performed by the image display panel,
A second effect display may be performed by the POV display,
The first effect display is one pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first pattern”) [for example, all or part of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character, FIG. 263 (l ′) to FIG. ') All or part of the chance button pattern 136' shown in Fig. 269, all or part of the jackpot character designs shown in Figs. 269 (m) to (n), and a pattern representing the third reserved icon shown in Fig. 274. h3 ′ all or part of the picture h0 ′ representing the changing icon shown in FIG. 275, etc.
The second effect display is an effect display of the aspect including the first pattern [for example, the character-like character shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) and FIGS. 262 (m) to (n). Display of picture t, display of chance button picture 136 'shown in FIGS. 263 (m ′) to (n ′), display of jackpot character picture shown in FIGS. 269 (k) to (m), FIG. 274 (l) to display of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 275 (o), display of the pattern h0 ′ representing the changing icon shown in FIG. 275 (o ′) to FIG. ]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The “picture” referred to here may be a character picture, a character picture, or a figure picture.

  The image display panel may always execute the effect display or may perform it. Further, the image display panel may be capable of executing only the effect display, or can execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error elimination display, and a warning display). It may be anything. Further, the image display panel may necessarily perform the first effect display.

  The POV display may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error elimination display, a warning display, etc.). There may be. Further, the POV display may always execute the effect display or may execute it. The POV display may always perform the second effect display.

  The first effect display may be an effect display of an aspect including at least all of the first design, may be an effect display of an aspect including only all of the first design, It may be an effect display in an aspect including at least a part of the first pattern, or an effect display in an aspect including only a part of the first pattern. Further, the second effect display may include an aspect including at least all of the first pattern, an aspect including only all of the first pattern, or the first display. The aspect which contains at least one part of a pattern may be sufficient.

Also,
“The first effect display [for example, the display of the pattern 136 ′ of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. (N ′)] and the second effect display [for example, FIG. m ′) to display of the pattern 136 ′ of the POV display 280 shown in FIG. (n ′)] are configured to be performed together.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect display and the second effect display may be configured to always be performed together, or may be configured to be performed together. That is, the first effect display and the second effect display are performed together in the first period, not performed together in the second period, and only one of the effect displays is performed. It may be configured.

Also,
“The second effect display is an effect display of a mode including only a part of the first picture [for example, part of the display shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (w) and FIG. 262 (m)”. Display of the pattern t of Tonosama character, display of some chance button patterns 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (n ′), display of some jackpot character designs shown in FIG. 269 (m), FIG. ) To (m), a display of a pattern h3 ′ representing a part of the third reserved icon shown in FIG.
Displayed so that the player can visually recognize one of the first designs by both the first effect display and the second effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first picture may be displayed across the second effect display and the first effect display. In other words, a picture including the first picture may be displayed across the second effect display and the first effect display, or only the first picture may be displayed. More specifically, a part of the first picture may be displayed on the image display panel, and the remaining part of the first picture may be displayed on the POV display. Further, the first picture displayed on the image display panel may appear to move to the POV display, and conversely, the first picture displayed on the POV display. It may be an aspect in which the pattern of the screen appears to move to the image display panel.

  A part of the first picture is displayed on the POV display by displaying the first picture so that the player can visually recognize both the first effect display and the second effect display. Since the remaining portion of the first pattern emerges and is supplemented with an image projected on the plane of an image display panel (for example, a liquid crystal display panel), it is configured to represent one pattern. The distance in the front-rear direction from the position of the display to the position of the image display panel may give a sense of depth to the pattern compared to a simple three-dimensional pattern display, and may increase the player's concentration on the game. In some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.

Also,
“The POV display has a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter referred to as“ second position ”) [for example, the rotation region of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (l) to (n) s, the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (j) to (n), and the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 263 (m ′) to FIG. 269 (k) to the position of the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG.
The second display area in the image display panel [for example, the area where the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (l) to (n) in the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208 is not overlapped, the decoration In the panel 208p of the symbol display device 208, the region where the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (j) to (n) does not overlap, the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. ) The first movable shown in FIG. 269 (k) to FIG. (N) in the area 208 in which the rotation area s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. An image may be displayed in an area where the rotation area 206s of the body 260 does not overlap,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area in the image display panel,
The first display area is a display area behind the POV display located at the second position.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The POV display may be configured to be movable from the second position to another position, but may be configured to be unable to move. That is, the POV display may be fixedly arranged at the second position. However, even if the POV display is fixedly disposed at the second position, the POV display may perform operations such as rotation, rotation, and swinging at the second position. Further, the POV display is arranged in front of the image display panel, and the POV display is arranged so that all display areas of the image display panel are not hidden by the POV display when the player views the front. And the image display panel may be provided.

  The POV display may be disposed behind the image display panel. When viewed from the front, both may be misaligned, or part or all of them may overlap. In the latter case, the image display panel may be a transmissive display panel (for example, a transparent liquid crystal panel or a liquid crystal shutter). Further, the image display panel is movable, the POV display is movable, or both are movable, and the POV display is behind the image display panel and the image display panel is movable. It may be possible to change the state between a state where part or all is hidden by the panel and a state where part or all is not hidden.

  The POV display may be necessarily located at the second position, or may be located only at the second position. In addition, an image may be displayed on the second display area of the image display panel, or an image may be displayed only on the second display area. Here, the “image” may be an image of the first pattern, an image including the image of the first pattern, or an image not including the image of the first pattern.

Also,
“The first effect display is the effect display performed in the second display area [for example, the display of the design t of the character of Tono in FIG. 262 (l), the design of the third reserved icon in FIG. 274 (j)” Display etc.]
A third effect display may be performed in the second display area,
A fourth effect display may be performed by the POV display,
A fifth effect display may be performed in the second display area,
A sixth effect display may be performed by the POV display,
The first effect display is an effect display that includes only a part of the first design [for example, the design t of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 262 (m) on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. The left half of the display, the display of the upper right half of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (m), etc.]
The third effect display is an effect display of an aspect including all of the first design [for example, all of the design t of the ton-like character shown in FIG. 262 (l) on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. Display, all display of the pattern of the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 274 (j), etc.]
The fifth effect display is an effect display that does not include the first design [for example, a full display of the design t of the Tonori character shown in FIG. 262 (n) on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208. , A display in which there is no full display of the pattern of the third hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 274 (n), etc.]
The fourth effect display is an effect display that does not include the first pattern [for example, the entire display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 262 (l) in the rotation area s of the LED array 282. No display, a display in which there is no full display of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 274 (j), etc.]
The sixth effect display is an effect display that includes all of the first pattern [for example, a total display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 262 (n) in the rotation region s of the LED array 282. , All the display of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon shown in FIG. 274 (n), etc.]
The third effect display and the fourth effect display are configured to be performed together,
The fifth effect display and the sixth effect display are configured to be performed together,
Display of the second effect [for example, display of the right half of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 262 (m) in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, as shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (m). The display of the lower left half of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon, etc.] is configured to be performed after the fourth effect display,
The second effect display is configured to be performed before the sixth effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Of the first effect display to the sixth effect display, the odd effect display is the effect display performed by the image display panel, and the even effect display is the effect display performed by the POV display. The display area is the display area on the image display panel, and the position is the position of the POV display.

Also,
“The first effect display is configured to be performed after the third effect display,
The first effect display is configured to be performed before the fifth effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The second effect display [for example, the display of the right half of the chance button pattern 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (n ′) in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, the big hit character shown in FIG. 269 (m) The display of the right half of the pattern, etc.] is the fourth effect display [for example, a display in which there is no full display of the chance button pattern 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (o ′) in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, 269 (n), etc., in which there is no full display of the jackpot character / picture, etc.]
The second effect display is the sixth effect display [for example, the entire display of the chance button pattern 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (m ′) in the rotation region s of the LED array 282, FIG. 269 (l). Etc.], and is configured to be performed after
The first effect display [for example, the display of the left half of the chance button pattern 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (n ′) on the panel 208p of the decorative design display device 208, the jackpot character pattern shown in FIG. 269 (m) The left half of the display, etc.] is the third effect display [for example, the full display of the chance button pattern 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (o ′) on the panel 208p of the decorative pattern display device 208, FIG. 269 (n ), And so on.
The first effect display is the fifth effect display [for example, a display in which there is no display of all the chance button symbols 136 ′ shown in FIG. 263 (m ′) on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. (K) to display in which there is no full display of the jackpot character pattern shown in FIG.

Also,
“The third effect display [e.g., all display of the pattern of the third reserved icon h3 in the pre-reading notice mode in the modified example of FIG. 274 (j) on the panel 208p of the decorative symbol display device 208] and the sixth Production display [e.g., all display of the pattern h3 ′ representing the third hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode shown in FIG. 274 (n), etc.] is displayed in advance. May be performed as a pre-reading notice by
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third effect display and the fourth effect display may always be performed as a pre-reading notice. Further, the first effect display and the second effect display may be performed as a pre-reading notice.

Also,
“When the first effect display including a part of the first picture is performed in the second display area, the remaining part of the first picture in the first display area Is configured so that there is a case in which an effect display including the above is performed [for example, a case shown in FIG. 263 (n ′)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In other words, the effect display of the aspect including the remaining portion of the first pattern performed in the first display area may be difficult to visually recognize by the POV display.

  In addition, when the first effect display including a part of the first design is performed in the second display region, the remaining of the first design is displayed in the first display region. You may be comprised so that the effect display of the aspect containing a part may be performed without fail.

Also,
When the effect display of the aspect including all of the first pattern is performed on the POV display, the effect display of the aspect including all of the first pattern is performed in the first display area. [For example, the case shown in FIG. 263 (m ′)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the effect display of the aspect including all of the first design performed in the first display area is difficult to visually recognize by the POV display in which the second effect display is performed. There is.

  Even when the second effect display is performed on the POV display, there may be a case where the effect display of the aspect including all of the first pattern is performed in the first display area. It may be configured to be performed without fail.

Also,
The POV display is a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256, the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the first movable body circulating and moving shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. 260, LED array 282 ′ shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body [for example, LED 2821, 2821 ′, panel 260p],
The POV display is configured to allow a player to visually recognize an afterimage by changing a light emission mode of the light emitter during operation of the movable body.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The case where the POV display is located at the second position is a case where the movable body is located at the second position,
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”) [for example, an initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG.
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“With symbol variation display means [for example, a special symbol display device 213 shown in FIG. 255, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.
The second effect display may be performed during the execution of a single symbol variation display [for example, a special symbol variation display or a decorative symbol variation display, etc.]
The symbol variation display in which the second effect display is performed is finally the big hit symbol mode [for example, the lighting pattern, for example, rather than the symbol variation display in which the second effect display [for example, Berser notice or the like] is not performed. Or a combination of decorative patterns]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The second effect display may be configured to start during the execution of the symbol variation display and to end with the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display. That is, the second effect display may be an effect display executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. Alternatively, the second effect display may be configured to always start and end during execution of one symbol variation display.

  The first effect display may be performed during execution of one symbol variation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may be configured to start during the execution of the symbol variation display and to end with the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display. That is, the first effect display may be an effect display executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. The first effect display may be configured to always start and end during execution of one symbol variation display.

Also,
“With the image display panel, one picture (hereinafter referred to as“ second picture ”) [for example, a special character picture that appears in the development of Super Reach, or a character picture letter Kuta that appears during a jackpot game In some cases, an effect display including a pattern etc. is performed.
The second design is a design different from the first design,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“POV display capable of performing effect display [e.g., POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and first movable moving in a circulating manner shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. A game table having a body 260, a POV display 280 'shown in FIG.
The POV display displays a second effect display [for example, display of the pattern t of the Tono-sama character shown in FIGS. 260 (v) to (y) and FIGS. 262 (m) to (n), FIG. 260 (k) to The display of the pattern k of the character of the enemy character shown in (w) of the figure, the display of the picture 136 'of the chance button shown in FIGS. 263 (m ′) to (n ′), and FIG. Display of jackpot character / picture shown in FIG. (S ′), display of jackpot character / picture shown in FIG. 269 (k) to FIG. (M), third hold shown in FIG. 274 (l) to FIG. Display of the pattern h3 ′ representing the icon, display of the pattern h0 ′ representing the changing icon shown in FIG. 275 (o ′) to FIG.
When moving the POV display that is executing the second effect display [e.g., FIG. 260 (q) -FIG. (U), FIG. 262 (n) -FIG. (O), FIG. 263 (r ′)] ~ (S ') etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  The POV display may always execute the effect display or may execute it. Further, the second effect display may always be performed by the POV display. In addition, the POV display may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may display other than the effect display (for example, error occurrence display, error elimination display, warning display, etc.). It may be a thing.

Also,
“Image display panel capable of performing effect display [for example, panel 208p of decorative design display device 208, panel 260p of first movable body 260, etc.]
In the image display panel, it is possible to execute a variation display of decorative symbols [for example, FIG. 260 (m) to FIG.
The movement of the POV display during the execution of the second effect display is configured to be performed in the variation display of the decorative symbols [FIG. 260 (q) to FIG. 260 (u)]
When the POV display is not moved during execution of the second effect display, the case where the movement is performed is finally performed in the variation display of the decorative design being executed [for example, “Decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2”] is configured to be easily displayed in a stopped state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The image display panel may always execute the effect display or may perform it. Further, the image display panel may be capable of executing only the effect display, or can execute a display different from the effect display (for example, an error occurrence display, an error elimination display, and a warning display). It may be anything. In the image display panel, the decorative symbol variation display may always be executed.

Also,
“The POV display is configured to always move during execution of the second effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the POV display does not move during execution of the second effect display [For example, the POV display 280 does not move except when a predetermined pattern is displayed, or the sub-control unit side selects the effect. If there is no movement according to the lottery result],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When the POV display that is executing the second effect display moves, the display position of the pattern on the moving POV display may be constant or may change. That is, the position of the POV display itself and the display position in the POV display are in a separate and independent relationship. If the POV display displaying the pattern is simply moved, the relative display position of the pattern is displayed. Changes and it looks as if the pattern is moving. On the other hand, if the display position of the picture is adjusted in the moving POV display so that the relative display position of the picture does not change in accordance with the movement of the POV display, the picture may not be moved. appear.

Also,
“The second effect display being executed on the moving POV display is a pattern movement display [for example, the movement display of the pattern k in FIG. 260 (p) to FIG. ) To display of movement of the pattern k in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The “picture” referred to here may be a character picture, a character picture, or a figure picture.

  Further, the movement display of the picture here may be a movement display in accordance with the movement of the POV display, or may be a movement display unrelated to the movement of the POV display. In the former case, by adjusting the display position of the pattern in the moving POV display so that the relative display position of the pattern does not change, it may appear that the pattern has not moved. In the latter case, the relative display position of the pattern can be changed, and the pattern appears to move.

  Further, the second effect display being executed on the moving POV display may include an aspect including at least the entire pattern, or an aspect including only the entire pattern. Further, it may be an aspect including at least a part of the pattern, or an aspect including only a part of the pattern.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The game machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,
“Image display panel capable of performing effect display [for example, panel 208p of decorative design display device 208, panel 260p of first movable body 260, etc.]
POV display capable of performing effect display [e.g., POV display 280 shown in FIG. 256, rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and circulating first moving body shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. 260, the POV display 280 ′ shown in FIG. 277, etc.]
A game machine equipped with
The POV display has a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter referred to as “second position”) [for example, the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 262 (l) to (n). 274 (i) to the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (n), the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 269 (i) to (o), the position of the rotation region 206s of the first movable body 260 shown in FIG.
The POV display has a movable body [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 256, the rotating first movable body 260 shown in FIGS. 269 to 270, and the first movable body 260 circulatingly shown in FIGS. 272 to 273. , LED array 282 ′ etc. shown in FIG. 277] are provided,
The movable body is provided with a light emitting body [for example, LED 2821, 2821 ′, panel 260p],
The POV display is in a constant speed operation by the movable body [for example, FIG. 260 (j) to FIG. (Y), FIG. 269 (j) to FIG. (N), FIG. 272 (l ′) to FIG. FIG. (M ′), FIG. 278 (j) to FIG. (K)] are configured so that the player can visually recognize the afterimage by changing the light emission mode of the light emitter.
In the POV display, before the constant speed operation by the movable body is performed, the movable body is accelerated (for example, FIGS. 260 (h) to (i), 269 (h) to (i)). 272 (h ')-FIG. (M'), FIG. 278 (h) -FIG. (I), etc.]
The acceleration operation refers to the movable body in a stopped state [for example, the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 260 (g), the first movable body 260 shown in FIG. 269 (g), and the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 278 (g). 'Etc.' is the operation until the speed is increased and the operation moves to the constant speed operation.
The second effect display may be performed after the first effect display,
The first effect display is the state in which the acceleration operation by the movable body [for example, the LED array 282] is performed [for example, the state shown in FIG. 274 (h) to FIG. It is the effect display performed in the area including the first display area in the image display panel [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208].
The second effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display [eg, POV display 280],
The first display area is the second position [for example, the rotation area of the LED array 282 shown in FIGS. 274 (i) to (k) to 275 (l ′) to (q ′). s position] is a display area behind the POV display [eg POV display 280],
The first effect display is an effect display of an aspect including one pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first pattern”) [for example, the pattern of the changing icon h0 in the white circle display mode] [for example, FIG. (I) display of the pattern of the changing icon h0]
The second effect display is an effect display of an aspect including the first pattern [for example, display of the pattern h0 ′ representing the changing icon h0 shown in FIGS. 275 (o ′) to (p ′)]. That is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
Also,
“A third effect display may be performed after the first effect display.
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display,
The third effect display is an effect display that does not include the first pattern [for example, display of the pattern h3 ′ of the third hold icon h3 shown in FIGS. 274 (l) to (m)]. That is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“When the third effect display is performed after the first effect display [for example, when the display mode change of the hold icon h3 is performed], the first effect display is performed after the first effect display. When the second effect display is performed [for example, when the display mode of the changing icon h0 is changed], the symbol change display being executed [for example, the symbol change display corresponding to the changing icon h0 is performed. ], In the end, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“From the start of the first effect display to the start of the second effect display [for example, the timing of FIG. 275 (n ′) to FIG. An animation display is made to the player so that a picture appears to enter the POV display from the image display panel.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“In the second effect display, the first design changes to another design (hereinafter referred to as“ second design ”) [for example, a design of the changing icon h0 of the white rectangular display mode] For example, the display in FIG. 275 (p ′)] is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
”A fourth effect display may be performed after the second effect display,
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area,
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The fourth effect display is an effect display in a form including the second picture [for example, display of a picture of the changing icon h0 in the white square display form shown in FIG. 275 (q ′)]. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area in a state where the acceleration operation by the movable body is performed [for example, FIG. The display of the changing icon h0 of the white circle display mode shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The second effect display is an effect display of a mode including all of the first pattern [for example, display of all the images of the changing icon h0 in the white circle display mode shown in FIG. 275 (o ′)]. That is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“When the POV display is located at the second position, the movable body is located at the second position [for example, the position of the rotation region s of the LED array 282 shown in FIG. 274 (l), etc.]. Is the case,
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”) [for example, an initial position on the back side of the second movable body 270 shown in FIG. 274 (a), etc.]
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, in the above description, the description of “... in some cases” can be appropriately replaced with “may not be in some cases” or “is always ...”. It is.

  In the above description, “executable” can be read as “be sure to execute” or can be read as “may be executed”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative design display device 208p Panel 260 First movable body 260p Panel 280 POV display 282 LED array s Rotating area 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit 600 Delivery control unit t Tono-sama character design

Claims (10)

An image display panel capable of effect display;
A POV display capable of performing presentation display;
A game machine equipped with
The POV display may be located at a certain position in front of the image display panel (hereinafter referred to as “second position”).
The POV display is provided with a movable body,
The movable body is provided with a light emitter,
The POV display is configured to allow a player to visually recognize an afterimage by changing a light emission mode of the light emitter during a constant speed operation by the movable body.
The POV display is configured to perform an acceleration operation of the movable body before the constant speed operation by the movable body is performed.
The acceleration operation is an operation until the movable body in a stopped state increases the speed and shifts to the constant speed operation,
The second effect display may be performed after the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in a region including the first display region in the image display panel in a state where the acceleration operation by the movable body is performed.
The second effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display,
The first display area is a display area behind the POV display located at the second position;
The first effect display is an effect display of an aspect including one pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first pattern”),
The second effect display is an effect display of an aspect including the first pattern.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
A third effect display may be performed after the first effect display,
The third effect display is an effect display performed on the POV display,
The third effect display is an effect display of an aspect that does not include the first design.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The case where the second effect display is performed after the first effect display is more active than the case where the third effect display is performed after the first effect display. In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol pattern is likely to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
An animation display in which the first design appears to enter the POV display from the image display panel between the start of the first effect display and the start of the second effect display. Done against
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
In the second effect display, a display in which the first pattern is changed to another pattern (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern”) is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5,
A fourth effect display may be performed after the second effect display,
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area,
The second display area is a display area in the image display panel,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The fourth effect display is an effect display of an aspect including the second pattern.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 6,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in the first display area and the second display area in a state where the acceleration operation by the movable body is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The second effect display is an effect display of an aspect including all of the first pattern.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The case where the POV display is located at the second position is a case where the movable body is located at the second position,
The movable body may be located at an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”),
The movable body is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.